WSCAD 51 - FTP Directory Listing

WSCAD 51

Table Of Contents
Introduction.......................................................................................................... 1
General ............................................................................................................. 1
Digitizing Drawings: Transferring “Paper” Drawings into CAD ................................... 2
Continuous Development = Subscription ............................................................... 3
Features of WSCAD................................................................................................ 5
General Information of WSCAD 5 .......................................................................... 5
Features of WSCAD 5 .......................................................................................... 6
New Features of WSCAD 5.1 ................................................................................ 8
Hardware requirements ......................................................................................10
Contact WSCAD....................................................................................................11
The fastest way to contact WSCAD.......................................................................11
Working with WSCAD 5 .........................................................................................13
Screen Layout ...................................................................................................13
Menu bar ..........................................................................................................15
Toolbars ...........................................................................................................16
Information bar .................................................................................................17
Status bar.........................................................................................................19
Mouse operation ................................................................................................20
Function keys ....................................................................................................21
Multiple windows ...............................................................................................24
Full screen mode ...............................................................................................26
Project Manager ...................................................................................................27
Project Manager in general..................................................................................27
General ............................................................................................................27
Starting Project Manager (PM).............................................................................29
The Project Manager window...............................................................................31
Changing the size of the Project Manager dialog ....................................................33
Closing the Project Manager ................................................................................34
Project functions................................................................................................35
Creating a new project .......................................................................................35
Creating project templates..................................................................................38
Project settings .................................................................................................43
Opening a project ..............................................................................................45
Copying a project ..............................................................................................46
Deleting a project or files....................................................................................48
Closing a project................................................................................................49
Integrate a project.............................................................................................50
Inserting external files........................................................................................53
Printing a project ...............................................................................................55
Selective printing...............................................................................................58
Graphic ............................................................................................................61
DWG-DXF .........................................................................................................63
Save in WSCAD 5.0 file format ..........................................................................65
Password protection ...........................................................................................66
User.................................................................................................................67
Project information ............................................................................................68
Editing fields in the Project Manager.....................................................................68
Arranging project information..............................................................................69
Project information with special functions .............................................................70
Additional project information .............................................................................72
Project Export Import Backup and Restore ............................................................73
Backup and restore ............................................................................................73
Export ..............................................................................................................74
Import..............................................................................................................77
File functions.....................................................................................................81
Creating a file....................................................................................................81
i

Table Of Contents
Creating (circuit diagram) subpages.....................................................................83
Opening files .....................................................................................................85
Deleting files (diagrams of lists) using the PM........................................................86
Selecting several files.........................................................................................87
Copying files .....................................................................................................88
Changing a file type ...........................................................................................90
Changing filenames............................................................................................91
Moving the page number of the file ......................................................................93
Linking project files to WSCAD files with “NOT”......................................................95
Copying and pasting a file...................................................................................97
Copying one file.................................................................................................99
Copying several files ........................................................................................103
Updating the Contactor- PLC manager................................................................104
Project view ....................................................................................................105
Switch between floorplan and schematics ...........................................................105
Preview ..........................................................................................................107
Option Projects................................................................................................108
Option Sorting.................................................................................................109
Projects and Folders (file types).........................................................................112
General ..........................................................................................................112
Hide folders or projects ....................................................................................113
Showing folders...............................................................................................115
Changing the sequence of folders and CPP part-projects .......................................116
All folders .......................................................................................................117
Creating folders ...............................................................................................118
Project customer database, manufacturer, construction site and architect...............120
Customer, manufacturer, construction site and architect database .........................120
Database assignment .......................................................................................121
Creating a Customer, manufacturer, construction site and architect record .............122
Saving customer, manufacturer, construction-site and architect information ...........123
Assigning Creating a Customer, manufacturer, construction site and architect data..124
Linking the customer database to email..............................................................125
CPP Project .....................................................................................................126
Creating a CPP project......................................................................................126
Creating a part-project .....................................................................................128
Creating diagram pages for a CPP part-project ....................................................130
Converting a project into a CPP project...............................................................133
Including diagram pages in a CPP part-project ....................................................134
Re-build a CPP project ......................................................................................135
UFD manager ..................................................................................................136
Automated listings ...........................................................................................138
Project evaluations, the advantages ...................................................................138
Automated listing.............................................................................................139
Separate listing ...............................................................................................142
Page number default for generated files .............................................................143
Text allocator 'Project Page' ..............................................................................144
Revision level ..................................................................................................145
Starting the revision level .................................................................................145
Closing the revision level ..................................................................................147
Making changes (enabled for modifications) ........................................................150
Removing revision levels from a project (reset) ...................................................154
WSCAD 4.x and 5.0 users can include entire existing projects ...............................155
Import a 4.x and 5.0 project list .......................................................................155
Integrate projects from WSCAD 4.x ...................................................................157
File ...................................................................................................................159
General ..........................................................................................................159
New file (page)................................................................................................160
Load file (page) ...............................................................................................162
ii

Table Of Contents
Close file (page) ..............................................................................................164
Page up/dn .....................................................................................................165
Copy file (page)...............................................................................................167
Move file (page) ..............................................................................................168
Deleting file (page) ..........................................................................................170
File - Compress (Clear file) ..............................................................................171
File - Save (Save page) ....................................................................................172
File - Save As (Save page as)............................................................................173
Store block .....................................................................................................174
Insert a block ..................................................................................................176
Creating a drawing macro .................................................................................177
Inserting a drawing macro by using Drawing macro Explorer.................................179
Import-Export .................................................................................................182
Insert graphic..................................................................................................182
Inserting graphics as a link ...............................................................................183
HPGL into WSCAD............................................................................................184
DXF/DWG -> WSCAD .......................................................................................185
WSCAD into DXF/DWG or Bitmap.......................................................................191
WSCAD into VNS .............................................................................................192
Printing ..........................................................................................................194
Abort .............................................................................................................198
Exit................................................................................................................199
File list ...........................................................................................................200
Schematic .........................................................................................................201
Connection line................................................................................................201
Line ...............................................................................................................201
Line + Node/Arrow ..........................................................................................203
DW point presentation......................................................................................204
Nodes ............................................................................................................205
Inserting symbols ............................................................................................206
Loading symbols or items .................................................................................206
Symbol Explorer ..............................................................................................207
Loading a symbol via the Library tab ..................................................................208
Loading a symbol via the designation tab............................................................209
Loading a symbol via the Search tab ..................................................................210
Loading a symbol via the Favourites tab .............................................................214
Placing symbols ...............................................................................................216
Loading a symbol in the Professional version.......................................................218
Loading a symbol in the Basic and Compact version .............................................220
Loading items..................................................................................................221
Graphics symbol selection.................................................................................222
Line name.......................................................................................................223
General ..........................................................................................................223
Cables ............................................................................................................226
Drawing in cables ............................................................................................226
Drawing cables and using wires from existing cables ............................................230
Deleting cables................................................................................................232
Deleting cables graphically................................................................................233
Cables as symbols ...........................................................................................234
Pasting circuit diagram macros with cables or copying cables ................................235
Cable shield ....................................................................................................238
Settings..........................................................................................................238
Draw a cable shield..........................................................................................240
Cable shield drawn on both cable ends ...............................................................242
Black-Box .......................................................................................................244
Creating a Black Box ........................................................................................244
Black Box Pins.................................................................................................245
Editing the Black Box .......................................................................................246
iii

Table Of Contents
Contact connections .........................................................................................249
Changing the symbol connection designations .....................................................249
Plug Socket.....................................................................................................252
Plug+socket ....................................................................................................252
Inserting connection diagram macro with plug/socket or copying plug/socket..........257
Inserting plugs or sockets separately .................................................................258
Deleting plugs or sockets separately ..................................................................259
Deleting plugs or sockets at one time .................................................................260
Changing a pin assignment ...............................................................................261
Destination wiring............................................................................................263
General ..........................................................................................................263
Aids for drawing connection lines .......................................................................264
Destination wiring library ..................................................................................265
The destination wiring elements ........................................................................266
Creating a destination wiring element.................................................................269
Working with Destination wiring ........................................................................270
Language settings............................................................................................279
Using a foreign languages character set..............................................................279
Functionalities .................................................................................................281
Unit and Field designation.................................................................................281
UFD Area ........................................................................................................283
Bus ................................................................................................................287
Path text ........................................................................................................288
Sheet texts .....................................................................................................289
Modify...............................................................................................................291
Modify component ...........................................................................................291
Component elements .......................................................................................291
Pins ...............................................................................................................292
Active parts ....................................................................................................293
Pin number .....................................................................................................294
Component type ..............................................................................................295
Modify Symbol parameters................................................................................296
General ..........................................................................................................296
Symbol – additional texts .................................................................................298
Enabling additional texts to be displayed ............................................................299
Additional texts in the material lists ...................................................................301
Linking additional texts to fields from the database ..............................................302
Additional items...............................................................................................303
Object Properties .............................................................................................305
Object Properties .............................................................................................305
Simple Text ....................................................................................................306
Text ...............................................................................................................307
Line, Rectangle, Circle and Connection Line.........................................................309
Symbol modification.........................................................................................310
Excluding components from the Materials List .....................................................311
Navigating within the Dialog..............................................................................312
Component Name , Function Text and Additional Text 1..16 and Manufacturer ........313
Assigning Parts................................................................................................314
Hints to use the Dialog .....................................................................................315
Reference replacement .....................................................................................317
Reference replacement .....................................................................................317
Change size ....................................................................................................319
Foreign languages............................................................................................320
General ..........................................................................................................320
Lexicon file format ...........................................................................................321
Editing the lexicon ...........................................................................................322
Cyrillic character set.........................................................................................326
Manager dialog for the foreign language display ..................................................329
iv

Table Of Contents
Install and delete a foreign language..................................................................332
Displaying several languages.............................................................................333
Special character set ........................................................................................334
Foreign languages in the basic version ...............................................................335
Quick Text ......................................................................................................337
Connection line................................................................................................338
General ..........................................................................................................338
Functionality ...................................................................................................341
Reference name ..............................................................................................341
Component name ............................................................................................342
Search + Replace ............................................................................................343
Cable name/type .............................................................................................346
Text allocators.................................................................................................347
Contactor........................................................................................................348
Make text invisible ...........................................................................................350
Exclude from material list .................................................................................351
Exclude from auto-numbering ...........................................................................352
Terminal/Cable numbers...................................................................................353
Terminal destination ........................................................................................354
Draw.................................................................................................................355
General ..........................................................................................................355
Line ...............................................................................................................356
Automatic pre-assignment of line parameters......................................................357
Rectangle, Full Rectangle..................................................................................358
Circle (parts)...................................................................................................359
Ellipse ............................................................................................................361
Simple text .....................................................................................................362
Text ...............................................................................................................363
General ..........................................................................................................363
Entering a text ................................................................................................364
Text entry using the window default...................................................................365
Overwriting text ..............................................................................................366
Changing the text attributes and properties ........................................................367
Character sets (fonts) ......................................................................................369
Text alignment ................................................................................................370
Text Box.........................................................................................................372
Dimension ......................................................................................................378
Color..............................................................................................................380
Line width.......................................................................................................381
Line type ........................................................................................................382
Delete / Move ....................................................................................................383
General ..........................................................................................................383
1 Window / M-Window......................................................................................384
1 Object / Objects............................................................................................385
Rotate / Mirror ................................................................................................386
Delete ............................................................................................................387
Copy ..............................................................................................................388
Move..............................................................................................................389
Drag ..............................................................................................................390
Repeat ...........................................................................................................391
UNDO.............................................................................................................392
REDO .............................................................................................................393
Automatic function..............................................................................................395
General ..........................................................................................................395
Automatic numbering .......................................................................................396
Automatic numbering .......................................................................................396
How symbols are numbered ..............................................................................398
Numbering types and additional variants ............................................................402
v

Table Of Contents
vi
Expanded view in the autonumbering dialog........................................................406
Auto. cross-reference .......................................................................................411
Auto. cross-reference .......................................................................................411
Reference algorithm.........................................................................................412
Line-related cross references.............................................................................413
Contact cross-reference without contact reflectors ...............................................415
Contact cross-reference with contact reflectors....................................................416
Contactors ......................................................................................................417
PLC + Main/side element ..................................................................................418
Control Cabinet Manager (CCM).........................................................................419
General ..........................................................................................................419
Create Control Cabinet file type .........................................................................423
Scale presentation in Control Cabinet Manager (CCM) ..........................................424
Reading in diagrams (in the CCM)......................................................................426
Display lock for symbols ...................................................................................428
Calculate dimensions........................................................................................430
Display options for the CCM and the control cabinet diagram pages .......................431
Required entries in the parts database ...............................................................436
Creating a mechanical Control cabinet layout with supplements.............................438
Placing the symbols in the control cabinet...........................................................442
Navigating from the CCM to the switch-cabinet pages ..........................................444
Cable manager ................................................................................................445
General ..........................................................................................................445
The cable database ..........................................................................................447
The conductors file...........................................................................................449
Change wire colour ..........................................................................................451
Removing cables..............................................................................................453
Working on existing circuit diagrams in WSCAD 4.0 format ...................................454
Connector manager..........................................................................................455
Connector manager..........................................................................................455
Auto. line names..............................................................................................457
Create line names............................................................................................457
Delete line names ............................................................................................460
Contactor manager ..........................................................................................461
Contactor manager ..........................................................................................461
Project data ....................................................................................................462
Project data ....................................................................................................462
Variables ........................................................................................................463
Drawing sheet Variables ...................................................................................463
New/modify ....................................................................................................464
Automatic .......................................................................................................465
Position and size remain unchanged...................................................................466
Fix date ..........................................................................................................467
PLC ................................................................................................................468
Activating PLC Manager ....................................................................................468
Creating project database .................................................................................469
Importing / Exporting PLC list............................................................................470
Drawing frames ...............................................................................................471
Replace drawing frames....................................................................................471
Manually replace a drawing frame......................................................................472
Automatic drawing frame replacement ...............................................................473
Project data ....................................................................................................474
Project data (first sheet)...................................................................................474
Material list .....................................................................................................475
General ..........................................................................................................475
Material lists with additional items .....................................................................478
Material list considering Unit and Field designation...............................................480
Material list in form ..........................................................................................481

Table Of Contents
Material list while using the Project Manager .......................................................482
Material list according to Access, Excel, ASCII, dBASE or UGS or KWP format..........483
Material list in the Compact Version ...................................................................485
General ..........................................................................................................486
Changing items ...............................................................................................487
Contactor online ..............................................................................................491
Show destination .............................................................................................492
Lock module for material list .............................................................................493
Module name, function texts and additional text 1-16 ..........................................494
Organisation in the Material browser dialog.........................................................495
Material browser with catalogue ........................................................................497
External Text Source ........................................................................................498
Connection list ................................................................................................501
General connection list .....................................................................................501
Reference name connection list .........................................................................502
Wiring diagram................................................................................................503
Wiring diagram browser....................................................................................505
Terminal diagram ............................................................................................507
Terminal diagram ............................................................................................507
1 Terminal strip ...............................................................................................510
All Terminal strips............................................................................................513
Terminal browser interface................................................................................514
Generating a terminal diagram from the browser .................................................520
Numbering terminal browser .............................................................................522
Manual sequence terminal browser ....................................................................524
Allocating item numbers in the terminal browser .................................................526
Function text in the terminal browser .................................................................527
Show button in the terminal browser..................................................................528
Multi-stage in the terminal browser....................................................................529
Fields in the terminal browser ...........................................................................533
Terminal destination ........................................................................................534
Set Color ........................................................................................................535
Connector chart...............................................................................................537
General Connector chart ...................................................................................537
Cable .............................................................................................................538
Cable list ........................................................................................................538
Cable chart .....................................................................................................539
Option: 1 Cable ...............................................................................................542
Option: All cables.............................................................................................543
Summary........................................................................................................544
Summary specification .....................................................................................544
Summary from information from Project Manager................................................545
Summary with the variables..............................................................................547
Modification list ...............................................................................................549
Modification list ...............................................................................................549
Reference list ..................................................................................................550
Reference list ..................................................................................................550
Labels ............................................................................................................552
Labels in general .............................................................................................552
Symbol editor ....................................................................................................553
General information .........................................................................................553
General ..........................................................................................................553
Background and grid colors ...............................................................................554
Summary........................................................................................................555
Exit Symbol editor ...........................................................................................557
Libraries .........................................................................................................558
General ..........................................................................................................558
New library .....................................................................................................559
vii

Table Of Contents
Control cabinet libraries....................................................................................560
Content ..........................................................................................................561
Change symbol size .........................................................................................562
IEC 61346 libraries ..........................................................................................563
IEC 40719-libraries ..........................................................................................564
Pin .................................................................................................................565
Place pin.........................................................................................................565
Pin type..........................................................................................................567
Pin form .........................................................................................................568
Pin direction....................................................................................................569
Size of pin number and pin name.......................................................................570
Move pin.........................................................................................................571
Delete pin .......................................................................................................572
Enter pin name................................................................................................573
Enter pin number.............................................................................................574
Editing pins (connections).................................................................................575
Symbols .........................................................................................................576
New symbol ....................................................................................................576
Characteristics of a component..........................................................................577
Create symbol body .........................................................................................578
Edit symbol parameters....................................................................................579
Determine component type ...............................................................................581
Modify size......................................................................................................584
Symbol link with graphic...................................................................................585
Functions........................................................................................................588
Content specification ........................................................................................588
Reset editor and load symbol ............................................................................589
Insert symbol..................................................................................................590
Save symbol ...................................................................................................591
Copy / delete symbol .......................................................................................592
Extras ...............................................................................................................595
Repair database...............................................................................................595
Line name database .........................................................................................596
System files ....................................................................................................598
Select objects..................................................................................................601
Output library as graphics.................................................................................602
ECAD module standard.....................................................................................603
Conversion parameters.....................................................................................603
Starting ECAD import .......................................................................................605
Part manager ..................................................................................................607
Part Manager ..................................................................................................608
ACCESS 97 (Standard) or ACCESS 2000.............................................................609
Structure or fields of the database .....................................................................610
Catalogues in the database ...............................................................................612
Activating catalogue forwarding.........................................................................614
Part Manager – interface of the dialog ................................................................615
Part Manager – Symbol view .............................................................................616
Part Manager tabs............................................................................................617
Part during symbol selection .............................................................................623
Specifying the selection for a data record............................................................624
Additional information for the Part Manager ........................................................627
Conversion of dBASE to ACCESS xx ...................................................................629
Changing the item entry in the dialog.................................................................630
Create / Change / Delete an Part entry...............................................................631
Link with symbol..............................................................................................633
Combination element .......................................................................................635
Editing the combination element........................................................................637
Data import ....................................................................................................638
viii

Table Of Contents
Data transfer into the WSCAD database..............................................................641
Data transfer from outside -> WSCAD................................................................644
Adjusting database fields ..................................................................................645
Additional database fields .................................................................................649
Database fields and their meaning .....................................................................651
Checking the database .....................................................................................655
Converting a database......................................................................................656
Creating a catalogue ........................................................................................657
Datanorm import to a catalogue table ................................................................659
Linking a catalogue to an Part root....................................................................661
Part Management filters...................................................................................662
Views................................................................................................................667
Zoom in..........................................................................................................667
Zoom out........................................................................................................668
Zoom Extents..................................................................................................669
Zoom Window .................................................................................................670
1/1 Middle ......................................................................................................671
Zoom last .......................................................................................................672
Display dimensions ..........................................................................................673
Show invisible texts .........................................................................................675
Identify symbols with number locks ...................................................................677
Identify symbols with material locks...................................................................678
Mouse wheel zoom...........................................................................................679
Cable visible or invisible ...................................................................................680
Text Box visible or invisible ...............................................................................681
Settings ............................................................................................................683
General ..........................................................................................................683
Color and Font settings.....................................................................................684
Color settings..................................................................................................684
Screen colors ..................................................................................................685
Printer colors...................................................................................................686
Fonts..............................................................................................................687
Options ..........................................................................................................689
Options ..........................................................................................................689
Snap settings ..................................................................................................691
Ortho mode ....................................................................................................692
Grid setting.....................................................................................................693
Auto-connection ..............................................................................................694
Cursor ............................................................................................................695
Cursor scale ....................................................................................................696
Page scale ......................................................................................................697
File type .........................................................................................................698
Invisible text ...................................................................................................700
Margins ..........................................................................................................701
Auxiliary lines..................................................................................................702
Exact conversion .............................................................................................703
Format ...........................................................................................................704
Desktop interface.............................................................................................705
Arranging the (desktop) interface ......................................................................705
Toolbars general..............................................................................................706
Managing function bars ....................................................................................708
Command bars ................................................................................................712
Configuring a command toolbar .........................................................................714
Library bars ....................................................................................................716
Library bars and IEC 61346...............................................................................717
Generating library bars.....................................................................................718
Configuring a library toolbar..............................................................................720
Library bar cabinet...........................................................................................721
ix

Table Of Contents
Creating a new cabinet library bar .....................................................................722
System performance ........................................................................................724
Design............................................................................................................726
Common Settings ...............................................................................................729
Tabs...............................................................................................................729
Directories ......................................................................................................729
File ................................................................................................................730
Printer............................................................................................................732
Cross reference ...............................................................................................733
Miscellaneous ..................................................................................................736
Contactors + PLC modules ................................................................................739
Connect + Load ...............................................................................................742
Compatibility...................................................................................................744
Cables ............................................................................................................745
Terminals .......................................................................................................747
Plug/Socket ....................................................................................................751
Database ........................................................................................................752
Labels ............................................................................................................753
Labels ............................................................................................................753
Equipment labels .............................................................................................754
Cable labels ....................................................................................................756
Terminal labels................................................................................................758
Output lists .....................................................................................................760
General ..........................................................................................................760
Summary specification with variables .................................................................761
Reference list ..................................................................................................763
Connection list ................................................................................................764
Tablet ............................................................................................................765
Requirements..................................................................................................765
Activate..........................................................................................................766
Create or select template..................................................................................767
Scale tablet.....................................................................................................769
Windows ...........................................................................................................771
General ..........................................................................................................771
Tile horizontally ...............................................................................................772
Tile vertically...................................................................................................773
Window list .....................................................................................................774
Cascade..........................................................................................................775
The full screen.................................................................................................776
Help..................................................................................................................777
Online Hilfe .....................................................................................................777
Online help overview........................................................................................777
Help in Search mode ........................................................................................779
Services .........................................................................................................780
Software maintenance via the internet and version status checking .......................780
Time interval...................................................................................................781
Online checking and download...........................................................................782
Activating the new version ................................................................................783
Online update directly from the program ............................................................784
DLL information ...............................................................................................785
Error log .........................................................................................................786
Function keys ..................................................................................................787
Terminals ..........................................................................................................789
General ..........................................................................................................789
Terminal chart algorithm ..................................................................................790
Terminal destination ........................................................................................792
Terminal numbering.........................................................................................793
Vertical terminals.............................................................................................795
x

Table Of Contents
Terminals with several connections (e.g. multi-storey terminals) ...........................796
Jumpers .........................................................................................................797
Jumpers display (standard)...............................................................................798
Plug-in jumpers ...............................................................................................800
Wire jumper....................................................................................................802
Contactor Management .......................................................................................803
Fundamentals of contactor management ............................................................803
Rebuilding the contactor database .....................................................................807
Cross reference coil-contact ..............................................................................808
Creating symbols .............................................................................................809
Creating coil and contact symbols ......................................................................809
Contact comb in general ...................................................................................812
Characteristics of a contactor contact .................................................................814
Creating a contact comb for contactor ................................................................816
Fully automatic................................................................................................818
General information on fully automatic Contactor Management..............................818
Loading contactor coil (first)..............................................................................820
Reference name ..............................................................................................828
Changing part numbers ....................................................................................829
Symbol name ..................................................................................................832
Changing addition text2....................................................................................833
Changing the function text................................................................................834
Naming a contact comb ....................................................................................835
Loading contact with existing coil.......................................................................836
Contact without a coil (creating a virtual contactor coil)........................................838
Expanding a contactor contact...........................................................................844
Changing the basic contactor or contact block .....................................................846
Adding the contact block from the database again ...............................................851
Assembling a contact block yourself ...................................................................855
Changing the pin numbers in the Expand dialog ..................................................864
Semi automatic ...............................................................................................866
General information on semi-automatic contactor management.............................866
Re-loading contactor coil (semi-automatic) .........................................................867
Using virtual contactor coil (semi-automatic).......................................................870
Loading contact with existing coil (semi-automatic) .............................................872
Loading a contact without a coil (creating a virtual contactor coil)..........................874
Contactor Manager...........................................................................................877
Contactor Manager in general............................................................................877
Activating Contactor Manager............................................................................878
Contactor Manager interface .............................................................................879
Contactor Manager functions.............................................................................886
Contactor Management Compact Version ............................................................893
PLC Manager......................................................................................................901
General overview of the PLC manager ................................................................901
Activating the PLC manager ..............................................................................902
PLC Manager interface......................................................................................903
PLC Manager functions .....................................................................................908
RE-addressing PLC inputs and outputs................................................................912
Import Export PLC lists.....................................................................................913
PLC database ..................................................................................................915
PLC Manager prerequisites ................................................................................917
Procedure when working with a PLC ...................................................................918
Inserting PLC elements with the PLC selection .....................................................919
Deleting the PLC main element and auxiliary elements .........................................921
Entering a comment text and/or symbol text directly in the symbol .......................922
Assigning a PLC text online ...............................................................................923
PLC cross reference navigator ...........................................................................924
PLC assemblies without PLC Manager .................................................................925
xi

Table Of Contents
Creating a PLC symbol......................................................................................926
General rules ..................................................................................................926
Creating a PLC symbol......................................................................................927
Creating the database entry..............................................................................929
Form layout .......................................................................................................930
General ..........................................................................................................930
Why Form / Drawing frame ...............................................................................931
New Form (or change an existing) .....................................................................932
Form type.......................................................................................................934
Inserting a frame.............................................................................................935
Draw lines ......................................................................................................936
Form dialog.....................................................................................................937
Managing text allocators using the form dialog ....................................................937
Starting the form dialog....................................................................................938
Organising the Text allocators ...........................................................................939
Formatting and inserting the Text allocators........................................................941
Text allocators which specify the number of lines on each form page (obligatory) ....944
Sum value of the Text allocator .........................................................................945
Text allocators based on additional database fields ..............................................946
Formatting the unit (only additional database fields) ............................................947
Formatting the number format ..........................................................................948
Multi-line texts with Text allocators ....................................................................949
Moveable Text allocators ..................................................................................950
Fixed Text allocators ........................................................................................951
Manual additional texts.....................................................................................952
Multi-page forms with Text allocators .................................................................953
Text allocator ..................................................................................................954
What Text allocators are available? ....................................................................954
Text allocators which can be placed for each terminal form ...................................956
Text allocator of the material-list form which can be placed ..................................958
Universal database Text allocators for the material list .........................................960
Text allocators for revision history .....................................................................961
Text allocators for cable lists .............................................................................963
Special case of several cables per form page.......................................................964
Text allocators for cable diagram .......................................................................965
Text allocators for content specification ..............................................................966
Text allocators for content specification from variables .........................................967
Text allocators for summary specification from the Project Manager .......................969
The following text allocators can be used for connector chart ................................970
Text allocator for connection list ........................................................................972
Text allocators for reference list.........................................................................974
Text allocators for Project manager texts ............................................................976
Text allocator for drawing macro .......................................................................977
Glossary ............................................................ Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.
Index ................................................................ Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.
xii

Introduction
General
By offering a software-service contract we carry essential further developing as
possibility adaptation for new legal regulation in scope of the software service
automatically as update as disposal. You profit automatically with each release of news in
our software product. This involves, that documentation changes in the course of a year,
because permanently updates and new functions in the software flow into.
As the documentation and the software is one “unit”, we had
determined to delive only one manual “First steps …” as a printed
documentation.
An actually documentation you will find as 'WebHelp' on our web-site. You activate
it directly from the WSCAD software with .
Online Help – WebHelp
With the menu entry 'Help –WebHelp' or , you can start directly the online help.
The online help is installed automatically on your system and you can use it every time.
If your PC has a web access and the connection (menu entry 'Help-WebHelp') is
activated, you get direct with key help form the internet.
If you need a special information to a subject, press the key and the related files
are loaded from the internet. You find the information what you need.
1

WSCAD 51
Digitizing Drawings: Transferring “Paper”
Drawings into CAD
WSCAD is offering a digitizing service which can free you from the time-consuming
task of recreating drawings in CAD format.
2
• This service include the transfer of paper documentation into CAD-based circuit
and installation diagrams, in accordance with your requirements, and the
conversion of US and other symbol standards into other standards
• The digitized CAD diagrams can be delivered in WSCAD or AutoCAD format
• Prices will be quoted individually and are based on paper size, range of services
provided (e.g. whether automated listings using WSCAD are needed) and
quantities
This digitizing service is suitable both for individual drawings and for the conversion of
entire archives. We can also digitize non-electrical schematics, like architectural plans.
Our staff are always happy to give you help and advice.
Contact your dealer for details and a quotation

Continuous Development = Subscription
Introduction
We are constantly improving on our products. We aim to keep our software in step, or
ahead of the best technology available. We understand that our customers need to keep
up with technological developments and expect software tools to maintain their
competitive edge. This is why it is so important to ensure that you have access to the
advantages of constant product development. The availability of a Subscription contract
from WSCAD will ensure that you can maintain that edge. New developments, including
any necessary changes to meet new requirements, become automatically available to
you as part of the subscription contract. By entering into a subscription contract you are
assured of the following advantages:
• Continuous improvements to functionality
• Amendments to the program to suit new standards
• Free updates during the validity of the contract
• Online access to the current program release via the internet
• Quantifiable ongoing software costs
• Hotline service: telephone support and priority customer care via email
• Adaptation of symbols to new standards
• Password-protected internet download of the latest libraries and database
• Special prices for seminars
• Special service rates
3

Features of WSCAD
General Information of WSCAD 5
WSCAD has a modular structure, meaning that you are able to start with the Basic -
version and at a later time expand it to a higher-version (Compact or Professional).
Drawings that have been made with a lower version are fully compatible with the higher
versions.
The three on top of each other set up software versions contains a reflexive and practical
experience features.
Basic - version
The Basic - version fit for especially initial operation, if the actually project planning already
completed and there is no more changes to be expected. Also you can use it as tool for
small and not so extensive schematics
Compact - version
The Compact - version you find it frequently in the maintenance. The strength of the
Compact - version is the adaptable schematic construction, in example, if a plant or
machine existence and will be expand in middle circumference. Over out it is fit for
schematic construction of small and middle projects. The user can use some different
automatic functions like: auto numbering; cross reference; terminal charts; contact
reflection and much more.
Professional - Version
The Professional - Version is used in planning, developing and documentation of new schematics.
In this case, the user is use difficult on-line and control functions, which he need in a new project.
Errors become lock out and productivity grows up.
Add-On ProjectWizard
There is an Add-On ProjectWizard for automated creating of schematics. The
ProjectWizard works with drawing macros which contains text allocators. This text
allocators (representing reference name, part number,...) can be filled in a table.
After you're generating an automatic schematic, the text allocator were replaced and the
schematic is finished without any further work.
5

WSCAD 51
Features of WSCAD 5
6
General Basic Compact Professional
- Schematic
Drawing pages 10000 10000 >10000
Sub pages
New design
Project management with file preview and sorting functions
Project manager with individual listings. Project-specific
information is automatically copied into the drawing frame
Project import/export
Unit/Field management; Unit/Field region - -
Text box
Path text
Black Box -
Destination wiring
Material browser - -
Text find/replace -
Free configuration of drawing frames and lists (layout)
Foreign language display/translate / - / - /
Dimensions
Printout labels of equipment, cables and terminals -
Drawing functions Basic Compact Professional
- Schematic
Choice of standards: Facility to work with old standard JEC 40719
or new JEC 61346 standard
Symbol explorer with preview when loading a symbol, including
symbol search and favourites
Symbol editor for drawing own schematic symbols
Drawing macro Explorer with preview
Terminal browser functions -
Drawing plug + socket separately / plug + socket together / - / /
- Floor plan
Symbol libraries of all areas for electrical installation
Symbol editor for drawing own electrical installation
Drawing functions for floor plans
Drawing format DIN and free format until 30mx30m
Scale 1:1 until 1:1000
Fly Eye for display actually position in the drawing
Clearly arranged floor management with installation zones
Print preview of the drawings
Snap functions
- Schematic
Automatic functions Basic Compact Professional

Features of WSCAD
Numbering of symbols -
Generating cross references with designation wiring/online - / - - / /
Automatic generation of line names in various forms - -
Control cabinet manually / semi automatic / - / - /
Terminal browser for locating and modifying terminals, single terminal,
multi level terminal, jumper -
Cable manager and connector manager online - -
Contactor management -
Contactor manager - -
Coil cross reference/ generate reflector -
Coil cross reference and contact manager online - -
Generate PLC cross references -
PLC cross references and PLC manager online - -
Replacing drawing frames -
- Schematic
Automated listings/charts Basic Compact Professional
Separate listings (terminal chart, material list, …) -
Automated listing for all lists - -
Project data -
Summary -
Revision history - -
Terminal Chart -
Connector chart - -
Cable list - -
Cable chart - -
Wiring chart - -
Reference list - -
Material list -
Interfaces Basic Compact Professional
- Schematic
DWG/DXF/HPGL Export
DWG/DXF/HPGL Import
VNS Export - -
ASCII, ACCESS, Excel, dBase, Import/Export (Data) - -
Import of parts data via ECAD standard component interface - -
UGL/UGS Export - -
Import of ASCII-, Excel- and Datanorm 4.0 - files - -
Material list output as ACCESS, dBase, ASCII or Excel - -
Label-Export to Grafoplast, Phoenix, Murrplastik, Excel or ACCESS -
Import/Export of SEQ list for PLC module as Excel, SEQ-txt-format - -
- Floor plan
DWG/DXF Import with taking over all layers
7

WSCAD 51
New Features of WSCAD 5.1
- Project management:
8
New Features of WSCAD 5.1 Basic Compact Professional
Hide and show of several projects
Export of several projects
Sorting in 2 levels
Advanced copy function for projects
Exclude components for additional material listings
DWG/DXF- import and -export
Export to BMP-, PCX- and PNG- format
-CPP and UFD-management:
Fast navigation through CPP-projects - -
UFD-management with view of concerned pages - -
Changing of UFD for one or several pages - -
Using of UFD-region without CPP-mode - -
- Contactor management:
Contactor management -
New contactor manager with advanced functionality: - -
- intuitive handling -
- smart listing of contactors during work -
- assigning contacts to preselect pin numbers - -
- split a 3pole power contact to a 3 single power contacts - -
- simple expand functionality for aux. contactor block - -
- creating an individual contact block - -
- free changings or moves of pin designations -
- Lexicon:
Selective text import and translation with new dialogue - -
- Drawing functions:
Simple text: expanded to 100 characters
Simple text: Rotation 0°/90°/180°/270° adjustable
Text box: used for more than 100 characters with import functionality
Direct access to File description and Comments (1+2) with Sheet text functionality
Direct access to function text and additional texts
Zooming with mouse wheel and keyboard +/-
Page up/down: goto; button next / prev; shortcuts
Sequential and unique number for project pages - -
Variable sheet number , sheet quantity l, filename short/long would be updated
Terminal browser: changing the terminal destination -
Material browser: insert external texts by using drag'n drop - -
Protect frame elements
Cabel visible or invisible by using a menu item
Graphic - company logo & graphic as link resizeable
Graphic used in symbols
Drawing macro Explorer for fast selection of drawing macros

Features of WSCAD
Accessibility Quick Text: preselect already known text - -
- Interface/Printing:
Output to ASCII: Material list -
Print: Margins are adjustable for printout
- Help:
Informations refering the Update-Download
Display the available shortkeys
9

WSCAD 51
Hardware requirements
10
Minimum requirements Recommend
Operation System: Windows 98/2000/XP Windows 2000/XP
CPU: 800 MHz 2 GHz
RAM: 128MB 512 MB
Harddisk 100MB 500 MB
Graphics Card: 32 MB 128 MB

Contact WSCAD
The fastest way to contact WSCAD
Central office: +49 -8131-3627-0
Orders /
invoices:
+49 -8131-3627-97
Fax: +49 -8131-3627-50
Email: office@WSCAD.com
Sales: +49 -8131-3627-98
Fax: +49 -8131-3627-52
Email: sales@WSCAD.com
Support: +49 -8131-3627-99
Fax: +49 -8131-3627-51
Email: support@WSCAD.com
Homepage: www.WSCAD.com
If you contact the technical support via email we strongly recommend our
troubleshooting form. You can find this form in the support section of our website
Troubleshooting–Formular .
11

Working with WSCAD 5
Screen Layout
The illustration below shows only one possible configuration, as you can rearrange the
screen layout entirely as you wish.
The main window shows the name of the application (WSCAD 5) and the version
number. You will also recognize other important components of the display:
• The menu bar
• Below the menu bar: a toolbar, in this case a command toolbar
• On the left-hand edge of the screen: another toolbar, in this case a library toolbar
• In the client area: a drawing windows
• Below the drawing space: the information bar (with input field)
• At the bottom: the fixed status bar
You can of course change the size of the whole window yourself, using either of the two
normal methods (with the buttons in the top right hand corner or by dragging with the
mouse).
Configuring the screen layout
13

WSCAD 51
The Command toolbars and the Library toolbars can be docked’ against the other side of
the screen or placed as a free-standing window. You can try this easily: move the
cursor onto a toolbar (but not onto a button), press the left mouse button and then move
the cursor, keeping the mouse button pressed. The new position of the toolbar appears
in outline and as soon as you release the mouse button the toolbar appears in this
position.
If you click once with the right mouse button on the area beside a docked toolbar or in
the window header, you will get a small menu that gives you (e.g.) a list of all available
library toolbars. With one mouse click you can activate or hide a Library toolbar.
You can of course configure the toolbars: If you click with the right mouse button on a
button, you can immediately insert a new button (or a separator) in this position.
Click on the new button, select ‚Record’ and then use the relevant command from the
menu bar. The command is accepted and its icon appears on the button.
You can design the buttons on the library toolbars yourself, using the Symbol editor.
The buttons of the command toolbar have preset icons, but for the icons on the symbol
toolbars you have a completely free hand. The button is assigned via the Symbol editor,
because each button must be assigned to both a component name and a library. You
can ‚snapshot’ the relevant icon out of the symbol editor and apply different background
colours if you wish.
14

Menu bar
Working with WSCAD 5
The menu bar, together with the command toolbar, gives access to all the functions and
commands of WSCAD 5.
Simply click on a command with the mouse and a pull-down menu appears. The same
effect can be achieved by pressing the -key and then the underlined letters in the
appropriate menu item:
Some commands may appear in light grey; this means that these commands cannot be
used at the present time. The small arrow on the right-hand edge indicates a further
sub-menu which can be accessed in different ways according to the operating system. If
you are working under Windows95 you merely need to position the mouse cursor on this
arrow and the sub-menu will open up automatically. The menu can also change to suit
the current conditions (e.g. in the symbol editor).
Hint
During certain actions the menu is disabled. The whole menu bar
appears in light grey and no command can be activated. The menu
bar becomes enabled again as soon as the action has been
completed, or cancelled with the key.
15

WSCAD 51
Toolbars
Toolbars enable specific actions to be started up directly and rapidly. The appearance of
the individual buttons is always intuitively linked to the relevant action.
Each toolbar can be “docked” or it can be positioned as a “floating” window. You can of
course display several toolbars or delete, move or insert buttons within a toolbar, with
virtually no restrictions. There are two different types of toolbar:
Command toolbars allow the rapid execution of commands which would otherwise need
to be accessed via the menu bar. We recommend combining functional groups of
commands.
For every available command there is a corresponding graphic symbol within WSCAD 5
which is inserted automatically when you allocate the command to a button. The button
display is linked to the relevant command: if the command is not available (it would be
shown in grey in the menu) its button is also shown in grey and cannot be ‘pressed’.
Within the Library toolbars components from any of the libraries can be allocated to
individual buttons.
The component is loaded simply by clicking with the mouse and it can then be placed
immediately. You can make the allocations yourself within the Symbol editor. It is also
quite easy to apply your own symbol to a button. As a maximum of 200 toolbars can be
handled, you have the facility to create various toolbars in advance and call them up only
when needed.
Note
16
The buttons for the Library toolbars which are supplied with the
program are available in two different standard sizes so that you
can choose the optimal size for your screen. When creating a new
toolbar you can also select other sizes.

Information bar
Working with WSCAD 5
The Information bar is in a special situation as it combines several functions in one
element.
• On the extreme left hand side is the field for indicating Snap [S], Orthogonal
modes [O] and Auto-connection [A].
• Next to it are displayed the mouse key functions when you are working within a
function. Thus you can see at any time what function you are carrying out with
the mouse keys. This also ensures that you know in advance what the next action
should be.
• Most of the space is taken up with the field for text input. Whenever WSCAD 5
expects an input other than via a dialog box (e.g. entering a function text) this
field is activated and highlighted in colour. Simply click on the small button (‘’)
to the right of the input field and you will be given a list of the last 20 inputs.
Additional when you're using the Foreign Languages Function / Quick Text
you will get the corresponding entries of the lexicon. This listing is resizeable. You
can then make your selection and transfer it using the button next to it on the
right.
• The next field shows the current drawing colour. There are 16 colours
available in WSCAD and these colours can be defined as you wish. The field is
opened with a single mouse click and you can then change the colour quickly and
easily.
• The procedure is equally simple for the Line type: simply click and you get a list
of the existing line types. This field does have an additional function: click with
the right mouse button and a menu for Line width will appear. As all the choices
17

WSCAD 51
Hint
18
are displayed in the selected line or background colour, this eliminates the need
for choosing by trial and error.
You can of course attach the information bar to the upper edge of
the screen or show it in its own window. In order to make more
space it can also be made invisible: when a text input is required it
appears automatically and disappears again after the text has been
entered.

Status bar
Working with WSCAD 5
The status bar displays information in conventional form. Apart from the indicators for
coordinates, page format and the size of available memory, hints relating to the commands
are shown on the far left hand side.
If you click on a menu item and keep it pressed, you can scroll through the menu
choices. If you pause on an active command you will see a description of the relevant
command. The command will only be executed when you release the mouse button.
19

WSCAD 51
Mouse operation
When working in a graphical user interface such as Windows it is normal to work with the
mouse. However the cursor can also be used for such tasks as inserting components.
One click with the left mouse button indicates positive confirmation. The internal
functions of WSCAD 5 allow the right button to be used for cancelling, as in the earlier
version, but not in the case of the main menu, as this is not compatible with standard
Windows functions.
Moving and sizing of individual windows is a normal part of the Windows operation and
the form of the cursor gives visual hints on how to do this.
The right mouse button gives you access to a very important function of the program.
When you position the cursor on any object, you will see a special menu which matches
the characteristics of the object. This applies not only to elements within the drawings
but also to the buttons on the toolbars.
You can use the mouse to mark an area (rectangle) of the drawing. You can then, for
example, move or copy the selected components.
When you wish to select a particular area of a drawing window for further processing,
you can do this with the mouse as well: click with the left mouse button on a corner of
the desired area, hold the mouse button down and move the cursor with the mouse.
This will cause a rectangle to be drawn and when the mouse button is released all the
components within the rectangle will be shown highlighted. You can then apply the Copy
command () to this area. To cancel the selection you simply click anywhere in
the drawing window.
Another familiar feature is the ‘Panning’ feature, which moves the whole picture in the
drawing window when the cursor reaches the edge of the window. However this function
is only activated when you hold the key down. This prevents the screen from
‘panning’ every time you move the mouse towards the menus or toolbars.
The Object properties concept embraces a new and very fundamental feature. A click
with the right mouse button opens up a menu which relates exactly to the object on
which the cursor is located. For example, if the object is a component, you will get the
Symbol parameters menu and its applicable commands, if you click near a command
toolbar you can insert and extract the function bars. You will soon come to appreciate
the usefulness of this feature!.
20

Function keys
Working with WSCAD 5
Even with a graphical interface the function keys should of course not be forgotten, as
they can also be used to give fast access to frequently used operators. For instance you
will often find the F4 key very useful for fitting your drawing to the current window, F2
and F3 for rapid Zooming, F5 for Snap mode switching or F7 for Grid display
switching.
load keyboard-stripes from our homepage this will help you to get familiar with
the function keys:
PDF:
www.wscad.com/HELP/WSCAD5_Tastaturaufkleber.pdf
Excel:
www.wscad.com/HELP/WSCAD5_Tastaturaufkleber.xls
Every Windows user will of course already be familiar with one function key: F1 for the
Online help. This gives access to the whole of the reference manual and there are also
“topical” hints and tips.
The full list of the available function keys is as follows:
Overview of available function keys
F1
Key Function
Invokes the online help for the menu item to which you are pointing
or the respective dialogue
F2 Zooms in (picture larger)
F3 Zooms out (picture smaller)
F4 Zoom to size (fit window)
STRG + F4 Presentation 1:1 in relation to the page format
ALT + F4 End program
F5 Snap grid on/off
F6 Orthogonalmodus ein / aus
F7 Grid on/off
F8 Coordinates display in mm / in
F9 Cursor zero point absolute / relative
F10 Autolink on/off
F11 Redraw
F12 Full screen mode
Mainly has the same function as the left mouse button
21

WSCAD 51
22
or
or
or
Pages through a set of drawings
Starts the Page up/down dialogue which allows you to navigate
easily through the schematics
The goto function shows you immediately the page which page
number you've entered in the text field (information bar)
Copies the symbols from a selected area, i.e. saves the symbols in
an buffer file and transfers them to the clipboard
Restores the buffer file. This is the same as the insert-block
command
Cuts the elements in the selected area
Invokes the UNDO function
Starts the load-file dialogue
Starts the print dialogue
Closes a file
Starts info for WSCAD
Jumps to first page of current plan
-
-
-
-
-
Jumps to first page of current project
Jumps to last page of current project
Jumps to previous area
Jumps to next area
Undoes the last POS1
Jumps to last page of current project
-
-
-
-
Undoes the last END
Starts Symbol Explorer
Starts Item Management
Starts Terminal Dialogue (Browser)
- Starts Cable Management
- Starts Plug Management
- Starts Contactor Manager
- Starts Protection Semiautomatic on / off
- Starts PLC Manager

Hint
- Starts Drawing macro Explorer
- Starts Parameters / Common Settings
Working with WSCAD 5
When a keyboard input has a default text, this is already selected.
This can be seen on the inverted view. If you wish to retain the
default text and merely edit it, the cursor must be positioned
beforehand using the cursor keys (or or ). If you
wish to enter text directly, the default text will be deleted
immediately.
23

WSCAD 51
Multiple windows
In WSCAD 5 you work with several drawing windows. The following example shows a
typical drawing window.
The title bar shows what is being displayed. With the button in the upper right hand
corner you can minimise the drawing window (put it down to an icon), maximise it (bring
it up to full size) or close it completely. When a window is closed, any changes are
saved.
Hint
24
The appearance of the buttons depends on what version of
Windows you are using.
Each page on the circuit diagram is assigned to a drawing window, i.e. a page cannot be
displayed in two different windows at the same time. Each window takes up space in the
drawing memory, which of course increases the amount of memory required. You can
therefore configure WSCAD 5 to work in multiple window mode.
With functions which involve other pages (e.g. ‘Cross-reference navigator’ or ‘Page
up/down) it is important to check first that the page is not already linked to a drawing
window. If this is the case, the relevant window will be made active. This may have the
effect, with the ‘Page up/down function for instance, that a second drawing window in the
background is made active.

Working with WSCAD 5
Each drawing window can be moved, resized, tiled side by side or overlapped with others
within the main window.
Hint
In the menu under the command ‘Window’ you will find a range of
commands which will enable you to arrange the windows on the
screen. The menu also includes a list of all open windows.
25

WSCAD 51
Full screen mode
You can switch between Normal mode and Full-screen mode using the menu
command Window / Full screen or the function key. The menu bar, window
title, status bar and information bar are not visible on the bottom edge of the screen. The
symbol and library bars, on the other hand, are still visible.
Hint
26
If it is necessary to input text, the information bar automatically
appears with the general text field and disappears again after the
text has been input.

Project Manager
Project Manager in general
General
With the revised version of Project Manager (PM) in WSCAD 5, the Installation
diagram module is invoked for the first time directly using a fully synchronised Project
Manager (PM). The two Project Managers (PMs) look identical and access a common
database. They therefore always see the same project listings and you can therefore
edit the project information and save, delete or open projects etc. in both PMs.
27

WSCAD 51
The difference lies in the enabled functionalities for the specialised file types at any one
time. The Project Manager (PM) of the Installation diagram module is used exclusively
for editing the files types installation diagram in the folder of the same name. All
other file types are edited in the Project Manager (PM) of WSCAD 5.
28

Starting Project Manager (PM)
Project Manager
PM is started under the menu option File / Project Manager. The PM obtains project
information from several ACCESS databases which are located in the default project
directory.
The (PRJKND.MDB, PRJVERW.MDB and PRJDATA.MDB) ACCESS databases contain
all of the information for project manager. These are located in the configured project
path under Parameters / General / Directories / Project database .
Function of the different project databases
29

WSCAD 51
30
• Prjknd.mdb: stores information relating to customers.
• Prjverw.mdb: stores all projects and project information for each project
• Prjdata.mdb: stores templates which determine the structure of your project.
• PRJARC.MDB: stores information relating to architects.
• PRJBAU.MDB: stores information relating to construction sites.

The Project Manager window
Project Manager
In the header bar you can always see the current status of the Project manager (here,
for example: -> Open: WSCAD Example project 1 ; this means that the project
WSCAD Example project1 is active).
Additionally you can see at the top right the Windows control symbols Maximize and
Close.
Note
The Project Manager cannot be placed onto the Taskbar !!!
In the left-hand window you can see the project structure (tree) with the project
name as the description and the individual folders (shown in color). These in turn
contain files of the corresponding type.
Note
The individual folders are not directories as such but simply a filter
for display purposes within the Project Manager.
In the right-hand window you can see the project settings fields or the project data
for each selected project, folder or single file. These project data fields can be used for
automated listings in forms using the text allocators. (not in Basic module)
At the bottom of the screen the display shows the currently highlighted object and the
contents of the clipboard. This is also where hints are displayed when you select a
command or a function.
31

WSCAD 51
In the center of the screen there are some buttons for menu commands, for easier
access to frequently used functions. The activity of each function is dependent on the
status of each project (whether open or not) and on the current selection in the left-hand
window.
32

Project Manager
Changing the size of the Project Manager dialog
The size of the project action window can be changed and the size of the fields in the
right hand window are readjusted to fit. In order to change the size, the cursor must be
moved to the side of the window and the double arrow which then appears by pressing
the left mouse button moves to the desired position (many of the dialogs can be made to
fit in this way). The width of the left area can also be changed. Move the cursor to the
side edge of the left window and then a double arrow will appear.
33

WSCAD 51
Closing the Project Manager
The menu item 'Project -/ Close' closes the Project manager and displays the current
drawing page of the selected WSCAD project. The Project manager don't must be
closed, you can use 2 screen solutions to set them on the second screen.
34

Project functions
Creating a new project
Project Manager
To create a new project, start up the Project manager and activate the menu item
'Project – New'. This opens up the dialog 'New project'.
Enter project name and working directory
In the Project name field at the top, enter the name of the new project (see above).
You can then choose either to set the working directory yourself via the Search button, or
to use the standard setting which stores the project name in a subdirectory of the preset
project path (’Settings – Common Settings - Directories’).
Using templates
To avoid always having to set the general parameters of a project such as the drawing
frames for the schematic diagrams or the forms for the various lists, WSCAD 4. for
Windows uses Templates. The descriptive texts and comment texts are copied into the
new project. They can be used in automated listings in the various forms(e.g. the cover
sheet).
Note
These templates 'note' the references for the forms, drawing frame,
file name and optional texts for all file types that are handled by
WSCAD.
35

WSCAD 51
Settings in the dialog – New project entry
36
• DIN 61346 This option has the effect of applying the new DIN libraries to the
new project. After a standard WSCAD installation, the DIN libraries are located in
the directory which was configured in the configuration under Parameters /
General / Directories / Field libraries 61346. If the option DIN 61346 has
been switched on, the database field designation DIN 61346 is used for the
assignment routines between DIN symbols and items and many processes then
relate to this setting. Otherwise, the DIN 40719 option is used.
• Project-specific configuration You can define whether a project-specific
configuration (WS_PRJ50.INI in the project directory) should be created or
whether you are able to work with the global configuration WS_WIN.50.INI and
(WS_PRJ50.INI in the Windows system directory). The advantage is that you
retain the settings in regard to the configuration which apply to this project and
do not transfer them to other projects when changing the project
• CPP This option has the effect of converting the project to a CPP project.
You will also see the folders belonging to the project for the respective file types.
(Cover sheet, Change state and Contents information etc.). In the right hand
working window of the Project Manager, you can supplement all other project data
(Name, Description, Number and Customer etc.) of the individual projects according
to need.
Example
New project DEMO_PROJECT in the automatically created DEMO_PROJECT directory
Hint

Tip
You can assemble different templates and save them under
different template names.
By using specific templates for each of your project types, it is very
easy to ensure that your projects have a uniform appearance.
Summary of procedure
• Enter the project name.
• Adjust the template
• Set the required options
Project Manager
You can also change the project-specific configuration options, the project mode
(standard or CPP) and the standard (DIN 61346) again later on. Now click on the OK
button in the New project entry dialog. The dialog will close and the configured
template data will be saved in the project.
37

WSCAD 51
Creating project templates
Project templates can only be created or changed when you generate a new project.
Select an existing project template and click on the Templates field in the New
project entry dialog.
The New button becomes active. After clicking on the button, you will see the new
description of the template in a text box.
Now change the existing settings. The individual objects (drawing frames, forms and
texts) are assigned with a double click on the element for which you wish to assign or
enter something.
e.g. in the >>Cover sheet

Project Manager
After double clicking, the Windows standard dialog opens. In this way, you can set up
a permanent link by marking the form and clicking on the Open button.
39

WSCAD 51
Text input dialogs are activated in which you can permanently link any test with the
elements Filename, Comment or Description of each folder. Click on the OK button
and the text box closes and is saved.
40

Special function for cover sheet
Project Manager
With Cover sheet, several different cover sheets are created when the sequential
forms *.0002, *.0003... are also present in the template directory.
Changing a filename or form
1st Method
Specify a fixed name Filenames => Diagram i.e. all the diagram
pages of this project are named: Schematic.0000...Schematic.9999
2nd Method
Do not specify a fixed filename but use the abbreviation %P => corresponds to a
wildcard for the project names.
41

WSCAD 51
Example
e.g. for , filenames => %P i.e. all diagram pages for the project
with the name XYZ are labelled:
XYZ.0000...XYZ.9999
e.g. for , filenames => %Ptermch
i.e. all the pages of the terminal diagram of the project with the name XYZ are labelled:
XYZk.0000...XYZk.9999
42

Project settings
Your PM can be configured using the PM menu option Tools / Settings.
Project Manager
• By using Restore project representation, the PM is opened in the state in
which it was left. However, note that a large number of open projects can slow
the system down, particularly when these projects are stored on network drives.
• When Modifications... , an entry in which the current user can be selected or
entered is only activated before starting the program after a user has been
entered.
• When inserting pages, New Page Numbers monitors the respective project
directory to see whether filenames exist and what those filenames are. If you
want to save new diagram pages but files with identical names already exist in the
project directory, then the project extension is set to the free page number. E.g.
Controller.0001 and Controller.0002 already exist, so the next file will be named
Controller.0003 .
• If the option Automatically open newly created projects is activated, then a
new project will be opened immediately after it has been created.
• You can select whether the evaluations (terminal diagram and material list etc.)
should be carried out in a file or on the printer.
• With the Configuring the content information option, the information comes
from the variables on the diagram pages (such as procedure versions, but
requires old equations) or if this option is not activated, from the PM. You
define how the contents information produced is organised in the box. Here, it is
possible to select different modes.
43

WSCAD 51
44
• Texts in part-projects enables the comments which can be freely defined to be
fitted to the individual part-projects in CPP mode.
In the PM, you will see your replacement text instead of the word Text1.
• The option 'Set revision'... has the effect of making the revision level the same
for all pages of the project. The number of change levels affects the
presentation of the change level data on the diagrams and lists. For example,
these can display only 3 change levels (even though a maximum of 15 can be
administered).

Opening a project
Project Manager
In order to open the project, first start the PM, search for the relevant project on the
left in the directory tree and click on the project name with the right mouse button and
a context menu will open; select the menu option Open. Alternatively, you can also use
the main menu of the PM (Project / Open) instead of the context menu.
In this case, opening is in the form of activation since only projects which are open
can be sensibly edited. Open files which do not belong to the project which is
currently open are identified as external and should only be used for observation or
for copying symbols or drawing areas.
The status of the project is indicated in the top window line in the PM. Here you can also
check the name of the project currently open. After creating a project, this will be
opened automatically depending on the general settings which have been configured.
45

WSCAD 51
Copying a project
In order to copy an existing project, it is only necessary to click on the project name to
be copied with the right mouse button and select the option Copy in the context menu.
At the bottom in the PM window, you will see a description of the project which has been
copied along with the clipboard.
Now click with the right mouse button and select Paste from the context menu (mouse
menu).
This starts the dialog Include existing project.
46

Project Manager
Now here you can specify the new project name while all other settings templates and
CPP yes/no are copied from the project and transferred to the clipboard. All files, lists
and all project information are transferred at the same time. The new (copied) project
copy_of_project appears in the project list.
47

WSCAD 51
Deleting a project or files
You can delete any project which is not open or individual files in the PM by marking
the relevant item using the right mouse button and then selecting the Delete command
from the context menu. Alternatively, you can always use the main menu (Edit /
Delete) instead of the context menu. You can then choose whether just the project
entry in the manager or all the files, all the diagram pages, lists and databases and
all subdirectories (including contents) in the working directory should be deleted.
48
Very dangerously, if you selected a directory as working directory,
contains other data than WSCAD data
By ticking the option Deleted files to the recycle bin, the deleted files are stored in the
Windows recycle bin. This setting can be made under Parameters / General / File.

Closing a project
Project Manager
In order to close the project, mark it using the left mouse button and select the option
Project / Close in the PM menu. Or click with the right mouse button and select Close
from the context menu.
49

WSCAD 51
Integrate a project
With this function you can integrate existing projects into the PM in a similar way to the
Import function. The essential difference is that the program only refers to an already
existing project directory containing WSCAD files. The existing project remains initially
unaltered. Files are neither moved, copied nor replaced, nor is a Zip file used. If the
drive in question is a CD-Rom or a Ram disk, WSCAD will offer to copy all the files into
the displayed project directory (a project cannot be edited on a CD-Rom). If the files
come from a CD-Rom, the write-protection is removed from the files. Start by using the
menu item 'Project– Integrate'. Then the dialog 'Integrate existing project' opens.
Enter your new project name and use Search to select the existing project directory
containing the file you want to associate.
Click on 'OK' two times to associate the project into your project structure as an
autonomous project. All the features, files and lists are integrated. Even WSCAD 4.x
projects can be included.
50

Project Manager
You have to confirm a dialog , about updating the project information and also the hint
how to recreate a CPP project. Select Yes.
51

WSCAD 51
Hint
52
In the case of older projects that were created with V4.0 or older,
not all features can be automatically integrated. For example, you
will need to amend the file data in the lists, because the various file
types were not yet available in the drawing format. You can also
amend them directly via the Project manager.

Inserting external files
Project Manager
When a project is open, you can also insert files to the current project that do not belong
to the project (i.e. external files). These files must of course be in WSCAD format. With
the cursor activate the folder Schematics; this makes the menu item 'Edit – Insert
external files' active.
When this is activated, the File selection dialog with preview dialog opens up. This
searches all the drives on the PC for WSCAD files and displays them in a list:
When you select a WSCAD file in one of the directories, you can see a preview of the file
and can insert specific files by clicking on OK. This opens up the standard Windows
dialog with the file name preset and showing the next free page number (this can be set
optionally in the project settings under Preset sheet numbers when inserting
pages).
53

WSCAD 51
Note
54
If contactors /contacts are inserted, automatic functions such as
the contactor manager take control.

Printing a project
Project Manager
In the PM, you can only print out open projects. Select Project / Print in the menu in
order to activate the printing process. A selection dialog will open which lists all the
available diagram types. In this dialog, you can decide which file types should be output.
See also
Selective printing
Here you can also select the print order in CPP Projects. After clicking on the Start
button, a list is produced of the files which are actually being printed out.
55

WSCAD 51
The files being printed out can be determined according to date and selection with the
button Limit to>>. Only those files will then be printed out which match the date which
you have set in the selection filter. You can select either before, on or after a date or
according to a time period, e.g. after 1.01.2000 and before 1.04.2000. Or only
selected file types or files are included or excluded.
The dialog only shows the files which can be printed out, for the purpose of checking.
56

Project Manager
After clicking on the OK button, the Print output dialog starts. You can use this to start
printing and, if necessary, configure any setting on your printer driver.
57

WSCAD 51
Selective printing
If you only wish to print out certain files, then you must make the selection beforehand
in the Project Manager dialog.
A few selection variants
These variants apply to all other file types as well as copying functions etc. In order to
select several files, hold down the key and click on the relevant files with the left
mouse button.
In order to mark ranges, hold down the key and click on the lowest of the
diagram pages to be marked. All the diagram pages above and up to the selection which
has already made will be marked at the same time.
58

Project Manager
Once you have marked the files you want, select Project / Print from the menu or click
on the appropriate button in the dialog. A list is produced of the files actually being
printed out. Start the output with OK.
59

WSCAD 51
60

Convert
Graphic
Project Manager
You are only able to print out opened projects. Choose the menuitem Project / Export
/ Graphic then you'll get a Selection dialogue where you see all existing schematics
and listings.
Select the relevant files an press OK.
61

WSCAD 51
The files being printed out as a graphic can be determined according to date and
selection with the button Limit to>>. Only those files will then be printed out which
match the date which you have set in the selection filter. You can select either before,
on or after a date or according to a time period, e.g. after 1.01.2000 and before
1.04.2000. Or only selected file types or files are included or excluded. Then press
OK.
Select now the graphic format. After pressing OK each file will be saved as an graphic
file.
62

DWG-DXF
Project Manager
Choose Project / Export / DWG-DXF to create DWG or DXF files from the schematics
and listings. You'll get a Selection dialogue where you see all existing schematics and
listings.
Select the relevant files an press OK.
63

WSCAD 51
The files being converted as a DWG/DXF-file can be determined according to date and
selection with the button Limit to>>. Only those files will then be printed out which
match the date which you have set in the selection filter. You can select either before,
on or after a date or according to a time period, e.g. after 1.01.2000 and before
1.04.2000. Or only selected file types or files are included or excluded. Then press
OK.
Select now the output format. After pressing OK each file will be saved as an DWG or
DXF file.
64

Save in WSCAD 5.0 file format
Project Manager
This function is used to start the output of the complete project or a file (depending on
whether you invoke the command from the main menu or from the project manager
menu) in the format of the previous version WSCAD 5.0 .
All new extensions are converted so that the files are readable in the old format. Of
course, some of the functions of WSCAD 5 will no longer be available.
Pages above 999 will be ignored
In the main menu file, the command for outputting to WSCAD 5.0 file format is also
available, but only the current file is converted.
65

WSCAD 51
Password protection
In order to protect projects from unauthorized access, you can protect your files with a
password. This ensures that projects can only be opened after a password has been
entered.
To apply a password, open a project in the PM and select the menu option Projects -
Password. You are now prompted to enter a password and then re-enter it to confirm.
Note
66
The password protection is now active for the project and will be
prompted for whenever the project is opened. However you can
still load and edit individual files from the protected project. The
files themselves are not write-protected.
You can deactivate the password protection by calling up the menu item 'Project –
Password' for the protected and open project and accepting the inputs 'New
Password' and 'Confirm password' each time without entering anything and finishing
with .
If you have forgotten your password, please ring our Hotline +49 8131-3627-99.

User
Project Manager
In larger companies or at workstations where several users may be using the program,
the 'User' function allows you to identify which project belongs to which user.
Hint
You can also display the projects in the Project manager, sorted by
username
When you confirm the menu item 'Project – User', this opens up the dialog 'Input:
Username'. Here you can input new usernames; use 'OK' to confirm. Individual
usernames can be deleted from the list with 'Delete'.
You can choose whether to work with the Username manager by setting the option in the
Project manager.
When the option is set, you must always specify a username (or select from the list)
when starting up WSCAD 5.
Hint
The selected person will also be identified as project editor for new
projects and when editing different revision histories of a project.
67

WSCAD 51
Project information
Editing fields in the Project Manager
The fields in the right-hand window of the Project manager contain the description of
the project. These fields can be filled in or edited and their contents can be
transferred into forms and lists by means of text allocators. If you click once on a
field and begin the input via the keyboard, you will overwrite the old texts. Start with
to complement the existing text. The project information in the right
hand working window of the PM is used to describe the project. This project
information can be edited. Click once on a field and start inputting using the keyboard,
then write over the old texts and use to supplement the existing text.
If you double click the field, this also puts the field into input mode, but the old text
remains. Press the key and the current field is closed (together with the
alterations) and the active input field jumps to the next line down. To cancel the action
or discard the changes, press the key.
68

Arranging project information
Project Manager
The project information in the PM can be rearranged or can be included or excluded.
In this way, your projects will only be shown with the information which is really
important for you. Using the right mouse button, click on the field which is to be moved
into position in order to move project-information fields into the list position. In the
context menu which appears, select Cut. Move the mouse pointer to the position to
which the field is to be moved. Click again with the right mouse button and now select
the desired field from the context menu using Paste. The field will now move to the new
position.
69

WSCAD 51
Project information with special functions
The general default setting is implemented in the configuration under Parameters /
General / Directories by the setting for the project list. New projects are normally
created in a subdirectory of the path entered there.
Customer or customer number
Double click on the Customer or Customer number field and it will branch automatically
into the customer database.
Editor
Opens an entry box from which a choice can also be made from the editors already
entered.
Working directory
The working directory can be selected via the file dialog by double clicking on the working
directory field. However, this procedure should only be used with care in case you have
moved a project using an external program (such as Windows Explorer) and now have to
move the working directory saved in the PM.
Project mode
Click on the Project mode field and then a list field will open. This is where the settings
Standard and CPP UFD are located.
CPP mode is not available in the Standard setting. The CPP UFD setting allows the
allocation of system and location designations. Sorting is according to system.
Hint
70
Normally, the mode of the project is already set when re-creating
the project.
Date
After double clicking in the Date field, a calendar opens in which you can set the date.
This value is then saved in the Date field. This field is saved by means of a wild card,
e.g. in the drawing frame.
External configuration

Project Manager
Each project can have its own configuration file which is located in the relevant
project directory. (WS_PRJ50.ini). With this field, you can provide a project with its
own configuration file subsequently or delete an existing one. You can also refer to a
WS_PRJ50.ini file located in another project directory (external). If you do not use
project-specific configuration files, the settings in the WS_PRJ50.ini file in the
WSCAD50 folder in the CFG system directory will be used instead. This is also where the
WS_WIN50.ini file is located.
Standard
Standard is used to change the standard format used. This setting controls access to the
libraries used.
71

WSCAD 51
Additional project information
If you need you can add additional fields to the Project manager. You must open the
Project manager database PRJVERW.MDB using MS Access, and you can add
additional fields (only to the existing table).
For this additional fields text allocators are also available, which you can add to your
drawing frame of the graphic forms (project data).
72

Project Export Import Backup and Restore
Backup and restore
Project Manager
The operation of these functions corresponds to that of the Export and Import function
(please look up the operation under these topics) but Backup and Restore functions are
only used on open projects. This should make the user aware of which activity he really
wants to carry out.
The difference between Restore and Import is that a new project is not created. With
Restore, the zip file is merely extracted into the current project directory and the
open project is overwritten. Note here that the existing files are moved to the backup
directory WSPRJBAK .
73

WSCAD 51
Export
One useful feature is the direct link to a file-compression program. You can save the
complete project from the PM as a zip file, which is compatible with WinZip®. The
filename of the export file can be anything you like and is normally saved in the
project path. The export file also backs up forms, comb library and cable/plug text
files. You can use this file to make your project files available to WSCAD Support.
Single project export
In order to do this, mark the relevant project by clicking on it with the left mouse button
and select the option Export from the PM Project menu.
The Windows standard dialog opens for saving a file and suggests a directory and
name for the zip file. The suggested name is always made up of the project
designation plus the current date. The Linked Graphic subfolder is always saved in
the zip archive at the same time.
74

Project Manager
Click on the save button and then the Compress / Extract dialog will appear. In this
dialog, you will see a list of all the compressed files which have been included in the zip
file. This dialog is closed by clicking on the OK button. The zip file is now located in the
selected directory.
multi project export
If make a multiple selection of projects an then you choose Project / Export then
you've got a message box which count the selected projects and you have to decide that
the Zip File's are created in one directory or several directories.
75

WSCAD 51
76

Import
Project Manager
The Import function is the reverse of the Export function. For this, execute the menu
option Project / Import.
This opens the dialogue Include existing project. There, specify your new project
name. Via the Search button, you can select an existing working directory in which to
import the files.
77

WSCAD 51
After clicking on OK, the file dialog opens. There, select a zip file (backup or exported
project).
An additional instruction dialog starts:
78

Project Manager
Confirm this with Yes and then all previously existing files are moved into the backup
directory WSPRJBAK. The zipped files are extracted and copied into the project
directory. The Compress / Extract dialog becomes active and is closed after
confirming with the OK button.
When you import a project with Project database, then you can decide here whether
you want to use it or not. This enables you to take over the original item files of the
project generator.
79

WSCAD 51
80

File functions
Creating a file
Project Manager
With the PM, a single file or several files at once can be created in each open project
by marking the relevant file type (folder) by clicking using the right mouse button and
then selecting the Create (for file type diagram) command or Generate (for file type
lists) from the context menu.
Then determine the number of pages to be created simultaneously (for file type
diagram).
The filename dialog starts, enter the filenames there with the start value of the new
file(s).
81

WSCAD 51
The files are created using the drawing frame created in the template for this project
and the PM is closed. Enter the PM again and select the new file in the project tree,
then you will see the properties for this file on the right. The Filename, File content
and Comment 1..2 fields can be used during the evaluation via wildcards e.g. in the
contents entry.
82

Creating (circuit diagram) subpages
Project Manager
If you have to document extensions or changes etc. without changing existing drawings,
then use the WSCAD 5 function of the circuit-diagram subpages. The subpages are
generated on the relevant circuit-diagram page directly in the PM.
Select Create and a previously populated page-creation dialog opens.
The current page number (1000) can be extended with characters (a-z) on 2 levels
where Level 1 must be filled and Level 2 can be filled.
83

WSCAD 51
The circuit diagram subpages in the PM are sorted alphabetically.
Further subpages can be created for circuit diagram subpages in exactly the same way
by marking the circuit-diagram subpage, choosing the relevant subpage and then
selecting Create in the context menu. You will then see the complete filename
displayed again which you confirm by clicking on the OK button.
84

Opening files
Project Manager
When you mark a diagram page, you will see the data for the diagram in the right
hand window of the PM at the top and the relevant content in the Preview underneath.
You can open the diagrams by double clicking on the filenames. The PM menu option
Edit / Open leads to the same result.
The PM closes when the file opens. If no project is open, then the project which
belongs to the diagram page opens after double clicking with the mouse.
Caution
If diagram pages are open which do not belong to the current
project, then these will be opened as external files. In this case,
any alterations are not monitored by the automatic functions.
85

WSCAD 51
Deleting files (diagrams of lists) using the PM
The project for which you wish to create circuit diagrams, terminal diagrams,
wiring diagrams or cabinet plans etc. using the PM must be in the open status
(activated). Now use the right mouse button to select the relevant folder for which you
wish to create or generate new or further diagrams or lists.
Deleting files
Also use the right mouse button for deletion. Move the cursor to the relevant file in the
open project and then click with the right mouse button and select Delete in the
context menu.
86

Selecting several files
Project Manager
Mark the desired diagram pages of any particular project by holding down the
key and clicking on the relevant files with the left mouse button.
In order to mark a range, hold down the key and click on the lowest of the
diagram pages to be marked. All diagram pages above and up to the selection already
made will be marked at the same time.
Unlike Windows Explorer, this procedure can be used many times over in order to select
several ranges with the greatest of ease. Now click on the marked range with the right
mouse button and, in the context menu which now opens, select Copy.
87

WSCAD 51
Copying files
Mark the file and select the PM menu option Edit / Copy file.
In the following standard dialog, you can enter the filename and with the file
extension (.0001, .0002, usw.) the first page number for the new files. You can also
enter another target directory for the copied files. Circuit diagram (main) pages
are created in the case of circuit diagram subpages.
Use Open to open a display where you can decide on the number of copies. By selecting
the number here, the corresponding copies are created in the selected folder.
88

Project Manager
89

WSCAD 51
Changing a file type
Mark the file WSCAD example_project 2.0011 and select the PM menu option Edit /
Change file type.
A dialog then opens in which you can allocate a file type to the selected file from the
available file types. This file type is saved with OK.
Important
90
You should only do this in exceptional cases since changing the file
type also affects the presentation of the files in the folder as well
as changing the properties of the files in general.

Changing filenames
Project Manager
If you wish to change the filenames, then you can change one or more filenames here.
Method 1
In order to do so, mark the filename(s) and select the menu option Edit / Rename.
Enter the new filename in the File specification entry dialog.
After confirming with the OK button, the dialog closes and the marked files are renamed.
‘*’ and ‘?’ can also be used. For example, you can use them to correct a typing error
e.g. if bintroller ventilation is renamed with co*, only the first two characters will be
changed.
Caution
If the new filename no longer correspond to the specifications in
the PM, these files will be filtered out of the folder view.
Method 2
If you wish to rename all the filenames within a folder, under certain circumstances, this
can be a very large number of files. For this reason, click directly on the folder (e.g.
91

WSCAD 51
diagram pages) and change the default filenames under the project information. Pay
attention to the PM display at bottom left in regard to the number of marked files.
Example
After making the entry, all filenames are renamed when you confirm the prompt with
Yes.
92

Moving the page number of the file
Project Manager
You can move the file extension (*.0002 corresponds to the current page number) of
files within the PM by marking the file(s) and selecting the PM menu option Edit /
Move.
Enter the offset in the entry dialog by which the selected pages should be increased. You
can also mark and offset several pages and shift the numbers in the opposite direction
by using a negative offset. In this way, page numbers which become free can be used
again. If you enter a “-5” minus sign as the offset, then the file will move forwards.
The function will notice that this file number already exists and will cancel the process.
However, if you enter the value 5 in the offset dialog for example, then Page 1 will
become Page 6:
93

WSCAD 51
Result
94

Project Manager
Linking project files to WSCAD files with “NOT”
If you require secondary documentation of if you want to link your layouts to pictures,
then the “Link” function of WSCAD 5 is the tool which is used for this purpose. It is
simple to use. In the link field, any file can be allocated to each drawing using the path
and filename (via a double click and Search for file, in this case, Layout.001 and a Word
file).
The respective file appears in the Preview window when you double click on the field
name Link or click on the Show link command in the menu view and can even be
edited (e.g. Word, but of course not with all Word functions).
The program which can be used to generate or edit the linked file type must be installed
on the computer system (in this case, for example, Word). One special feature in this
case is the ability to enter an internet address (such as www.WSCAD.com).
95

WSCAD 51
96

Copying and pasting files
Copying and pasting a file
Project Manager
In order to copy an existing file of whatever type, it is only necessary to click on the file
to be copied with the right mouse button and select the option Copy from the Context
menu. This file may also be located in a project which is not open. (Check in the
bottom display of the clipboard to see which file has been selected for copying).
Now switch to your open target project and select the folder into which the file is to be
copied. The project which is to receive the file must be open. Now click with the
right mouse button and select Paste from the context menu.
97

WSCAD 51
98

Copying one file
Project Manager
If you are only copying one file, then all the automatic management actions up to
automatic numbering are executed depending on the configuration level
(professional or compact) and parameter settings in the open (target) project.
Keyword Cable manager, Protection manager, PLC manager and Plug manager.
The file dialog opens with the preview and offers the default filename for the folder with
the next available page number.
Save this name with Open and the file will be saved in the file circuit.
Each manager (Cable, Plug, Protection and PLC) starts up and reads the reference
name of the component from the copied diagram and attempts to adjust the respective
database accordingly. See below the examples on the left which are the reference
names of the components which are currently available on the diagram and on the right
99

WSCAD 51
the corrected reference names for these components which have consequently been resaved
in the managers.
Cable manager
Above you see the content of cables in this sheet. Insert a new Reference Name and
select the target cable which receive the new Reference Name by a double click.
Plug manager
100

Project Manager
Here you see the content of connectors in this sheet. Insert a new Reference Name and
select the target connector which receive the new Reference Name by a double click.
Contactor manager
A new reference name for each coil or contact is created and it's saved in the
Contactor manager.
Here you can correct the assignment.
101

WSCAD 51
102

Copying several files
Project Manager
When copying several files (by holding down the key and clicking on the files) the
automatic management actions are suppressed and will have to be restarted manually
later on. The difference between this procedure and the procedure involving single files is
the message that the automatic management actions for this procedure have been
disabled.
Once you have confirmed this, the file dialog starts as before in order to define the first
filename. The subsequent filenames are then automatically increased by 1. During the
copying process, the reference names of the symbols on the existing diagram pages are
compared with those which are being copied. If a reference name already exists, then
the default value 0 is added to the reference name being copied.
Example
–K1 is changed to –K1/1
and
–1K1 is changed to –1K1/1
Then renumber again in order to correct the changed reference name again.
The following applies here also
All of the necessary generation functions are executed in order to
obtain a functioning project.
Example
You have copied several pages with cables and are working with the Cable manager:
you can manually adjust the reference names which are now added or re-issue them
via the automatic numbering system. After this, the Cable manager can be reactivated.
The cable database is updated with the Read diagram command.
103

WSCAD 51
Updating the Contactor- PLC manager
These functions must always be executed whenever you add or remove several files
and/or drawing macros (which contain coils, contacts or PLC modules or cables) to or
from existing drawings in projects.
This has to be carried out for CPP projects in particular. Because all automatic functions
were switched off when copying several files, the PLC manager and the Contactor
manager must be activated and executed (General parameters / Tab / Contactor
and PLC).
For this, start the command:
104
Automatic / Contactor manager / New project file
Automatic / PLC/ Create new PLC manager file
Automatic / Cable manager
Automatic / Plug manager

Project view
Switch between floorplan and schematics
Project Manager
In each case, switch over to the other program under the menu option View / Partner
program PM and the Project Manager (PM) of the relevant program will open. In this
way, you can very quickly switch between Circuit diagram and Edit installation
diagram.
105

WSCAD 51
106

Preview
Project Manager
The preview (activated or deactivated by clicking) allows you to display the files
graphically, once these have been highlighted in the left-hand project window.
107

WSCAD 51
Option Projects
Under 'View – Projects' there are three options which can help you to navigate around
the Project manager.
Within the project tree, the 'Currently open' option jumps to the project that is
currently open. This can be a great help when there are many open projects and folders,
each containing a large number of files.
With the command 'Close all folders' all the detailed project information are hidden and
only the project folders with their names are listed.
The command 'Restore' restores all the projects to the state they were in before you
last left the Project manager.
108

Option Sorting
Project Manager
Sorting allows you to list projects in a specific way. You can sort either by project name
(Standard) or by other project data. The project data are located in the Project
manager on the right-hand side.
Example:
In the illustration below the 'Drawn by' field is highlighted.
For the purposes of selecting the project data it does not matter which project you are in
at the moment.
Highlight the field 'Drawn by' in the project data and select the menu item 'View –
Sorting – Selection'. The project directory will then be sorted by 'Drawn by'. Similarly
you can also determine whether alphabetical sorting is done ascending or descending.
Now you can see that all the identified editors are given their own group containing their
respective projects.
109

WSCAD 51
Further possible selections are sorting by (e.g.) >> Drawn by

Project Manager
111

WSCAD 51
Projects and Folders (file types)
General
Each project has a standard number of folders. These can be included or excluded in
any way you choose and also positioned in the sequence.
Each folder reflects a file type which is identified by specific functionalities and properties.
While creating the relevant diagram pages or drawings via the PM, the correct file types
for the new element are configured automatically. This is essential for automatic
evaluation later on. For this reason, the PM must always be used for creating new
drawings and diagrams etc. The names of the folders are almost unambiguous and in
most cases, it is not necessary to explain to the specialist in detail what they mean.
On the other hand, free graphics and others are special folders. These folders are
required for supplementary documentation. The free graphics allows WSCAD drawings to
be created with any content desired which will not be used for the evaluation. Others are
files of any type (not WSCAD) which, in spite of this, can be displayed in the Preview of
the PM window. The Installation diagram allows diagrams to be created which
document the position of the field equipment within a layout (e.g. building).
112

Hide folders or projects
Project Manager
Within the Project manager the folders or projects can be filtered in or out as
required. If for example you want to filter out the folder Cable list, select the folder and
click on ‘'View - Hide folder’. The folders list is amended accordingly.
Hide several projects at one time
Keep the Ctrl Button pressed and select the project entries with a mouse click. Then
you have to choose View / Hide Folder.
113

WSCAD 51
To make the folders and projects visible again choose View / Show Folder. You get
an extended menu where you see the invisible folders and a project menuitem to start
a listing of all projects which are invisible. Another option is to select the menu
command ‘View – Show folder – All’. This command reveals all hidden folders of the
project.
If you select Projects.. then you will see the listing. Here you select the project (or
multi selection) and confirm OK then the project will be visible again.
114

Showing folders
Project Manager
When you click on the plus sign + in front of a project name, the project opens up.
Here, you will now see the folders (Cover sheet and change level etc.) and may
contain several files of identical name and type (e.g. diagram.0001-diagram.9999). You
will not see plus signs on the folders when there are no files of the respective name
and type present in the project directory.
Hint
When opening a project folder, the structure of the relevant project
is analysed on the hard disk. This process may take a moment,
depending on the number of files and on whether it is a network
drive which is being accessed.
115

WSCAD 51
Changing the sequence of folders and CPP partprojects
The sequence of the folders within a project (or even part-project) is standardized but
can be easily changed using drag & drop by clicking on the folder concerned with the
left mouse button, holding the button down and moving the folder to the desired position
where it is then pasted.
In this way, it is also possible to change the sequence of the individual part-projects
within a KTP project.
Hint
116
This also controls the sequence when printing out the entire
project / part-project.

All folders
Project Manager
With the aid of this option the folders list in the project tree is reduced to show only
those folders where files are actually present.
117

WSCAD 51
Creating folders
You can define other folders in order to generate a second material list with a separate
form. This feature is only available in the Professional version. This and other features
also mean that each project which is clicked on in the PM must be supplemented with
fields which relate to the PRJDATA.MDB database.
In general, this becomes visible with Project / New where the additional fields which
may be available come after the fixed fields when the template is allocated. It is also
possible to enter a form if additional material lists are required, for example.
118

Project Manager
With a project which has already been created under View / Additional areas, the
entry is made via a special dialog, but with a new project, it is made within the Project /
New dialog. There, it is possible to define a maximum of 5 folders by giving the name
of the folder e.g. Parts list while selecting the list type e.g. Material list at the same
time. You must then define the file type.
With the folder, these entries cause these defaults to appear also. With a project which
has already been created, the entry must be made afterwards for the form and
filename evaluations, even in existing part-projects. It is better to specify this with
Project / New since the entries always relate to the whole project and therefore
equally to all part-projects created afterwards. The menu option Invoke for additional
extensions is View / Additional areas.
119

WSCAD 51
Project customer database, manufacturer,
construction site and architect
Customer, manufacturer, construction site and
architect database
The procedures and functionalities described in this section apply equally to the
construction site and architect fields each with their own databases. The
manufacturer fields are addressed via the customer database.
A PRJKND.MDB customer database in ACCESS format stores the specific customer
data for repeated use in new projects. The menu is invoked via the open PM under Tools
/ Customer file, a list of customers in the form of a table opens up with all the
customers recorded. This database can be extended by separate fields using ACCESS.
120

Database assignment
Project Manager
The procedures and functionalities described in this section apply equally to the
construction site and architect fields each with their own databases. The
manufacturer fields are addressed via the customer database. The transfer of data
from additional databases (customer, construction site and architect) into the project
database can be configured, either via PM menu option Tools / Database fields, or
via the right mouse button in the project fields.
An assignment dialogue appears for configuring the project database fields with the
additional databases. Populated fields in bold indicate the assignments specified by the
program. Every other field can be linked by double-clicking on the fields of the respective
additional database.
121

WSCAD 51
Creating a Customer, manufacturer, construction
site and architect record
The procedures and functionalities described in this section apply equally to the
construction site and architect fields each with their own databases. The
manufacturer fields are addressed via the customer database. To create a new
customer, click on the New button and another line will be created in which you can
edit the customer data. The individual pieces of customer data can also be edited
directly by double clicking or clicking once on the field and using the keyboard to edit the
entry. With , the entry moves one field on and with the key the entry
is cancelled. With the Save button, you can transfer the customer data from the
customer file to the currently marked project in the PM.
122

Project Manager
Saving customer, manufacturer, construction-site
and architect information
The procedures and functionalities described in this section apply equally to the
construction site and architect fields each with their own databases. The
manufacturer fields are addressed via the customer database.
Information which has been amended in the customer-specific project information can
be returned to the customer database. Double click on the customer or manufacturer
field in the project information and the automatic monitoring system will recognise
whether the customer is already present in the database. A transfer confirmation is
invoked which carries out the data transfer with Yes (useful for importing new projects
etc.).
Extending the customer database
Several identical customer entries are accepted which differ in the department or
contact field.
123

WSCAD 51
Assigning Creating a Customer, manufacturer,
construction site and architect data
You can save customer data to the current project from the customer manager. Mark
the project name in the left project manager window. Then enter one of the project
information fields, customer or customer number, by double clicking and then the
customer database will open. Select the record that you wish to assign by clicking on
the default number of the record. Then click on the Save button of the customer file
dialog.
.
This increases the number of data fields for the customer in the Project Manager for
the desired project. Make sure that you have marked the project for which you want to
assign the customer data. This is not determined in this case by the project which is
currently open.
124

Linking the customer database to email
Project Manager
If there is a homepage or WWW field in the customer database (PRJKND.MDB), then
double clicking it will lead to the internet page; exactly the same happens with email, a
new email is generated to the address which is entered.
Tip
If you wish to enter other customer data, you can repeat the
procedure at will. The customer data can also be evaluated in the
forms, since wild cards are available for each field of the project
manager.
125

WSCAD 51
CPP Project
Creating a CPP project
When you create a new project, mark the option CPP in the dialog.
The project then automatically becomes a CPP project. Alternatively, switch into
Project information of the existing project (in this case WSCAD CPP example
project) and select the option CPP UFD (i.e. not standard) for the project settings
under project mode in the right hand window. The CPP setting should be implemented
immediately when creating the project. If you have selected the setting CPP UFD, then
the display of the project tree with the folders changes.
Example
126

Project Manager
127

WSCAD 51
Creating a part-project
In order to create a new part-project, you must first open an existing CPP project.
Click on the part-projects folder with the right mouse button and select the option
Create from the context menu.
Alternatively, you can always use the main menu (in this case Project / New partproject
) instead of the context menu. A dialog now becomes active where you can enter
the designation of the system identification. The list also shows which system
identifications have already been assigned. After clicking on the OK button, the
system identification (in this case H5) is generated as a new folder in the parent
folder Part-projects.
An alternative possibility is to select a WSCAD file via the . button. There, the
system identification is read out from the drawing frame and transferred to the dialog.
128

Project Manager
All parent folders data in this part-project are also transferred to this part-project at
the same time i.e. all part-projects, for example, have identical drawing frames with
the diagram pages as standard.
129

WSCAD 51
Creating diagram pages for a CPP part-project
The CPP project must be opened in order to create diagram pages for the partprojects.
Here, pay attention to the heading in the PM dialog. Select the diagram
pages folder in the relevant part-project by clicking with the right mouse button and
then select the Create command from the context menu.
During creation, the dialog Number of pages opens. Here, you can enter the desired
number of new pages as well as the location identification which is to be used for
these pages.
After clicking on the OK button, you can check the filenames in the file dialog again or
correct the first page number. The number can differ from .001, if pages are already
present.
130

Project Manager
The corresponding number of files is now created. The system identification, as specified
beforehand for this part-project, and the previously specified location identification are
placed simultaneously in the file at the position intended for them. At the same time,
the system and location identification (as = and + signs) must have already
been specified in the intended drawing frame. In this case, for example, 5 circuit
diagram pages for Part-project with Unit =H5 and Field +Location1.
131

WSCAD 51
Result on the circuit diagram
Using alternative drawing frames and file names
If you wish to have another drawing frame or file name for this part-project, before
you create the sheets, you only need to make the appropriate changes in the project
information fields, drawing frame and filename in the right working window of the
PM.
132

Converting a project into a CPP project
Project Manager
In order to convert a standard project into a CPP project, you must provide all circuit
diagram pages manually with a Unit and Field designation (UFD, here =
H5+Location1).
UFD= abbreviation for the Unit and Field designation within CPP mode. The UFD must be
present on each design of a CPP project. (=House1+heating corresponds to
=system+location).
Then set the project mode to CPP system/Location in the PM for this project.
133

WSCAD 51
Including diagram pages in a CPP part-project
In order to insert existing diagram pages (with a separate identification) of a project into
a CPP project as a new part-project, first create a new part-project as described
before. Then copy the files into the part-project.
Defining a part-project system
After you have copied the files into the system memory, switch to the relevant folder of
the part-project created in the open CPP project. Click on the folder with the right
mouse button and select Paste e.g. Circuit diagram folder. With several files, the same
procedure is repeated, insert as with conventional files, i.e. the automatic actions are
suppressed and an information dialog also offers the possibility of aborting the
procedure. A dialog is now offered to you which transfers the filenames from the
information for this part-project. The files which have been copied are now given the
specified name.
E.g. the files which are to be copied are now given the name =Heating_House1.001
(beginning with the first free number).
134

Re-build a CPP project
Project Manager
In order to reorganise a project, the Re-build command from the PM must be invoked.
The UFD found on the circuit diagram are saved in the project and the folder for each
part-project re-created. This command is only active when you have marked the
identification of the open CPP project.
135

WSCAD 51
UFD manager
In the PM menu, a dialog appears under Tools / UFD manager with a display of all the
Unit designation and Field designation being used. All of the pages of the project are
searched and the information collected for this purpose. The individual Unit and Field
Designation for the entire project can be changed by using the Change button. All
diagram pages are updated.
Mark the identification symbol (here, Field Designation OG1) to be changed, click on
the Modify button and enter the new Field Designation in the text entry line.
You see in the Edit-Field al modified UFD's.
136

Project Manager
After clicking on the OK button, the Field Designation (referring to System ) is replaced
on all diagram pages.
137

WSCAD 51
Automated listings
Project evaluations, the advantages
Instead of invoking the individual commands from the menu-command group Automatic
in the WSCAD main menu, it is possible to start generating automatic evaluations
(Terminal diagram, Material list and Cable diagram etc.) directly in the Project
Manager.
This has a number of advantages
The dialog for selecting the graphics form is no longer necessary since the form is
already fixed.
It is possible to specify beforehand whether the output should be to a WSCAD file or to
the printer.
When outputting to a WSCAD file, the standard dialog for determining the filename is
no longer necessary since this has already been determined.
When invoked for the first time, the relevant dialog for determining the evaluation
parameters (such as Terminal diagram: sorted or unsorted, Material list:
separately or collectively) appears for each output. When working with a projectspecific
configuration, the evaluation parameters are already known when an evaluation
is repeatedly invoked, so these dialogs are also no longer necessary.
Hint
138
If you wish to output your evaluations in a special file format (such
as ACCESS or EXCEL) or still want to influence the evaluation
parameters of an output list later, you must work with the menu
commands of the automatic group.

Automated listing
This function only applies within an open project.
Project Manager
The total evaluation should enable the user to have all the default lists (Cover sheet,
Contents, Change lists, Cable lists, Cable diagrams, Plug diagrams, Terminal
diagrams, Connection lists and Material lists etc.) generated automatically without
ever first having to start the command for creating the relevant list manually.
The lists are generated with the names used for saving them in the Project
specifications. Select the PM menu option Tools / Automated listing. A dialog opens in
which you can select all the evaluations you desire.
Start the process by clicking on the Start button.
Hint
Deactivate the option for the type of evaluation which you do not
want to execute. The sequence in which the lists are shown here
and therefore printed out, for example, can be configured
beforehand by dragging-and-dropping the folder in the project
tree.
Additional options
• The option Output into part-projects in each case (only possible with KTP
projects) implies that the automatic evaluation only processes the individual part-
139

WSCAD 51
140
projects one after the other. Therefore, prepare all lists, entered for each partproject
but, for example, not a total material list.
• A project database can also be created with all of the items used in the project
by activating the option create project database.
• The option, Place text for contents information in lists
automatically has the effect of creating the described text file content
automatically for all lists prepared, e.g. Terminal diagram X1, X2. This ensures
that the text File content is entered for all files in the contents information.
• The option, Place text for contents information in lists
automatically has the effect of creating the described text file content
automatically for all lists prepared, e.g. Terminal diagram X1, X2. This ensures
that the text File content is entered for all files in the contents information.
Caution
only possible when working with a project-specific configuration.
Example Supplying the file WSCAD Example project 2.0001 with file content
Dazu die Auswertung des Dateiinhalts in der Inhaltsangabe.

Tipp
Möchten Sie die Auswerteparameter nur einer Ausgabeliste (z.B.
Materialliste: einzeln oder zusammengefasst) nachträglich noch
einmal ändern, so können Sie auch die Ausgabeliste direkt mit dem
entsprechenden Menübefehl der Automatik Gruppe erzeugen.
Project Manager
141

WSCAD 51
Separate listing
This function only applies within an open project.
To start a listing, click on a folder (e.g. Terminal diagram) with the right mouse button
and select the command Automated list
from the menu that appears next.
You will therefore start the creation of the terminal diagram, equivalent to main menu
command Automatic / Terminal diagram.
142

Page number default for generated files
Project Manager
When you have clicked on a folder and then set the default in the filename field e.g.
Terminal_diagram.1000 in the PM in the right hand window, then the pages which are
generated are named terminal diagram starting with the page number 1000.
143

WSCAD 51
Text allocator 'Project Page'
The text allocator Project Page seq. and Project Page total within the design
framework permit counting functions to the sequential and the total numbers of project
pages.
If both text allocator within the frame were positioned, you can start then with the
project management menu extra/ Text allocator ' Project page '/ create the
procedure.
The total number depends on the pages found in the project with or without existing
text allocator.
The sequential page number depends on the position of the side in the current project.
The arrangement of the folders is considered thereby. If you change the folder sequence,
then a generation process must be accomplished again.
The sequential page number is indicated in the project management.
In the summary the current page number can be indicated likewise by a text allocator
symbol.
144

Revision level
Starting the revision level
Project Manager
A new revision level can only be created once the project has been completed. You
can start a new revision level for the currently open and completed project in the PM
menu under Extras / revision level. After a prompt to save it, you can, if this has not
already happened, save the entire project (as a compressed zip file, this process is
skipped with Cancel).
A change entry is then generated in the PM and the status of the project changed
Example
1.revision level = Completed on 09062005
Status = In progress
145

WSCAD 51
146

Closing the revision level
Project Manager
The status closed can be assigned to the current open project using the PM menu Extras
(means: finished for the time being).
Activate the menu option, then the entry dialog appears in which you will have to enter a
meaningful designation for the project status to be completed. We suggest using the
current date set in the date format under Parameters / General / Miscellaneous.
A good variant is to name the first conclusion Initial setup and simply add characters
(A and B) or numbers for subsequent change levels.
Caution
Pay attention to the information dialog which appears between
each step. When assigning the identification, bear in mind the
limited space in the drawing frame.
You will now be able to create a compressed file (zip) of the complete project status.
This file is saved in the project path with a combination of project name and current
date as the filename.
147

WSCAD 51
After clicking on the Save button, you will see a progress dialog which indicates the
progress of compression.
148
You have now made a backup of your final project status
All files in the project are now in their final state, i.e. they can only be edited in the
project via a revision level which has to be restarted. An indication of this is the
shortened main menu. If you have the wild cards for the revision level on the
diagrams then these will show the current status.
Hint
The files of a finished project are not provided with a write protect.
Thus, when using the Project Manager, you are not prevented from
accessing these files and carrying out changes in them.
Aligning the revision level of all diagram pages
Due to the option Project conclusion, which sets all pages to the same status, all
diagram pages of a project are assigned the identical project status and the display
within the drawing frame is adjusted. This option is located under the PM menu option
Tools / Settings.

Project Manager
149

WSCAD 51
Making changes (enabled for modifications)
If editing has been enabled again by the start of a new revision level in the current
project, then the editor must release each of the drawings which are to be changed.
When you have opened the drawing, use the main menu File / enabled for
modifications.
Then enter a comment to describe the change.
150

Project Manager
Otherwise, the operator only sees a shortened Editing menu in the main menu which
does not allow changes.
Hint
You do not have to work with revision levels. However, if you
decide to, this will activate certain rules by which you will have to
abide later.
Revision levels in the drawing frame
The wild cards in the drawing frame (normally bottom left) are also a visible reference
to revision levels. The 3 fields on the left in the following screenshot are intended for
revision levels while the area next to them on the right applies to the initial setup. In
the PM for the respective initial setup on 03.04.01, also enter completed by editor
Widmann and 2 further revision levels (B and C).
Hint
Altogether, 15 revision levels (with wild cards) can be managed in
the drawing frame. 3 revision levels are usually configured. Using
the new wild cards makes the use of a variable date superfluous.
The wild cards contained in the drawing frame are updated
automatically according to the revision levels.
Documenting changes by means of the PM project information
If information on the project is changed in the PM, then the changes must be made in
the drawing frame, such as whether the pages concerned have been released for
changes or not.
151

WSCAD 51
Releasing several files for changes immediately
Mark those files in the project which are to be released and use the Project
management menu / Set change state.
The switch AutoFileWrite=0 under the section [Config cross references] in the
WS_PRJ51.INI file prevents accidental activation of the revision level by
implementing the line cross reference for a circuit diagram page on which only the line
cross reference has been re-written and otherwise none.
152

Project Manager
153

WSCAD 51
Removing revision levels from a project (reset)
The current revision level in a project can be defined as a new base state by copying
the complete project, for example, CTRL+C and CTRL+V while assigning a new
identification, then the information appears which enables you to refuse acceptance
of the revision levels. All revision levels are therefore free again and the project is in
the state before the first completion.
154

WSCAD 4.x and 5.0 users can include entire
existing projects
Import a 4.x and 5.0 project list
Project Manager
WSCAD 4.x and 5.0 users can include entire existing projects from their old project lists (
e.g. project41.mdb) into the Project manager, in one single action. This has the same
result as if you had integrated each individual project (see command Integrate a
project). To do this, activate the menu item 'Project – Project list 4.x'; this opens the
standard Windows File Open dialog.
Look for your previous Project4x.mdb, which will normally be found in your old
installation path for WSCAD 4x in the Projects subdirectory. Select 'Open' and you will
see a Hint dialog which allows you to abort the process by selecting No.
Now you can decide to assume the customer database or not.
155

WSCAD 51
If you select Yes, the file reading will commence. A confirmatory message will show you
again which projects have been included. If you select No, the projects have been
included without copying the files.
If project directories are shown in the old project list but in fact no longer exist, these
projects are not transferred and a message dialog will inform you accordingly.
Projects with the same name are not included.
Note
156
Afterwards you must enter for every folder (Schematics, Project
data, Terminal chart ….) the file name and you must assign a
drawing frame (if you want to create new pages).

Integrate projects from WSCAD 4.x
Project Manager
In order to include individual projects, select the PM menu option Project / Integrate.
In the dialog, now specify a new project identification or search (Search key) for the
project folder directly which contains the project to be included.
Select the project folder with save, then the project identification will be saved at
the same time.
157

WSCAD 51
If this already contains identical project information, then this is updated on request or
not.
The complete information is copied with OK.
158

File
General
WSCAD 5 has the ability to display on-screen several pages at once, including pages
from different projects. The integral Project manager not only manages a list of current
projects but also, in the Professional module, can combine part-projects within a
directory into a complete new project (Combined part-projects or CPP mode).
159

WSCAD 51
New file (page)
Using the Project Manager
This menu option should only be used for creating drawing frames and/or forms. Use
the Project Manager for creating new diagram pages for a project since the default
drawing frames are also transferred here. Several diagram pages can also be created
here immediately.
After clicking on the menu option File / New, the filename dialog opens. There, you
can open or create the desired directory in which the new page is to be saved. Then
enter the new filename. The number in the file extension = page number in the set
of drawings.
Use the File preview in order to find your way about.
160

This command produces a new empty page for your set of drawings or as a new form. In
this case, the page setting from the active drawing such as grid, snap grid, size or
even file type (circuit diagram or switch cabinet etc.) are transferred.
File
161

WSCAD 51
Load file (page)
Using the Project Manager
This main menu command allows an existing file (circuit diagram pages, lists and
diagrams) to be loaded (activated). In order to do this, start the Windows standard
dialog for opening a file appropriately populated and a preview.
With the function Load file, please note that certain parameters (such as file type, snap
grid and path information etc.) are saved at the same time. If the option Include the
settings for the drawing is ticked on the General configuration tab “File”, then the
parameters which have been set for the page in question apply.
Hint
162

If a project is already open and you load a file which does not
belong to the current project, then this file will be designated
External in the title line.
This message will always appear when you wish to edit an external
file.
File
163

WSCAD 51
Close file (page)
This command closes the active working window and saves the file being edited within it.
All changes are saved along with the current date. If you have activated other
working windows, then the next working window in the window list will be activated and
displayed.
164

Page up/dn
Indicates in the dialogue all identically designated files. This files must be stored in the
same folder.
hint
Dialogue in the standard mode
Dialogue in the cpp mode
File
165

WSCAD 51
166
During page up/down the schematics are stored
Select from the dialogue the target sheet and click on OK, or you select by doubleclick.
The sheet is displayed automatically and old sheet will be secured. The sheet method is
simpler and faster by using page up/page down from keys.

Copy file (page)
This command makes it possible to copy the page of the active working window but
not when you are working with KTP mode from a part-project in another. Load the page
which you wish to copy and activate the copy command. In the entry line, you must now
enter the FIRST and LAST page number to which the active page is to be copied.
Hint
A separate file is produced for each page number, the file
extension corresponding to the page number.
If you wish to copy Page *.001 twice and attach the new pages to the end of the set of
drawings (consisting of 11 pages), then activate the Page *.001, select the copy file
command, enter the First page no. = 12 and the Last page no. = 13 in the entry field of
the status bar. Two pages *.012 and *.013 are then generated with the contents of Page
*.001.
If Page *.012 already exists, then a dialog is started in which you can decide whether the
process should be aborted or whether you would like to replace the existing file.
If the active working window does not belong to the project, a message will appear to
that effect. This prevents you from accidentally accessing a project which you have only
opened temporarily.
File
167

WSCAD 51
Move file (page)
If you are going to paste a page into an existing character set, then you can use the
command Move file (page) for this purpose. This command enables you to move one or
more pages and therefore create or close a gap in the numbers. This operation is
always used on the character set (or in CPP mode, on the part-project) which belongs to
the drawing window currently open. You must enter a total of 3 page numbers during
the moving process. The range is determined by the last number which you have
entered. This last number may also be larger than the last existing page number.
Hint
168
If a file is being overwritten, a prompt will appear beforehand.
Example
Move file (page) :[Create gap]
Your set of drawings includes the page numbers (=number extension) from *.0001 to
*.0020 and *.0040 to *.0060. You want to create a gap for a new page *.0004. The
previous page *.0004 should then receive the page number *.0005. The numbers from
40 onwards should not be changed.
• Load Page *.0004
• Activate the Move file command
• Enter the following in the entry field of the information bar on request:
Text type Value
Start number: 4 (gap for new page)
End number: 5
Last number:
20
(of the set of drawings with are
to be moved at the same time)
Result:
Page 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, ....20, 21, 40 ... 60 => Page number 4 is missing.
Use the New file or Copy file command in order to create a new Page *.004.
Move file (page): [close gap]
Your set of drawings has the page numbers (=number extension) from *.0001 to *.0020
and *.0040 to *.0060. You want to close a gap (assuming that Page number *.0004 is
missing). The previous Page *.0005 should then receive the page number *.0004. The
numbers from 40 onwards should not be changed.
• Load Page *.0005
• Activate the Move file command
• Enter the following in the entry field of the information bar on request:

Text type Value
Start number: 5 (gap for new page)
End number: 4
Last number:
20
(of the set of drawings with
are to be moved at the same
time)
Result:
Page 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, .…19, 40 ... 60 => Page number 20 is missing.
Use the New file or Copy file command in order to create a new Page *.0020.
Hint
If the active working window does not belong to the project, when
using the Move file (page) function, a message will appear to that
effect. This prevents you from accidentally accessing a project
which you have only opened temporarily. Numbering and crossreferences
are not automatically adjusted during this operation.
Then use the appropriate automatic functions.
File
169

WSCAD 51
Deleting file (page)
Activate the Delete file command. If you are working without CPP mode, you will
enter a dialog directly which will show you all of the WSCAD files from the directory
belonging to the active drawing window.
When you select the desired drawing and start the deleting process with OK, a prompt
will appear for each file (page). Confirm with Yes if you want this action to be carried
out.
Hint
170
When you delete the current drawing, the next lower or higher
page number will appear automatically.

File - Compress (Clear file)
When you delete parts from your drawing, you can no longer see them on the
display, but at this point they are only tagged for deletion and still exist in memory.
This is why you are able to use the UNDO command to rapidly recall deleted parts.
Hint
Both the active page and the whole project can be compressed and
cleared.
If you want to make room for more memory and remove the deleted parts, activate the
'Compress' command. This will clear the memory of parts that are tagged as 'deleted'
and at this point nothing will be available when UNDO is selected.
During this process, overlapping and broken connection lines will be regenerated to
complete lines. Even open line-ends, that did not fit exactly to a component will be
connected, provided that the gap is smaller than the half of the current snap range.
Identical components located at exactly the same position are also removed even if they
have different component names and/or reference names.
After activating this command, you can still specify whether only the active drawing or
the whole drawing set or the total project is to be affected.
Warning
This command deletes the UNDO/REDO buffer.
File
171

WSCAD 51
File - Save (Save page)
Hint
172
This command stores the page which is in the active drawing window.
WSCAD can save automatically.
This action overwrites the contents of the existing file. If you have not yet given your
drawing a name, you will be prompted to do so.
With every drawing several settings are also saved:
• Page size
• View size
• Last cursor position
• Snap range
• Cross-reference values (page/path, first co-ordinate sign, zero point, distance,
unit...)
• space between reflector contacts
• max. 30 UNDO values and 10 REDO values.
When you load the drawing, these values are regenerated.
Hint
When you load a drawing, you must disable the transfer of the
saved settings if you change one of these values in the
configuration. Otherwise the values you have entered will always
be overwritten every time you load the drawing!!

File - Save As (Save page as)
Using the standard Windows dialog for entering file name and path, you can save
the file in the active window under another name and path. The original drawing remains
unchanged.
Hint
If you wish to duplicate the current page, you should use the Copy
file command.
In multiple window mode a new window is opened for the new page, unless one already
exists for this page.
Hint
This command copies the file, but bypasses the Contactor manager
and the PLC manager. Use the command only when you need to
make a short-term, temporary copy of the current page.
File
173

WSCAD 51
Store block
Use this command to transfer objects of the current drawing to other drawings or
other positions in the current drawing. This menu command operates like the other wellknown
functions Copy/Paste. However, the elements of the active drawing window are
saved in the WSCAD intermediate file P1BLOK01.
174
Once you have selected objects by clicking on them with the left mouse
button or have selected a window, you can also use the key combination
to save the block to the Windows clipboard.
After menu option activation, you must select an option in the menu (top left in the
working window) in order to determine the choice of objects belonging to the block.
Possible choices
• All (if active) selects the contents of the complete WSCAD page
• 1Object Click on the relevant element with the left mouse button
• Objects Click on several elements with the left mouse button (finish
selection using the right mouse button and )
• 1Window Draw a selection window with the left mouse button held down
• M-Window Draw several selection windows with the left mouse button held
down
Finish the selection by clicking on the right mouse button and confirming with the
key. The temporary file is overwritten every time the command is executed but
the contents remains available even after restarting the program. Use this function to
transfer parts of a drawing from one page to another page.
Selecting a circuit diagram by using the Windows method
All elements within a window are added to the block.
Hint
This does not apply to the CPP range function
graphics Example

File
175

WSCAD 51
Insert a block
Elements which have been saved to the buffer memory with Save block can be
pasted to the active working window. You can also carry out this function by using the
key combination . The entire contents of the buffer memory are now located at
the cursor and can be repositioned.
If coils, contacts or PLC modules are located in the temporary files, then you are
prompted to execute further actions depending on the configuration level and the
settings under Parameters / General / Protection and PLC, of the Protection
manager or the PLC manager, for example.
Hint
176
This does not apply to the UFD region function
graphics Example

Creating a drawing macro
Using this command, parts of a page or entire pages which you want to use more
often in other drawings or in other positions on the current drawing can be selected and
saved.
There are different ways available for selecting the individual elements which you can use
in any sequence or as often as you wish.
Hint
This does not apply to the SLI range function
Activate the menu option, then an entry dialog appears in which you will have to enter a
name for the drawing macro to be created. The drawing macro should be stored in the
corresponding directory otherwise it will be difficult to find again. The standard dialog is
already defaulted with this directory so that you only have to enter a name. If you do not
enter a file extension, this will automatically set to 000.
Example
Select the individual parts of the drawing (in this case, the Windows method). You need
to position the cursor as accurately as possible (tolerance of a few pixels).
After menu option activation, you must select an option in the menu, top left in the
working window in order to determine the choice of objects belonging to the drawing
macro.
Possible choices
• All (if active) selects the contents of the complete WSCAD page
• 1Object Click on the relevant element (including texts and lines) with the
left mouse button
• Objects Click on several elements with the left mouse button (finish
selection using the right mouse button and )
• 1Window Draw a selection window with the left mouse button held down
File
177

WSCAD 51
178
• M-Window Draw several selection windows with the left mouse button held
down
Finish the selection by clicking on the right mouse button and confirming with the
key. Each multi-selection is finished with or the right mouse button. Also
pay attention to the status display on the status bar at the bottom of the screen.
Hint
Tip
You can only extract parts selected by means of the M window by
using ‘Objects’ to select again from the selection.
Using your own drawing macro will speed up your work
significantly.

Inserting a drawing macro by using Drawing
macro Explorer
With this Menuitem you can insert a drawing macro into the current schematic.
The Drawing macro Explorer has access to the preset directory.
In the Drawing macro Explorer see you down tree, which corresponds to an exact
structure of the folder Drawing macro. The elements with + indications are further
subdirectory . This structure can be extended or amended independently.
File
179

WSCAD 51
Refresh
The listing structure is again read in and indicated in the Drawing macro Explorer.
External
It is indicated to the file open dialogue and you be able to select drawing macros
outside of the given listing structure.
Display
A ICON (*.ico) can be assigned to each subdirectory (+ element) over the right mouse
button. These are contained in the Windows system or in external editors themselves to
provide.
180

File
181

WSCAD 51
Import-Export
Insert graphic
With the menu command File / Import / Insert graphics, you can insert small
graphics (max. 30 kB) in the drawing. The colour resolution is essentially determined by
the size of the graphics file. The size (dimensions) must be set in a graphics program.
The Windows standard dialog will appear for opening the file. Select the file and position
it on the circuit diagram.
Under WSCAD 5, the graphics can be moved, copied and deleted but not edited.
When creating the graphics, bear in mind the output medium since a very colourful
bitmap can appear somewhat strange on a black and white printer.
If you click on the Bitmap with the right mouse button, then a context menu opens
where you can choose one of the displayed functions to change the Bitmap.
Caution
182
Not all printers support the output functions for graphics. Pay
attention to the size of the graphics. Maximum: 30 kB (with an
external graphics program, you can reduce the colour intensity etc.
and therefore the file size.)

Inserting graphics as a link
With the menu command File / Import / link to graphic, you can insert graphics
(without any limitation in size) as a link in the drawing. In this case, the file will be
copied into the (LinkedGraphic) subdirectory of the project where it will remain. When
exporting the project, this subdirectory must be given at the same time. (Do not use
in drawing frames or forms).
File
183

WSCAD 51
HPGL into WSCAD
This function converts an HPGL file into the WSCAD format. Nearly all CAD
programs are able to store drawings in an HPGL format. The command 'HPGL->WSCAD'
converts the file into the WSCAD internal format.
The information converted into the WSCAD format is only represented by Basic Graphics,
e.g. lines, circles, etc. There are problems with further processing of these drawings,
because they do not have the necessary additional intelligence associated with the
elements for the automatic functions to recognise.
Lines and circles (arcs) will be converted, but special commands such as hatching and
special fonts will be ignored. The following HPGL commands will be processed: AA, CI,
IP, PU, PD, PA, PR, SC, SP.
A conversion scale can be entered in order to adjust the size.
If there is no clean separation between the HPGL commands (separator is ‘;’), the
drawing translation could be faulty or incomplete.
Notice that some CAD programs output circles and arcs as multiple lines. If that is the
case, when moving these elements, you must select them with ‘Window’ (not ‘Object’),
as you cannot easily pick the individual lines.
184

DXF/DWG -> WSCAD
Importing a DXF/DWG file into a WSCAD drawing
A DXF/DWG file is changed into a WSCAD drawing. Only basic
elements of the DXF/DWG format are transferred because of the
complexity of the DXF/DWG format and because the information cannot
be used by the automatic functions.
Lines, polylines, circles, arcs and text.
The command SOLID (e.g. in the case of arrow heads) without filling and blocks without
scaling / turning are also supported. These components are changed into elements from
free drawing and the texts are displayed in 90 o steps. Before changing, you will be
prompted to enter a scale. The colour can be adjusted in the configuration Parameters
/ Colours / Drawing colours – DXF/HPGL Import. If a colour other than the current
background colour of the screen has been selected, any colour information in the DXF
file will be ignored and the picture will be displayed exclusively with the colour which has
been selected. Once the current background colour of the screen has been adjusted, the
colour information of the DXF files will be transferred. If there is no colour information
in the DXF file, the picture will be displayed with the complementary colour to the
background.
Flow
Invoke menu File\Import\DXF or DWG. Define the WSCAD file to be created.
Select the DXF/DWG file (preview). The import factors must then be adjusted.
File
185

WSCAD 51
Importing several DXF/DWG files into several WSCAD drawings
In order to do this, start the DXF/DWG Import as above but in this case you must
name the DXF/DWG files in a certain way so that the multi-import function can operate.
The filenames must be displayed with an underscore and a serial number with the
extension DXF/DWG. The files must be located in one directory.
186

Select the first DXF/DWG file.
File
187

WSCAD 51
188

Select the WSCAD file with which the import process is to begin.
File
189

WSCAD 51
Decide on the scaling parameters (once).
190
• Auto-centered centers the imported file into the WSCAD sheet
• Factor scales the imported file around the entered value
• Offset shifts the graphic in X and/or Y direction by the entered value
• Text is DOS-Code for older plans needed
• Adjust all pages with multiple import one needs
• Keep page numbers the page number is like the number in the file name
(Plan_15.dwg => Plan.0015)
All DXF/DWG files will then be imported.

WSCAD into DXF/DWG or Bitmap
This converts one or more pages of the current drawing set into
DXF/DWG or Bitmap format. For each page of the drawing set a
DXF/DWG or Bitmap file will be created.
You are given a dialog in which to choose the path and file name. From
this file name all characters will be used separated by (_) and the (fourdigit)
page number. The file name extension is always ‘.DXF/DWG or bmp
(png or pcx)’/
Example
The conversion of pages 4 and 5 of the project AEROPLANE will generate files
AEROPLANE_0004.DXF and AEROPLANE_0005.DXF.
File
191

WSCAD 51
WSCAD into VNS
The Standard DIN V40950 ‘Neutral interchange format for diagram data’ was drawn
up with the participation of many large companies with the aim of facilitating the transfer
of data between widely differing CAD programs. A further, and important aim of VNS is
the archiving of circuit diagram data in a form which is independent of manufacturers.
One outcome was the fact that the format could not be defined too strictly, so that each
CAD manufacturer could introduce the specific characteristics of his program into the
process. Thus a detailed knowledge of both the source and the target system is needed,
if a conversion via VNS is to be successful. Certainly the capabilities of level 1 are still
limited, so one should not expect to be able to continue in the target system without
doing some reworking.
In the meantime we have Version 2.0 of this interface specification, which controls the
exchange not only of charts (documentation) but of all the data associated with a
project. This does however considerably increase the required processing time.
192
During the transfer process, temporary files ‘*.TPL’ or ‘*.TSY’ are
created. If an error occurs the VNS write-processor gives an
appropriate error message. You can then use the temporary files to
find the source of the error in the project.
During the transfer process, the whole drawing set is converted into two ASCII files.
These files, with the extension ‘.VPL’ and ‘.VSY’ are stored in the same directory as the
files of the current drawing set. Both files are ASCII files, which can be manipulated with
any normal editor. In the ‘.VSY file’ (symbol file) are the symbol definitions and in the
‘.VPL’ file (connection file) are the call commands for the symbols, the electrical connections,
texts and free graphics. For the transfer process, project data is required (the
so-called header data), which WSCAD 5 cannot automatically take from the circuit diagram
(drawing number, sender etc.). You are prompted for these after the conversion
process has started and then have to enter them. The configuration of the VNS interface
enables you to control the transfer of the component-related texts (e.g. function text).
For those familiar with the VNS standard, the important features of the
WSCAD conversion are summed up below in note form:
Hint
• As WSCAD 5 does not recognise a drawing frame as a separate element (the
frame is more usually produced in ‘Draw’ mode), the necessary symbol for the DF
(drawing frame) set is automatically generated, but is marked as invisible.
• In the case of the SD (symbol definition) data set, the component type is
transferred as symbol form. The admissible values are: (STANDARD, SPULE,
KONTAKT, SPIEGEL, KAMM, HAUPTELEMENT,
NEBENELEMENT,KLEMME,KABELADER).
• In the case of terminals, the designation of the internal side is transferred with an
SA data set, which follows the symbol definition. Here the ‘RICHT’ sign is defined,
and the value can be 'OBEN', 'UNTEN, 'LINKS' or 'RECHTS'.
• Using the line types defined by V40950, WSCAD recognises four further types
which are transferred with the identification numbers 5 to 8.
• WSCAD supports two features of a connection point: the pin number and the pin
name. If the connection of a symbol only has one of the two, the value (pin
number or pin name) is transferred by means of a TA set and a ‘:’-attribute
according to the semantic table. If both features are present, the pin number is
transferred as a TA set and the pin name is transferred as an AT set.

The wording for the SA and SD data set has been kept to German
words, because the VNS is a German standard and is mainly
supported by German CAD software)
File
193

WSCAD 51
Printing
WSCAD 5 uses a printer installed under Windows for printing out drawings and
lists. This can be configured independently from another printer which is used exclusively
for the label printout. When starting the program for the first time, both printers will be
configured to the Windows standard printer configured in your system. If you wish to
invoke this command, a dialog will appear which will offer you a large number of options
in controlling the output.
Printer
For your information, see where your printout will take place. If one of the pieces of
information in the printer area does not correspond to how you would like it or you would
like to check other printer parameters, this can be done via Printer properties. The
printer dialog, which may vary from printer to printer (depending on the printer
features), will then appear.
Output
The page range of the printer output can be determined under Output. You can still
decide whether the sequence of pages printed out should be reversed (i.e. starting with
the highest page number) and/or, in the case of multiple copies, whether the pages
should be sorted (i.e. 1,2,3….1,2,3) or unsorted (i.e. 1,1,...1,2,2,....2,3,3,3.....3). It does
not matter whether you enter the last or the first page first in a page range. The colour
option can only be activated when the printer driver of your printer is able to provide a
colour printout. If you select the option automatic sizing, then each page (whatever the
drawing format) will be adjusted to the remaining printable area of the page format
configured in the printer. On the other hand, if you select a fixed scale, then this factor
will be applied to all printouts. However, if the available area on the paper is too small, a
message will appear informing you of how many sheets the page will be divided into. You
can either accept this or abort the printout.
Page area
194

If you have selected an area marked with a rectangle on the circuit diagram page, you
can print just this selected area alone with the option Select. Otherwise, either just the
open page will be printed out or the pages which have been entered.
Tip
You can very easily divert the printer output into a file by
configuring your printer to do so under Windows (Control panel –
Printers). Printing can be very easily carried out directly from the
Project Manager.
Line weight
On popular request from users, a feature has been added for adjusting the line weight of
thin lines according to personal preference (the settings are located under Parameters /
General, “Printer” tab).
File
195

WSCAD 51
For certain line types, you can adjust the line thickness to Line weight 1 (thinnest
line). The option Correction in pixels is another option for adjusting the printout.
Because some printer drivers do not represent the colour correctly and the option of the
colour printout in the printer dialog therefore cannot be activated, it is always possible to
override the printer driver data using the colour switch. Adjust the printer dialog
according to whether you really want to print in colour.
Hint
196
In most cases, printing colours on a black and white printer usually
results in grey scaling. The two buttons for the printer selection
operate the same as the menu commands File / Change printer.
Changing printers
WSCAD 5 manages 2 different printers:
One for the drawing output
One for the label output
The printers are managed separately, i.e. changes to one printer have no
effect on the other printer. Under modern Windows systems, it is very

easy to set up several printers with different settings. WSCAD 5 does not
remember the settings but just the names of the drawing and label
printers. Select which printer you wish to change and a Windows standard
dialog will appear for the printer configuration.
With the aid of this dialog, it is possible to choose between all the printers
which are available under Windows and, of course, change the default
standard values such as paper size or orientation. When you have
confirmed with OK, all information from the Windows printer driver is
copied (e.g. margins and interface etc.).
File
197

WSCAD 51
Abort
This exits the program without saving the current changes to the drawing. A prompt
requests confirmation to exit without saving. Modifications to component libraries are
always saved.
Hint
198
In the case of all automatic functions, the whole project is
automatically saved beforehand.

Exit
This ends your work by saving your drawing(s) and closing the project.
Modifications to component libraries are also saved. In addition the desktop settings are
saved and the MRU list (list of the most recently opened files/projects) is updated.
File
199

WSCAD 51
File list
This MRU list at the end of the menu shows you the 4 most recently opened files.
When the program is started for the first time, the file list is empty and is not displayed.
The list is managed dynamically and adjusts itself automatically. When the program is
terminated, the active drawing window is always placed at the top of the list, provided
that this file belongs to the project currently being edited, with the Project manager
active.
200

Schematic
Connection line
Line
The 'Line' command is used to connect components in a schematic. Components
must be connected using this command (as opposed to the 'Line' command under
'Draw') because only these lines will be recognised by WSCAD 5 for checking and list
generation.
WARNING
Do not use 'Draw - Line' command to connect components.
Lines will be stored as single line segments, instead of single lines. This provides for
easier manipulation and requires a minimum amount of memory. To ensure that
connections between lines and components are made correctly, turn on the 'Snap'
mode (function key turns it on, and off, and is indicated by 'S' as first character
in the status line at the bottom of the screen). Components are created with the
connection pins positioned on grid points, so with the 'Snap' mode on, the cursor will
jump from grid to grid where the pins are located. This is the only secure way to ensure
that connections to the component pins are made exactly.
WSCAD 5 can automatically create horizontal or vertical connection
lines.
When inserting and deleting components in the schematic, lines will become fragmented
and connection points between lines and components may be overlapped. Note the
'Compress' command on the 'File' menu. This function will correct overlapped and
fragmented lines automatically. It is good practice to run the 'Compress' command from
time to time to 'cleanup' the drawing.
TIP
Turn on the 'Automatic Connection' mode (function key
turns it on and off, and is indicated by 'A' as the third character in
the status line). With the 'Automatic Connection' mode on, when
components are placed, all vertical (or horizontal depending on the
connection mode selected, connections will be done automatically.
Input line name
If the line has an open end, the dialog 'Input line name' opens, and you can enter line
name, connection name, colour, cross section and length.:
201

WSCAD 51
Hint
202
If you do not need all this information, you can disable the dialog in
the configuration.
Connection lines (menu command 'Schematic - Line') can be created in different
colours. These are conditional on the colour configuration for connection lines ('Settings -
Colours - Connection Lines'). Nevertheless if you want to see all connection lines in the
same colour, you can ignore the colour information by setting the option 'Ignore
connection line colours' in the colour dialog.
Important
Connection lines from earlier projects have no colour information.
Therefore, when converting the file into the new file format, the
program adopts the current colour settings. You should therefore
note these settings before transferring an old project. If necessary
refer back to the automatically produced safety copies.
Preset of line parameters
When you draw a new connection line the parameters like colour, line type and line width
can be taken from an existing line, when you make the start point exactly on an existing
line.
Hint
When you place a node on an existing line and a connection line is
created automatically, the line parameters are also adopted.

Line + Node/Arrow
Schematic
The menu option Line + Node/Arrow is only active once you have switched off the
option Activate online destination wiring under Parameters / General /
Compatibility tab. You must restart the program when you want to activate this.
This command is used to set connection nodes or arrows at the beginning or
end of the line depending on the option selected. These options are available for
selection after applying the menu option.
However, the nodes or arrows are only visible after fixing the line. Arrows are only
drawn for vertical or horizontal connection lines, they are there only for display purposes
and have no significance for automatic functions such as cross references.
The command Schematic / Repeat only collects the last element drawn, i.e. node or
arrow.
203

WSCAD 51
DW point presentation
WSCAD 5 also offers the option of displaying the 3-pole Destination-Wiring elements
in point form. The display can be switched over at any time by using the menu command
Schematic / DW point display. Full functionality is retained during this process.
Hint
204
point display destination-wiring display
The switch over can only operate properly providing the correct
destination wiring library has been set in the configuration. Apart
from that, for the point presentation, additional symbols must be
present with symbol names that agree with those of the
corresponding 3-pole symbols up to an attached P. These are then
displayed during the point presentation instead of the normal DW
elements. Just look at the library supplied with the software.

Nodes
Schematic
Component-pins and line ends that exactly hit the end of a line are recognised as a
connection without a node being placed. Line ends, that exactly hit another line are also
recognised as a connection without a node being placed. A node can be placed at the
connection point to visually identify the connection.
WSCAD 5 can automatically draw a connection line, when the node is
drawn on a line that is directly in line with a component pin.
If two lines that cross each other are to be connected, then the 'List generator' requires
that a node be placed, at the connection point, to recognise the connection. However,
two lines that cross each other are also recognised as a connection, if a segment of one
of the lines ends exactly on the other line. Nodes are always displayed on the screen as
squares. However, when plotting you have the option of representing the nodes as
circles.
TIP
With the 'Automatic Connection' mode switched on ( turns
on/off), connection lines are drawn automatically between
components, if the component pins are exactly in line with each
other.
205

WSCAD 51
Inserting symbols
Loading symbols or items
Symbol standard (DIN 61346)
In the WSCAD Version 5, the symbols are available in two versions of the library. The
first version shows the symbols in libraries with the previous arrangement and
identification letters (reference names). The second version re-categorises the
symbols while supplying the identification letters for the symbols according to DIN
61346. The new DIN has been in force since 01.06.2003.
A graphics symbol search is available with the menu option Schematic / Graphics
symbol selection / Load component or Library.
The best route to the symbol is without doubt the Symbol Explorer, which is started via
the menu option Schematic / Symbol. The directory is selected under Parameters /
common settings / Directory tab.
206

Symbol Explorer
Schematic
The Symbol Explorer interface makes it suited to virtually all methods of working. This
functionality is available in all the versions (Basic, Compact and Professional). Start
the Symbol Explorer via the menu item ‘Schematic - Load Symbol’.
It is no longer necessary to activate the library as in earlier versions.
Positioning the symbol in the schematic gives rise to further actions, dependent on such
things as method of positioning (simple mouse click or double click), version of the
program being used and parameter settings.
The dialog can be resized as you wish, likewise the split between preview and library
view (whenever the cursor style changes ). The Symbol Explorer always displays the
libraries which are located in the directories under ‘Settings – Common Settings –
Directories’ in the lines ‘Libraries’ or ‘Libraries IEC . Which of the two directories is
used will depend on the current setting in the Project manager for the active (open)
project under the project data standard.
207

WSCAD 51
Loading a symbol via the Library tab
Symbol Explorer is started via the menu option Connect+load / Load symbol. Then
click on the Library tab.
In the lower part of Symbol Explorer, you will now see all the libraries which are
located in the active library directory.
The library name in the new version is determined by the word “DIN” and the relevant
identification letter of the symbols contained. In Symbol Explorer, click on the
extension character in front of the relevant library from which you wish to load the
symbol. The library then opens up showing the symbols listed according to name.
Select the symbol name you are looking for. The symbol preview is then activated in
the upper part of Symbol Explorer and the symbol you have selected will appear. The
preview only works when the drawing is loaded. Double click in the Symbol preview
and the symbol will appear larger. Selection is then made via the OK button or by double
clicking on the symbol name.
208

Loading a symbol via the designation tab
Schematic
Select the Designation tab. In Symbol Explorer, click on the extension character in
front of the relevant designation from which you wish to load the symbol. The
designation then opens up showing the symbols listed according to name. Select the
symbol name you are looking for. The Symbol preview is then activated in the upper
part of Symbol Explorer and the symbol you have selected will appear. Selection is then
made via the OK button or by double clicking on the symbol name.
209

WSCAD 51
Loading a symbol via the Search tab
Select the Search tab. In Symbol Explorer, click on the Search symbol field and enter
just one or several parts of the symbol name. The separators are: Space ( ), semicolon
(;) and comma (,).
210
The search is activated by clicking on the binocular symbol or the key.
Available input options
switch single word fragment

emerg switch several word fragments
Schematic
211

WSCAD 51
emerg switch lock any number of word fragments
212

Schematic
Select the symbol name you are looking for. The symbol preview is then activated in
the upper part of Symbol Explorer and the symbol you have selected will appear.
Selection is then made via the OK button or by double clicking on the symbol name.
213

WSCAD 51
Loading a symbol via the Favourites tab
Select the Favourites tab. Favourites should contain the symbols which you often use.
You yourself should choose which symbols go into Favourites. A right mouse button
function (which becomes active under the tabs Library and Designation) has been
created for adding a symbol to Favourites. Just select the symbol and press the right
mouse button and then the Favourites context menu appears.
Here, you can specify a functional structure via the sub-option New folder. Here, you
can decide on the generic terms under which the symbols can be saved later. Enter
descriptive terms in the text box.
214

Schematic
In Symbol Explorer, see the generic term. The selected symbol is added to this
generic term by clicking on it.
In Symbol Explorer, click on the Favourites tab and then you will see the generic
term with the associated symbols. Select the symbol name you are looking for. The
symbol preview is then activated in the upper part of Symbol Explorer and the
symbol you have selected will appear. Selection is then made via the OK button or by
double clicking on the symbol name.
Here, you can also click on the symbol with the right mouse button and delete it from
Favourites again. The same applies to the generic terms.
215

WSCAD 51
Placing symbols
When a symbol has been inserted in the drawing from the active symbol library,
then other entries are necessary according to the parameter settings and configuration
level.
Hint
216
WSCAD 5 can adjust the size of a symbol automatically during
loading. This can be useful when you do not have the matching
libraries for the grid dimensions of the current drawing. This
function should only be activated with care. It is better to adapt
the grid dimensions of the drawing since incorrect adjustment can
make it impossible to position the symbols precisely.
Possible direct events when placing the symbols
Before fixing the symbol on the circuit diagram (left mouse button or ), a
menu can be activated by means of the right mouse button (or ) which offers the
following options:
• Rotate or flip the symbol.
• Enter general text (or several, one after the other) to add a security value to the
symbol, for example.
• Change the symbol name.
• Change the reference name.
• Show or change all symbol parameters
• Change the terminal destination by rotating the terminal virtually.
• Determine the active component (electronics only, for several similar components
in one housing).
• Abort the entire process and delete the symbol again. (Must be carried out in
order to remove the symbol from the cursor again).
All symbols are placed on the connection line simply with a click of the left mouse
button and the line opens up automatically. If there is still no connection line on the

Schematic
circuit diagram at this position but another symbol connection (pin) has been placed in
direct line beforehand, then the connection line is drawn automatically.
With standard symbols, in the Professional version, you are requested to select and
assign an item from the Item Manager. If you abort the assignment, the symbol will
still be placed on the circuit diagram and the symbol parameters will open in which you
can enter the information for the symbol.
Symbol (parameters)
In the Professional version, if you activate the database access by selecting option
When loading a symbol: take values from the database under Parameters /
General / Connection tab / Load, the menu for the symbol parameters opens
automatically after placement.
217

WSCAD 51
Loading a symbol in the Professional version
If you work with activated Contactor Manager and/or active PLC Manager, then the
process changes as follows:
Contactor coil
After positioning a contactor coil, first the Item Database Manager will open with the
contactors inside. After selecting an item in the database, the values are transferred
from the Contactor Manager, the comb is loaded automatically and its position on the
circuit diagram pre-populated.
However, if you abort from the Item Database Manager ( or right mouse button)
the Contactor Manager offers you the list of contactors already located on the circuit
diagram. All virtual contactors are designated (with *) so that you can assign the coil
to a virtual contactor. A contactor from which contacts have already been loaded but
the contactor coil of which does not yet exist on the circuit diagram is called a virtual
contactor
Contactor contact
When loading a contact, the Item Database Manager likewise opens first. Only select
a database entry when you are in the process of loading the first contact of a new
contactor. The Contactor Manager then generates a so-called virtual contactor. You
can work completely normally although the contactor coil has not been inserted in the
circuit diagram. If you abort from the Item Database Manager ( or right mouse
button) the Contactor Manager offers you the list of available contactors and you
must assign the contact to a contactor. The reference name is then transferred
automatically.
Hint
218
Position the contact or the contactor with a double click of the
mouse or the space bar, then skip the database selection and
access the assignment dialogue directly.
PLC main element
After positioning a PLC main module, the Item Database Manager will open first and
display the associated database entries. After selecting the database entry, the values
are transferred from the PLC Manager.
However, if you abort from the Item Database Manager ( or right mouse
button) the PLC Manager offers you the selection of available PLC modules. All virtual
modules are designated (with *) so that you can assign the main module to a virtual
PLC module. A PLC module from which PLC auxiliary elements (the individual
channels) have already been applied but the main module of which does not yet exist
in the circuit diagram is called a virtual PLC module.
PLC auxiliary element
When loading a PLC auxiliary module, the Item Database Manager with the PLC
modules opens first. Only select a database entry when you are in the process of

Schematic
loading the first channel of a new PLC module. The PLC Manager then generates a socalled
virtual module; you can work completely normally even though the main
module has not yet been inserted in the circuit diagram. If you abort from the Item
Database Manager ( or right mouse button) the PLC Manager offers you the
selection of available PLC modules and you must assign the PLC auxiliary module
(separate channel) to a PLC module. The reference name is then transferred
automatically.
Hint
Position the PLC module with a double click of the mouse or by
using the space bar, then skip the Item Database Manager and
access the assignment dialogue directly.
219

WSCAD 51
Loading a symbol in the Basic and Compact
version
When loading coils, contacts and terminals which can be cross-referenced, you must
enter a reference name such as K4711 or X1.
With contacts and terminals, you can also enter the contact numbers. If you enter a
+ or - sign, all existing pin numbers which are made up solely of numbers for this
component are increased or decreased by 10 respectively (contactor contacts).
With contacts which can be cross-referenced (symbol type, contact), if no reference
has been entered or pre-populated core name (e.g. K) transferred, the reference of a
coil or contact which is located at the same height on the left will be assigned and a
broken line drawn to this component.
Hint
220
With terminals, if no reference is entered, the reference from the
terminal which is found at the same height on the left (or top in the
case of a horizontal work direction) will be transferred. The
suspension point of the terminal is the deciding factor for the
position comparison rather than the position of the reference
name.

Loading items
Loading a symbol and assigning an item at the same time
Schematic
In the Professional version, use a database in which the individual items are stored. In
order to obtain immediate connection between symbol + item data, use the menu
option Schematic / Load item. The Load symbol and Assign item dialog is a
combination between the Symbol Explorer and an Item Manager. In the symbol
tree, search for the appropriate symbol and select the item from the Item Manager
(both must be marked). Only then can you load the symbol at the cursor by using the
OK button or a double click of the mouse and place it on the circuit diagram.
Note whether the Synchronisation option has been activated or not. This option
activates the link between the symbol and item and then jumps to the assigned item
or symbol during selection.
221

WSCAD 51
Graphics symbol selection
Load component
The menu option Graph.symbol selection with the sub-menu Load component and
library is the graphics method (for Version 4.2 standard) for inserting symbols in a
WSCAD circuit diagram. This method is only active when you have activated the option
Graphics symbol selection under Parameters / General / Compatibility tab. You
must restart the program when you want to activate this. When using the Load
component command, the graphics display (template page) appears first
Selecting a symbol via graphics symbol selection
After selecting a symbol from the template page, the circuit diagram
appears and the selected symbol can be positioned. After positioning, the
graphics symbol selection appears again. The template used is
oriented to the activated library so that several different templates can
be available. If no symbol is selected (Abort with or right mouse
button) the normal dialog will appear showing a list of the symbols of the
active library for selection. This also appears when no template page is
available.
Symbol selection via a dialog
When a search term for the name of the symbol to be looked for is entered in the
Search term field, the selection bar is automatically positioned at the relevant symbol
according to the character sequence which has been entered.
The symbol is selected via OK or a double click.
Creating a library template
You can easily create a graphics template yourself since this is a normal WSCAD
drawing which need only satisfy the following criteria:
Hint
222
• The filename corresponds exactly to the library name
• The file extension (=page number) is .000
• The template is stored in the same directory as the library itself.
The template is displayed in the same scale in which it was
created. You can easily adjust this scale to your resolution by
loading the template, zooming as required and saving it again.

Line name
General
Schematic
Every electrical connection line which is open at one (or both) ends (such as a
connection to a BUS or a continuous line to other pages) requires a line name when this
line is continued to other points in the set of drawings, otherwise the list generator will
not be able to assign the lines.
What are the different ways of entering the line name?
Changing the line name: The dialog is only active when you have switched off the
option ‘Activate online destination wiring’ under Parameters / General /
Compatibility tab and have not activated the option ‘Enter line name via general
input field’ under Tab / Connect and load. Several connections can be managed for
one and the same line name. A connection database is created at the same time.
Alternatively, enter the line name via the input field, in which case, only the line
names are compared on the drawing and used for cross-referencing. By doing this, it is
not possible to manage several connections for a single line name. No connection
database is created.
Enter / change / edit line name
When you activate the menu option Line name, at first, a context menu appears in
which you can decide which functions you want to execute in relation to the line name.
Here, select Enter.
The dialog Enter line name appears.
223

WSCAD 51
Enter the line name, click on OK and position it on the line. By clicking with the left
mouse button (or: pressing the key), the line name is fixed and the Enter
line name dialog immediately opens again.
However, if you select the context menu option Change, then you must first select an
existing line name from the circuit diagram. Only then does the above Enter line name
dialog appear.
Placing the name at the end of the line is important: The beginning of the name must
lie on the line (distance e.g. due to movement with grid switched on) between the end of
the line and the next coordinate point (kink or other line end) of the line, otherwise
another applicable name will be assigned for this line group. You can also rotate the line
name, change its size or even make it invisible (by placing an object in front).
Input line name dialog
In the Input line name dialog: define the line name, connection, colour, cross section
and the length of the wire to be laid.
Line names
Enter a new line name and confirm with the Enter key (not the OK button) or open the
list field and select an existing name.
Connection
If you enter a new connection designation or select one of the existing connections
for this line name then this will appear in the large list field on the right. With the set
option Show double connections, you will see all connections with this line name.
Assign line - connection
If you wish to assign the line just drawn to an existing open connection, simply select
the relevant entry on the right in the list field with a double click. Any existing
224

Schematic
information such as connection name and colour etc. will be transferred immediately.
Otherwise, give the line a connection name in addition. Each open connection can only
be assigned once (beginning and end count as one open connection in each case). This is
the only way to make it possible to identify this open line end precisely later on.
Placing the line name
After clicking on the OK button, the line name is placed automatically. Abort with
or the right mouse button.
Hint
The values for colour and cross section are also saved in test files
(Colour.TXT or Crosssection.TXT in the database directory) in
addition and are therefore available for future entries.
Special function for electronics
For lines with names that end in numbers (e.g. data or address lines) and which lie on
top of one another within the fixed distance, only the first line name needs be entered.
If you abort the entry via the dialog, the other names will be written and positioned
automatically with the command Draw free hand / Repeat. The numbers at the end of
the name are increased by one each time. The direction of the repeat is up to you. For
example, you can choose for the names to be counted in ascending order.
Line cross reference when lines have the same potential
Different line names can be assigned to open line ends. However, in this case, use the
Connection field in the dialog to assign open line ends. You can only use a connection
twice. This makes it possible for the cross references to be unambiguous. Only line ends
to which the same line name and the same connection have been assigned refer to one
another.
Automatic pre-assignment of text parameters
When entering General text and line name, the size and direction as well as the angle
of rotation of the last entry or change is used as a pre-assignment.
Hint
The length of the test is restricted to 48 characters.
225

WSCAD 51
Cables
Drawing in cables
The cables are managed in the Professional version when you have activated the option
Activate online Cable Manager under Parameters / General / Cable tab. In order
to manage cables in general, they must be placed on the circuit diagram by using the
menu command Connect+Load / Cable name/type. The start point of the cable is
now set with a click of the left mouse button. Draw the (cable)line over the area of the
wires which should belong to this cable and place the end point with another click of
the left mouse button.
When the Cable Manager is activated, the cable database dialog appears.
Now click on the New button. Enter the cable name e.g. –W105 and place the text
with the cursor and a click of the left mouse button.
226

In the Professional version, the Item Database Manager then appears.
Schematic
Select the appropriate cable with a double click of the mouse or by clicking on OK.
Then the Cable Manager dialog opens again to show the available cables and the new
cable from the cable database. The colour code is transferred from the database. If
no colour code has been saved in the database, then you can select one of the existing
colour codes. This new assignment is written back in the database.
Hint
A colour code can only be changed if no wires of the selected cable
have been used in the circuit diagram.
227

WSCAD 51
When you leave the database dialog, the new cable is pre-selected. The selected
colours are indicated below. You can only select as many wire colours as lines you have
intersected with the (cable)line. If you select fewer wire colours than there are
intersected lines, then the missing wire colours will be automatically supplemented from
the last selected wire colour onwards.
The cable symbol also determines the alignment of the wire colour (derived from the pin
name) horizontal or vertical. You can adjust this by the setting under Parameters /
General / Cables.
228

Schematic
oder
229

WSCAD 51
Drawing cables and using wires from existing
cables
It is also possible to assign free wires from cables which have already been laid to cables
which have just been drawn. Use the menu command Schematic / Cable name type
and set the start point of the cable. Draw the line over the area of the line wires and set
the end point. Thereafter, abort entering the cable designation with . The Cable
Manager dialog appears.
You will see whether free wires exist in an existing cable by the colour difference and
when there is a number greater than 0 in the Free column.
Select the cable that you wish to use and then the information concerning the colourcode
name which was stored in the item database for this cable will appear in the
colour-code area. The colours or numbers of this cable which are assigned and still free
are indicated below. These colour abbreviations are also distinguished from one another
by colour. Fully assigned cables are labelled in the text by special colours. Now colours
which have not yet been used can be assigned with a double click of the mouse. Confirm
with OK, then the Cable Manager closes and you can place the cable designation on
the cable line. (-W104).
Hint
230
A cable with a sufficient number of free wires has been selected.

Schematic
231

WSCAD 51
Deleting cables
It is not necessary to delete all the wires on the diagram to remove a cable completely
from the set of drawings. Once a cable in the list is selected in the Cable Manger dialog,
the Delete button becomes active.
In so doing, the cable can be deleted from the entire set of drawings. All cable wires and
cable shields with the identical reference name are removed at the same time.
Hint
232
This function is not subject to the UNDO/REDO Manager and
cannot be undone.

Deleting cables graphically
Schematic
Only when you have activated the option Cable management on-line under
Parameters / General / Cables.
Delete a cable, for example, by marking with a window and then pressing the
key, then the entry in the cable database is removed automatically.
233

WSCAD 51
Cables as symbols
WSCAD 5 draws the cables in circuit diagrams by means of a cable wire symbol.
Cable-wire type symbols are positioned on the connection lines. While the cable line
formerly represented a special element, which is still supported for reasons of
compatibility with previous versions, the cable-wire type symbols are flexible in
application and numbering.
When drawing the line, the cable-wire symbols are placed on the intersections
automatically. Each cable-wire type symbol therefore corresponds to a wire in the
cable and can be numbered automatically from top to bottom or from left to right.
The symbols themselves consist of a body (e.g. a short, diagonal line) and a pin. In
addition, the cable designation and the cable type are converted into reference
names and symbol names of the cable wire symbols. Using a symbol for a cable also
has the advantage that it is possible to work with the database, so that values from the
database can be processed in the task lists (e.g. material lists).
Cable-wire type symbols can be numbered manually and automatically, in the same
way as terminal connections. The type of numbering is determined in the
configuration.
Instructions on creating cable lists and cable diagrams
234
Cable designations are only transferred when the cable type and
the cable designation are both present or can be assigned by the
external destination. (When the cable designation for the external
destination is missing but the cable type is present, the reference
name of the external destination with the prefix W is used as the
cable designation.)
When creating cable lists/cable diagrams, the automatic system
must know which components are internal and which components
are external. In the case of a terminal/symbol connection, the
assignment is given by the terminal connection: if the symbol (e.g.
motor) is connected to the external connection of the terminal then
the symbol is external and the terminal strip is internal. With a
terminal/terminal connection, the assignment is somewhat more
difficult. Every symbol which is not a terminal is recognised as an
external destination but is connected to a terminal. Or this symbol
is explicitly labelled using !ext.
When connecting external terminals / externally or internal terminal / internally
or connecting between two symbols, it is not possible to assign automatically without
additional information. This information must be entered in the form of the word !ext
(also possible without the ! character) in the Text1 or Text2 lines of the symbol
parameters of the external symbol. With several symbols (e.g. terminals), this
information must be entered for each symbol.
Hint
The information !ext is necessary for symbol/symbol or
terminal/terminal connections

Pasting circuit diagram macros with cables or
copying cables
Schematic
Special feature for pasting circuit diagram macros or circuit diagram pages which
already contain cables. If you have activated the Cable Manager when pasting the
circuit diagram macro or copying cables then, after placement, a cable dialog starts
which lists the cables which have been pasted or copied. During this process, the old
cable designations are used. A function text then only appears in the dialog when all
wires of the cable have the identical function text. If the function text is not
changed, then it is left as it is. The function text can be removed from all wires of the
cable by entering a space.
1st Method
The Change button starts the item database selection in which the cable type can be
changed. Another reference name can then be given to the new cable via the
Reference name window. In order to do this, you must change the reference name and
then click again at the top on the cable that you want to change
235

WSCAD 51
2nd Method
The cable management dialogue starts via Assign. There, from the cables already laid,
you can select the cable which has the necessary number of free wires in order to
assign the newly added cable to the selected cable. There, you can also decide on the
wire colours.
236

3rd Method
Schematic
Alternatively, you must correct the reference name of the cable used in the Reference
name field.
237

WSCAD 51
Cable shield
Settings
In the configuration Terminals + Cables you find settings which determine the shape of
a shield and the information transferred into automated listings. All these settings only
have an effect on newly drawn cable shields.
Settings
238
• Line type: Determines the line type (not: half circle)
• Radius: Determines the size of the half circle
• Name: This text becomes the function text of the cable shield
• Pin name: This is the name of the connection point (pin)
All these texts are normally not shown in the schematics, therefore they are marked as
invisible.
Example: Shield of the cable –W5
Note
Cables with shields must have a '1' in the field 'height' of the
material database, if you wish to work with the cable manager.

Schematic
239

WSCAD 51
Draw a cable shield
With the 'Schematic – Cable shield' command you start drawing a cable shield.
Set the start point and then the end point of the line, then cancel the command with the
right mouse button or . The component 'Cable shield' is created automatically.
The pin will be at the start point position, at the end point you will see a half circle.
Note
240
You can draw a cable shield only horizontally or vertically
The following screen shot shows 4 vertical connection lines, on the right is the starting
point of the cable shield.
1 2 3 4 start
Draw the line for the cable shield across the connection lines, set the end point and
cancel the line drawing function.
Compact module or Professional module without cable manager
Now you must enter the reference name of the cable that the shield belongs to.
Professional module with cable manager
The dialog of the cable manager appears:
All cables of the current project are listed in the dialog, cables which may have a shield
are marked with a '+' in the column 'Shield'.
Select an existing cable and click on OK. The dialog closes and the cable shield will be
completed in the schematics. The reference name is taken from the selected cable,
function text and pin name are marked as invisible. With the option 'Show all' of the

Schematic
cable manager you can list all cables in the current project, independent of whether the
cable has the correct entry in the material database ('1' in the field 'height').
If you select a cable without a cable shield, a dialog will ask you if the material database
should be adapted. If you answer with YES, the database field 'height' of that particular
cable will be set to '1'.
241

WSCAD 51
Cable shield drawn on both cable ends
Often a cable shield is shown twice in the schematics, sometimes it is connected on both
sides (externally and internally in the cabinet).
-X1 extern X2 intern
If you draw a cable shield twice, you must determine which of the shield components is
listed on the external side in the cable chart. Please enter '!ext' in Text1 or Text2 of the
Symbol parameters of the component 'cable shield' which is on the external side.
Note
242

You can also use cables with more than one shield. Matching
shields must have the same function text!!
Schematic
243

WSCAD 51
Black-Box
Creating a Black Box
The Black Box makes it easier to use WSCAD 5 without interruption. This function
allows you to create symbols directly in a schematics without having to open up the
Symbol editor.
To start this process, activate the menu item ‘Schematic - Black Box’. The first
instruction to appear in the information toolbar is: "Set first corner of rectangle".
The first click generates the start point of the rectangle which can be dragged to size with
the cursor. The second click fixes the size of the Black Box.
244

Black Box Pins
Schematic
Where the Black Box cuts into connection lines, pins are automatically placed and
numbered.
Note
The automatic numbering only applies to vertical connection lines
The sequence of the pin numbers follows the order in which the connection lines were
drawn (chronological order). The "oldest" of the connection lines is thus number "1".
Further pins can also be placed and numbered automatically. The process is ended with
the key or with a click of the right mouse button.
Please note that connection pins must always be placed on the "body"
of the Black Box
245

WSCAD 51
Editing the Black Box
When all the pins have been placed, the Black Box dialog opens up automatically. This
displays all the information about the Black Box, which can be edited.
Reference name, Symbol name and Part number
In the Professional module, the reference name must be entered, then you can move
directly into the Parts manager dialog via the button Parts from material database.
246

Schematic
When selecting parts, the values for Symbol name and Part name are copied across
(these are invisible in the drawing because of their prefixed "!").
In the Compact and Basic versions the fields can be filled in manually.
Pin name and number
The name and number of the pins can also be edited. After the dialog has been closed
with OK, the values in the Black Box are amended with extended, modified or new data.
247

WSCAD 51
248

Contact connections
Changing the symbol connection designations
Schematic
In order to start this process, activate the relevant symbol with the right mouse button.
Then select Connections in the context menu.
Changing the connections for a symbol
When you activate this command for a symbol, all parameters in the dialog are activated.
However, the way this looks depends on the symbol type chosen. The symbol type
affects the possible changes.
Symbol type Standard Symbol type Coil
249

WSCAD 51
Connection name, connection number
The name and number of the connection pin can also be edited. After ending the
dialog by clicking on the OK button, the changed values are supplemented, changed or
re-positioned at the symbol. The reference name and the symbol name can be
changed directly in the text field. In the Professional version, the change takes place
directly in the Item Manager by means of the command button Item out of database
(invoke the Item Manager with the pre-selection Designation). In the Compact and
Basic version, the fields can be filled in manually. The values for Symbol name and
Item designation are transferred by the Item Selector (not visible on the circuit
diagram due to “!” prefix).
250

Schematic
251

WSCAD 51
Plug Socket
Plug+socket
The Online Plug Manager is activated via Parameters / General / Plug/Socket
option: Online Plug Manager. The menu option Schematic/ Plug opens a context
menu in which you can decide whether you want to insert the symbols separately (plug,
socket) or in a process.
Insert Plug+Socket
Use this menu option when you want to insert plug symbols and socket symbols in
one or more existing connection line(s) simultaneously.
Procedure
Activate the menu option Connect+Load / Plug /Plug+Socket. Place the start point
of the plug line next to the connection line into which the Plug + Socket is to be
inserted. Click on the other end of the connection line and the Plug Manager dialog will
open.
Click on the New button and the Reference name input will open.
Click on the OK button and the Item Manager will open (the selection is determined by
the selection text in the std-st module).
252

Schematic
Select an item by clicking on it and the OK button and the information is saved in the
Plug Manger.
If you want to select an item for the socket immediately then you must confirm the
following dialog.
253

WSCAD 51
Click on the Yes button and the Item Manager will open (the selection is determined by
the selection text in the std-bu module).
Select an item by clicking on it and the OK button and the information is saved in the
Plug Manger.
The plug belonging to the selected socket is shown to you in the top of the dialog in the
Plug line (here, the identical reference name is crucial). See the selected coding in the
dialog on the right (in this case, the number code). The coding is stored in the
PLUG.TXT file. This is located in the database directory. This file contains the plug
coding and can be edited. Now select the appropriate connection assignment by
double clicking on the relevant numbers or colours (the current selection is shown to
you below).
254

Schematic
Now end the Plug Manager dialog with OK and the symbols in the circuit diagram will
be supplemented and numbered after you have placed the reference name.
Caution
The direction in which the line is drawn determines the direction of
the numbering. The order of the symbols is reversed with the shift
key.
Examples
Drawing direction of the plug line: from right to left + shift key
Drawing direction of the plug line: from right to left + shift key
255

WSCAD 51
Drawing direction of the plug line: from left to right
Drawing direction of the plug line: from left to right + shift key
256

Inserting connection diagram macro with
plug/socket or copying plug/socket
Schematic
Special feature for pasting circuit diagram macros or circuit diagram pages which
already contain plugs/sockets. If you have activated the Plug Manager when inserting
the circuit diagram macro or copying plugs/sockets then, after placement, a plug
dialog starts which lists the plugs/sockets which have been pasted or copied. During
this process, the old plug/socket designations are used. A function text then only
appears in the dialog when all the elements of the plug/socket have the identical
function text. If the function text is not changed, then it is left as it is. The function
text can be removed from all the elements of the plug/socket by entering a space.
257

WSCAD 51
Inserting plugs or sockets separately
Use this menu option when you only want to add plug symbols and socket symbols to
existing connection line(s).
Procedure
Activate the menu option Schematic / Plug /Plug (or Socket). The symbol set in the
Parameters is located at the cursor. If you want to rotate it, confirm with the right
mouse button and select the context menu option Flip X (horizontal) or Y (vertical).
Place the symbol at the end of the line.
Place it with a click of the left mouse button or Return and the Item assignment
will start in which you can select an item number and confirm the selection with OK.
(Abort the Item Selector with ESC and you will switch into the Online Plug Manager
automatically). However, if you place the symbol with the space bar or double click
then the Online Plug Manager opens immediately.
The elements listed here are available for you to assign. Select the plug (in this
example). The associated socket appears in the dialogue at the top and the current
allocation on the right. Now select the current pin which should be used on the right. If
sockets or plug symbols are already located on the left of the current symbol then this
reference name is used automatically.
258

Deleting plugs or sockets separately
Schematic
Select the symbol with the right mouse button and choose Delete in the context menu.
The element is removed.
When the Online Plug Manager is activated, corrections are carried out there
immediately (the contact is enabled again, in this case, Plug contact assignment 3).
259

WSCAD 51
Deleting plugs or sockets at one time
When the Online Plug Manager is activated, select the element and select the
Remove button.
And confirm the message box.
260

Changing a pin assignment
Click on a plug or socket symbol with the right mouse button.
Schematic
This opens up the associated context menu, select ‘Change pin / wire’. The
numbering/lettering of the connector pins or sockets is displayed in a dialog and the
connection of the currently selected pin is marked with an arrow.
Select a free pin and confirm with OK . The new pin assignment will then be copied
across.
261

WSCAD 51
262

Destination wiring
General
Schematic
To activate the destination wiring functionality you have to select the option Activate
destination wiring with menuitem Parameters / Common settings / Compatibility
.
263

WSCAD 51
Aids for drawing connection lines
Destination wiring is an important tool when you want to define the wiring in the
circuit diagram unambiguously. After that, you can then create a circuit diagram which
shows the exact point-to-point connections (keyword: obligatory wiring).
In order to use Destination wiring, three separate symbol libraries have been created in
which all elements of Destination wiring have been assembled.
Important
264
It is important to define the connection points for this element
precisely in order to establish the direction of the destination.
The wiring sequence is defined unambiguously by the choice of the respective
Destination-Wiring symbol. Each line which is to be laid is provided with the line
name and the name of the connection but the cross section, length and wire
colour can be provided as an option. This supplementary information will then be
available to you in the connection list (circuit diagram).
Hint
Destination wiring is only useful for circuit-diagram files.
Caution
All the information mentioned above up to the line names is only
available within a project. If diagram components (such as circuit
diagram pages) are copied within projects, then the lines which are
copied at the same time must be supplemented with the additional
information manually.

Destination wiring library
Schematic
The 'Destination wiring’ library (DW.BIB) contains all the components needed to use
destination wiring.
To enable the destination wiring to function, the symbols must be drawn up according to
certain rules and conventions.
The illustration shows the Destination wiring symbol bar.
If you allow the cursor to linger on a symbol, this generates a Tooltip which shows the
component name for the symbol. This is very helpful for identification purposes.
265

WSCAD 51
The destination wiring elements
There are various destination wiring elements with different functions or tasks.
DW elements with 1 or 2 connection points could also be replaced by
connection lines.
Elements with 1 or 2 connection points serve mainly to use the advantages of the
automatic connections (horizontal and vertical). Corner pieces (or angles) are used to
connect two lines running at right angles to each other; arrows document the
continuation of the line in another position.
Corner pieces or angles
266
• Corner(1) Connection line from the left turns up or vice versa
• Corner(2) Connection line from the left turns down or vice versa
• Corner(3) Connection line from above turns right or vice versa
• Corner(4) Connection line from below turns right or vice versa
links It is essential to define the line name in order to create the line cross
references.
Arrows
indicate lines which end at one position and continue at another position. The line name
and connection name must be entered. The conductor colour, cross-section and length
can also optionally be specified
Outgoing arrows (connection line is continued in another position)
• Arrow(1) Arrow direction to the left
• Arrow(2) Arrow direction upwards
• Arrow(3) Arrow direction to the right
• Arrow(4) Arrow direction downwards
Incoming arrows (connection line is continued from another position)
• Arrow(1) Arrow direction from the left
• Arrow(2) Arrow direction from above
• Arrow(3) Arrow direction from the right
• Arrow(4) Arrow direction from below

Elements with 3 connection points (T-pieces)
Schematic
Only by using these elements is it possible to create T-connections which make it clear
which points are to be connected to each other. The names of all 3-pole DW elements
are derived from these.
If you look at the buttons on the first toolbar illustrated above, you will note the
following:
The common connection point (with 2 wires) is depicted by a small triangle.
The secondary connection is depicted by a red line.
The following illustration explains in detail the naming of the DW elements, using as an
example the element 'T-piece left, destination 1 up -> destination 2 down'.
On the far left the element is shown as it appears in the toolbar (button). Picture the
connection as a T-piece left consisting of 2 connections. Connection 1 begins on the left
on the common point and leads upwards to destination 1. Connection 2 begins at the
same point but leads downwards.
Rule
The following rule must be adhered to when using these DW elements:
The common connection point, identified by a triangle, must ONLY
be connected to a component, NOT to another 3-pole DW element.
T-pieces T left
• T-piece1 T left; destination 1 up, destination 2 left
• T-piece2 T left; destination 1 up, destination 2 down
• T-piece3 T left; destination 1 down, destination 2 left
• T-piece4 T left; destination 1 down, destination 2 up
T-pieces T up
• T-piece1 T up; destination 1 left, destination 2 up
• T-piece2 T up; destination 1 left, destination 2 right
• T-piece3 T up; destination 1 right, destination 2 left
• T-piece4 T up; destination 1 right, destination 2 up
T-pieces T down
267

WSCAD 51
268
• T-piece1 T down; destination 1 left, destination 2 right
• T-piece2 T down; destination 1 left, destination 2 down
• T-piece3 T down; destination 1 right, destination 2 left
• T-piece4 T down; destination 1 right, destination 2 down
T-pieces T right
• T-piece1 T right; destination 1 up, destination 2 right
• T-piece2 T right; destination 1 up, destination 2 down
• T-piece3 T right; destination 1 down, destination 2 up
• T-piece4 T right; destination 1 down, destination 2 right

Creating a destination wiring element
Schematic
Normally the standard symbols supplied with the destination wiring library cover all
applications. These symbols have been created in a 1.28mm grid and thus fit into the
2.5mm drawing grid which is normally used.
However, if you wish to create new destination wiring symbols, you must make sure that
these T symbols (with 3 connection points) conform to the following rules:
Rule
• Component type 'Destination wiring'
• Reference name 'DW'
• 3 connection points
• The common pin (which must only be connected to a component) is given the pin
name '!a'
• The pin which gives the 'primary' connection to the common pin, is given the pin
name '!1'
• The pin which gives the secondary connection to the common pin, is given the pin
name '!2!
• The component name should describe the intended application exactly
• The grid spacing of the connection points must fit the drawing grid normally used
According to standard practice, the incoming connection line
always joins pin !1 and the outgoing one leaves pin !2. The
component to be connected is always attached to pin !a.
Example
Component name: T-piece down: Destination1 left -> Destination2 right
Component connection (Pin name !a)
Incoming connection from the left (Pin name !1)
Outgoing connection to the right (Pin name !2)
Reference name (!DW)
Tip
The shape and colour of the DW element should be drawn such that
you can easily recognize both the common connection and the
secondary connection.
269

WSCAD 51
Working with Destination wiring
One advantage of the destination wiring symbols is that connection lines are
automatically created (and broken) – both horizontally and vertically – when DW
elements are added. If the DW elements are inserted logically and automatic connection
line generation is used, the manual drawing of connection lines can be largely dispensed
with.
The additional data such as connection name, cross-section, length and colour are not
saved in the drawing pages themselves but in an Access database. The name of this
database is formed from the Project name + the extension '_Vltgn.MDB' and saved in the
project directory. The database is automatically updated when the UNDO, REDO, File
Copy, Delete File and Auto Line Name commands are used, but only within the project, if
the file is not loaded as an 'external' file.
When the project is opened, an Access database is created for the line names, if not
already in existence.
Warning
270
If the database *_Vltgn.MDB is lost, it can NOT be fully restored
from the drawing files. If it is rebuilt, it will not contain the
connection name, colour, cross section or line length. The data
must then be filled in manually.
The data on colour and cross section are not intended to be used on screen but are
meant to be included in the wiring chart. The colours on the screen can be altered via
the menu command 'Settings – Colours' for connection lines and line names.
Please make sure you differentiate clearly between the destination wiring (for internal
connections) and the cables (for external connections). When inserting cables, use the
Cable manager as before, under the menu item 'Automatic - Cables – Cable manager
.
Important
If entire drawing pages are copied across between projects or if
you insert drawing macros, only the line names are copied across.
The rest of the data must be added manually.
Inserting the DW element 'Corner'
Angles are used to change the direction of connection lines. Choose an corner symbol
from the DW.BIB library by clicking with the left mouse button on the symbol. After the
element has been placed (likewise with a click of the left mouse button) a connection is
automatically generated to the symbols or to the other DW elements. Also note the
contents of the tooltip when you select the element.
Example: Angle => Auto. connection to Q2.

Inserting T-pieces
Schematic
The T-pieces form the connection between the attached components and other DW
elements. This allows the line routing to be traced accurately. They allow the branching
of connection lines.
Example
When you place the DW element T down: Destination1 left -> Destination2 right (in
the Example) above the circuit breaker , the connection line is automatically drawn
between the angle and the circuit breaker contact.
Line routing
271

WSCAD 51
At the same time the form of the T-pieces determines the wiring route (from the
common connection to the primary destination, and from the common connection to the
secondary destination).
A useful feature
As there are many different forms of destination wiring elements in the DW symbol bar,
special attention must be paid to the selection of the appropriate element. A helpful
feature is that when 3-pole DW elements (T pieces) are placed on an existing DW
element or a node, the previous element is deleted. This allows DW elements to be
exchanged very easily.
Rule
272
The common connection point, marked with a triangle, must ONLY
be connected with a component, NOT with another 3-pole DW
element.
Example of correctly used destination wiring
Analysis of the connection list for the correct application
Example of incorrectly used destination wiring:

Error
The common connections of the DW elements (via K1 and K2) do
not point to component connections, thus breaking the rule
Inserting the DW element 'Arrow'
Schematic
Arrows indicate line routings which end in one position and continue in another
position. In this case you must enter a line name and, where there are more than two
line ends with the same line name (wire number), the connection name as well. The
other data such as conductor colour, cross section and length is optional for this item and
are only taken into account in the wiring chart.
When a connection line is automatically generated after a DW element 'Arrow' has been
placed, the dialog 'Enter line name' appears, so that you are reminded to specify the
line name, the connection, the colour, the cross section and the length of the conductor
to be placed.
273

WSCAD 51
Enter a new line name and confirm with the enter key (not the OK button), or open the
List field 'Name' and select an existing name. If connections with exactly the same line
name already exist, these will be displayed in the large list field on the right.
Each open connection can only be assigned once (a beginning and an
end each count as an open connection).
If you want to assign the newly-drawn line to an existing open line, simply select with a
double click the appropriate entry in the list field on the right. Any existing data such as
connection name, colour etc. will be copied immediately.
Otherwise you should additionally give the line a connection name. Only then will
you later be able to identify this open line end exactly. Select the OK button and the line
name will be placed automatically and a further arrow symbol will be placed under the
cursor.
Quit out with or the right mouse button.
Hint
274
The values for colour and cross section are stored additionally in
text files ('Colours.TXT' or. 'CrossSec.TXT') in the database
directory and can be added to later.
Example
In the drawing you can see, on the right-hand side, the first arrow to be placed (direction
right), with the line name L1 which you assigned or entered as described earlier.
The next arrow is under the cursor and is ready to be placed, which you do by clicking
the left mouse button or by pressing .
When the element '>' is placed the lines are automatically drawn to the left as far as
the next symbol connections or DW elements. They must therefore be exactly aligned (Y
– co-ordinate).
A further feature is that an identical line name can be entered several times on a drawing
page (to wires with identical potential). The individual connections are differentiated
here by means of the connection name. The individual connections can then be
analysed exactly in a wiring chart.
Example
Extract from a possible application with line cross references. Within the drawing the line
cross references indicate the continuation point of each connection.

Shortcuts
Schematic
You can greatly increase your speed of working by using shortcuts instead of the normal
selection of DW elements with the mouse. WSCAD supports the following shortcuts for
DW elements:
Shortcut DW elements
- Left arrow T-Pieces left
- Right arrow T-Pieces right
- Up arrow T-Pieces up
- Down arrow T-Pieces down
- Left arrow Arrows
- Right arrow "
- Up arrow Corner
- Down arrow "
When you use a shortcut a small dialog appears offering the corresponding DW
elements:
You can also navigate using the arrow keys. Make the selection with the key
and quit out with the key.
Drawing a connection line manually
When creating open lines manually, by drawing a connection line, the connection
parameters dialog appears just as it does when working with DW arrow elements:
275

WSCAD 51
If however you do not wish to input this information immediately when drawing the
connection lines, or generally prefer just to enter the line names and dispense with the
extended line information, you can set this option in the configuration.
The relevant options can be found under 'Settings – General – Connect + Load'.
276

Schematic
If the option 'Disable request to enter line name' is set, the 'Input line name' prompt
does not automatically appear after you have manually drawn an open line. If you later
enter the line name via the menu command 'Connect + Load – Line name', a dialog
appears with the full range of options.
The option 'Input line name in general input field' disables the 'Input line name'
dialog and the general input field is used to make the entries. This means that the
additional data such as connection name, cross section, colour etc., can no longer be
entered.
Modifying line parameters later
To modify line parameters later, click with the right mouse button on the connection line.
DW point representation
WSCAD 5 also allows you to display 3-pole DW elements as points (nodes). You can
change the setting at any time via the menu command 'Schematic – DW Point
representation'. Full functionality is retained.
DW point
representation
DW representation
277

WSCAD 51
Hint
278
The conversion can only work properly if the correct destination
wiring library is set in the configuration. There must also be
additional components for the point (node) forms in the destination
wiring library, with the same component names as the
corresponding 3-pole components but with a trailing '_P'. The
normal DW elements will then be replaced by nodes when the
option is set. These components are included in the library
supplied with the program.

Language settings
Using a foreign languages character set
Schematic
Activate the Windows Language settings in the control panel under Regional options
and choose the desired character sets (languages). The example shows Windows 2000.
In WSCAD for Windows under Parameters / Fonts for general text, select a font
which supports the current style (in this case Kyrillic) and activate the Change font
option under Parameters / Desktop.
279

WSCAD 51
General text, for example, is now entered in the style of the Greek keyboard, i.e. with
the Greek characters.
280

Functionalities
Unit and Field designation
Schematic
The elements Unit and Field designation (abbreviated to UFD) are used for
forming groups within a project. Only one system and location identification is available
per page and is assigned to all reference names (identification of the resource) of the
page automatically. The identifiers = and + must be present so that it is possible to
distinguish between reference names.
• The Unit designation is prefixed with an ‘=’.
• The Field designation is prefixed with an ‘+’.
There may only be Unit designation or only Field designation present, however both
will usually be used. A complete reference name (see also DIN 40719, Part 2) however
always consists of a Unit and Field designation and resource identification:
=1EB14+12A1E-F6
The length of a reference name is limited to 48 characters, even if the Unit and Field
designation is only assigned virtually.
Hint
If you want to assign an UFD to a symbol, which differs from the
default UFD assigned to this page, then you need only add the
desired UFD to the reference name. However, it is crucial that the
identifiers =, + and - are assigned at the same time.
Only the different identification needs to be entered, thus only Unit, or only Field, or
possibly also both if neither system nor location are identical to that of the page, or
none if system and location of the page apply.
Example
+12A1E-F6 Field identification +12A1E resource identification -F6 system
identification as for page (if available)
Visible system location identifications are displayed using several lines. In this case,
only that part of the UFD is shown which differs from the UFD which generally applies.
Hint
Decide in advance whether you want to work with UFD. Use the
UFD on all pages. It is easily possible to change an existing UFD
while introducing it afterwards is substantially more difficult and
more time-consuming.
You can also change an existing UFD later. With activated Contactor Manager, the
contactor project list is likewise adjusted automatically just as the PLC project file is
281

WSCAD 51
with active PLC Manager. Change the UFD on all pages and replace by means of the
reference or in the Project Manager.
Hint
282
Do not use Delete Immediately or Delete/Move for removing the
UFD, otherwise you will bypass Contactor Manager and PLC
Manager.
When working with Unit and Field designation, the local UFD is placed in front of the
reference names of the symbols if no other UFD has been placed in front of the
symbols manually. Complete references are always processed internally.
When changing an UFD, you must enter the portion which has to be replaced completely.
For example, if you want to change = Sys+Loc1 to = Sys+Loc2 on all pages, then you
must also enter the leading system component at the same time. With the automatic
functions, the Unit and Field designation act differently:
• Cross-reference to line: The Unit and/or Field designation of the destination
are placed in front of the cross-reference text when these differ from the
identifications of the source. Only the texts which differ are displayed, i.e. with the
same system but different location, for example, the local identification only and
not the system identification.
• Terminal diagram: The reference name of the terminal strip is output with the
system and local identification. Destination designations with the same UFD as the
terminal strip are output without the UFD.
• Material list: Unit and Field designation are placed in front of all reference
names when the output is without a graphics form.
• Connection lists: System and location identifications are placed in front of all
reference names.
• Separate reference: The complete reference name including the Unit and Field
designation must be entered. Reference group: Complete reference name
including the system location identification, without attached numbers, e.g.
+Loc1-F for all safety devices with location identification Loc1.

UFD Area
Schematic
With UFD Area, it is also possible to draw a Unit and Field designation on an existing
page which differs from the UFD on the page. I.e. the symbols within this area are
located at another Unit and Field.
Restrictions for UFD area
In a standard project (not a CPP project), identifications (UFD's) must be present in
the drawing frame for which an additional independent UFD area is to be created. In
other words, a Unit designation when the new area is to contain a system
identification and/or a Field designation when the new area is to contain a location
area. If this is not the case, a message will appear and the process will be aborted.
In a CPP project, systems are always present in the drawing frame and in most cases
location identifications also. The symbol types to which the new area applies are coils,
PLC main elements, standard symbols and terminals. Excluded are contacts, PLC
auxiliary elements, cables, plugs and shields.
Caution
With terminals, you must specify new reference names for the
terminal-strip component which lies outside the UFD area (i.e.
when the terminal strip does not lie completely within the UFD
area).
After activating the menu option, you must enclose the new UFD area with a rectangle.
283

WSCAD 51
After completion, a dialogue appears from which you can select a new Unit and Field
designation. In a CPP project, you can select the system identifications from the
existing part-projects, the location identification is according to choice. In a standard
project, you can specify any system and location identification you like. During the
input, the necessary characters = and + are produced automatically. The graphics can
be organised using the parameter settings. The colour, type of line, text size and
the text position of the UFD are changed.
The UFD area is created and the Unit and Field designation (= H1+C1) is placed with
OK.
Once the UFD area has been created, this can be changed again later with a click of the
right mouse button. In the context menu, the commands Delete or Change UFD are
made visible. Delete removes this area again and corrects the display of contactor
contacts and PLC auxiliary elements again (Contactor manager and PLC active).
Change restarts the dialogue in which you can make changes (graphics and
identifications) to the selected area.
284

Schematic
The use of the UFD area can be seen in the Material browser, for example. A new
UFD is assigned to the emergency-stop key marked in the example. It is therefore
recognised in all automatically generated lists.
For example, coil Q2 is given its own UFD area, and the contacts are copied in the
reference name online.
Important: UFD areas can only be drawn, deleted or changed. No other
operations such as copy or move, are possible, and neither is inserting a drawing macro
into a UFD area.
285

WSCAD 51
Visible in the Contactor browser.
286

Bus
Schematic
The 'Bus' command is used to draw lines representing a common connection bus.
This is most often used in electronic schematics, where it is logical not to have
connection lines directly between components, when you have multiple common
connections between components that represent a similar function, e.g. data bus,
address bus, etc.. It can also be used to represent many lines that continue in another
location, e.g. other pages.
To draw a bus, select the 'Bus' command and enter the start and end points on the
screen, or by inputting the co-ordinates. The procedure is the same as for the 'Lines'
command.
The bus is drawn in a line width thicker than the normal connection lines and the default
colour can be set independently of the other lines.
Hint
You cannot name a BUS line
The function of a bus differs enormously from a normal connection line:
The bus line is only a visual representation for when many lines are continued at
other locations, e.g. different pages. Connection lines can end at a Bus, but each
connection line must have a 'line name' associated with it. For those connection lines
ending at a bus, the cross reference capability, (to other line ends with the same name),
is disabled. The bus has no effect on the electrical connection, open ended lines,
connected to the bus, with the same line name are recognised as being connected (there
will just be no cross reference generated). The list generator recognises the connection
lines as being tied together (and NOT to the BUS) only by use of the line names. It
makes no difference if the connection lines end at one or more busses, if they are open
or go to a plug.
You can draw as many separate Bus lines as you want.
287

WSCAD 51
Path text
There is a special text entry under the menu option Schematic / Path text. This text
should only be set once for each circuit diagram. The display is in the colour of the
variables.
The Path text becomes listed as function text for all symbols which are placed in the
path (if the symbol has no own function text).
288

Sheet texts
Schematic
Under menu option Schematic / Sheet texts are there a special text input. Over a
dialogue you be able to edit the file specific texts directly.
The editing is not affected by the frame protection. The Text allocators for this must
be in the frame present.
See also
What Text allocators are available?
Alternatively the texts can be worked on over the project management for the
individual files.
289

Modify
Modify component
Component elements
The 'Component elements' command is used to modify the graphic elements that
make up the shape of the component (e.g. lines, circles,...).
It can also be used to modify any text that has been entered for the component (e.g.
Part number, Function text, Aux. text 1, etc.). The features and operation are the same
as the symbol editor.
To use 'Component elements', select the command and identify a component using the
left mouse button. Then identify the element that you wish to modify. If you are
modifying graphic elements, the appropriate option will be displayed (e.g. if you select a
line, you may modify the line type or delete the line). Also, when identifying graphic
elements, WSCAD 5 highlights the selected element and the cursor points to it. This
helps when the component has a lot of graphics associated with it and you may be
unsure as to which element you are about to modify.
If, after identifying the component, you then identify text associated with the component,
instead of a graphic element, the appropriate text modification menu appears. (e.g. if
you selected the Function text, the 'Function text' menu appears), where you can select
the appropriate modification command.
Note that if the text is invisible on the drawing (!), but you know its location in reference
to the component, you can still identify the text for modification by pointing to the text
location and the appropriate text modification menu will appear.
Hint
You cannot modify: Pins, Component names and Reference names
as they have specific modification commands associated with them.
291

WSCAD 51
Pins
With this command you can modify pins of components already placed in your
schedule. Feature and operation are the same as the function of the symbol editor. First
select the component, and you get a menu with all available pin parameters. Decide what
parameter you want to modify and then select the pin you want to modify.
292

Active parts
Modify
In one enclosure there could be more than one component (e.g. 74LS00). This
typically refers to electronic components where there could be several similar
components included in one enclosure (or device), e.g. several NAND gates on one chip.
If a component is selected, a window appears with the numbers of components per
enclosure. With the component 7400, the numbers from 1 to 4 are displayed, and with
7404 it would be the numbers 1 to 6. Every number represents a group number. If you
select a group (= number), all pin names and numbers will be assigned automatically.
In the menu 'Automatic function-Automatic numbering' the distribution will
automatically be done for the complete drawing set, with automatic assignment. If this is
not desired, you should create only one Component/Enclosure with the 'Create Component'
command. The single subcomponents of such a component, must not be placed on
the same page, but may be placed on any other page in the drawing set.
The first group (first number) of a component must definitely be drawn (even if it does
not have a direct function), because the Power pins (invisible) are only in the first group.
293

WSCAD 51
Pin number
Pin numbers are normally entered when a component is created using the
commands on the 'Editor database' menu. However, after a component has been placed,
the pin numbers can be modified at any time using the 'Pin numbers' command.
To modify a pin number:
• Select the command and then select a component with the left mouse
button (or key).
• The cursor is automatically positioned at the first pin.
• The input field, at the bottom of the screen, displays the existing
component pin number.
• Enter a new pin number or accept the old one by pressing the
key.
• The cursor jumps automatically to the next pin.
After the last pin has been numbered the procedure terminates, or you can terminate at
any time by pressing the right mouse button (or key).
Hint
294
With this command it is very easy to number component pins
manually. However, the position and direction of the pin numbers
are determined by the pins. To modify the position and direction
use the 'Modify- Pins' command.

Component type
Modify
With this command you can change the type of a component already placed in your
schedule. Many automatic functions like cross-reference, numbering, contactor manager
of PLC manager apply to the component type, therefore you should only use this
command with care. For most components the type is Standard.
295

WSCAD 51
Modify Symbol parameters
General
To modify Symbol parameters, select the 'Symbol parameters' command, then
the symbol you want to modify and the 'Symbol parameters' menu appears, displaying
the corresponding information associated with the component (The width of the menu
window is dynamic, as it expands to fit the length of the text):
Move the selection bar to the parameter to be modified and select it with the left mouse
button (or key) and epending on the parameter chosen, you will then be
prompted for the modification.
Hint
296
In addition to the Symbol parameters some frequently used
commands are available in this menu
You can modify:
• Reference name
• Component name
• Part number This is used as an index for the database access. When 'Part
number' is selected and the database access is enable, a dialog appears showing
a list of the corresponding part numbers available in the database, from which a
selection can be made. If you identify the required part and accept it with the left
mouse button the component name, part number and text2 will be taken from
the database, whereas function text and text1 will be unchanged. If you cancel
the database dialog, or if there are no appropriate parts in the database, you can
modify the part number manually.

Note
Note
If the contactor manager is on and you change the part number of a
contactor, the comb, pin numbers and cross reference text will
automatically be updated (same function as 'Modify contactor').
Modify
• Function text This can be transferred to terminal chart, cable chart and material
list by use of text allocators. If the contactor manager is on, the function text is
also shown when a corresponding contact is to be placed.
• You can change the component type
• Text 1 … Text 16 for additional information such as power consumption. You can
transfer this information to graphic forms using the appropriate text allocators
(Text 3…. Text 16 only in the material list).
• Text 2 is also used by the automatic contactor determination.
• Direct changing of function text and additional texts by right mouse-click on
the text
Using the Object properties with the right mouse click you have
fast access to the Symbol parameters
Take information from the database
Information can be taken from the database and copied into the symbol, when the
database access is enabled, and when you make a selection in the database selection
dialog. Text2 always gets the text from the database field 'Text2'. If Text2 has already
be set in the symbol editor, position and visibility are kept. Otherwise the text will
become invisible and set under the reference name of the symbol.
Text3….. Text16 only get completed if the text is already specified in the symbol editor,
AND if a database field is assigned in the configuration.
297

WSCAD 51
Symbol – additional texts
The symbol parameters cover 16 additional texts altogether. You can edit these
additional texts at any time via the Symbol parameter menu.
298

Enabling additional texts to be displayed
Modify
In order to fill the additional texts in the circuit diagram with values from the Item
database, you must pre-assign these texts in the Symbol editor (except for Text 2).
The additional texts must also be linked to fields of the database.
Example Parameters of a power coil
Here, in the Symbol editor, you can see an Additional text 3 in position : x for a
power-coil symbol.
299

WSCAD 51
300

Additional texts in the material lists
Modify
Only the wild cards which are provided for this purpose have to be on the form for the
material list to enable the symbol parameter texts in the material list to be used.
301

WSCAD 51
Linking additional texts to fields from the
database
The Additional texts 2 to 16 can accept values directly from the database while a
symbol is being loaded. However, this is so providing the additional texts of the symbol
have already been assigned in the symbol editor. It is also necessary to specify which
values from the database are to be transferred into which additional text. In the
configuration under Parameters / General / Connect+Load, set up the reference
between the additional texts and the material database. Set the respective Additional
texts 3, 4 and 5 to 16 in the Symbol parameters list field and, in the database field,
set the field from which the respective additional text is to accept the information. After
placing the symbol and assigning the item concerned, the existing additional texts are
swapped with the values from the database.
Example Additional text 3 linked to the Voltage field from item database
302

Additional items
Modify
Standard, main element and coil type symbols can be used to manage additional
items. Clicking on the additional items symbol parameter starts a dialogue in which
you can store up to 10 more item numbers for the currently selected symbol in
addition so that these can be evaluated later as well in the material list. The settings
made apply to this symbol alone. However, they are transferred at the same time when
copying a symbol.
In this dialogue, select the Module name field, click on the Database button and then
the Item Manager opens. There, look for the relevant item and transfer it to the table.
303

WSCAD 51
The minimum information for the values to be saved is the data in the fields for
Number and Module name.
With the control commands + and - you can vary the number of selected items and
remove them again with the Delete X button.
304

Object Properties
Object Properties
Modify
This menu command is located within the menu 'Modify'. The object properties (line
type, line width, color, text size etc.) can be altered very easily here. Objects are
Simple Text, Text, Line, Rectangle, Circle, Connection Line and Symbol. The
changes are made with reference to the page and the selection, i.e. all the selected
objects of one type within one page of the schematic can be modified identically. In order
to carry out a modification at least one object must be selected ( by selecting with a
window). It does not matter whether this has been done before the menu item is opened
or subsequently.
First select the object type to be modified before you select any objects. This opens up a
context menu.
Choose the desired selection function and select a range or individual objects. Quit out
from the procedure with the right mouse button or . The number of modifiable
properties depends on the object.
305

WSCAD 51
Simple Text
The modifiable properties of the object Text are grouped into their own dialog. If the
buttons and options are greyed out, this indicates that the selected elements have
different settings.
The program also shows how many invisible texts there are within the selected range.
Modify the elements by clicking or selecting and then click the OK button.
306

Text
Modify
The modifiable properties of the object Simple Text are grouped into their own dialog.
If the buttons and options are greyed out, this indicates that the selected elements have
different settings.
The program also shows how many invisible texts there are within the selection. Modify
the elements by clicking or selecting and then click the OK button.
307

WSCAD 51
Hint
308
The UNDO function cannot be used here

Line, Rectangle, Circle and Connection Line
Modify
The modifiable properties of the objects Line, Rectangle, Circle and Connection Line
are grouped into their own dialog.
The program also shows how many objects there are within the selected range. Modify
the elements by clicking or selecting and then click the OK button.
Note
The UNDO function cannot be used here
309

WSCAD 51
Symbol modification
The modifiable properties of any selected symbol are grouped into their own dialog,
which is very similar to the Materials browser dialog.
310

Excluding components from the Materials List
Modify
Select one or more fields in the 'Exclude' column. Then click on the relevant buttons
(1and 2) to change the status. You can also change the status by double clicking the
relevant field.( ).
311

WSCAD 51
Navigating within the Dialog
←→ ↓ Using the arrow keys you can move the active field within the dialog. Use the
keyboard to start your input into the field (or double click). The key takes you to
the next field, Shift + Tab takes you to the previous field..
312

Component Name , Function Text and Additional
Text 1..16 and Manufacturer
Modify
Each of these fields is activated by a double click. After editing, close the dialog with OK
and the texts are automatically updated in the drawing. Command buttons in the dialog
control the editing functions. Button 1 attaches an exclamation mark to all selected texts
which thus become invisible in the drawing. Button 2 reverses the procedure.
1 2
For text editing, buttons 1 to 3 are used. Button 1 is used to cut text (CTRL +X),
button 2 copies text (CTRL +C) and button 3 inserts text (CTRL +V). Click in the
relevant field(s) in order to use these editing shortcuts.+
1 2 3
A special case is inputting new text
If you are inputting new texts into "empty" fields, you must position them in the
schematic when you have ended the dialog. The relevant symbol is greyed out and the
cursor with the text is positioned on this symbol. The texts are positioned one after the
other.
Texteingabe Platzierung im Plan
313

WSCAD 51
Assigning Parts
The button Assign part number is used in order to access the Parts manager directly
and choose a part from the database.
If the option 'Contactors Online...' is active in the dialog, all the modified contactor
data such as comb, contact pins and cross references are updated in the drawing as soon
as you leave the Materials browser. If the field is not active, once you have quit out of
the dialog a further dialog is displayed. Select OK to write the modifications into the
drawings.
Hint
314
If you use this function, it can take a little time to update the
drawings

Hints to use the Dialog
Sorting
Modify
The visible columns in the dialog can be displayed in various ways. You can highlight a
column by clicking in the column header.
The menu symbols become active and you can set the sort order alphabetically to
Ascending (button 1) or Descending (button 2).
1 2
Hide/unhide columns:
In order to keep the dialog uncluttered, you can hide or unhide individual columns, so
you only have to display a column when you actually need it. Click with the right mouse
button in the column header to display the context menu in which you can unhide the
individual columns.
315

WSCAD 51
316

Reference replacement
Reference replacement
Modify
The 'Reference replacement' command is used to automatically change the first
few letters of the component reference name for all similar components in a drawing set
and also to automatically change the size of all reference names in a drawing set. As a
reference name can also include a unit designation and/or field designation (UFD), this
function enables you to replace the UFD in the complete drawing set.
Replace text
WSCAD 5 can change reference names, even if the component is already
numbered.
Parts stored in the component libraries are assigned Reference names that help to
identify them, e.g. R for a resistor, C for a capacitor, F for a Fuse. If you do not agree
with these assignments, you can change them with this command, e.g. substituting a 'Q'
with a 'B', even if the components are already placed in your schedule and numbered. To
change a reference name, select the 'Replace text' command and you are prompted for
the "replaceable tokens", i.e. the characters of the existing name that you wish to
replace. After entering the characters you are prompted to enter the "new tokens" (or
characters). After entering the new characters, WSCAD 5 processes each of the
drawings in turn and replaces the existing Reference names with the new ones. During
the replacement process the information bar shows the name of the file currently being
processed.
Example: If you want to change circuit breaker 'Reference Names' from '-Qxx' to '-
Bxx': enter '-Q' first, then '-B'. All the components designated '-Qxx' will be changed to
'-Bxx'.
If you are using UFD in your project, internally the local UFD (of the current page) is
combined with the reference name, if you have not manually added a UFD to the
reference name. Therefore you must also enter a reference name including the UFD, if
you want to replace a reference name in such case.
Example
The local UFD is '=27A12+2C5', the reference name is '-S16' and should be
replaced with '-S2.3':
Ref. name to be replaced =27A12+2C5-S16
Hint
New ref. name =27A12+2C5-S2.3
The local UFD of the current page is automatically shown at the
input prompt. Please press the 'END' key before any other text,
otherwise the input field will be cleared.
If you want to change the UFD, enter only the UFD text
Example
317

WSCAD 51
318
You want to change UFD '=27A12' to '=15A12':
UFD TO BE REPLACED =27A12
New UFD =15A12
This command changes not only the UFD in front of the reference name, but also the
local UFD on all pages of your drawing set.
If you only enter '=27' and '=15', all UFD's beginning with '=27' will be replaced with
'=15' !
Tip
This command provides an easy method of making Reference
names visible, or invisible, in the drawings
It also works if the Reference names are numbered.
The length of the Reference name is limited to 48 characters.
The replacement process, for the characters in a Reference name, is case sensitive.

Change size
Modify
To change the size of the Reference names in all the drawings, select the 'Change size'
command and then select the new size from the list that appears in a dialog.
319

WSCAD 51
Foreign languages
General
The use of foreign languages is taken for granted, particularly in international
companies. Projects which are provided for foreign customers inland must be presented
to both the technical designer and the customer in the usual language. WSCAD 5 is able
to display all the texts of the free graphics as well as the symbol parameters
Text1...16 and function text in up to 3 languages. The technical designer can initially
create the diagram in the host language (= version language of WSCAD 5) and then
transfer the foreign language texts to the diagram as well. The fact that the
underlying dictionary is also well able to be used to standardise the texts can be
inferred from the Quicktext section.
320

Lexicon file format
Modify
The lexicon consists of a database in the ACCESS format with the lexicon table. Thus, it
is also possible to edit the lexicon using Microsoft ACCESS. Each language appears in the
database table in a separate column and each entry appears on a separate line.
Specify the lexicon with which you want to work under Parameters / General /
Directories / Dictionary.
If you enter a filename which does not already exist, the file is created with the
standard languages German (DE) and English (GB).
Hint
Do not change the structure when working with external programs.
321

WSCAD 51
Editing the lexicon
After invoking the lexicon via the menu option Change / Foreign language / Edit
lexicon, you will see the name of the current lexicon file (= database) in the dialog
heading as it is set in the configuration under Parameters / General / Directories
(here e.g. the database Translate.mdb).
The language identification appears as a column heading and the host language is
underlined.
Hint
322
The dialog size and column widths can be changed by dragging
them with the mouse. These are saved when the dialog is ended.
New lexicon entry
Another entry can be created at the end of the lexicon by using the New entry button.

Modify
The entry is confirmed with and can be aborted with . You can switch
to the desired language field with the arrow keys or and start inputting the
translation directly.
The entry recognises whether an appropriate host language entry is already present.
Editing a lexicon entry
The input mode of the field concerned is activated by double-clicking on a cell while
maintaining the existing text, which is recognised by the different background colour.
However, if you mark a cell without double clicking on it and start entering text directly
via the keyboard, then any existing text is deleted.
Hint
The entry is aborted with and you can switch between fields
with the cursor keys.
Of course, you can also use and to copy texts.
This also applies to texts, which have been saved to the Windows
clipboard from an external program (translation program) etc.
Searching for a lexicon entry
The Search button offers this function also and opens an entry field in which you can
enter the search term. The display is updated immediately with each character entered.
The search is carried out in the host language.
Deleting an entry
In order to delete an entry, select the cell or line concerned and delete using the Delete
button, the key or . If the host language is affected as well, after
prompting, the entire entry is deleted, otherwise just the field concerned.
323

WSCAD 51
Exporting texts
After invoking the lexicon via the menu option Change / Foreign language / Edit
lexicon, you can use the Export button to create an ACCESS database or a text file
into which the texts are to be exported.
As a text file: there is a text line for each entry and each language is separated by a #.
The languages which have been output are located in the first line of text.
As an ACCESS file: a database is generated with the lexicon table. A column is available
for each language and a field for each entry. This database is created in the respective
project path according to choice.
Example
Click on the Save button and then the dialog (Language selection) will start.
324

Modify
With Options, you can specify which languages are to be exported and whether all texts
should be exported or only those texts with no translation. The output is in the form of
an ACCESS file in the default format (ACCESS 97 or ACCESS 2000) or a text file. In
the setting for ACCESS 97/2000, you will find in the configuration under Parameters /
General / Miscellaneous. After confirming with the OK button, the export is started.
Importing texts into the lexicon
Texts and translations can be transferred from an external file to the lexicon. There
are two possible methods:
From a text file: the structure corresponds to the file generated during the export. The
first line indicates which languages (e.g. DE, NL,...) are present and all the other lines
are text entries.
From an ACCESS database: the database must have a lexicon table. The column
headings determine the languages and they determine how the text is allocated in the
lexicon. If the entry concerned is missing in the host language, a new entry is produced
in the lexicon.
325

WSCAD 51
Cyrillic character set
Switch to Russian under XP/Control panel/Regional and language
options/Extended.
WSCAD 5 can then enter and display the Russian language in the lexicon.
After switching the keyboard to Russian
Settings in WSCAD 5
In the lexicon, select Russian under the Foreign language 1 or 2.
326

Set the drawing set to Cyrillic.
Modify
The text can then be translated in the lexicon from German to Russian providing the Russian
keyboard setting is used. See figure top right.
327

WSCAD 51
328

Manager dialog for the foreign language display
Modify
With the menu command Change / Foreign languages / Manage + translate, the
lexicon dialog appears.
Reading in texts
Click on the Read in texts Button then all of the texts from your entire project are
collected together.
Another dialog appears in which you can decide on the file types from which the texts
can be read out.
329

WSCAD 51
If a certain text is missing in the host language of the lexicon, then a new entry is
produced within the lexicon. At the end, a short information dialog appears indicating
how many new entries have been produced. In the display group, you can set whether
just texts, just variables or just PLC texts are displayed. The following restrictions
(concerning the texts) can be imposed for accepting new entries in the lexicon.
Translating texts
After you have translated the host language texts in the lexicon into the respective
language, start the actual translation process with the Translate Button under Group
lexicon / translation. The entire project is then processed. The translation includes
general text, free text, symbol texts, variables and function text, providing these
are within the drawing area of the page and also within the drawing frame.
In the Status field dialog you select which languages you want to be displayed. After
double clicking on the relevant field of the Status column, a list opens from which you
can make a selection. Inactive means that the language concerned cannot be used for
the translation. Only one language at a time can be activated as Foreign language 1 or
2 but the Host language is always determined by the language version of WSCAD.
330

Modify
If a host language text is not yet present in the lexicon, a new entry is generated.
This function can be prevented by means of the option Enter missing texts. In the
Translate these texts column, select the texts which are to be translated and
displayed.
331

WSCAD 51
Install and delete a foreign language
Install a foreign language
Using the menu command Change / Foreign languages / Manage+Translate, the
Lexicon dialog appears, click on the Install new button in the language group. If no
foreign languages are set in the table, the Translate button is inactive. Enter the
language abbreviation (e.g. FR) in the activated entry field and click on the button to
the right of it.
The new language will appear in the table and a new column will be set up for it in the
lexicon.
Deleting a foreign language
Click in a field of the language concerned and then click on the Delete button. After a
prompt for confirmation, the language is deleted.
Hint
332
In the lexicon, the entire column is deleted with all the entries.

Displaying several languages
Modify
After the translation run, the relevant texts in the set of drawings are, strictly
speaking, in 3 languages. These are, the host language and the two foreign languages.
Hint
Of the multilingual texts (host language and 1 st + 2 nd foreign
language), only the highest can be selected or edited on the
drawing in each case. They are displayed inter-dispersed.
The language which you want to see can be specified in the Display group according to
different categories. At least one language must be activated for each category at any
one time. The All the same button copies the options Host language, 1 st + 2 nd
Foreign language for all text types under the display area.
Hint
If one foreign language is activated but the foreign language text is empty, then the text
is displayed in the host language.
333

WSCAD 51
Special character set
With the foreign language display, it may be necessary to use a special character
set. With a double click in the Character set column, the Windows standard dialog
appears for selecting the font. When you select a character set, its name is transferred
to the table:
In order to delete a character set, select the field with one click of the mouse and then
press the key.
Hint
334
WSCAD 5 normally recognises four different character sets
(general text + 3 free texts). A language-specific definition affects
the way that all of the texts of the foreign language concerned are
displayed but only the font, the font size and the style are adopted
from the general font configuration.

Foreign languages in the basic version
Modify
So that you can at least change the character sets of the Foreign languages 1 and 2 in
the basic version, new dialogs have been introduced here also. Under Change /
Foreign languages / Manage and translate, a dialog starts which enables the fonts
to be changed for Foreign languages 1 and 2.
Under Group, you set the general text type to which this change is to apply: (General
text, PLC text and Variable)
The fonts which are displayed are determined under Display. The relevant display is
switched on or off depending on whether the box has been checked. Now click on the
Foreign language 1 field of the Character sets for foreign languages area, then the
button next to it turns into a set of binoculars symbol. If you click on the binoculars,
then the standard Windows dialog opens for setting the character set.
335

WSCAD 51
After selection, the type of character set which has been chosen is written to the
relevant field, and after clicking on the Finished button, the font of the character set
changes and the dialog closes. However, the font size is ignored.
336

Quick Text
Modify
Even though you do not require multiple languages in your projects, the lexicon can
be of immense use to you:
The Quick text makes it possible to search for similar texts even while entering texts in
the lexicon and to suggest these during the input.
When you've to make an input (e.g. function text) the field for text input is activated
and coloured. The last text inputs are stored and are at any time callable. In addition the
input is compared with the foreign language lexicon and indicated with agreement. The
selection window is resizeable. You can accept the selection by the key () on the right
side or Return.
337

WSCAD 51
Connection line
General
Via the menu option Connection line or by selecting a connection line with a click
of the right mouse button, another menu appears with commands which can be used to
influence the course of the connection and its line name later on.
Changing the line parameters later on
In order to change line parameters later on, simply click on the connection concerned
with the right mouse button. The associated context menu appears.
Placing a bend in the connection line
A bend is placed in a piece of straight line. First select the piece of line, then you can
specify the point of the bend by positioning the mouse pointer accordingly. The
connection line can be moved like an elastic band and re-positioned.
338

Removing a bend from the connection line
Modify
On a connection line, select the point of the bend that you want to remove. Remove
the bend by pressing the left mouse button (or the key).
Moving the ends of a connection line
Select the start or end point of a connection line and re-position it. A connection
node at the end of the line cannot be moved.
Colour
Setting for the current colour of the connection line.
Line type
Setting for the line type.
Delete or copy immediately
Deletes or copies a connection.
339

WSCAD 51
Move
Moves the current connection line.
Enter name
The full dialog appears, enter the line name if this is not generally blocked. The
appearance of the dialog is also determined by the on-line destination wiring
parameters setting under Parameters / General / Compatibility. If this has been
activated, then you can enter the line name in the dialog which then opens, otherwise
the entry is made via the entry field of the Information bar. If you just want to move
or rotate the line name, click on the line name directly with the right mouse button and
the line name context menu will appear where you can select the desired action. When
changing, the dialog then appears again, enter the line name if this is not generally
blocked.
340

Functionality
Reference name
Modify
The 'Reference name' command is used to change the reference name of existing
components on a drawing. The 'Reference name' command opens the 'Reference'
menu, from which you can select the desired modification command.
Here you can change, delete or move the name; rotate it 90°; enlarge or reduce its
size; or offset it from the cursor position. After selecting the desired modification
command, from the 'Reference' menu, identify the specific component you wish to
modify, using the left mouse button (or key). If you are modifying the name,
the existing name appears in the prompt field, at the bottom of the screen, ready for
modification. After making the required changes, accept them with the left mouse button
(or key) and then position the text as required.
Hint
The existing name appears in the prompt field
The Move, Rotate, Enlarge and Reduce commands also prompts you to position the
text. Remember that if you wish the name to be invisible in the drawing, place a '!' in
front of it. The name remains visible until it has been positioned.
Hint
If you change the reference name of a coil and the contactor
manager is on, the reference names of all contacts and the comb
will be changed automatically. In this case it is not possible to do it
by modifying the Symbol parameters!
Any character combination is possible for a component reference name, e.g. '-3K',
'AB.1/z', 'K2'.
Hint
Please remember that Auto-numbering will change or extend the
names.
341

WSCAD 51
Component name
The 'Component name' command is used to modify the name of an existing
component on a drawing. The 'Component name' command opens the 'Component
name' menu, from which you can select the desired modification command.
Here you can change, delete or move the name; rotate it 90°; enlarge or reduce its
size; or offset it from the cursor position. After selecting the desired modification
command, from the 'Component name' menu, identify the specific component you wish
to modify, using the left mouse button (or key).
If you are modifying the name, the existing name appears in the prompt field, at the
bottom of the screen, ready for modification. After making the required changes, accept
them with the left mouse button (or key) and then position the text as required.
Hint
342
Remember that if you wish the name to be invisible in the drawing,
place a '!' in front of it. The name remains visible until it has been
positioned.
You can easily exclude components from the material list
If the first sign (or the second one, if the name begins with '!') is a certain character, the
component is not included in the material list. You can set this sign in the settings for the
material list.
Tip
The parts in the libraries have names that are generally valid (e.g. NO 1 pole).
These names also appear in the material list (except if you are working with the
Mega module which uses information from the database). Therefore it is a good
idea to give parts, that are often used in a library, appropriate names.

Search + Replace
Modify
The 'Search + Replace' command allows you to search for some entities, lines,
text etc. throughout the drawing, and to replace them with specified changes.
The 'Search + Replace' command allows you to search for
• Reference name
• Part number
• Component name
• Function text
• Line name
• Text (incl. Simple text)
The search process can be defined by selecting the 'From the beginning' toggle which
defines if the search should encompass all drawings in the set. To carry out a search,
select the appropriate options and then click on the Start button. WSCAD 5 will open
the appropriate drawing and highlight the component or text identified by the search. If
more than one match is available, WSCAD 5 will display each in turn. If the 'Output'
toggle is selected, WSCAD 5 prompts for the name of a file and then outputs a list of
the selected text (e.g. Reference names, Part Numbers or Component names, etc.) to
that file. This text is in ASCII format and can be viewed by any editor. In addition, the
'Exact' toggle is used to determine if an exact match is required or if text containing the
word(s) should be searched for. Note that in both cases, the search process is case
sensitive.
Replace
If the toggle 'Replace-YES' is selected you can replace the following text:
• Component name
• Part number
• Function text
• Line name
• Text (incl. Simple text)
343

WSCAD 51
Note
344
You cannot replace reference names (use the command 'Modify -
reference name') and part numbers of coils and contacts in the
Mega module, if the contactor manager is enabled (use the
command 'Modify - Comp. parameters - Part number).
To carry out a search and replace operation, enter the search text and the replacement
text and click on the start button. WSCAD 5 can replace text from a text file with foreign
language text. If the 'Text from file' toggle is selected, WSCAD 5 shows the standard
windows File open dialog for selection of the input text file.
This text file must be structured in the following way:
The first line is the text to be search for, the following line is the replacement text. Empty
lines will be skipped, but the line sequence must be 'Search text - Replacement text' !
The size of the text file doesn't matter, but the line length is limited to 200 characters.
If the text should have multiline style, you must enter '\n' for each line feed. If the
toggle 'Exact' is not set, the text to be searched for can be longer then the text entered,
but the whole text will be replaced. Text attributes such as size, colour, direction or
position remain unchanged.
Example
Existing:
Search for
Replace with
Result:
Testword
Test
New word
Testword -> New word
If the toggle 'Text output' is selected, all text which is processed will be written to a
text file. WSCAD 5 shows the standard Windows File open dialog for determination of
the output file. Path and file name will also be shown in the 'Search + Replace' dialog.
The text file is structured as described in the previous section: The first line is the text,

Modify
the next line is an empty line, ready for you to enter the replacement text, and so on. As
a safety measure, the 'Safety copies' toggle causes WSCAD 5 to save a backup copy of
the drawing files prior to making the changes to the text.
Hint
I you want to use foreign languages within you project, we strongly
recommend you utilise the lexicon in the Mega module.
345

WSCAD 51
Cable name/type
The 'Cable name/type' command is used to make changes to the name (e.g. W101)
or type (e.g. 4x1.5mm²) of an existing cable. In addition it can be used to change the
"type" of the line that defines the cable. Once the command has been selected, you are
prompted to select the cable line that defines the cable and after the line has been
selected the 'Modify cable' menu appears where you can select the desired modification.
If 'Cable name or Cable type' is selected, the 'Cable name or Cable type' menu
appears, showing the options available for modifying the text (both menus have the
same modification commands). Here you can modify, delete or move the text; rotate it
90°; enlarge or reduce its size; or offset it from the cursor position. Once text has been
modified, you will be prompted to position the text. This is also true for the Move, Rotate,
Enlarge and Reduce commands. If 'Line type' is selected, the 'Line type' menu appears.
Selecting a new line type from the menu replaces the existing line type with the one
selected.
Note
346
Components that are designated as 'Cable conductor' component
types cannot be modified with the 'Component type' command.
These components must be modified with the 'Modify Component'
command.

Text allocators
Modify
This command starts a Text allocators Manager dialog. In this dialog, you can add
new wild cards or delete existing ones and change the formatting and the font size of
the display. Text allocators can only be edited in forms, or in evaluation lists
prepared from forms. The menu option is only activated when there is a form (or
evaluation list) in the active drawing memory.
347

WSCAD 51
Contactor
The 'Contactor' command allows you to change the type of contactor that is being
used in a circuit. To change a contactor, select the command and then identify the
contactor to be changed, using the left mouse button (or key). Once the
contactor has been identified, a list of available contactors, in the database, is displayed
in a menu window. Select the required contactor from the list and the 'Symbol
parameters' menu appears showing the parameters for the component and the new
part number of the contactor. At this point additional changes can be made to the
parameters, or the 'Symbol parameters' menu can be dismissed by pressing the right
mouse button (or key).
Hint
348
If you change the contactor, the new comb is loaded and the crossreference
text at comb and contacts will be regenerated. The
configuration determines if the pin numbers can be retained, or if
the pin numbers are assigned new

Modify
349

WSCAD 51
Make text invisible
Use this command to hide text very easily. This command applies not only to both
types of text, but also to every internal text of a component such as function text. Click
on this command again to make the text visible.
Tip
350
If you don't know the text position, use the command 'Settings -
Options - Invisible text' to show all text on the screen.
Select the desired text and the text becomes invisible immediately, the position remains
unchanged. Now you can select the next text, or you can cancel the command with the
right mouse button (or Escape).
A text is invisible if the first character is a '!'.
Tip
It's useful to have a button for this command

Exclude from material list
Modify
You should use this command if you want a component not to appear in the material
list. This command inserts at the beginning of the component name (but after an existing
'!') a specified sign (default: '.'). You can configure this sign.
Repeat this function to undo the exclusion
Hint
You can see the special sign if you use the command 'Modify -
Symbol parameters'
If you set the menuitem View / Mark mat-locked symbols then you'll see a sign at
the excluded component.
351

WSCAD 51
Exclude from auto-numbering
You should use this command if you want a component not to include at the autonumbering.
Repeat this function to undo the exclusion
Hint
352
You can see the special sign if you use the command 'Modify -
Symbol parameters'
If you set the menuitem View / Mark num-locked symbols then you'll see a sign at
the excluded component.

Terminal
Terminal/Cable numbers
Modify
Use this command if you want to modify the pin numbers of terminals or cables (not
reference names) easily!
Select the first terminal or cable conductor, the input line is preset with the current
number. You can enter the new number or accept the existing one by pressing the
key. The sequence of the highlighted pins corresponds to the sequence of the
parts in the drawing memory. If you have already used the automatic numbering
function and the option 'Sorted' was activated, the parts are already in the correct
sequence, corresponding to the configuration. The process stops after the last terminal
pin or cable conductor. You can also cancel the command with the Escape key or the
right mouse button.
Hint
This command is an easy way to change the pin numbers of
terminals and cable conductors manually. Position and direction
remain unchanged, if you want to change these attributes you must
use the command 'Modify - Component - Pins'
353

WSCAD 51
Terminal destination
The terminal destination assignment (internal/external) can be reversed by using
the 'Terminal destination' command. To do this, select the command and identify the
terminal, using the left mouse button (or key), and the dot will be moved to the
other terminal pin, indicating the change of assignment.
The "dot", used to indicate the internal destination, is defined by the 'Pin name' and
can be changed by using the 'Pins' command on the 'Modify - Component' menu and then
selecting 'Pin name' after the pin has been identified. In the configuration you can
prevent the output of the dot on a printer or plotter.
If a terminal is to be created, using the Symbol editor, all terminal pins must have pin
names and pin numbers that are located in the correct positions. In this way when the
terminal destination is reversed, the new location for the destination assignment symbol
will be known (i.e. the location of the other 'Pin name').
Tip
354
If a 'Pin name' was assigned to both pins of a terminal and then the
destination assignment was changed, both pin names would
disappear. If only one 'Pin name' exists (e.g. a "dot"), the name is
transferred to the other terminal when the destination assignment
is changed. If it is invisible please check the position of the other
pin name!

Draw
General
The commands on the 'Draw' menu are used to add additional graphics, e.g. lines,
circles, and text, that are required to complete the drawing. None of the automatic
features and list generation routines recognize elements created using these commands.
355

WSCAD 51
Line
The 'Line' command is used to draw any additional lines, that are required on the
drawing, that do not represent an electrical connection. To draw a line, select the
command and you will be prompted to enter the start point. This can be done by
inputting the co-ordinates, using the keyboard, or by positioning the cursor on the
screen. If you are using the cursor, when the cursor is in the correct location, press the
left mouse button (or key) to fix the first point and you will be prompted to
enter the next point. Continue entering as many points as required to complete the line.
Although these lines are created in a similar manner to those created using the
'Schematic - Line' command, they will not be recognised by the list generator or other
automatic functions. The width of a line can be set using the 'Line width' command,
with the maximum width being 1 inch (25.4mm). In the case of a very thick line, it is
created symmetrically about the center line (in contrast to a rectangle whose width is
generated inwards from the base line). If you need to select a thick line, e.g. for a modify
operation, it must be selected by placing the cursor on the center of the line and not on
the edge. In addition to the width you can also set the colour and type of the line, prior
to placing. In the case of a drawing generated in colour, it is also possible to output plots
in corresponding colours.
356

Automatic pre-assignment of line parameters
Draw
When creating an electrical connection line or a simple line, the line parameters
such as colour, type of line and line width (line only) can be transferred from an
existing line. If you set the starting point of the new line on an existing line, then
this line accepts the parameters specified above.
357

WSCAD 51
Rectangle, Full Rectangle
The 'Rectangle' and 'Full Rectangle' commands are used to draw a rectangle /
full rectangle, by entering two points representing diagonally opposite corners.
To draw a rectangle, select the command and you will be prompted to enter the start
point. This can be done by inputting the co-ordinates, using the keyboard, or by
positioning the cursor on the screen. If you are using the cursor, when the cursor is in
the correct location, press the left mouse button (or key) to fix the first point
and you will be prompted to enter the next point. As you move the cursor, the rectangle
will be displayed in dynamic mode until the second point is entered by pressing the left
mouse button (or key).
Like the 'Line' command, rectangles will not be recognised by the list generator or other
automatic functions. You can set the line type, line width, and colour. When a rectangle
is drawn with a line width greater than 0,25mm, then the thickness is generated towards
the inside of the rectangle and not symmetrically about the lines. If you need to select a
rectangle having thick lines, e.g. for a modify operation, it must be selected by placing
the cursor on the outer edge of a line and not in the center.
358

Circle (parts)
Draw
The 'Circle (parts)' command is used to draw complete circles or parts of
circles:
• Circle
• Half circle
• Quarter circle
• Arc
• Ellipse
With all four commands, the required coordinates of the input points can
be entered using the keyboard, or by positioning the cursor on the screen.
If you are using the cursor, when the cursor is in the correct location,
press the left mouse button (or key) to fix the position.
Additionally, when the cursor is used to enter the second point, the
resultant circle or arc, etc., will be displayed in dynamic mode until the
second point is fixed.
When drawing a circle, you are first prompted to enter the point
representing the center of the circle and then another for the radius.
With half and quarter circles you are first prompted to enter the point
representing the center of the circle and then another for the radius. In
addition to determining the radius, the second point also determines the
direction of the circle segment. Half and quarter circles are drawn along
the 'X' or 'Y' axis of the center point.
For an arc, you are prompted to enter the point representing the center,
and then start and end points of the arc. The start point determines the
radius, and the end point determines the arc length.
Circle segments will not be recognised by the list generator or other
automatic functions. You can set line width and colours.
When a circle, or segment, is drawn with a line width greater than
0,25mm, then the thickness is generated towards the inside of the circle
and not symmetrical about line. If you need to select a circle having thick
lines, e.g. for a modify operation, it must be selected by placing the
cursor on the outer edge of the circle.
Hint
359

WSCAD 51
360
Arcs are always drawn counter-clockwise. By selecting
the appropriate start and end points you can draw any
segment

Ellipse
Draw
The default of the ellipse shape is made via a rectangle. The properties of the
drawn element can be changed by using the right mouse button via a context menu. In
order to do this, select the relevant property and carry out the changes.
n
361

WSCAD 51
Simple text
This command can be used to enter any text. This text is not taken into
consideration by the automatic functions. You can change the size of the text, rotate
it (0°, 90°) and place it in any position. This can also be done later on. The length of
the text is restricted to 100 characters. The text can be marked as invisible by an !
(exclamation mark) placed in front, i.e. although the text is present on the drawing, it
is not displayed. In order to make these texts visible or editable, you can activate the
option Reveal all under Parameters / Options.
If the escape sequence \n is entered at the word wrap, the text can be displayed on
several lines. The text, however, is always displayed on a single-line in the input line.
Example Wor\nd wr\nap
end up as:
Wor
d wr
ap
Hint
362
Misalignment shifts the text a few points upwards and to the right
but only with the grid function switched on.
You can configure the font to be used for displaying the General text, but only
TrueType Fonts with fixed character separation can be used. If the capabilities of the
text configuration (size and font) are not sufficient for you, use Free text (see next
section). However, General text is simpler to handle, faster in screen layout and
requires less storage space.
Switch fonts
Another font can be selected under Parameters / Fonts. The change will affect all
general type texts on the circuit diagrams.
Automatic pre-assignment of text parameters
When entering General text and line name, the size and direction as well as the
angle of rotation of the last entry or change is used as a pre-assignment.

Text
General
Draw
Text type text offers substantially more possibilities for text configuration than the
General text. 3 different character fonts are available and you can also configure the
character height and character width. When selecting an existing text, its attributes
are adopted and therefore applied to new entries. The figure shows the configuration
options for text.
363

WSCAD 51
Entering a text
When entering the new text, the attributes such as size, width factor, colour and type
of display are adopted according to the settings. The entered text can be placed
anywhere and rotated to any degree. Otherwise, the text is fixed immediately at the
position of the mouse. The cursor is then automatically positioned on the next line, the
line space being determined by the character size and whether the grid is switched on.
364

Text entry using the window default
Draw
For fitting text into a window. This is very practical if you are unable to indicate
precise dimensions. First enter the text then specify the window size by drawing a
rectangle with the mouse. The window is then deleted again. Now you can place or
rotate / flip the text at will. The Height and width of the text are automatically
adjusted to the window.
Window default
Automatic text adjustment
365

WSCAD 51
Overwriting text
The text content of an existing text is changed. The attributes such as size or width
however remain unchanged.
366

Changing the text attributes and properties
The size, width factor, colour and font of existing texts can be changed.
Hint
The values entered for size and width factor are approximate and
depend on the font selected.
Deleting text
Draw
Any texts are deleted immediately without prompting for confirmation (can be
undone with UNDO).
Moving text
Any texts can be repositioned later. The attributes of the selected text still apply to the
next new entry.
Hint
A function is implemented until it is aborted ( or right mouse
button). Example, dragging: Select first text, move, fix, select next
text, drag, fix..
Rotating text
You can rotate free text clockwise or anticlockwise in 90° steps. The attributes of the
selected text still apply to the next new entry.
Changing text size
Specify the size for the next entry.
Factor
Specify the size factor for the next entry.
Changing colour
Specify the colour of the next entry.
Offset
When Offset is switched on, the text is repositioned a few points upward and to the
right, but only with the grid function switched on. This is really useful if text is to be
written on lines which are drawn in the snap grid (e.g. tables).
367

WSCAD 51
Copy immediately
Text can be selected and immediately copied to any place on the page.
368

Character sets (fonts)
The following fonts are available for selection:
Hint
• Standard font with fixed character separation (e.g. Courier New)
• Proportional font with variable character separation (e.g. Arial)
• Special font with variable character separation (e.g. Arial)
The text can also be displayed on several lines like the general
text.
Draw
You can select these fonts from among all the fonts available on your computer system.
However, bear in mind that these fonts must also be available on another computer (e.g.
that of the client) so that the drawing will appear the same. Special characters can also
be introduced, by using special fonts such as Wingdings. You can also use fonts for
foreign languages (e.g. Arial CE for the Slavonic font).
369

WSCAD 51
Text alignment
The text alignment can be specified for any text, whether it is General text, Free text
or symbol parameters.
For example, click on a General text with the right mouse button and select the
Alignment command in the following object menu.
The following dialog appears in which you can specify the text alignment.
You can see how it will look in principle in the small preview window.
Hint
370
In regard to older files (up to V4.1), when changing into the new
file format, the reference names are also provided with a text
alignment automatically (normally right-justified, since the
reference is left of the symbol). Thus, a re-calculation of the
position is omitted with the automatic numbering.
Important

When creating your own symbols, you must make certain that the
text alignment of the reference name is set correctly e.g. Text
alignment right, if the reference name has been positioned left of
the symbol.
Draw
371

WSCAD 51
Text Box
The Text Box offers the possibility larger text sections keeping together. This is useful
for formatting and of determining the line-makeup. At the same time 3 different versions
can be stored by a Text Box.
Give after menu call a rectangle, into which the Text Box is to be inserted.
372

The dialogue functions
The Text Box can be made invisible with the small box Invisible.
Draw
Within the Frame determine you a Line type, Line width and Color for the noted
rectangle.
373

WSCAD 51
y
In the range text parameters adjust you beside the text size and the color the
adjustment 0° or 90° as well as the general adjustment (left, centrically, right) of
the text in the rectangle. Here you know also a margin region between rectangle and
text for all pages adjusting framing for the noted rectangle.
374

Draw
In the range text you can enter the text or use an import function of texts from a
text file. Look for the text over the file open dialgue. After the selection the text is
indicated immediately and can be edited.
375

WSCAD 51
The text under the option Main language is stored automatically. If they place 1 or 2
now on foreign language, then you can store further 2 versions of the text. The foreign
language becomes visible only if it in the foreign language translation the attitude 1. or
2. Foreign language for the block text stop.
With OK you leave the dialogue and the text into the rectangle are positioned. The text is
cut off, if it does not fit into the rectangle.
Functions in the plan
If you click with the right mouse button on the Text Box, then a context menu becomes
active.
376
• With Modify the input dialogue restarts.

Draw
• With Remove you delete the Text Box with all versions.
• With Move you can again position the block text within the plan
• With Resize you must the edge of the rectangle select and be able to do the form
to then determine again the text thereby are automatically adapted.
• Provided with Copy will made a copy of the Text Box and these can within the
plan again be positioned.
• If you would like to copy the Text Box on another side, use the function Ctrl+C
and Ctrl+V.
377

WSCAD 51
Dimension
Dimension lines with 4 different line ends are available for providing the
dimensioning.
Display dimensions. Under menu option View / Show dimensions, you can hide and
reveal dimensioning.
Procedure
After defining the start and end point, the entry line for the text is pre-assigned
with the length of the dimension line. This value is calculated from the units chosen (mm
or inch) as well as the current cursor scale. The text is automatically positioned correctly
in the line or, with a line which is too short, on the line. The line can be prevented from
being disconnected in the configuration.
Hint
378
The dimension line can be disconnected automatically and provided
with the unit.
The text size entered can be from approximately 1.5 mm to approx. 10 mm. Text can
only be written horizontally or vertically. The dimension line, consisting of the line
and the text, is stored internally as a symbol without a symbol name. The colour
therefore depends on the value specified for symbol bodies.
Measurement data in mm
When the option is activated, the measurement data are always output in mm (instead
of cm or m), whatever the value.
Disconnect dimension line (otherwise set to line)
This option is used to determine whether the dimensioning text is placed over the
dimension line. When the option is active, the ratio of the line length to the text
length determines whether the line is disconnected.

Display units with the measurement data
This is used to determine whether the unit is attached to the dimensioning text or not.
Hint
The specified cursor scale is only important for showing the cursor
coordinates and pre-assignment of the measurement text. The
output of the drawing on printers or plotters is not dependent on
this scale.
Draw
379

WSCAD 51
Color
The 'Color' command is used to select the active drawing colour. After selecting the
command, a dialog shows you the 16 available colours, from which a colour can be
selected:
The active colour, designated by a rectangle in the middle of the colour area, is the
colour used by the drawing commands on the ‘Draw’ menu. The colour selected on this
palette has no effect on the colour selected for the text commands.
Hint
380
You also have access to the current drawing colour by using the
information bar

Line width
Draw
The 'Line width' command is used to set the active line width for the elements
drawn in ‘Draw’. After selecting the command, a dialog appears and you can select a
value between 1 and 16 or enter a larger value. This value is limited to 100.
The numbers represent multiples of a width unit with one width unit equal to 0.01 inch,
or 0.254mm.
Hint
You also have access to the current line width by using the
information bar
381

WSCAD 51
Line type
The 'Line type' command is used to set the active line type for the elements drawn in
'Draw'. After selecting the command, a submenu displays the available line types. To
make a selection, move the selection bar to the desired type and select it with the left
mouse button (or key).
Hint
382
It is more convenient to change the line type by clicking on the line
field in the information bar

Delete / Move
General
The commands on the 'Delete/Modify' menu are used to manipulate existing elements
on a drawing
The commands available include delete, move, drag, copy, rotate and mirror as well as
undo and redo. The functions are not limited to components, but also operate on all other
elements within the drawing, including text and elements created with the 'Draw'
commands.
Apart from undo and redo, in order to manipulate an element, it has to be selected first.
After choosing a command, a menu appears providing the options available for selecting
elements. There are four methods by which an element or elements can be selected.
383

WSCAD 51
1 Window / M-Window
The '1 Window' command is used to select elements by enclosing them in a window.
After choosing the command, you are prompted to define the two diagonal points that
define the window. All components in this window, with at least one co-ordinate pair, are
selected and highlighted ready for manipulation.
384
• Lines and rectangles must have at least one coordinate point in the window.
• The center point of the circle must be in the window.
• Library components must have at least one corner in the window.
By using the 'M-Windows' command, it is possible to select elements using multiple
windows. After defining the window, the 'Selection' menu re-appears. Here you can
terminate the selection process, with the right mouse button (or key), or you can
continue adding more elements to the selection, e.g. with the '1 Object' option.
TIP
TIP
Elements selected with 'Window' can only be deselected with the
'Objects' command
On a complex drawing, it is sometimes easier to select a number of
elements using the Window command and then to deselect the few
that are not required by using the Objects command.

1 Object / Objects
Delete / Move
The '1 Object' command is used to select a single object (or element). After selecting
the command, you are prompted to 'Select 1 Object'. Position the cursor on the
required element and then press the left mouse button (or key) to select it, and
the selected element will be highlighted ready for manipulation.
• Lines, rectangles and circles with normal line width, are selected by positioning
the cursor on the line.
• Lines with multi line width are selected by positioning the cursor in the middle
of the line.
• Rectangles and circles with multi line width are selected by positioning the
cursor on the outer edge of the line.
• Text is selected by positioning the cursor on any letter.
• Library components are selected by positioning the cursor anywhere on the
component.
If you choose the same object a second time it is de-selected. If a single element is
selected, using the '1 Object' command, then the selection process ends immediately.
By using the 'Objects' command, it is possible to select several elements. After
identifying the required elements press the right mouse button (or key) and the
'Select' menu re-appears. Here you can terminate the selection process, with the right
mouse button (or key), or you can continue adding more elements to the
selection, e.g. with the 'Window' option.
385

WSCAD 51
Rotate / Mirror
The 'Rotate/Mirror' command is used to rotate an element through 90º, or to
mirror the element about the 'X' or 'Y' axis.
The commands can also be used in conjunction with each other e.g. rotate 90º and then
mirror. After selecting the 'Rotate/ Mirror' command and identifying an element(s), a
menu appears from which you can select the desired action.
Hint
386
You can use Rotate / Mirror for single elements or components
Here the Mirror-X P. and Mirror Y P. operate in the same way as for other elements and
that is that the rotation point is determined by the position of the cursor. With the Mirror-
X and Mirror Y commands the mirroring process takes place about the center point of the
component and does not require any input to determine the mirroring point. This can be
useful as the position of the component doesn't change.
Note
We recommend that you use point-related Rotate/Mirror
commands
In both cases when a component is mirrored, the location of the text associated with the
component is mirrored, but the text maintains the correct orientation (i.e. the text is not
generated backwards). When a component is rotated, the text maintains either a horizontal
orientation or a vertical orientation rotated 90º counter-clockwise (i.e. text is not
generated up-side-down or vertical to the right).
Text that was written using 'Draw - Text', can be rotated in 90º steps, but not
mirrored, and the text will not maintain a correct orientation.
TIP
Be careful when using the 'Rotate/Mirror' command as the
component pins may not fall on grid points after the change. This
would then make connections more difficult.
See also
1 Window / M-Window
1 Object / Objects
Move

Delete
Delete / Move
After selecting the 'Delete' command and identifying an element(s), you are
prompted to 'Confirm delete'. Upon confirmation, using the left mouse button (or
key), the element is deleted. To abort the command, without deleting any
elements, press the right mouse button (or key). This is different to the 'Delete'
command to the one found on the 'Draw' menu, as that command deletes a single
element immediately, without asking for confirmation.
TIP
If you delete an element, or elements, by mistake, they can be
recovered by the 'UNDO' command.
However, if you accidentally delete more elements than are stored
by the UNDO buffer, then only those in the UNDO buffer can be
restored
See also
1 Window / M-Window
1 Object / Objects
Move
387

WSCAD 51
Copy
The 'Copy' command is used to copy existing elements in a drawing. After
selecting the 'Copy' command and identifying an element(s), you are prompted to
'Place' the copy in its new location. Move the element to the new location and "fix" its
position, by pressing the left mouse button (or key). After pressing the left
mouse button (or key), a dialog appears where you can select the number of
copies. If you select a single copy, the copy will be placed at the point entered for the
copy.
If you select multiple copies, the first copy will be placed at the point entered for the
copy and subsequent copies will be placed an equal distance from each other, as the
second was from the first, and in the same direction. In this way it is easy to create an
array of elements with equal spacing. This procedure can only be reversed with the
UNDO function.
Care should be taken, when copying coils, contacts or PLC modules when contactor
manager or PLC manager are on, as both managers try to assign the elements. So
'virtual' contactors or PLC modules may be created.
TIP
388
Notice that the reference names of coils/contacts can be changed
automatically when copied, so that no conflicts occur during
automatic numbering
See also
1 Window / M-Window
1 Object / Objects
Move

Move
Delete / Move
The 'Move' command is used to move element(s) in the drawing. After selecting the
'Move' command and identifying an element(s), you are prompted to 'fix' the position of
the element. Move the element to the new location and "fix" its position, by pressing the
left mouse button (or key). By selecting several elements at once, it is possible
to move them at the same time, while maintaining their relationship to each other.
Note
The procedure cannot be reversed by UNDO
See also
1 Window / M-Window
1 Object / Objects
Move
389

WSCAD 51
Drag
The 'Drag' command is similar to the 'Move' command, with the exception that if
there are any connection lines connected to the component, then they will be dragged
along with the component, so that they maintain their connection to the component
being moved and also to the component connected to the other end of the lines. Also, in
the case of the 'Drag' command, there are only two options for selecting elements. If '1
Object' is used as the selection command, only components can be selected, all other
elements will be ignored. If 'Window' is used as the selection command, then all elements
that have a co-ordinate point in the window will be highlighted and moved. Any
connection lines that have "bend" points that are outside the window, then the "bend"
point remains in its original location and the drag takes effect from the "bend" point.
See also
1 Window / M-Window
1 Object / Objects
Move
390

Repeat
Delete / Move
The 'Repeat' command is used to repeat the last drawing procedure. When the
command is selected, the cursor jumps automatically to the starting point of the last
drawn element. You will then be prompted to enter the starting point for the copy. This
start point can be in any direction and distance from the original start point. Once the
cursor is in the right position, fix the new start point with the left mouse button (or
key) and the procedure will be repeated producing a copy of the original.
By pressing the left mouse button (or key) again, an additional element will be
placed that is the same distance and direction from the second as the second was from
the first.
391

WSCAD 51
UNDO
The 'UNDO' command is very useful as it allows you to UNDO the last drawing
procedure. It's not only useful for deleting the last part drawn, but what is more useful is
that you can reverse a deletion.
When you manipulate several elements at one time, e.g. using the 'Multiple objects' or
'Window' options with a 'Delete' or 'Copy' command, the elements are recognised and
manipulated as individual parts and hence the 'UNDO' command only undoes the last
part it manipulated and not all of the parts it manipulated together.
Only those procedures that add or remove elements from the drawing are flagged for use
by the UNDO command, 'UNDO' does not work with the Move, Turn or Rotate
commands.
Note
392
When the 'Contactor Manager' or PLC manager are turned on, you
cannot recover deleted coils /contacts or PLC modules with the
UNDO command.
The last 150 drawing procedures are stored in the UNDO buffer. When the drawing is
saved, part of the UNDO/REDO buffer is stored along with the drawing, so that after a
drawing has been opened again, previous manipulations can be undone. The
UNDO/REDO buffer will be emptied if any of the following commands are used: 'File -
Compress' and 'Sort' (when using 'Automatic numbering').

REDO
Delete / Move
With the 'REDO' command you can reverse the UNDO procedure, e.g. if you
accidentally deleted an object with the 'UNDO' command.
393

Automatic function
General
All automatic functions apply to a complete drawing set or a complete project. A
universal connection file must be present in order to create line cross-references,
terminal chart, wiring chart, cable chart, cable list, net list and connection list. This
‘*.CXK’ file is created if it is not already present, or when a drawing in the drawing set is
created or modified at a time later than the time stamp of the connection file. It is
therefore especially important that the time function in your computer is operating
properly. The connection file is situated in the project directory and is given the name of
the project with the file extension ‘.CXK’.
Security copies
WSCAD can make safety copies automatically. If you want to record the situation prior to
automatic processing, WSCAD can do this for you if the corresponding configuration is
set . To do this, a subdirectory ‘Safe’ is created in the project directory and the security
copies are stored in this subdirectory. Every time you make a security copy, the
previous security copy is overwritten!
395

WSCAD 51
Automatic numbering
Automatic numbering
Automatic numbering
The reference names of the symbols as well as the terminal connection and cable core
are automatically numbered.
Actions during numbering
During the numbering, WSCAD 5 performs checks with certain symbols. For terminals
without reference, the assignment is thereby searched; for auxiliary SPS elements, the
assignment to the main element is verified. In addition, for versions without contactor
management (Basic and Compact), coils without reference or with multiple assigned
references as well as contacts without reference are detected and reported. After the
auto-numbering, the contactor management, cable management, plug management
and the SPS database are updated.
396

Select the type of numbering from the dialog and then start the numbering run.
Automatic function
397

WSCAD 51
How symbols are numbered
You can use the following options to specify which symbol types are processed by the
automatic numbering. Only the selected elements are numbered, the remaining ones are
not modified.
The symbol types, e.g., standard, coil / contact, main – auxiliary element must be
selected if the relevant symbol type shall be included in the next numbering run.
Selection and reference name extension (type of numbering)
Corresponding to the numbering type selected, the reference names of the selected
symbol types are renumbered and extended in the reference name.
Type Type of numbering
Name # Number consecutively across the entire drawing set
Name sheet Path Name, sheet number, path
Sheet Name #1 Sheet, name, number beginning with 1 for each sheet
Sheet Name # Sheet, name, consecutive number
Sheet Name #1 Sheet, name, number beginning with 1 for each sheet
Sheet Name path Sheet number, name, path
Terminal and cable
Since reference names of terminals and cables are usually assigned manually, they are
normally excluded from numbering. In addition, the options all cable cores or 1 cable
are only active if the online cable management is deactivated. All existing reference
names and their connections are numbered with all cable cores all terminal connections.
The starting value here applies to the first reference name.
398

Automatic function
If you activate the option 1 cable or 1 terminal strip, then you will prompted – after
clicking on the Start button – (to specify) the respective cable core or terminal symbol.
The auto-numbering dialog is closed thereby without performing another numbering
activity.
If you select 1 terminal strip then the value in the field starting number will be
defined as starting value for the first connection of the selected symbol (e.g., first
terminal connection).
399

WSCAD 51
If you select All Terminal strip then the value in the field starting number will be
defined as starting value for the first terminal strip.
400

Hint
If the automatic numbering is started although no symbol type has
been activated, then the symbols are nonetheless sorted in the
drawing memory if this option is activated !
Automatic function
401

WSCAD 51
Numbering types and additional variants
The following options for numbering defaults are available:
Fixed length
You can specify a fixed character length for the numbering. Simply enter the number of
digits in the field fixed length. Number values are 0-9 whereby 0 is numbered as
previously and 1-9 (max.) completes the number at least to the respective length.
Preceding symbol
This is only active if the project is not a KTP project and if the drawing scope does not
contain any attachments and location identifications.
A symbol can be placed before each reference name, e.g., a minus symbol (-). When
using installations and/or location identification, then this symbol must be available for
separation and, if applicable, is set automatically. If the option preceding symbol has
been activated, then the preceding symbol is removed!
Priority: left to right
Now for illustration you imagine, you put a ruler on the sheet (horizontal) then you move
the ruler vertically = with adjusted switch "Priority: left to right" the numbering always
starts from left to the right and then vertically down.
If you turn the ruler now around 90°, push it horizontal to the right. then the numbering
starts always along the ruler (from left to the left above down).
Correcting switch cabinet layout
If the option is activated, then the existing switch cabinet layout is automatically
compared with the changed reference names and will be corrected. If, e.g., a contactor
receives –Q6 as new reference, then it is also renamed in the switch cabinet layout.
402

Specific numbering
Reference fragment
Automatic function
An input is only possible if no entry has been made in the number based field. Here, you
have the options of a text-based selection criteria for the reference names you would like
to number. A text comparison hereby takes place permitting the detection of special
symbols or numbers within the reference name, e.g., in case of symbols that have been
added subsequently (-X?; -F100).
When you now enter the following into the dialog
403

WSCAD 51
then all fuses are numbered containing F10 in the reference name (e.g. F10000;
F10999; F101;...).
Special
An input is only possible here if no entry has been made in the reference fragment field.
Here, you have the options:
• only one reference family
• only reference names without appended number
• only reference names with number greater as, equal
This allows for the numbering of symbols added subsequently without changing already
existing ones.
404
Input in the field Special The following reference names are numbered:
- without appended number (e.g., -F)
1000 with appended number greater equal 1000
F with reference trunk F
F1000 greater equal F1000
#F all having numbers preceding reference trunk
F- with reference trunk F without trailing number
Exceptions
In this field, you can specify up to 20 exceptions for the numbering. For this purpose,
enter the capital initial letters of the operating materials identifications (e.g., FV for fuses
F and valves V).
Starting number
For numbering type name # and sheet name #, a starting number can still be entered
before beginning the numbering
Example 1
For the condition for numbering you have entered
Input in field number based, e.g., F30, then all symbols with the operating materials
identifier F and an appended number greater or equal 30 are numbered. If you have
entered, e.g., 100 as starting number, then F30 becomes F100, F31 becomes F101, etc..

Example 2
For the condition for numbering you have entered
Automatic function
Input in field number based, e.g. F, then all symbols not yet numbered are numbered
with the operating materials identifier F, beginning with the starting number entered by
you.
Attention
Do not specify starting numbers, that have already been used to
number symbols with the identifier F. Otherwise, duplicate
numbering may occur since no verification is done whether the
number already exists. If you enter the starting number 1, then the
actual starting number is automatically determined from the next
available number.
405

WSCAD 51
Expanded view in the autonumbering dialog
If you click on the Expanded button in the dialog, then an image appears of all the
reference names being used throughout the project (including the CPP project) and a
short reading-in procedure starts.
This extension is used to display the lockouts of individual references for the
numbering. The two buttons, Lock and Unlock enable the reference to be locked and
unlocked after selection. This is represented by a special symbol. The OK button closes
this extension and then you only see the Autonumbering dialog.
406

Automatic function
The Unit or Field tabs have been introduced to enable you to work in CPP projects also
flexibly and clearly.
If you want to lock a reference name for the numbering, then select one or more
references (left mouse button (individual), Shift + left mouse button (range) or Ctrl +
left mouse button (add individually)) and click on the Lock button.
Example: individual selection
407

WSCAD 51
Example: selection of Unit or Field
Once you have made your selection, start the autonumbering procedure with the
other desired settings using the Start button. If you have implemented further settings
here, all the settings are taken into account for the numbering.
408

Visualisation on the circuit diagram
Automatic function
In the main menu, under View / Indicate symbols with num. lock you will find a way
of showing the locks on the circuit diagram. The reference names which contain locks will
be indicated by a padlock.
The symbol parameters for this symbol are given another value which you can use to
activate or deactivate this lock.
409

WSCAD 51
410

Auto. cross-reference
Auto. cross-reference
Automatic function
Cross references are automatically generated texts, which signify assignments and
relationships. The settings for the cross-references are modified in the Configuration.
The following types of cross-reference are available in WSCAD 5 .
Cross-reference type: indicates:
Related lines open line end with same line name
Contacts with/without reflector assignment of coil to contact in the Automatic version
Contactors assignment of coil to contact in the Mega version
PLC and main/side elements assignment of main/side elements and PLC modules
411

WSCAD 51
Reference algorithm
There are several possibilities, each with a lower priority. This means that if case a) is
not true, then option b) will be checked, and so on.
The highest priority however has the information 'connection name' in combination
with the line names as used in the destination wiring. When building cross-references
only information on co-ordinates, page number and direction of line ends is used.
One open end in the drawing
412
• Cross-references to a preceding page, if the line end shows towards the left,
otherwise it references to a following page.
• Cross-references to a leading page, if enabled in the Configuration.
• Cross-references to itself.
Two open ends in the drawing
The left end cross-references to:
• A leading page
• The right end on this page
The right end cross-references to:
• A following page
• The left end on this page
MORE than 2 open ends in the drawing:
The left end cross-references to:
• A leading page
• The nearest right end on this page, direction is ignored
The right end cross-references to:
• A following page
• The nearest left end of this page, direction is ignored
The other ends refer to:
• The nearest right or left end.
TIP
If cross-reference text appears in unexpected places, there could
be an open line end. Perhaps the line end is not exactly connected
to a component (turn on ‘Snap’!). Check this with the command
('Delete/move - Drag'); the electrical connections should move at
the same time as if connected with rubber bands! Perhaps a line
was created out of several overlapping lines which are not directly
visible. If so, use the function ‘Compress file’.

Line-related cross references
Automatic function
With this command, the page number with the coordinates of the extended line
which has the same line name and is also open is written automatically at open line
ends (with connecting lines only). When using the destination wiring elements for
producing lines, another connection designation must be entered as well as the line
name. The cross references are then created for lines with the same line names and
connection designation only.
Hint
The criterion for connecting open line ends is that the line names
are the same.
The line ends are labelled in the direction of the line. With lines which are open on the
right (or below or above), the automatic system searches on the following pages first but
with lines which are open on the left, the automatic system searches on the preceding
pages first. Open line ends can have different line names, even though they are at the
same potential. This enables the cross references to be unambiguous.
Hint
Only line ends to which the same line name can be assigned refer
to one another.
The beginning of the name must lie on the line between the end of the line and the
next coordinate point of the line (kink or other line end), otherwise another appropriate
name will be assigned for this line group. If several of such names are assigned for the
group of lines, the first which is found in the drawing memory will be used.
Position the line name with active offset directly on the connection line, and the
system and location identifications (SLI) will be placed in front if the destination has
a different system and/or local identification. Some line cross references can be locked.
Hint
The current page must have an SLI, otherwise all cross-references
are written without an SLI.
On-line line cross references
After entering the line name and connection name in the dialog, the on-line cross
reference relating to the line is written if there are exactly TWO connection
segments and the line name also has a connection name.
If a line has two open ends, the cross reference is written at the end, where the line
name AND connection name agrees with the values just entered.
The function can be locked in the cross-references configuration and is not available in
the Basic Version.
Hint
413

WSCAD 51
414
A connection segment is a symbol connection with an open line
end, otherwise the symbol is connected nowhere. If several
symbols are connected on the page, destination connection
elements with 3 connection points must be used.
Line cross references with destination module
The function can be activated in the cross-reference configuration. In addition to the
previous cross-reference text, the reference name and connection of the attached
symbol can be entered on the extension page. In order to do so, a destination
connection arrow need only be positioned ACCURATELY at the line end. The function
text destination connection arrow must not be empty but can contain any text
desired.
Hint
Exactly 2 connection segments must exist.
The display options of the destination module are set in the cross-references
configuration:
• Without destination module, display of the cross reference as before.
• Single line, cross reference as before, then separators, then reference name:
connection.
• 2-line, cross reference at previous position, reference name: connection one line
below.

Automatic function
Contact cross-reference without contact reflectors
Cross-reference texts on contacts can also be disabled. For every crossreferenceable
contact, the co-ordinates of the associated coil are written beneath in the
same direction as the reference name. Any existing contactor reflectors will be deleted.
In the Professional module, this function is only needed in order to prepare older
drawings for the Contactor manager. Cross reference text can be disabled in the
Configuration because as a result of ‘Numbering with paths’, the reference name
and cross-reference text are identical.
415

WSCAD 51
Contact cross-reference with contact reflectors
This function is normally not required with the Professional module, because it
works with contact combs (i.e. complete contact arrangements) that are automatically
loaded and managed by the Contactor manager. This function is only of use when
converting older projects which were not produced with the Contactor manager. Therefore
you cannot access this command when the Contactor manager is active.
In addition to the cross-references at the contacts, duplicate contacts are displayed
under the corresponding coil together with the co-ordinates of the original contacts.
These duplicate contacts are rotated through 90 degrees. Any vacant contacts cannot
be displayed. An additional auxiliary line can be inserted to show the height of the
reflected contacts. The position of the reflector contacts is set in the Configuration, as is
the type of display for page and co-ordinates. In the case of coils with aux. contacts
(such as MPCBs) no contact reflectors are generated, but the cross-reference text is
written directly underneath the manually inserted auxiliary contact.
TIP
416
This is how an auxiliary contact is created: Load a NO contact or an
NC contact from the library. Do not enter a reference name (or
simply accept the preset ‘K’) and place it on the right hand side of a
coil. An auxiliary line (dotted) will be inserted automatically.
Attention
The pin numbers of all pins must be numeric, otherwise the
automatic functions cannot recognise the contact as reflector
contact.

Contactors
Automatic function
This function creates cross-references on contacts and contact comb. These crossreferences
are created On-line when a contact is placed, if the Contactor manager is
activated.
The allocator '!#rws-q>' indicates a right-justified cross-reference; the allocator itself
is invisible.
The cross-reference text on contacts is normally written right-justified under the
reference name. However if the allocator ‘ws-q’ is present, the cross-reference will be
placed in its position. To do this, put an invisible allocator against each desired
component in the Symbol editor (For basic information on allocators.
417

WSCAD 51
PLC + Main/side element
PLC + Main/side element. The distance between the lines is determined by the
current Snap range. The cross-reference on Main and side elements is normally written
right-justified under the reference name, if the allocator ‘ws-q’ is not present in the
component. If several side elements are present, the cross-references are arranged
below each other starting at the allocator.
With Main/side elements the allocator can also have trailing numerals. These
numerals can be used to differentiate between the individual side elements, provided
these are also clearly numbered. The numbers must begin with 1 and be continuous.
The cross reference is then written in the relevant position on the main element.
Example
Hint
418
!#lws-q1>
!#lws-q2>
The cross-references on side elements are not created On-line but
only when the command is activated
At the same time the cross-references on PLC modules are newly created. In the case
of these components which are controlled by the PLC-manager, the position of the crossreferences
is always indicated by an associated allocator.
Hint
When the PLC manager is activated, these components are created
On-line

Control Cabinet Manager (CCM)
General
Automatic function
In the Professional version, the Create Control Cabinet Manager CCM provides
support by producing the layout drawing of the switch cabinet. It shows clearly the
symbols and components used on the circuit diagram. The size of the Control
Cabinet Manager CCM can be changed and notes the position at which it was last
placed. The Switch Cabinet Manager (SCM) dialog is activated by using the menu
command Automatic / Control Cabinet Manager CCM. A menu line appears in its
display field with View, Automatic, Display and Parameters.
View System/Location View Location/System
419

WSCAD 51
420

Menu in the CCM
Automatic function
Under menu option View on the left side, the sorting can be determined for the
displayed symbols in the Control Cabinet Manager CCM, depending on the CPP in the
project. If the option is active in the foreground, then the dialog remains visible when
setting the modules.
Under menu option Automatic, you can read in the diagrams (inserting symbols into the
CCM), determine the dimension (space requirement), set the display lock and start
the output for positioning the symbols according to Steinhauer.
The menu option Display enables you to choose the handling mode quickly.
The menu option Parameter is used to determine the display and handling mode.
Symbols in the CCM
The symbol list at the bottom shows all the symbols in the diagram with reference
names, numbers, symbol names and item numbers. If there are several symbols
421

WSCAD 51
with the same reference name (terminal strips), the number is simply totaled up. In
the symbol list, only one entry then appears but with the corresponding number.
The checkbox Show all offers the possibility of revealing or hiding symbols in the
bottom symbol list which have already been placed and locked.
The symbols displayed in the bottom symbol list are oriented to the selection in the top
SLI list if you have issued system or location identifications.
System / Location
When you select System / Location, you will see the sorting in the bottom symbol list
first according to system and then according to location.
Location / System
Alternatively if you determine the sorting according to location / system (without
system or location identification) only the information for the project in the CCM
appears in the top CPP list.
In the foreground
If In the foreground is activated, then the CCM remains visible when placing the
symbols. Otherwise it is switched to the background and only switched to the foreground
again after placement.
Show all
The display can also be influenced by means of the checkbox Show all. Without
activation, neither locked symbols nor symbols which have already been placed appear
on the display.
422

Create Control Cabinet file type
Automatic function
Use the Project Manager to create a Control Cabinet file. The file type for this
circuit diagram page is placed on the Control cabinet layout automatically. If you
want to provide a Control cabinet layout without Project Manager, you must
produce a new empty circuit diagram page first and then place the file type for this
circuit diagram page on the Control cabinet layout via the main menu command
Parameters / Options.
423

WSCAD 51
Scale presentation in Control Cabinet Manager
(CCM)
In order to generate the switch cabinet layout correctly and true to scale, various
entries must be made in the item database. In principle, there are three possible
methods of creating the Control Cabinet layout.
1st Method
The fields width, height and length (= > depth) must be entered in the item
database (if not already entered).
Example Extract from an ACCESS data base table
2nd Method
The second method is derived from the fact that a detail drawing of this symbol is located
in a separate layout library. In order to load this layout drawing, you need the name
of the layout library with the symbol name. The layout libraries must be in the
directory which is located under the configuration Parameter / General / Directory
tab / Field layout libraries, e.g. C:\WSCAD50\LIBRARIES\LAYOUT\. The assigned
item entry of the symbol used needs a reference to the respective symbol drawing in
424

Automatic function
a layout library in the database. This entry produces an entry in the item database in
the Switch cabinet field.
Select a symbol from a cabinet library
3rd Method
The third method comes from the previous Version 4.0 and should only be mentioned
here. A symbol abbreviation is entered in the Switch cabinet database field. This
abbreviation is assigned to the symbol (e.g. symbol name). The symbol is as detail
drawing in a certain layout library. It is this library which must be activated for
loading.
Summary
Particularly important for the CCM are the height, width, and depth (length) data
and, if a layout diagram for a symbol is present, accurate information in the Switch
cabinet field (library name and symbol name). These data are looked after in your
item database, if not yet available.
425

WSCAD 51
Reading in diagrams (in the CCM)
In order to work with the CCM, a list of all symbols must first be created internally
despite all the circuit diagram pages. The plugs and sockets are also read into the
CCM.
You start reading in the diagrams of a project using the CCMmenu command Automatic
/ Read in diagrams. When you are carrying this out for a project for the first time, this
list (of all the modules from the circuit diagrams) is created internally. If a list has
already been created at some time, the following query dialog appears:
If you select Yes, then placements made on a control cabinet diagram before are
retained. If this list has changed, because symbols have been deleted for example, this
will be indicated by corresponding messages such as “3 has been deleted”.
If you confirm with No, then the entire symbol list is created all over again. All
placements which were possibly noticed beforehand are rejected, recreated from the
circuit diagram pages and compared with those in the control cabinet diagram. If
you have made manual changes to the control cabinet diagram afterwards, it is
possible that the restoration will not be complete. At this point, you can make a backup
copy.
As things develop, the CCM will recognise item numbers in the modules which have
already been placed. Here, a message will appear and you can decide whether the
symbol in the CCM is to continue to be treated as placed.
426

Cancel aborts the reading in process.
Hint
When you start the CCM for the first time for a particular project,
then you must first allow the diagrams to be read in again. The
program will recognize a symbol list which may have been created
beforehand and will activate it without starting the reading-in
process again.
Automatic function
427

WSCAD 51
Display lock for symbols
With the CCM menu commands Automatic / Display lock / Set or Remove, you can
hide selected symbols in the CCM preview or remove this lock again. It is also possible to
make repeated selections (hold down the key and click on the individual symbols
using the left mouse button).
By activating the checkbox Show all, you can ignore the selection mentioned above so,
as you see from the symbol list all symbols read in, regardless of whether or not they
have already been placed in the control cabinet layout.
Hint
428
If a symbol has been placed, the text color of the symbol in the
symbol list of the SCM changes or no longer appears in the symbol
list if Show all is switched off.
Show all
Off On

Automatic function
429

WSCAD 51
Calculate dimensions
The 'Calculate dimensions' function calculates the lengths and areas of Control cabinet
components.
With the CCM menu command 'Automatic - calculate dimensions' you get the
following dialog:
The Calculate button starts up the calculation across every page of the drawing. Each
supplement part is shown on a separate row in the list. For fixed components such as
back plates the number of parts is shown as a total, for extendable components the total
length is given in metres 'm'. In addition, even before a Control cabinet is constructed,
the surface area requirements for all the parts in the component list can be calculated.
This sum is also governed by the current selection in the UFD list field (e.g. a unit
designation). In addition the maximum depth is also calculated. This is useful for
determining the necessary depth of the cabinet.
430

Display options for the CCM and the control
cabinet diagram pages
Automatic function
The CCM has its own menu commands for adjusting the various settings for its
functionality. Under Parameters / Displays, you can quickly set certain display
characteristics by simply clicking on them with the mouse. Everything will be displayed
transparent starting from the time of activation, i.e. the characteristic concerned
will apply to all symbols which are placed on the control cabinet diagram from this
time onwards. You will see whether the option is already active or not by means of the
tick in front.
Reference names option: Show reference Yes/No
431

WSCAD 51
Item number option: Show item number Yes/No
CPP + reference name option: the CPP + reference name is shown
Move CPP+ reference option: the CPP+ reference name are shown and can be
placed anywhere at the cursor. (no picture)
Transparent reference option: the reference name is shown transparent and
therefore does not mask lines or texts. (no picture)
No display of reference several transparent option: reference only placed with the
first symbol and not with any others.
Further options in the SCM menu under Parameters / Options
(You must always be on a control cabinet diagram in order to make these settings.
Always applies to the next symbol to be placed and not to those which have already
been placed).
432

Hint
• Change scale (switches to the Desktop dialog).
• The following applies to the reference:
Automatic function
Automatic move option. The reference name is moved automatically
when the symbol is positioned.
Set size option. Here, the reference size can be set to very small
values. The outputs in [mm] relate to the scale 1:1. Standard values are
marked with an *.
No display option. With several identical symbols (such as terminals)
the reference name is not displayed.
• Show item number
• Show SLI
• (RID) of the additions: Set the default resource identifications (=
mounting plate, DIN rail and cable channelling, etc.) standard U. If you are
working with the previous DIN, then you must set E here. However, if you are
working with the new DIN, the identification letter U must be used.
If you have created your layout symbols on a scale 1:1, then place
the desired scale (at the beginning) to be used for the symbols on
the layout circuit diagram in the Switch Cabinet Manager.
If, as was usually the case in earlier versions, you have created
your layout symbols to scale (e.g. 1:10), then set the scale for the
Switch Cabinet Manager to 1:1.
433

WSCAD 51
Example Exact presentation of a terminal 7 mm wide. An internal coordinate
resolution of 1/100 inch produces a resolution of 1/10 inch = 2.5 mm for an M 1:10.
Thus, a 7 mm wide terminal, for example, cannot be displayed accurately. If the M1:4 is
used, then the resolution is 1/25 inch = 1 mm and the picture is shown accurately.
Example In above dialog, you can also determine which texts should be visible
when placing the symbols: Reference name, item number.
Hint
434
If you display all the available texts, then the layout of the switch
cabinet becomes very unclear in the case of terminals. The
checkbox ‘Do not show when there are several components’ is
available in order to avoid this. This checkbox should always be
activated.
• Ignore cabinet data in database. Another option is Ignore cabinet data in
database. By activating this option, the entries Length, Width and Height will
determine the scale of the symbol representation in the item database. If this
information is missing, then enter the height, length and width via a separate
dialog (this starts automatically). This symbol then appears as an empty
rectangle. In so doing, you will ignore a detail drawing in a layout library which
may exist (entry in the switch cabinet item database field)
• Rectangle as per symbol body colour assignment. The option Rectangle as
per symbol body colour allocation draws a rectangle in the colour which is
principally created for the symbol bodies under the main menu option Parameter
/ Colours.
• Centric. The option centric is useful for symmetrical symbols, since scaling is
relative to the centre.
• Rounding down symbol size calculation. Rounding down symbol size
calculation corrects the scaled representation in the switch cabinet with the
function Round down. Advantage: in no way are the symbols shown larger.
If this option has not been selected, rounding down is applied.
Reference lines
The dialog for adjusting the reference lines of the SCM appears with the SCM Menu
command Parameter / Reference lines. With Reference lines, you can produce
horizontal and vertical reference lines which are used to assist in positioning the
symbols in the diagram better. Enter the values in mm. Visible must be checked in order
for these lines to appear on the diagram. The reference line of the standard circuit
diagram page is not affected by this.
Hint
The values are always displayed in relation to the origin of the
coordinates on the circuit diagram page. The lines are independent

of the selected scale in the Switch Cabinet Manager and always
remain stationary in the diagram, even when the scale is changed
subsequently.
Automatic function
435

WSCAD 51
Required entries in the parts database
In order to place the additional parts easily with the CCM, certain entries are needed in
the parts database. All your additional parts such as back plates, cable channels and
mounting rails are activated by selecting them for use in the CCM.
Hint
436
The additional parts stored in the parts database must be specified
by selecting them separately.
The fixed-size components such as Control cabinets or mounting plates are specified with
the abbreviation SSM&… The extendable components such as cable channels or guard
rails are given the abbreviation SSM-… The following table illustrates the uses of
abbreviations:
Element Abbreviation
Mounting plate SSM-&MP
Cabinet SS-&SCH
Cable tray SSM-KK
Stay brace SSM-MS
Top hat rail SSM-MS
Collection bar SSM-SS
End holder SSM-&Z
Separator SSM-&Z
Intermediate plate SSM-&Z
Example

Hint
The abbreviations above have been created arbitrarily and refer to
the selection of the symbols in the library 'Cabinet.bib'.
Round components
Automatic function
Can be created by entering into the Width field in the parts database a value
corresponding to the diameter of the round component. You must not specify a Height.
437

WSCAD 51
Creating a mechanical Control cabinet layout with
supplements
The "Supplements" button in the CCM opens up a selection window in the parts
database, showing all the parts which are available for constructing a mechanical
switching cabinet.
Tip
438
There is a quick method of loading additional parts, via a new
library toolbar 'Switching cabinet' which gives direct access to the
parts database, where you can select parts of a particular
component type. The mechanical parts which are available for
inclusion in a Control cabinet are listed selectively.
This symbol toolbar is activated by clicking with the right mouse button on the header or
the information bar and then clicking with the left mouse button on symbol toolbar.
There are basically two different types of component:

• Fixed-size components
• Components with variable length
Automatic function
If you load, for example, a mounting plate (a fixed-size component), the size stored in
the parts database will automatically be used. If the selected database record has no
dimensioning values (Example: general mounting plate), an input field for Width /
Height / Depth will appear.
If you enter the measurements in 'mm' and confirm with OK, a component of this size
(appropriately scaled) will be located on the cursor and can then be placed. If you select
a component with variable length e.g. cable channel and set the starting point, a defined
length will appear in the edit field. You now have two possibilities: cancel using the
key and the component will be located under the cursor. Now you can enter the
starting point and set the size and alignment of the component by dragging with the
mouse. Or you can accept the measurements given and place the component using the
given length.
Example: Constructing a switching cabinet
Back plate + cable tray + mounting rail + Control cabinet housing
Sie haben jetzt 2 Möglichkeiten:
• Brechen Sie diesen Vorschlag mit ab. Das Symbol befindet sich jetzt am
Cursor. Nun können Sie den Startpunkt vorgeben und die Größe und Richtung
des Symbols mit Ziehen der Maus bestimmen.
439

WSCAD 51
440
• Oder Sie übernehmen die Maßangabe und das Symbol wird in dieser Länge zur
Positionierung angeboten.
• Sie haben bei nachträglicher Selektion des Kabelkanal mit der rechten Maustaste
im Parametermenü die Option Ziehen zur Auswahl und können somit die Länge
bzw. die Breite des Kanals korrigieren. Die gewählte Kante (lange oder breite
Seite) der Selektion bestimmt die Änderungsmöglichkeit.
Beispiel Schaltschrankaufbau Montageplatte + Kabelkanal + Hutschiene +
Schaltschrankgehäuse

Automatic function
441

WSCAD 51
Placing the symbols in the control cabinet
The individual symbols can be collected from the symbol list double clicking on them with
the mouse and then placed on the diagram. The dimensions are taken from the Item
database.
If no dimension entries are available, a dialog is offered to you for entering the
dimensions for the symbol.
Set the option Accept values in the database if you want to save the dimensions for
this item permanently in the database.
If you have activated the checkbox Centred in the CCM, then the symbol body will be
located centred at the cursor. With a click of the left mouse button, position the symbol
at the desired location on the control cabinet layout. The alignment can be changed
via the rotation menu.
If you set the checkbox Automatic after the first symbol then, after a double click, all
other symbols will be placed at the preset distance next to the previous symbol. All
settings which relate to the view are adopted. This process can be reversed by deleting
the symbol which has been placed or by using the UNDO function.
Alternatively, click with the mouse button and the symbol will remain on the switchcabilnet
layout diagram and merely the placement in the CCM will be taken back.
Example Symbol placed at a distance of 1.0 mm automatically and reference
name revealed.
442

Automatic function
If there are several symbols with the same reference name (e.g. terminals) you will see
the corresponding number of pieces in the bottom symbol bar of the CCM in Column #.
After you have placed a symbol, the number of pieces is divided up: You will now see the
total number and the number of symbols which have already been placed. After the
first symbols, set the checkbox for Automatic and activate the Plus button, a counter
dialog will appear which will enable you to place one or more symbols automatically.
With OK, the chosen number of symbols are placed one after the other at the preset
distance next to the previous symbol. All settings which relate to the view are adopted.
The process can also be reversed. As with the placement of individual symbols, you can
choose whether all the placements or only one should be removed again.
443

WSCAD 51
Navigating from the CCM to the switch-cabinet
pages
In the CCM, you can mark the symbols which have been placed individually with the
right mouse button and activate the option To diagram page and display under
Symbol parameters and then the cursor will jump to the page entered and to the
symbol.
444
=>

Cable manager
General
Automatic function
The Cable manager enables you to easily allocate wires within multicore cables, and
assign colour code schemes to the wires.
The option for activating the online Cable manager can be found under 'Settings -
Common Settings –(tab) Cables'.
The Cable manager works with an ACCESS database which contains the data on the
cables being used.
You can see, together with other information, the quantity of free wires and the assigned
colour code. If the column 'Shield' shows a '+', based on the information of the material
database the cable has a shield. If the option 'Show all' is NOT selected, only cables
with free wires are listed (or cables with a shield, if you are assigning a cable shield). If
you now add a cable to your project or remove one, the changes will be monitored in the
background by the Cable manager and updated automatically.
Hint
445

WSCAD 51
446
If the Online Cable manager is not activated, you can open the
cable manager dialog manually, although any changes will not be
automatically recorded. This means that the state of the cable
database could differ from the content of the drawing.

The cable database
Automatic function
This database is located in the same directory as the circuit diagram drawings. The
name of the database is taken from the project name and has the added letters "kab"
and the extension 'MDB'. All the cables in a current project are managed within the cable
database. When switched on, the Cable manager automatically updates the database
both when a cable is drawn and when it is deleted.
Example: Extract from cable database
In order to use the Cable manager, every cable used, together with its full data, must
be entered in the main WSCAD parts database.
Example: Extract from parts database
447

WSCAD 51
448

The conductors file
Automatic function
There is a text file for defining cable colour schemes. It contains the correct colour
abbreviation for each conductor using common colour codes. The file name is
'Conductors.txt' and must be located in the same directory as the parts database. Each
line contains the name of the colour code, a sequential number beginning with 1 and the
wire colour. You can easily add customer specific colour codes by editing the conductors
file.
Hint
Don't enter control characters and keep the format of the original
conductors file.
449

WSCAD 51
450

Change wire colour
Automatic function
You can change the wire colour within the Cable manager dialog or directly within the
schematics. Open the Cable manager dialog via the menu command 'Automatic funct.
– Cable manager'. Select the cable you want to modify. Select the colour you want the
change. Press and hold the -key and select the new colour. Click on the 'Change'
button.
You can change one or several wire colours. Then click on the OK button to close the
Cable manager dialog.
alternative way
In the schematics right click the wire you want to change. You'll get an information dialog
denoting which component is selected. If the conductor is listed confirm with YES. Select
the command 'Change colour/wire' in the Symbol parameters menu. You get a
dialog which lists the available colours of the assigned colour code, similar to the Cable
manager dialog. The currently selected wire is marked with a '

WSCAD 51
Select another colour and then click on the OK button, the new colour will be copied to
the element in the schematics.
Hint
452
If you select a used colour as the new colour, the two colours will
be exchanged

Removing cables
Automatic function
If you delete a cable e.g. by marking it in a window and then pressing the
key, the entry in the cable database and all wires / shields within your schematics
with this reference name will be removed.
Note
You cannot UNDO this function.
453

WSCAD 51
Working on existing circuit diagrams in WSCAD
4.0 format
When you start up Scan existing drawings the program checks whether the conductors
of the cables used in the chart correspond with the associated colour code in the parts
database. If there is no entry for a colour code in the parts database, or it differs from
that of the cables being used, the dialog Select colour codes is started automatically.
The cable designation is displayed with the conductor colours in use, and you can select
the appropriate colour code from the upper selection window. Confirm your choice with
OK and the colour code will then be transferred to the cable database.
Warning
Hint
Hint
454
The chosen colour code must correspond to the actual conductor
colours in use
You can only assign the actual colour code being used and not
another one later on, because the changes will not be written back
into the circuit diagrams. If it is not possible to do this, you can bypass
the allocation using 'Ignore'. If you want to abort the entire
assignment procedure use the 'Cancel' button.
The type 'Numbers' is permanently defined as an alternative colour
code, i.e. this colour code is assigned to all cables in the chart
which do not have a pin number, in cases where there is no colour
code definition in the parts database.

Connector manager
Connector manager
Automatic function
The Connector manager is a feature of Professional module. This functionality offers
you a detailed overview of all the plugs and sockets in use in the current project. The
individual connections are checked using the Parts manager and compared with the
assigned coding. The Online Connector manager is activated via ‘Settings –
Common Settings – Connectors. For the menu items ‘Schematic - Connector –
Plug’ or ‘- Socket’ or ‘- Plug+Socket’, the dialog above must be set.
If you load a Plug or a Socket via the Schematic - Load Symbol command, other
symbols can then be used by this method.
Used library
The library to be used is selected.
Plug symbol
The symbol to be used for the plugs is taken from the used Library . The symbol must
be of the component type Plug!
455

WSCAD 51
Socket symbol
The symbol for the sockets is also taken from the used Library. The symbol must be of
the component type Socket!
456

Auto. line names
Create line names
Automatic function
This function automatically generates line names (wire numbers) in different styles
for all the lines (i.e. connection lines with the same potential), which:
• don't have an open line end
• do not already have a line name
With the menu command Automatic funct. – Auto. Line names - Create you get the
following dialog to determine how the line names are to be created:
The five main methods are:
Main Method Example
# continuos 1,2,3,.....
Page . #1 1.1, 1.2, .....2.1, 2.2,.....
Page .# 1.1,..1.2,.....2.3, 2,4,......
Source/Target -Q6:1,-Q6:3,...
Page . Path # 1.3, 1.3A, 1.4, 1.5,
If you select Source/Target the complete reference name with pin number will be
the new line name.
457

WSCAD 51
Settings:
458
• It is also possible to specify a hyphen or other symbol as a preceding character.
• With the option 'Fixed Length' you can set a constant length for the names, e.g.
0001,0002 etc. …
• The option Lines with Conductor indicates whether line names should also be
generated for the connections where there is already a component of the type
'Cable Conductor'.
The options of the group ‘Per Unit’ only work under the setting ‘#
Continuous’
• Start at 1 means that for every new unit designation the names start at number
1 (units are for example part projects with extended reference names such as:
=Unit1, =Unit 2, etc.)
• Reserved block size means that you can choose a range to suit the job. When
you enter e.g. 200 and in the first unit 153 lines are numbered, the second unit
numbering will begin at 200. If 203 lines are numbered then the next series will
start at 400.
• Specified start value opens up a dialog which can store permanent values for
the various unit.
The generated line names conform automatically to the current
drawing functionality and path settings
The currently used drawing functionality and path settings determines the position of the
line name. With horizontal functionality selected (USA) the line name is positioned in the
middle of a horizontal line, with vertical functionality selected (Germany) it is positioned

Automatic function
in the middle of a vertical line. Similarly this determines whether the horizontal
(Germany) or the vertical (USA) path settings are used for the line names.
Warning
Manually marked line names can no longer be deleted automatically!
459

WSCAD 51
Delete line names
With this command you can delete from the circuit diagram all line names which
have been created automatically and are not assigned to open lines. Line names entered
or modified manually will not be removed.
460

Contactor manager
Contactor manager
Automatic function
The Contactor manager governs and monitors the allocation of contactors and relays.
Because of its complexity, it is explained separately in the chapter Contactor manager.
461

WSCAD 51
Project data
Project data
You can start this automatic function with the menu command 'Automatic Funct.
– Project data' or directly from the project manager dialog. The project data contains
general information about the project such as customer, project number …., but also
technical information like voltage, phase … . First you'll get the windows standard dialog
to determine the output file, then you have to select the graphic form.
Note
462
If you start creation of the project data from the project manager
dialog and a graphic form is already assigned, the selection of the
graphic form is skipped.

Variables
Drawing sheet Variables
Automatic function
This command transfers general functional information such as page
descriptions into a project summary. You can enter and automatically
manage 10 general variables (0 … 9) as well as variables for ‘Page
number’, ‘Page quantity’, ‘Date’, ‘Time’ (year 2000 compliant),
‘File name long’, ‘File name short’, ‘Next page’, and ‘Previous
page’. They can then be distributed throughout the whole drawing set.
In the case of the variable ‘File name long’, the full name, consisting of
drive directories and file name is copied across. In the case of ‘File name
short’, only the file name itself is copied.
The numerals in the file name extension gives the page number; the
page quantity is the file name extension of the final page
The text is always displayed on a single line and the length is limited to
48 characters
The variables ‘File name short/long’ and ‘Variables 0 to 9’ are distributed to all the
pages when the Automatic function is activated, whereas the other variables such as the
Page numbers are set on-line. When this command is activated, the following dialog
appears, containing all the variables of the active drawing window. Thus you can see at
a glance all the variables for this page.
463

WSCAD 51
New/modify
Select the field of the relevant variable and insert the desired text. You can of course
edit several variables before sending the information to the circuit diagram with the OK
button. If you modify an existing variable, only the new value will be entered: all the
other settings such as the position remain unchanged. After entering a new variable you
will see the following menu:
In the above example, Variable 2 was entered. You can now set the position (‘Move’)
or, for example, alter the size. After you have positioned the variable correctly with
‘Move’, you can quit out of the menu with ESC or the right mouse button. If you have
entered several new variables, this process must be repeated for each variable.
Remember
464
You only need to enter variables onto one page of your drawing set;
the distribution and updating for the complete set, is then done
with the 'Automatic' command.

Automatic
Automatic function
When updating page numbers, page quantity, date and time, only the characters up
to the first number are transferred unchanged; the current number is then appended. All
other variables are generated completely from new. Select the variables to be updated
with the options in the ‘Automatic’ group.
You can transfer the date of the current page onto all the other pages.
When updating the date, you can choose via a dialog whether to transfer the current
value across to all the pages (meaning that every page will then have the same date), or
to retain the date of the last drawing modification. (Note! A drawing will have been
modified even after you have drawn only one line and deleted it again!).
‘Variables 0 to 9’ will be distributed to the whole drawing set as they were originally
entered. Position, size, direction and value of the variables in the currently displayed
drawing will be transferred to the whole drawing set if the switch ‘Position and size
remain unchanged’ is off; if it is on, only the value will be updated.
TIP
TIP
Before a variable can be automatically handled, it must first be
entered and placed by hand, otherwise the Automatic command will
not be able to find it.
The variables ‘Date’ and ‘Time’ are automatically updated when a
modified drawing is saved, if this is allowed in the Configuration.
465

WSCAD 51
Position and size remain unchanged
The variables can also be updated without resetting the position. If this switch is on, the
position, size and direction of the variables on the various pages - if already present
there - will not be altered during the automatic run. If it is off, then the position, size
and direction of the variables in the current page will be transferred across.
466

Fix date
Automatic function
The variable ‘Date’ is converted into simple text. Thus you have a very simple way of
“freezing” the date of the various modification stages. If you enter a completely new
date later (as a ‘Date’ variable, of course), you can again position it where you wish.
467

WSCAD 51
PLC
Activating PLC Manager
In order to use the automatic functions of the PLC Manager, the latter must first be
activated in the configuration (Professional Version). Therefore, check the configuration
Parameters / General / Contactor and PLC / PLC Manager. Invocation via the PLC
Manager takes place via Automatic / PLC / PLC Manager and displays the contents
of the PLC database.
468

Creating project database
Automatic function
The project database is created as an Access file in the project directory and is used
as the basis for automatic PLC Management by using the PLC Manager.
469

WSCAD 51
Importing / Exporting PLC list
Siehe
Import-Export-SPS Listen
470

Drawing frames
Replace drawing frames
Automatic function
A drawing frame is not a element in its own right, but a collection of normal drawing
elements. All these elements are simply added to the current file when you insert a
drawing frame. If a drawing frame is already loaded, the elements of this frame must be
removed before you insert the new drawing frame. This can be done automatically if the
margin settings of the current drawing and the file type of the drawing frame are correct.
Drawing sheet variables and Unit/Field designation will remain, if the new drawing frame
also contains these elements.
Hint's
The margin settings are a basic requirement to remove the
elements of the existing drawing frame. As the drawing frame is
not a element of its own all elements are considered as part of the
drawing frame which are located within the margins. If elements of
the old frame are not removed please check the margin settings!
To copy the margin setting into files without margin settings, use
an ‘empty’ drawing frame (no graphic element at all) with correct
margins. No replacement will happen, only the settings will be
copied to the files.
471

WSCAD 51
Manually replace a drawing frame
If you want to replace the drawing frame of one sheet, you only have to load the new
drawing frame using the menu command 'File – Insert drawing macro'. If all the
requirement (margins settings, file type of the drawing frame) are fulfilled the following
will happen in one operation:
472
• The elements of the existing drawing frame are removed
• The new drawing frame is inserted
• Drawing sheet variables and Unit/Field designation will remain, if the new drawing
frame also contains these elements.

Automatic drawing frame replacement
Automatic function
With the menu command 'Automatic funct. – Replace drawing frames' you can
replace the drawing frame in the schematics and control cabinet layout of a complete
project.
Important
It's strongly recommended to make a safety copy of the complete
project. Therefore you'll get a safety dialog every time you use this
command.
First you have to select the new drawing frame using the windows standard dialog. The
file type of this file must be 'drawing frame', therefore files of previous WSCAD versions
are not supported. As the replacement process modifies the complete project, all sheets
are analyzed. If any problem is found you will get an information dialog which reports
any problems:
Hint
You should correct the reported problems in every case before
trying to continue the replacement process.
If many problems are reported you can print the list by clicking the 'Print' button. You
can, even if not recommended, ignore the reported problems, but then sheets may be
not replaced, if the format differs, or if there is not enough free drawing memory.
CPP projects
It's necessary for CPP projects that the new drawing frame
contains unit designation (field designation recommended).
473

WSCAD 51
Project data
Project data (first sheet)
This automatic function is started via the menu command Automatic / Project data or
directly from the PM. After the command has been invoked, output the Project data to
a file. The Windows standard dialog will then appear for entering the filename and then
the choice of graphics form. The Project data should contain fundamental information
about the project such as the client and project number etc. as well as technical
information. The following figure shows an example of a Project data.
Automatic Project data in the PM creates several different first pages if additional
sequential forms *.0002, *.0003... are present in the template directory.
474

Material list
General
Automatic function
With this function you can create a materials list from a complete project (drawing set).
You can also initiate creation of the materials list from the project manager.
Output to Browser
The ‘Output to’ either produces a formatted printout or a WSCAD form as well as
various different file types and the Material browser. Each printout is limited using the
other settings.
Type of printout
Separate All the symbols which are selected in the dialog under output elements
are placed in the materials list. One line is generated in the list for each symbol.
475

WSCAD 51
Combined All symbols with the same item number or symbol name are combined
and sorted according to symbol name.
Hint
476
The contactor and terminal browser and the Cable Manager which
are intended for the purpose should be used for the item
assignment of contactors, terminals and cables.
Sort according to
The sorting sequence (Sort according to: in the dialog area) can be defined according
to number or manufacturer etc. (all database fields). The sorting functions for
creating the material list have been extended by additional criteria. Until now, sorting
was according to one criterion. Now, several criteria can be linked with AND in order
to make sorting more efficient.
Criteria are: Manufacturer + Items, Manufacturer + Types, Supplier + Items and
Supplier + Types. Sorting is initially executed according to the first named field value
and then according to the second field value.
Output material lists: which symbols are output. The symbols of the circuit diagrams to
be listed are specified in the Output elements area. They are specified by selecting the
relevant symbol type: Standard, Terminals, Contactors, Cables and Plugs.
Filters for the material list via System identification / Location
identification
The transfer of symbols to the material list can be prevented if the symbol name
starts with a particular character. This can be configured in Configuration under Start
characters if the symbol is not on list. The ! at the front of the symbol name is
ignored during the comparison.
Example The following table should explain the possibilities for entries in the field
System identification / Location identification.
Entry Refers to
=System1 All symbols from System 1
=System1;=System2 All symbols from System and System 2
=Sys* All symbols where the symbol identification starts with Sys
=System1+Loc* All symbols from System 1 where the location identification starts

Automatic function
with Loc
=Sys*+Loc? All systems where the identification starts with Sys AND the
location identification starts with Loc and only where the location
identification only has one other character (e.g. Loc1 or Loc9)
+Loc7* All symbols where the location identification starts with Loc7.
-X5? All symbols where the reference (regardless of the SLI) starts
with –X5 and has one other character (e.g. –X51, -X56...)
#K2? All symbols with the following resource identification e.g. 1K21,
10K25, 71K23
-#V*;-#M* Linked filter (valves and motors are evaluated)
#K* All symbols where the resource identification has any number of
numerals (0-9) in front of the K
Output elements
Here, you simply select the symbol type which should be used for creating the material
list.
Output option
The option Database is deactivated when you issue item numbers and symbol names
under Symbol parameters which do not come from the item database. When the
database is deactivated, then +Additional components and Additional components zus.
cannot be selected.
When Database is selected, data are transferred from the ACCESS database and then
Replace is switched off automatically. The wildcard for Page/Path is only taken into
consideration with the output Separate. Additional elements (e.g. covers or plug
contacts) can be output when the option +Additional components is activated and the
item is a combi-element.
477

WSCAD 51
Material lists with additional items
When the option Database is configured, then the option Additional components zus
can be activated. The additional items which are stored for an item in the database are
then also collected together in a list and no longer assigned to the respective main
components. This option should be activated in order to generate an order list, for
example. But not only the evaluation of the additional components (combi-element)
saved in the item database is evaluated but also the subsequent parameter function in
the relevant symbol on the circuit diagram.
478

Automatic function
In the dialog, further data can now be entered by either collecting it from the item
database or by entering it direct in the individual lines.
479

WSCAD 51
Material list considering Unit and Field
designation
The area Unit and Field designation is needed to create the material lists just for one
or more particular part-areas. This can be done by entering the corresponding
information in the field Unit and Field designation.
Important
480
It is important that a system identification starts with an = and a
location idenfication starts with a +.
You can be very flexible by using wildcards. As well as this, you can enter several
specifications by separating them with a ‘;’. The wildcards ‘*’ (for as many subsequent
characters as you want) and ? and # for exactly one character makes it possible to use a
very flexible specification. Reference names can also be entered selectively e.g. M or
V.
Take into account whether it is upper or lower case.

Material list in form
Automatic function
In the Professional Version, the data are transferred from the database. After clicking
on the Start button, with the option Form->File activated, a WSCAD material list is
produced by means of a form. By using wildcards, the material list can be created
flexibly for the output. If there are extra-added database fields in the item database,
then these have to be taken into consideration when creating the form so that they can
be evaluated in the material list.
Material list in file
Select this type of output when you want to create the material list as a WSCAD file and
possibly edit it on the screen. Before selecting the graphics form, the Window standard
dialog appears for creating a file and can also be used to define the file name. The first
page of the material list is displayed immediately in a drawing window. Use the Project
Manager to generate lists repeatedly without further pre-settings.
The following list shows the sorting options and the associated wildcards of the graphics
form:
Sorting options Wildcards in the graphics form
Item number type
Part number ptno
Manufacturer manu
Supplier suppl
Type type
Symbol name symbol
Reference name ref
Additional text 1 atxt1
Additional text 2 atxt2
Function text fctext
Page/path path (not with option Combined)
After the internal editing is complete, you still have to define the content of the output
first and then obtain a dialog which lists the available graphics forms.
Important
Only symbols with symbol names and reference names are output.
Material list on printer
If you want the output to be on the drawing printer, a standard dialog will appear as for
the drawing output but with some of the functions of the dialog deactivated.
481

WSCAD 51
Material list while using the Project Manager
The material list is best generated for the project which is open via the Project
Manager.
482

Automatic function
Material list according to Access, Excel, ASCII,
dBASE or UGS or KWP format
The material list can also be written to an ACCESS, EXCEL, ASCII or dBASE
formatted file for further processing. The wholesale format UGS or KWP can also be
used. Which values are output is determined by selecting the corresponding field
values. The file extension is automatically set to MDB, XLS, TXT or 0000.
The field names and field lengths of the item file which is produced correspond to
those of the database currently being used.
In the list on the left, you will see the available output fields. The field which has just
been selected is transferred to your Output at the same time by clicking on the >>
button at the top, the

WSCAD 51
Output to UGS
In this case, a file (in the special format) is always created in the current project
directory.
484
x

Material list in the Compact Version
Automatic function
A symbol list of the character set is output on the printer or written to a file. An output
form is the creation of an ASCII list. Outputting in ASCII is useful for editing with a
word processing program or to file when the printout is to be deposited with a materiallist
form. You can determine the structure of the output list yourself by using forms.
You can produce an output list in which each symbol is listed separately, even with
coordinates. With outputs Combined and Combined+references, sorting is always
according to symbol name, otherwise it can be according to reference.
The text of the header for the ASCII list is transferred from the configuration with
associated text columns. If a column is set to zero, the corresponding value is not
transferred to the list. The values of the text columns determine the sequence within a
line.
Hint
Place the column Add.+References in the configuration far enough
to the right for the values not be overwritten with the symbol
names, particularly when working with the replacement list. The
output is completely suppressed when the column is set to zero.
With coordinates: The output is executed as for Separate but with the coordinate
output (page/path) of the symbols.
Replace: When generating the material list, all symbol names of the drawing are
replaced with text from a foreign data file. This file must be structured as follows. The
symbol name which is to be replaced (possibly without) is the first word of a line but
this must not be positioned at the start of a line. The symbol name must be a word,
i.e. not a space. The replacement text is positioned behind the symbol name to be
replaced in the same line up to but not beyond the line end and, of course, can be made
up of several words (e.g. new symbol name, supplier and company number etc.).
If an existing symbol name cannot be found in the replacement list, it is retained. The
maximum size of a conversion file is 64 kB, which is sufficient for more than 1000
items. You will find an example file for a replacement list (*.ERS) in the WSCAD
directory or on the installation CD:
CD:\Installed\Projects\WSCAD Exampleproject1\Ws_mat1.ERS
Any number of conversion files of this type can be present but only one at a time can
be selected for the generating procedure for producing the material list.
485

WSCAD 51
Material browser
General
When starting the Material browser, the following view appears.
Material browser display
The following fields are displayed in the Material browser:
Lock, Number, Symbol(module)names, Item, Manufacturer, Reference name, Page/Path,
Function text, Symbol type, Selection, Designation as well as the Additional texts 1..16 ,
Catalogue of Symbols (when Separate is invoked). The field values which have been
saved can be edited by using the browser. When you change field content, the whole line
is given a coloured background and marked with an *.
486

Changing items
Automatic function
When you select a field in the Item column, the Assign item button becomes active:
Now press this button and the database selection dialog will open. When you select
an item to which a contact comb is allocated, you will see this in the Preview at the
same time:
487

WSCAD 51
488

Automatic function
You can now allocate a new item to the selected symbol. In order to do so, determine the
new item identification from the selection list by double clicking on the identification or
clicking on OK. Only symbols of the same type can be selected. Once you have selected
the option Combined as the material list dialog, all symbols of the same type will be put
together.
Hint
You can also select as a group and assign identical item numbers to
several symbols.
When you change an item, the line is given a coloured background and marked with an
*. The change is transferred to the diagram by clicking on OK.
489

WSCAD 51
490

Contactor online
Automatic function
If the function Contactors on-line in the Material browser are activated, all changed
contactor data such as comb, contact PINs and cross-references are transferred to
the diagrams immediately on leaving the Material browser. If the field is not ticked,
then the following dialog will appear after ending the Material browser. Click on OK
and all changes will be written back to the diagram.
Hint
When this function is executed, the writing back process may take
a little time.
491

WSCAD 51
Show destination
If you want to jump directly from the Material browser onto the circuit diagram page
on which, for example, the changed symbol is located, then select the symbol and then
click on Show destination. If several symbol types are combined, the cursor jumps to the
first found (also applies to terminals which are always combined anyway).
492

Lock module for material list
Automatic function
Mark one or more fields in the Lock column. Then click on the relevant button in order to
change the status. The status can also be changed by double clicking on the relevant
field (terminals are always combined).
493

WSCAD 51
Module name, function texts and additional text
1-16
The relevant fields are activated for the entry by double clicking on them with the mouse.
After correction and ending the dialog with OK, all of the texts are positioned on the
drawing automatically.
Special feature
Additional texts can only be edited providing they already exist before invoking the
Material browser. Additional texts are only displayed when they have been selected
separately when invoking the Material browser. The function text cannot be edited
when the option Combined is activated. Terminals, plugs and cables are always
displayed together.
Symbols on the menu bar are there to assist during editing. Thus, all marked texts are
furnished with an exclamation mark by clicking on Button 1 and are therefore not
visible on the circuit diagram. The action is reversed by clicking on Button 2.
1 2
Buttons 1 to 3 are used for editing the text in the Material browser. Button 1 cuts
text (), Button 2 pastes text () and Button 3 copies text
(). You must click on the relevant field in order to edit it.
494
1 2 3
Exception enter new text:
New texts cannot be entered in “empty” fields.
Positioning changed texts:
The changed texts are placed on the circuit diagram where they were before.

Organisation in the Material browser dialog
Sorting
Automatic function
The visible columns in the dialog can be displayed in different ways. Columns are marked
by clicking on the column header.
The menu symbols become active and you can define the sorting sequence as
ascending or descending alphabetically.
Inserting or hiding columns:
In order to make the dialog easy to see, the individual columns must be hidden or
revealed. In this way, you only show those columns which you really need. Click on the
column header with the right mouse button and a context menu will appear which you
can use to reveal or hide columns individually.
495

WSCAD 51
496

Material browser with catalogue
Automatic function
The introduction of the catalogues enables electrical wholesalers’ catalogues to be
read in by means of the data standard in the WSCAD 5 item database. These
catalogues can be used to assign items to the individual symbols in the Material
browser.
In order to do this, separate fields are displayed in the Material browser which you have
filled in when invoking the item database.
497

WSCAD 51
External Text Source
If you possess data sources, which would not like to merge or be able to import to the
WSCAD database, then you have nevertheless access to these information. Typical
example of use is subsequent reading in of measurement records.
If the Material browser is opened you start the procedure with the button Ext. text
source These texts can possess the formats text (* txt), Excel (* xls) or ACCESS (*
mdb).
In the first line of the dialogue you're searching the data source by clicking the button
[...] .
498

Automatic function
Dependent on the source format attitudes concerning table or fields have to be made.
The option Show all in the source on shows also that one, which already selected you.
They can select in the dialogue individually or several times (Ctrl and/or Shift). If you
selected values, then you pull these with pressed left mouse button into the
Materialbrowser into the field, in which inserting is to take place.
499

WSCAD 51
The values are then transferred to the symbol parameters. From there you can use the
values for Automated lists (e.g. material list).
500

Connection list
General connection list
Simple connection list
Automatic function
This consists of the different line names or a serial number if the name does not
exist and the reference name with pin number.
The connection list can be started via the menu command Automatic / Connection
list / Simple.
Possible outputs of the simple connection list
The simple connection list only outputs two connection points for each line indicated
(source and destination). After starting the menu option Automatic / Connection list /
Simple in the Professional Version, the Connection list dialog opens. In the Compact
Version, the output on the printer or in text or ASCII list is offered immediately. You
decide on the form the output of the list should take simply be selecting the relevant
option.
Detailed connection list
The text of the header with associated text columns is transferred from the
configuration. If a column is set to zero, the corresponding value is not transferred to
the list. The values of the text columns determine the sequence of the contents of a
line.
This is an ASCII list and consists, per line, of:
serial number, line name, reference name, symbol name, pin number, pin name,
pin type and page number
Hint
In the automatic version, the evaluation via the Project Manager
supplies the connection list.
501

WSCAD 51
Reference name connection list
Separate reference connection list
This is an ASCII list in which only the connection list of a single symbol is
produced. Enter a reference name for which the connection list is to be created (e.g.
K4 or even X1). On the list, only those connections are indicated to which all
connections of the chosen symbol are connected. This type is useful, for example, for
plugs and sockets. Unwanted connections or open connections can therefore be easily
recognised. The output format corresponds to the settings in the configuration.
Hint
502
If you are working with SLIs, you must enter the SLI along with
the reference name.
Reference family connection list
The Reference family connection list is an ASCII list. Specify the core name (=
reference name without numbers on the end of the name) for which the connection list
is to be created. With this, by specifying the letter F, for example, it is possible to create
a connection list for all symbols with the resource identification F.
Hint
If you are working with SLIs, you must enter the SLI along with
the core name.

Wiring diagram
Automatic function
With the destination wiring functionality, it is possible to generate a detailed type
of connection list. The wiring diagram now makes it possible to pursue the
destination of connections precisely and allows the interlinked connections to be listed
precisely. The connection list can be started via the menu command Automatic /
Wiring diagram or in the Project Manager.
Possible outputs of the wiring diagram
The wiring diagram outputs a line for each connection (each connection supplies the
line name, source, destination and the connection name, colour and cross
section). In the Compact Version, in the Project Manager, the connection list can be
output on the printer or in an ASCII list. You decide on the form of the output simply
by selecting the relevant option (in this case, e.g. Browser). Output via a form is
achieved by using extended connection list forms.
Sorting
If you want a sorted wiring diagram, then you must select an output via a form or a
database format beforehand. Sorting is carried out via a list field in which you can set the
desired criterion.
503

WSCAD 51
Limitation
The display or output of the list can be limited via the option Limitation. In order to do
this, you must enter one or more reference names to be displayed.
Hint
504
Alternatively, the evaluation can be started via the Project
Manager. If you have permanently assigned the connection list in
the Project Manager, then the form which is set there will be used
automatically.

Wiring diagram browser
Automatic function
The browser provides a quick overview of the connected destinations of the respective
connection lines. Advantage: You do not have to create an output such as a file first in
order to monitor your connections. Sorting and selection (limitation) take place in the
browser, i.e. the connections appear in the browser as they will appear later in an
output file.
Editing fields
The fields Colour, Cross section and Length can be edited by double clicking on the
relevant field and carrying out the desired changes using the keyboard.
Special function
Activate a field in the Source or Destination column in the browser and the Show
button becomes active. After clicking on this button, the cursor jumps to the site of the
connection on the circuit diagram. Even double clicking on a field in these columns
triggers the jump function.
Adapting forms
The wiring diagram operates like other output lists (terminal diagram and material
list etc.) with a graphics form. The corresponding wildcards are available for preparing
the contents. Using the new Form dialog is also very helpful. The following wildcards are
available especially for the wiring diagram:
Wild cards Function
Colour Colour information for the connection
Length Length information for the connection
Sr. no. Serial number
Line name Line name
Source Source of the connection
Source coord Coordinates of the source
Cross section Cross section information of the connection
Connection Connection name
Destination Destination of the connection
505

WSCAD 51
Destcoord Coordinates of the destination
506

Terminal diagram
Terminal diagram
Automatic function
The Terminal diagram dialog is invoked using the Automatic / Terminal
diagram menu command.
In the Compact and Professional Version, a terminal diagram is written in the
form of output units to a WSCAD file (graphical form), a text file (ASCII), DBase ,
Access or Excel file, for one terminal strip or for all terminal strips according to
choice. The terminal diagram with WSCAD file is standard for WSCAD 5 and is
already available in the Compact version. WSCAD uses a graphics form which
you can set up yourself with a high level of flexibility as a WSCAD drawing. You
yourself decide on what information you would like to see in the terminal diagram
via so-called wildcards. Apart from information such as target information,
line names, pin numbers, function texts and cable information relating to the
terminals, this also includes general information such as the date and filenames.
You will find the exact list of available wildcards in the chapter Form configuration.
The graphical forms can be very easily adapted to your individual needs by using the
wildcards.
Two targets on each connection side (internal/external) per terminal
connection are administered in each case. The two nearest connection points
(seen from left to right, located exactly above the terminal connection, however,
have priority) are labelled as the target by other symbols which are connected to this
terminal connection.
Classification
507

WSCAD 51
508
• According to coordinates: The terminals are output according to their
position on the circuit diagram, in other words, first from left to right and then
from top to bottom.
• Alphabetical: The terminals are output arranged according to terminal
number. In this case, the sorting algorithm determines how terminal
numbers which are made up of numbers and letters are treated.
• Mixed: The terminals are initially arranged according to terminal number.
Terminal connections which are only provided with letters as the terminal
identification (such as PE) are classified according to the position on the
circuit diagram between the terminals which are arranged according to
number.
• According to levels: The terminals are output arranged according to their
levels.
• According to terminal position number (TPN): Sorting according to the
terminal position number produces an arrangement of multi-stage terminal
connections according to their position within the multi-stage terminal.
• Taking into account the manual sequence: In the Terminal browser,
you can determine any sequence for the terminal output which can vary from
all standard arrangements.
• Determining the output unit: In the selection field Output unit, you can
determine the target for the output. The points, Printer, WSCAD, ASCII ,
DBASE , ACCESS and EXCEL, however, are only available in the
Professional version.
After activating the menu command of the output unit, you will need to press the
desired button 1 Terminal strip or All terminal strips in the dialog. Now, in the
dialog File, enter the filename of the new terminal diagram being created and
then in the next dialog File, select the desired terminal form which is to be used as

Automatic function
the basis for the output. This is necessary in order to define the values to be output.
Work as for the days of WSCAD for Windows Version 4.3
If you want to use the conventional terminal diagram, then you will have to make
the following adjustment. Terminal diagram compatible with V 4.3
509

WSCAD 51
1 Terminal strip
On request, you must click on a terminal connection from the desired terminal strip. Then
you have to select the output device.
On file you must decide the filename for the new terminal diagram.
510

Automatic function
Then select the appropriate form in a dialog. This form is filled with the information from the circuit
diagram and printed out or displayed on the screen.
511

WSCAD 51
512

All Terminal strips
Automatic function
Here, there is no need to enter a name. All the symbols from the symbol type, Terminal,
(i.e. whatever the reference name) are edited. Then you have to select the output device.
On file you must decide the filename for the new terminal diagram.
• First, decide on the first filename of the first new terminal diagram.
• Then select the appropriate form in a dialog. This form is filled with the
information from the circuit diagram and printed out or displayed on the
screen.
• With the vast majority of forms, a separate new terminal diagram is
generated for each terminal strip. However, there is also the option of
outputting all terminal strips directly one after the other by using the
wildcard kbezM.
513

WSCAD 51
Terminal browser
Terminal browser interface
The terminal browser starts with a generation process which goes through all the
circuit diagram pages so that all the terminal connections for the selected terminal
strips can be shown on the screen. During this process, you will only see the terminal
strips which have a reference name.
The terminal strips without a reference name can also be displayed by an INI switch
Showallterminalstrips=1 in the [Config terminal cable] column in the WS_PRJ51.INI
file.
Left side in the terminal browser
On the left in terminal browser, you will see all the terminal strips of the project
listed in the selection field. The register cards at the bottom left (All, System, Site)
allow the terminals to be sorted in KTP mode. If this mode has been used, you will be
able to select the terminal strips to be evaluated by clicking with the left mouse button
(single selection), holding down the key + left mouse button (multi selection)
or holding down the key + left mouse button (range selection). The function
key + A allows all terminal strips to be selected immediately.
Top centre in the terminal browser
The function buttons are arranged at the top centre of the terminal browser. The Item
button is only visible in the Professional version and is only active once you have
clicked on the Item field.
Right side in the terminal browser
On the right in the terminal browser, the individual terminal connections are listed in
a table. You can, of course, display as many terminal strips as you like by clicking other
terminal strips in the left selection field. The display is updated.
Column arrangement
514

Automatic function
The columns in this table can be included in or excluded from the display by clicking on
the column heading you want to exclude, for example, with the right mouse button or by
clicking wherever you want to insert another column. Select the corresponding Context
menu.
The columns in this table can also be shifted into position by clicking on the column
heading to be shifted with the left mouse button and holding it down. Now move the
mouse pointer to the place in the table where you want to reposition the column. The
current position will be indicated by a small white triangle.
Outer right
Register cards which sort terminal connections in the respective manner are located on
the right.
According to coordinates: The terminals are output according to the position on the
circuit diagram.
515

WSCAD 51
Alphabetical: The terminals are output arranged according to terminal number. In this
case, the sorting algorithm determines how terminal numbers which are made up of
numbers and letters are treated.
Mixed: The terminals are initially sorted according to terminal number. Terminal
connections which are only provided with letters for the terminal identification (such
as PE) are classified according to the position on the circuit diagram between the
terminals which are arranged according to number.
516

Automatic function
Level: Sorts multi-stage terminals according to the available connection levels.
These are recorded and administered in a separate Level column.
TPN: Sorts multi-stage terminals according to the Terminal Position Number
(TPN). These are recorded and administered in a separate TPN column.
517

WSCAD 51
Bottom left
Register cards are located here for displaying the terminal strips in regard to the
system location designation (SLD).
All
Lists all the terminal strips of the project.
System
Lists all the system designations with the respective terminal strips.
518

Field
Lists all the location designations with the respective terminal strips.
Test button
Automatic function
Monitors the terminal strips as to whether a multi-stage terminal which has a double
TPN (Terminal Position Number) is positioned within the terminal strip. Monitoring
takes place automatically every time the browser is invoked.
519

WSCAD 51
Generating a terminal diagram from the browser
The Output button uses a graphics form in which the terminal diagram is output. If you want to
output all the values in the table, then you must use a form which has all the necessary wildcards.
First, you must specify the filename of the terminal diagram. If you put in a file type, then a file
of this type is produced with the values from the form.
Then enter the form which is to be used as the basis for a template.
520

The terminal diagram is then produced in the background.
Output in other formats
If, for example, you set to Access, then you must enter the target database.
Automatic function
521

WSCAD 51
Numbering terminal browser
The individual terminal strips can be numbered manually. You can also renumber all terminal strips.
Specify the desired terminal number in the Number field for the first terminal connection by
marking the Terminal connection field in the Number column and entering the start value there.
The value is saved by pressing Return and the next field in the Number column then becomes
active. With this, it is also possible to number the terminals manually. If this is not what you want,
cancel with .
Select the other terminal connections. You can select the terminal connections by clicking with
the left mouse button (for selecting a single terminal connection), holding down the key +
left mouse button (for selecting several terminal connections), holding down the key +
left mouse button (for selecting a range) or by clicking on the column header to mark all the
terminal connections and the type of numbering has to be determined:
522

Automatic function
• Continuous also includes terminals such as N and PE internally in the count and increases
the next terminal number by these terminals which have been included in the count.
However, N and PE are not overwritten.
• Overwrite all overwrites all existing texts in the Number field section (including N and
PE).
• By pressing the Number button, the marked terminals are counted up from this start
number.
E.g. Index 1 is changed to 10 by using the Continuous option
Result: Terminals which have been changed are marked darker yellow in the individual list and the
terminal strip which has been changed is marked red in the tree on the left.
Confirm with OK and the terminal numbers in the terminal diagram are now changed.
The Overwrite all option also replaces terminal numbers such as N and PE terminal numbers with
continuous numbers. Caution: no way back.
523

WSCAD 51
Manual sequence terminal browser
The sequence of terminal connections displayed can be changed manually by marking the
Terminal connection field in the Sequence column and entering the position value there. The
value is saved by pressing Return and the next field in the Sequence column then becomes active.
This does not affect the terminal number.
Note the option Take into account manual sequence. This option must be activated if the
Sequence column is not to be disregarded on the display. In the example, you will see that
Terminal 14 is displayed at Position 14. This function can be used to set up the terminal
diagram.
Special function
This function can be used especially for PE and N (text in general) by entering, for example, #PE in
the sequence field and then the terminal connection so labelled is automatically placed behind the last
PE terminal.
524

Output medium and output sequence
The target for the output can be determined in the selection field Output unit.
In the Compact version, WSCAD and Printer only.
Automatic function
After the menu command for the output unit has been activated, the filename of the new
terminal diagram being created must be entered in the File dialog and then the desired terminal
form which is to be used as the basis for the output selected in the next File dialog. This is necessary
in order to define the values and the position on the graphics to be output. The sequence of the
terminals output can be predetermined using the option Take into account manual sequence.
525

WSCAD 51
Allocating item numbers in the terminal browser
Click on a field for a terminal connection in the terminal browser. Press the button Allocate
part and then the database selection starts. You can select the terminal connections by clicking
with the left mouse button (for selecting a single terminal connection), holding down the key
+ left mouse button (for selecting several terminal connections), holding down the key
+ left mouse button (for selecting a range) or by clicking on the column header to mark all the
terminal connections.
Now look for the appropriate item and confirm with OK. The item will then be saved to all the marked
terminal connections. Terminal connections which have been changed will be marked in darker
yellow. Press on OK and all the changes in the diagram will be saved. If you now click on the relevant
terminal in the diagram with the right mouse button, the parameter field will open with the changed
item number.
526

Function text in the terminal browser
Automatic function
Switch into the relevant field in the Function text column in the Terminal browser and activate
the entry with a double click. Now enter the desired function text. In this case, for example,
Controller. This function text is now assigned to this terminal pin as a visible function text.
Alternatively
You can also assign a function text directly to each terminal. The parameter menu for the relevant
terminal is opened by clicking on the terminal in the circuit diagram with the right mouse button. You
can also edit the function text there.
527

WSCAD 51
Show button in the terminal browser
The Show button makes it possible to navigate precisely to the terminal on the diagram which is
displayed in the terminal browser, even in complex projects, by marking any field from the desired
terminal with a click of the left mouse button.
Mark Line 1-column / internal target and after confirming with the Show button, the cursor
jumps to the selected Terminal. In the reverse direction, click on a terminal with the right mouse
button, the Parameter menu opens, select Browser and, likewise, you will find yourself in the
Terminal browser table with complete listed terminal strip for the current terminal.
The cursor is positioned at the selected terminal.
528

Multi-stage in the terminal browser
Automatic function
If there are multi-stage terminals (these cannot be resolved into individual terminals) on the
circuit diagram, these will be displayed immediately in the Index column with a special mark. The
main connection for this terminal is marked in red. Make sure that the Level column is included.
All the functions described (numbering, item number and sequence etc.) can likewise be
executed here as shown above. Since the multi-stage terminal is only available once as a
component, you can issue an identical number. The levels provide the differentiation in the spatial
connection assignment.
Defining the multi-stage terminal
If you want to generate multi-stage terminals from standard terminals afterwards, this can be
done here in the terminal browser. The symbols on the circuit diagram are unaffected and the
assignment is carried out via the database only.
If, for example, you wish to generate a five-fold multi-stage terminal, then simply select the 5
associated connections on a terminal strip.
Now press the Define button in the Multi-stage terminal section of the browser and then the
terminals will be assembled.
529

WSCAD 51
If a number between - and 5 is set in the selection field, in the case of -, all marked terminals are
added to one multi-stage terminal. If, for example, 3 is selected, then the marked terminals are added
to the 3 rd multi-stage terminal.
Pin name and number of the terminal
Now change how the numbers and the names can be written back in the diagram by using the
automatic numbering modes. Note the Same number option in the terminal browser dialog. This
is used to impose an identical number for all the connections of a multi-stage terminal.
Item number
Specify an item number for the main connection from the item administration window (marked in
red). The other connections are given the identical item number automatically. However, only the
main connection entry is used in the material list.
Changing a multi-stage terminal into separate terminals
If, for example, you wish to resolve a five-fold multi-stage terminal into separate terminals again, then
simply select the 5 associated connections on a terminal strip.
530

Automatic function
Now press the Delete button in the Multi-stage terminal section of the browser and the Multistage
terminal is then resolved into separate terminals again.
Levels
The levels determine the spatial assignment and can also be used as a separate view in the general
sorting window. Example of the possible uses of a multi-stage terminal.
When you have several multi-stage terminals on a terminal strip, you can control the numbering using
Sort display to produce the desired result on the terminal diagram.
TPN (Terminal Position Number). By using the Level register card, the same levels are assembled
within the terminal strip and by using the TPN (Terminal Position Number) it is possible see which
terminal this connection physically belongs to.
531

WSCAD 51
Now, with the numbering changed.
532

Fields in the terminal browser
Automatic function
The fields in the Terminal browser can be adjusted. A lot of information can be seen at a glance
and you can arrange how it is presented yourself. Click on the column header with the right mouse
button and you will obtain an overview of the fields which are not yet displayed. Select the desired
field and move this into position on the grid.
The fields are primarily for the function texts for the units and cables connected to the terminals,
divided up according to whether they are internal or external. If, for example, you use the target
wiring, then ….
533

WSCAD 51
Terminal destination
The Button Terminal destination makes it possible to exchange the internal and the
external side of the terminal. This is indicated in Terminal Browser. Mark any field of
the desired terminal with one click to the left mouse button. If you click on the button,
then the internal and external targets are exchanged.
534

Set Color
Automatic function
If you liked a coloured distinction (e.g. potentials) visible in the Browser , then you select
the button Set color to adjust.
The dialogue show all pin numbers and pin names of the selected terminal, the colors
actual colors will be shown. The yellowish dye is standard. If you select now a text (or
several by means of Ctrl key) and select Modify background colour , then you can
choose the new background colour for the selected texts from the color chart. Mide the
button Modify text color.
The changes become immediately visible in the dialogue. With Remove color you delete
the attitudes for the selected texts again.
535

WSCAD 51
If they terminate the dialogue with OK , all texts become L1, L2, L3 coloured accordingly
represented.
536

Connector chart
General Connector chart
Automatic function
The Connector chart is the evaluation of the plugs and sockets which exist in the
project. The forms for the evaluation can be organised without restriction. By using
wildcards, the values can be selectively entered in the lists which are required for the
documentation. The evaluation is carried out using the menu option Automatic /
Connector chart. This menu option invokes a dialog in which the output of the
Connector chart can be determined. In this, click on Selection and all the plugs in the
current project will be listed.
• With the 1 Plug button, you are requested to select the relevant plug on the page
for which the plug diagram is to be created.
• All plugs selects all the plugs in the project.
• Selection displays all the plugs found in the project (selection is made by clicking
with the mouse)
• The plug diagram can then be output via a form, into a file or on the printer.
For this, you must always select the form to be used from a dialog.
Example Connector chart
537

WSCAD 51
Cable
Cable list
In the Professional Version, Cable list is used to produce a list of all the cables in
the project. If the cable list is to be output to a file, you can sort according to the
following criteria.
Search for the relevant destination file. When you select a file, then you must first
specify the filename and then the form.
538

Cable chart
Automatic function
The Cable chart is a diagram in which all the individual cores are available together
with additional information about the connected components. The prerequisite for this is
that the cable core type symbols are used as a cable presentation, since the cable line
contains no information about the numbering of the cores.
The Cable chart contains various pieces of information about the individual cores and
the components connected to them. The graphics form allows the cable diagram to be
arranged flexibly.
First specify the output unit.
Select the option File if you want to create the material list as a WSCAD file in a predefined
form and possibly edit it on the screen. The first page of the cable diagram is
displayed immediately in a drawing window.
If you select printer, the output will be fed directly to the drawing printer. A standard
dialog will then appear for the drawing output but certain parameters will be locked.
Evaluating the cable shield on the cable diagram
Via the menu option Automatic – Cable – Cable chart – 1 Cable, a cable diagram can
be produced according to the form specifications for a selected cable. Alternatively, the
Cable chart can be generated directly from the Project Manager. After clicking on the
command, you must select the cable for which the diagram is to be produced by clicking
on a crossover point between the cable line and the connection line.
In the menu which now opens, select File
539

WSCAD 51
After selection, a file dialog opens in which you can enter the name of the cable
diagram.
After issuing the filename with the OK button, you must specify the form which is
needed as the template for creating the cable diagram.
540

Automatic function
This is specified by selection and then clicking on the OK button. A cable diagram is
then created.
541

WSCAD 51
Option: 1 Cable
The cable chart is created for 1 cable. Specify the cable by selecting a core of the
cable with the mouse. The automatic system searches the entire project for the
associated cores. Specify the output unit and then select the desired graphics form from
a dialog. This will be filled in with the information from the circuit diagram.
542

Option: All cables
Automatic function
The cable diagram is produced for all cables in the project. Specify the output
unit and then select a suitable graphics form from a dialog. This is then output on the
printer or displayed on the screen.
A new page is produced for each cable.
543

WSCAD 51
Summary
Summary specification
Formerly, the Summary specification took the information from variables which were
located on the pages of the circuit diagram. By using the Project Manager, the
Summary specification can be created for an entire project, even though the individual
output lists have different filenames. So that existing projects and forms can continue
to be evaluated, there are two separate invocations in the Main menu 2.
544

Automatic function
Summary from information from Project Manager
The information relating to the page is entered within Project Manager and saved in the
database.
In the project WSCAD EXAMPLE PROJECT 1, the text SUPPLY is indicated as the file
content.
The menu option Tools / Overall evaluation / Option content specification in the
Project Manager starts the setting up of content specification in the new style. At the
same time, the file name, the file content and the date are transferred to the content
specification via wildcards.
The content specification can also be generated by clicking on the Content
specification folder with the right mouse button and then clicking on the context menu
option Generate with the left mouse button.
Evaluation can equally be carried out via the menu option from information from the
Project Manager in the main menu (see above).
545

WSCAD 51
Tip
546
The text from the File content field can also be transformed to the
diagram pages via wildcards by extending the desired drawing
frame and the Form content specification using the Form dialog.

Summary with the variables
Automatic function
The command in the main menu Automatic / Content specification /
Consisting of variables from all diagram pages prepares the content specification in
the conventional style by using the variables.
The Overall evaluation of the new Project Manager can be converted to the previous
mode by means of the option Content specification consisting of variables from all
diagram pages. You set up a list (overview) which contains certain information
(variables) from each page of the circuit diagram. Use, for example, the variable 6 to
briefly name the function of each circuit diagram page. Enter the function text on each
page via the Variable command. In this example, the variable (6) must be the same on
each page but the position and size of the text can be selected according to your
requirements.
In the next dialog, you can either work with a graphics form (Professional Version only)
or specify which variable should be used for the content specification.
When you select the option Activate graph. form, you do not need to select any of the
variables offered. Rather, the output takes place in a graphics form. Consequently, the
wildcards in the form concerned determine the information of the content specification.
The content specification in a form can be in several columns (up to 4). The columns can
be assigned page numbers (always the three-place name extension) as well as the
variables 0 to 9 beforehand as variable wildcards (# as the first character).
Important
Tip
The graphics form must use old wildcards. The new forms of
WSCAD Version 5 have no such wildcards. The multi-column output
can also be controlled via the configuration so that approximately
the same number of lines is output in each column.
It is essential that you avoid using Automatic to edit a variable
which you are using for the content specification. Otherwise the
547

WSCAD 51
548
text of the variables on all the pages will be overwritten by the text
of the variables of the drawing which is loaded. This process
cannot be reversed with UNDO.

Modification list
Modification list
Automatic function
The Modification list can be started with the menu option Automatic / Change list or
directly from the Project Manager. The Modification list is based on the
management of change states as the Project Manager makes them available. There,
specify the change states and enter the associated information which is then output in
the Modification list.
After invoking the command, the Windows standard dialog will appear for entering the
filename and then the choice of graphics form.
Hint
At least 1 page is output for each change state and no more than
15 change states can be managed.
549

WSCAD 51
Reference list
Reference list
The reference list shows you all the connections between the individual unit with the
information reference name, pin number, pin name and function texts. You can see
exactly which connections are connected together. At the same time, the individual
connection are continuously counted up. The filter possibilities for the different SLI
scenarios appear in the dialog for activating the reference list.
550
• The output can be to printer or file, via a WSCAD form in each case, and to
Access, Excel and ASCII.
• The output can be sorted in the sequence System, Location, Reference or
Location, System, Reference.
• The output is restricted in the entry line with the complete system identification or
location identification.
• Determine whether the output should be executed with terminals and/or
plugs.
• The output is started with the OK button.
Example

Automatic function
551

WSCAD 51
Labels
Labels in general
When outputting the labels (resource labels, terminal labels and cable labels) via the
menu command Automatic / Labels / Resources, the following dialog will appear, for
example.
Via this dialog, you can either start the label output immediately, select another printer
or switch directly into the label configuration.
Hint
552
This also applies to the cable and terminal labels.
If the option In file has been set, the list of the supported output formats is activated.
The output can also be to Microsoft Office Products ACCESS and EXCEL. In each case,
you will produce a file in original format which can be processed further using the usual
software products. Next, you must specify the name and directory for this file in the
Windows standard dialog. Switch into the configuration dialog in which the format for the
output is configured via the Label configuration button.

Symbol editor
General information
General
This chapter describes:
• How a component is created or modified.
• How to graphically display the component library.
• How to create a new button for a library toolbar
When you select 'Symbol editor' you can create a new component or modify an existing
one. Using 'Select objects' you can copy parts of your drawing (components and simple
graphics) into the symbol editor. You can copy imported DXF symbols into the symbol
editor.
After starting the Symbol editor you will see that it has its own menu
Please check the grid settings before you start creation of a new symbol. The menu gives
you quick access to the symbol editor specific commands. Within the symbol editor only
one drawing window can be used. If you have several windows opened in the current
drawing, these will be hidden and re-activated when you quit the symbol editor. The
library toolbars remain visible, but cannot be used. Buttons in drawing toolbars bars may
become inactive, depending on the command.
Note
You can only exit the symbol editor with the command 'Exit'! The
standard windows icon at the right top corner for closing the editor
is intentionally disabled
553

WSCAD 51
Background and grid colors
The background and grid colors can be set independently of the general settings under
‘Settings – Colors’ in the main menu. The advantage is that when you "record" symbols
to library toolbar buttons you can use different colors for the background and grid.
554

Summary
Symbol editor
The following summary shows a brief list of what has to be done to create or modify a
symbol.
If you wish to modify an existing symbol
• Switch on the snap grid with F5
• Activate the library in which the desired symbol is saved.
• Bring the symbol to the screen using Delete+Load.
• Delete previous parts of the symbol and draw new ones.
• If necessary, delete pins and re-set them with type, shape and direction.
• Enter pin numbers and/or pin names.
• If necessary, change symbol name and possibly the reference name
Activate another library if the symbol is not to be saved in the same
library.
In the library, select Save component, specify the suspension point and the symbol
will be saved. In order to check, use Delete+Load or even Paste (for direct comparison)
to bring the symbol back to the screen.
If you wish to create a new symbol
Note
• Adjust the grid range under Options (optimum, 2.50 mm or 0.1 inch).
• Enter number/cabinet (select no more than 1).
• Select symbol type.
• Create shape of symbol. Switch between snap grid and ortho using Keys F5 and
F6 as needed. Bear in mind that the pins must be arranged inside a grid area.
• Set the pins with the shape (point), type and direction. The snap grid is
automatically switched on. Specify the pin number and possibly switch off Auto for
better positioning. You can also specify the pin name and make it invisible (! as
the first character).
• Enter the symbol name (usually invisible).
• Enter the reference name. The position and correct text alignment is important
(may be placed left of the symbol).
• Activate the library (if the correct one is not already selected) or create a new
one.
• Select Save component and after specifying the suspension point, the
component is saved.
• Load again with Library – Delete+Load in order to check.
A detailed example of symbol creation is described in the practice
example of the Installation and Practice Manual and you should at
any rate read the entire example.
Special features of the terminal symbol
When creating a terminal, some special features must be taken into consideration
because of the additional information for the automatic functions (Terminal destination
direction and Numbering location).
• In the symbol editor, first enter 1 for Number / Cabinet.
• Select symbol type Terminal.
• Allocate Draw body, Symbol name and Reference name.
555

WSCAD 51
Note
556
• Set pins: Each terminal must have at least 2 connections (or better: 2 + bridge
pins). Set passive pins in point form on top of one another. A terminal can also
have more pins (multi-storey terminals) but must be one symbol. Only one
number is allocated to each terminal when numbering, regardless of the number
of pins.
• The pin orientation is set manually (e.g. right) not automatically. In so doing,
you also immediately specify the orientation of the pin numbers created during
automatic terminal numbering.
The pin orientation during automatic numbering is altered
according to the configuration.
Allocate all pin numbers – the automatic positioning should be switched off.
Position the pin numbers to how they should appear later during auto-numbering.
Next, delete all pin numbers again (not with the space bar but with the backspace key).
You have now allocated the positions for the automatic numbering.
The pin name is used to label the internal side of the terminal (terminal destination).
Likewise, allocate all pin numbers because of the position determination. Delete the pin
names again at all pins of the outer side. What you enter as the pin name is not
important, a full stop (.) is usually used. With multi-storey terminals, it is useful to use +
or - to distinguish between different pin names.
Draw another pin using the point shape and of the type bridge. e.g. in the centre of
the terminal. The pin must only be used for the bridge connections of terminals. The
bridge pins can be connected in the drawing by means of a continuous line – coordinate
points are not necessary.
Save the component in the library.

Exit Symbol editor
Symbol editor
The Exit command is the only command that will abort the symbol editor. When the
command is selected, you are prompted with the safety request 'Release editor'. You
have to answer the safety request prompt with a 'YES' to dismiss the editor. This should
act as a reminder if you have forgotten to save a component.
557

WSCAD 51
Libraries
General
The 'Library' command opens the 'Library' menu. Using the menu you can add
components to a library, create a new one, and transfer parts between two libraries. A
library can store several components, the maximum size of a library file is the drawing
memory size.
558

New library
Symbol editor
The 'New library' command is used to create a new component library. After selecting
the command you are prompted to enter the Name of the new library (without
extension). The name must have a maximum of 8 letters and the name extension
'.BIB' is attached automatically.
You can create as many libraries as you need.
559

WSCAD 51
Control cabinet libraries
If the option 'Control cabinet libraries' is set, the directory for the control cabinet
libraries is used instead of the directory of the IEC 40719 symbol libraries
560

Content
Symbol editor
The 'Content' command allows you to output the component names, of all components
in the active library, either directly to a printer or to a file. A semi-automatic graphical
display of the library contents is possible using the 'Output library' command.
561

WSCAD 51
Change symbol size
Multiple use of this command can produce rounding errors. The 'Change symbol size'
command is used to modify the size of all components in the active library.
When the command is selected, three choices are displayed in the 'Factor' menu:
If 'Input' is selected you are prompted to 'Input the scale (0.5 to 2.0)'. This capability
can be useful if you change the grid spacing being used to create drawings.
WARNING
562
Care should be taken when using this command as it modifies the
size of ALL the components in a library. A better approach may be
to copy the components to a new library prior to changing the size.

IEC 61346 libraries
Symbol editor
If the option IEC 61346 libraries is set, the directory for the IEC 61346 is used
instead of the directory of the IEC 40719 libraries.
563

WSCAD 51
IEC 40719-libraries
If the option IEC 40719 libraries is set, the directory for the IEC40719 symbol
libraries is used.
564

Pin
Place pin
Symbol editor
This command generates a new connection point. The grid function is always
switched on for this. The shape, type and orientation still have to be selected. A
dialog is provided to assist in the settings for the connection pins that you wish to
place on the symbol body.
This dialog appears when the option Aids for the electronics is switched under
Parameters / General / Compatibility tab.
565

WSCAD 51
566

Pin type
The type of connection is only important for generating lists.
Symbol editor
• Type Bridges for the terminals of the main PLC and auxiliary element channels
• Type PASSIV for PLC connections, contactor and standard symbol
567

WSCAD 51
Pin form
The shape of the connection is mainly for visual purposes. Where possible, always use
the point pin shape. This type of pin is represented by a short line on the screen but is
not output on the printer.
568

Pin direction
Symbol editor
The direction of a pin can be specified manually or determined automatically. The
envelope of the symbol is formed internally for the automatic determination. The
automatic pin orientation is determined by the outer edge of the envelope at which
the pin is positioned, i.e. a pin on the outside right is assigned the pin direction– right.
Note
The pin orientation also determines the text direction for the pin
number and pin name.
Normally, the pin numbers and pin names are aligned the same
way. However, if the pin orientation is automatically recognised as
top or bottom, the pin number is vertical but the pin name is
horizontal. This property is used for auxiliary contacts arranged at
the side.
569

WSCAD 51
Size of pin number and pin name
This text size can be specified for each pin of a symbol. This normally takes place in
the symbol editor with setting the connection points but can also take place later via the
menu command Change / Symbol / Connections. The 4 available sizes correspond to
the first 4 size classifications of the Gen. text.
Note
570
The specification for the size always relates to the pin number and
the pin name of the connection point concerned to the same extent.

Move pin
Symbol editor
An individual pin can be moved with its pin number and pin name. First release the
grid lock so that pins which do not lie precisely on the grid can also be selected.
However, always reactivate the grid for positioning.
571

WSCAD 51
Delete pin
This command removes a connection with number and name. The grid lock is
released at the same time so that the grid can be switched off if necessary.
572

Enter pin name
Symbol editor
The pin name can be up to 10 characters long. Using an ! as the first character
makes the pin name invisible. After entering a name, you can position the pin name
providing the Auto switch is not active. The cursor automatically switches to the next
pin. In the symbol editor, an invisible pin name is visible in any case.
Note
A connection must have a pin name and/or pin number, otherwise
it will not be included by the list generator.
573

WSCAD 51
Enter pin number
The pin number can be up to 6 characters long and does not have to consist solely of
numbers. After entering a number, you can position it providing the Auto switch is not
active. The cursor automatically then switches to the next pin. For this reason, the
numbers can be entered very quickly without frequently having to reposition them. The
option Auto (avoid using if possible) applies to all pins.
574
It is not possible to position one pin manually and another
automatically.
The orientation of the text is determined by the pin orientation which has been set
(except for auto pin orientation, where the text orientation is determined by the
position of the pin number relative to the pin).

Editing pins (connections)
Symbol editor
The pins of a symbol represent the electrical connection points of a symbol. Electrical
connections are then only recognised as such when the connection line is connected to
a pin exactly. Up to 2 parameters can be assigned to each of these pins – the pin
number and pin name.
Important
However, the pins cannot be placed until the symbol body has been
created.
Some special features
The connection is important for the list generator (terminal diagram and connection
list). For the list generator, the pin number has a higher priority than the pin name.
A pin name can be made invisible by using an ! as the first character. An invisible
name is visible in the symbol editor in any case but a pin number is always visible.
Give each pin a pin number or a pin name. The list generator cannot
process a pin without a pin number or a pin name and it will not
appear on the terminal diagram.
575

WSCAD 51
Symbols
New symbol
If you click on the menu option Body / New symbol, the contents of the Symbol
editor will be deleted and the Parameters will be set to zero.
576

Characteristics of a component
Symbol editor
A component is not just a simple collection of graphic entities and text. WSCAD 5
provides several automatic functions. To take advantage of these automatic functions,
components consist of the following parts:
Element Function
Component graphic determines visual shape or form of the component
Pins determines the component connection points
Component name name in the library
Component type determines the automatic functions available to the component
Reference name for numbering
n addition certain texts (text allocators) have special functions, e.g. to determine the
position of cross references.
When creating a new component you should follow this sequence:
Note
1. Quantity/Enclosure enter (mostly 1)
2. Select component type
3. Draw component graphics
4. Place pins and pin numbers/names
5. Enter component name
6. Enter Reference name
The maximum pin qty. is 255, the maximum component size is 32
kB.
577

WSCAD 51
Create symbol body
All elements which are created using this menu option determine the shape and
appearance of the symbol.
Switch off the grid function when creating small elements (function key ). However,
bear in mind that the connection points (pins) must always be located inside the snap
grid. The grid size of 0.1 inch or 2.50 mm is a good value and most libraries are set to
this grid size. You can then take advantage of the automatic sizing feature if you really
have to work in another grid size.
The drawing possibilities largely correspond to those of freehand drawing.
UNDO and REDO memory are deleted with the selection ALL, by selecting the menu
option Pins, Symbol name, Reference name and Change size and in the Library
menu in the case of Delete+Load and Load component.
Note
578
Make sure that your connection pins are always drawn with the grid
switched on (F5).

Edit symbol parameters
Symbol editor
The Parameter dialog is started after invoking the menu option or clicking on a
symbol with the right mouse button. A menu is opened with the symbol parameters for
the selected symbol – the values can be changed.
All texts are of the General text type with an (internal) separate identification. The
changes which can be made correspond to those of General text. The width of the
window adjusts itself dynamically to the length of the text. Parameters can be reentered
or changed in the entry field by clicking on the relevant line.
Reference name
The reference name is used as the basis of the resource identification (e.g. R for a
resistor, F for a fuse or K for a contactor). The reference name also has a significant
influence on the access to the database in the Professional version. The reference
name can be placed anywhere or rotated but, with automatic numbering, it is
extended in accordance with the type of numbering selected. The reference name can
be made invisible by using the prefix !. The user must set the text orientation of the
reference name.
A symbol can also be created without a reference name but will then not be available
for the connection generator etc. The reference name comes under the Symbol
parameters and can also be changed in the drawing manually via Symbol parameters.
Note
When using System and Location identification in the Profession
Version, the reference name is extended internally with the System
and Location identification.
Symbol name
Here, enter the name of the symbol by which it is to be found in the library. The name
can be placed anywhere, rotated, enlarged or reduced in size. The symbol name comes
under the symbol parameters and as such can also be changed at any time later on.
The symbol name is also transferred to the Material list but the original name (in the
library) is overwritten with corresponding text from the database in the Professional
version when the database is accessed. The symbol name is normally not visible on
579

WSCAD 51
the circuit diagram. This is achieved by prefixing it with an ‘!’ when the symbol is
created.
By entering a certain lock character in the symbol name, you can prevent the symbol
from being transferred to the Material list. The character (usually a full stop .) can be
specified in the configuration and must be placed at the beginning of the symbol name,
behind the leading !. This lock character takes on the function of a lock for the material
list.
Note
580
Many symbols in the libraries supplied by us have general names
such as !SSwitch1pol.. Give these symbols the names which are
appropriate for your application (special Compact version) and in
regard to the conversion file for the Material list.
Make sure that the name does not contain spaces, otherwise these
will lead to problems when using the name for the conversion file.
Item number
The Item number is used as an index for access to the WSCAD database. If the line
Item number is selected while the database access is activated in the Professional
version, the database selection appears again as it does when loading the symbol
and the components are displayed in accordance with the identification letters and
selection criteria. The symbol parameters Symbol name, Item number and
Additional text 2-16 are transferred and the Additional text1 is not changed. If
aborted or if no components are in the database according to the identification
letters, the Item number can be changed manually.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer is mainly used in the Compact version to allocate the symbols to the
manufacturer who is mainly used for this element from the beginning.
Note
With a coil and with the Contactor Manager switched on, if a new
contactor is selected, the comb, contact inscription and reference
text are automatically corrected (menu option Change / Contactor).
Function text
The function text can be transferred to the terminal diagram, cable diagram/list
and material list by means of wildcards (see Wildcards). When assigning a contact, with
the Contactor Manager switched on, the function text for the coil is displayed in the
assignment dialog at the same time for better orientation.
Symbol type
The Symbol type can be changed.
Additional texts
16 texts for additional information such as fuse rating, power or other information.
These texts can be accessed in the material list by means of wildcards. Text2 is used
for specifying the automatic contactor for the power or current specification.
Note
Quick access is also provided to the symbol parameters via the
object properties.

Determine component type
Symbol editor
To take advantage of the automatic functions provided by WSCAD 5 , components must
be designated a certain 'Component type' according to the function of the component. To
do this select the Component type command and the 'Component type' menu
appears. Here you can select the appropriate type designation for the component.
Subsequent changes can be made to the component type
Standard
All components not designated as one of the other component types are designated as
'Standard'.
Coil
Components of type Coil and Contact can be recognised and processed by the contactor
manager. Automatic functions assign elements of the type 'Contact' to
components of the type 'Coil' , if they have the same ref. name. 'Coils' and 'Contacts'
can be distributed over the complete drawing set. Only the component name of the 'Coil'
is entered in the material list.
Contact
The position of the cross reference text can be preset by using text allocators. All
elements (contacts) need to have this designation, if they are to be assigned to a 'Coil'
with automatic cross-reference to it. Reflector contacts, i.e. duplicates of the contact in
the schematic, are displayed next to the coil with the page number and path, where the
original contact can be found, displayed next to it. Contacts are not added to the
material list.
Terminal
To create a terminal list you need elements of the type 'Terminal'. A terminal normally
has three pins:
• one for the external side (type: passive)
• one for the internal side (type: passive)
• one for jumper connections (type: jumper)
For the connection generator, the pins of the terminal are not connected, that's why you
have the possibility of naming wires and cables separately.
Cable conductors
You can identify a cable by using the 'Conductor line' command on the 'Schematics'
menu. You can also draw a cable using components of the type 'Cable conductor'.
These components consist of a graphic (e.g. short line) and one pin. The reference name
corresponds to the cable name (e.g. 'W'), the component name is the cable type (e.g. 4
x 1,5, 10m long), and the component must be assigned as a component type 'Cable
conductor'.
581

WSCAD 51
The component pin must be placed on the connection line. The method of drawing a
cable using components of the type 'Cable conductor' is similar to that for terminal
strips.
Main element
Main and side elements can be distributed over the complete drawing set. The
component types 'Main element' and 'Side element' enable you to draw a widely
distributed component e.g. PLC sub-components or switches. One component can consist
of several different elements with the following features.
582
• Every element is one library component.
• Only one part/enclosure is allowed.
• One element is assigned as the component type 'Main element', all other
elements are assigned as the type 'Side element'.
The procedure corresponds exactly to the Coils/Contacts:
• The reference name of main and side elements must be the same.
• Only the component name will appear in the material list.
• Main and side elements can be placed anywhere in the drawing set.
• The cross-reference of the side elements will point to the main element.
• During automatic assignment a dash line is drawn from main to side element.
When loading a side element you must enter a complete reference name. This must be
the reference name of the corresponding main element. If the side element is placed on
the right side of the main element, a reference name is not needed. It will be
automatically assigned and attached with a dash line.
Side element
See previous description 'Main element'. Cross reference text is placed right-aligned
below the reference name, if there is no appropriate text allocator 'ws-q' (Example:
'!#lws-q>'. You can use the text allocator in two different ways:
A text allocator can determine the position of cross reference text.
Text allocator without additional number: Each side element has the same text allocator
as the main element ('!#lws-q>'). For every side element a cross reference text is
created like the main element, but you cannot distinguish the side elements. Text
allocator with additional numbers: Each side element belonging to a main element has a
unique number, the main element has one text allocator for every side element ('!#lwsq1>',
'!#lws-q2>'....). This gives a clear assignment at the main module.
Hint
Cross reference text for side elements is not created on-line. Please
use the command 'Automatic func. - Auto. cross reference - PLC
and main/side elements' to do that. The only exception are PLC
side elements, which are controlled by the PLC manager.
Contact Comb

Symbol editor
This component type is restricted to contact combs, where a contact comb represents the
layout of the complete contact arrangement.
Destination wiring
This component type is restricted to the destination wiring symbols.
Cable Shield
This component type is restricted to the cable symbols.
Connectors
Two new component types are defined to facilitate the use of the Connector manager.
Sub-Type ‘Plug’
The selection text here should be std-st. This is necessary in order to display the correct
parts in the parts manager dialog.
Sub-Type ‘Socket'
The selection text here should be std-bu. This is necessary in order to display the correct
parts in the materials database manager.
583

WSCAD 51
Modify size
Scale setting
When Scale setting' is selected, you are prompted to 'Input the scale (0.5 to 2.0) :' .
All co-ordinates will be multiplied by the scale entered. Pay attention when using 'Scale
setting' so that the pins stay on the grid! If a component is magnified several times, it
could produce errors if the pins no longer fall on grid points.
Rectangle setting
When the Rectangle setting is selected, a rectangle appears that encompasses the
component graphics and the pins. Stretching the rectangle to a new size will modify the
component size (and shape) accordingly. This method of changing size is best suited to
rectangular shaped components with pins on the edges, e.g. a microprocessor. Using the
command for typical electro-mechanical components can distort the shape completely, if
care is not taken in its use. The Rectangle setting functions only with components
whose pin direction was automatically determined:
584

Symbol link with graphic
Symbol editor
Load with the menu option Draw / Insert graphic (max. size of 32 KB) a prepared
picture of a construction unit into the symbol editor.
With the scaling methods of the diagram you can adapt the bitmap in the size. Position
the bitmap at the Editor. Select the bitmap with the right mouse button and select in the
context menu the resize option, if you want to increase or make the picture smaller. Set
the pins and/or other parameters as used and store the symbol in any library.
585

WSCAD 51
The symbol appears as used in the Symbol Explorer .
586

Symbol editor
587

WSCAD 51
Functions
Content specification
All symbol names of the selected library are output to the printer or to a file. First
select a library and then start the printout.
Note
588
A semi-automatic graphics display of the content of a library can be
output by means of the command Library in the main menu under
Symbol / Database.

Reset editor and load symbol
Symbol editor
This command is used to erase the symbol memory and then load an existing symbol in
the symbol editor. This can then be modified and saved again. Use this function when
there is already a similar symbol available.
Note
The previous symbol memory and the drawing window are erased.
589

WSCAD 51
Insert symbol
This command is used to load a symbol in the symbol editor also. The symbol name
and reference name are not transferred during this process. A symbol can easily be
assembled from several symbols by first loading a base element with Delete+Load and
then adding the other components.
Note
590
Use the library symbols to assemble a symbol.

Save symbol
Symbol editor
This command is used to save a symbol which you are editing in the current library. If
a symbol with the same name already exists, you will be asked whether you wish to
overwrite it. You must specify the point where it is to be inserted. The coordinates
for this point are taken into account in the path calculation. The name is correctly
sorted and filed away automatically. The symbol is attached at this point when inserted.
591

WSCAD 51
Copy / delete symbol
This command starts the dialog which should make it simpler to organise the symbols
in the libraries. The symbols of the current library can be selectively copied into
another library. Here, it is possible to display the contents of 2 libraries simultaneously
so that you can compare their contents immediately.
By using the graphics button
592
...
it is possible to display a library from the set library
directory with the library’s contents and create a new (empty) library using +
name of your choosing.
with a
If you have selected a library on every page, the symbols contained in it will be listed
underneath. The symbol preview which adheres to the left or right of the dialog in each
case is started with the button .

Symbol editor
For example, when copying a special symbol from the left side to the right side of the
dialog, simply drag it to the right side while holding down the left mouse button and then
release it again. Several symbols can be selected simultaneously with the well-known
key combinations [CTRL +left click] or [SHIFT +left click]. If identical symbol
names are already present on the right side, then you will be asked whether you wish to
overwrite the symbol (or symbols).
The procedure is the same for or . The selected symbols are now likewise
located in the library on the right or the left side. Using this method, it is very easy to
assemble your own libraries.
593

WSCAD 51
The button can be used to make a comparison between the library on the left and
the library on the right. Symbols which are present in both libraries are excluded from
the marking. If you wish to transfer all the marked symbols, they can be copied to the
right or left by clicking on the buttons or
The button Copy produces a copy of the symbol and Remove deletes the symbol
selected in the library concerned (multiple selection is possible with Delete).
594

Extras
Repair database
Databases which no longer function because of a system crash etc. can be repaired or
their physical size reduced by using the command from the main program Extras /
Utility / DB Repair without any reduction in the number of data records.
595

WSCAD 51
Line name database
A consistency test can be performed on the line-name database under the menu Tools
/ Line-name database. This file is located in the project directory and the project name
is extended with *_VLTGN.MDB. The file is an ACCESS database. When this menu
command is executed, a new line-name database is created and the variables
Connection name, Colour, Cross section and Length are transferred from the
original line-name database, providing the new coordinates and the line names
agree with the original ones. Data records which do not agree with the original ones are
displayed in a dialog.
Hier können Verbindungsname, Farbe, Querschnitt und Länge editiert werden. Die
Feldbezeichnungen sind blau gekennzeichnet. Geänderte Datensätze werden markiert
und können in die neue Leitungsnamen-Datenbank zurückgeschrieben werden.
596

Extras
Der Inhalt des Dialoges kann ausgedruckt werden. Die neu gebildete (und evtl.
geänderte bzw. ergänzte) Leitungsnamen-Datenbank sollte jetzt als Original
übernommen werden, die bisherige originale erhält die Extension *.OLD.
Bilden Sie jetzt neu die Leitungsquerverweise siehe Leitungsbezogene Querverweise.
597

WSCAD 51
System files
The Conductors.TXT and Connector.TXT files with the editors for the files
WSWIN50AT.INI and WSPRJ50AT.INI.
Please note how risky changes in the files mentioned can be.
598

Extras
599

WSCAD 51
600

Select objects
Extras
This command is used to load a symbol directly from the circuit diagram into the
symbol editor without starting the symbol editor separately. The symbol name and
reference name are transferred at the same time.
601

WSCAD 51
Output library as graphics
The contents of the current library can be displayed as graphics and semiautomatically.
After invoking this function, you will be asked whether a selection text
which is present in the symbol should be displayed.
To set up an overview of a library, proceed as follows.
Create an empty (better several of the same) drawing page (New file), possible with
a drawing frame. Copy this page (Copy page), since there will probably not be enough
room on one page for all of the symbols of the library. Select the function Output
library as graphics.
Select the first symbol to be displayed from the selection window and position it. The
symbol name is automatically made visible and positioned above the symbol. The
rotation menu can still be invoked beforehand by pressing the right mouse button (e.g.
in order to position the symbol name differently).
Fix the symbol. The next symbol in the selection list is then immediately loaded
automatically – position it accordingly.
When your drawing page is full, enter the rotation menu with the right mouse button
and terminate the process with Cancel+Delete. For example, use the PgUp PgDn keys
to move to the next empty page and restart the output. You can start at exactly the
place where you left off.
Once the end of the library has been reached, the loading process is terminated
automatically. In the Rotation menu, automatic loading can be terminated manually
with Cancel+Delete.
Note
602
This function can also be used to create a template for the selected
graphics symbols. In which case, the selection should not
displayed.

ECAD module standard
Conversion parameters
Extras
Which information has to be transferred from the ECAD file to which fields of the ACCESS
database must be specified first. Furthermore, if you do not wish to read into the current
material database, you must also specify the (existing) ACCESS output file. Click on the
button Parameters and the following dialog will appear:
Destination database
The database in which the import is to take place is entered in the group Access file. By
clicking on the Search button, the standard Windows dialog will appear for selecting the
files. If the database has several tables, you must select one. These specifications must
be met before the assignments can take place.
Assignments
Use Assignment to specify which variables from the ECAD file must be transferred to
which ACCESS file. In the list below, the characteristic code of the ECAD standard will
appear in the ‘Identification’ column, the associated database field will appear in the
‘Assignment’ column and the description text of the ECAD standard will appear in the
‘Text’ column.
To carry out or change an assignment, select the relevant field (or empty field) in the
selection box ‘Field names’ and assign this to the characteristic code in the first column of
this data source by double clicking on it with the mouse.
In this way, you will establish the links from the ECAD file to the ACCESS file.
603

WSCAD 51
To save this compilation so that it can be easily invoked later on, simply enter a name
and then click on the button.
Sometimes it is necessary to include a factor during the data import. Thus, in the
WSCAD database, the measurement data are generally expressed in [mm] but in the
ECAD standard they are usually in [m]. To this end, after selecting the database field, the
factor must be set before initiating the assignment process by double clicking with the
mouse.
Comb data
The current adjustment of the comb library is important when transferring contactors or
relays. During the import, a WSCAD comb name is determined from the contact
information present in the ECAD file as it is entered in the Comb file in the database. This
then starts a search in the current comb library for the appropriate comb. When an
appropriate comb has been found, then the name is also entered in the database and in
the assigned field:
If the comb for the item cannot be found in the library, the comb identification is
transferred to an error log. This can be displayed at the end of the run or will remain in
the file ECADBTN.ERR which is an ASCII text file. There, by giving the item name, it is
possible to check and see which combs are missing in order to create them afterwards in
the symbol editor. Only then can you work with these items perfectly in regard to
contactor management etc.
Note
604
The characteristic codes KW_0 - KW_3 are not ECAD standard
codes. They are special WSCAD codes for determining information
from the ECAD standard.

Starting ECAD import
Extras
After the parameters have been set for the conversion, the ECAD file must be
selected by clicking on the button Open and the standard Windows dialog for opening a
file will appear.
Note
The ECAD files have the file extension *.VGR.
The selected file is opened and read in and the dialog appears with information about the
import file.
This contains various pieces of information about the person who created the file.
Confirm with and the data are then first read into the intermediate file and then
displayed.
605

WSCAD 51
As soon as the conversion has started, information about the ECAD file on how many
entries the file has or has transferred is shown at the top. If no selection is made, all
entries are converted and you can select the items individually by clicking on the
relevant lines. By using the or keys, you can also select several at a
time. By double clicking on a list entry, you can see in detail which information is being
transferred.
Tip
606
After you have invoked the detailed information, this entry in the
list is selected. With the key held down, click again on the
item in order to remove the selection.
When the option Update has been set, then only those items are processed which are
already available in the destination database, otherwise the missing items are
supplemented. The actual process is started via the button Convert. When you have
confirmed the following prompt with YES, the data are entered in the destination
database. Completion of the transfer is indicated by the following message:
If errors occur during the conversion, then the corresponding message appears and you
can choose to create a detailed ASCII log file ECADBTN.TXT which can be found in the
ACCESS database directory. There, by giving the item name, it is possible to check and
see which combs are missing in order to create them afterwards in the symbol editor.
Only then can you work with these items perfectly in regard to contactor management
etc.

Part manager
Extras
607

WSCAD 51
General information
Part Manager
The Part Manager is the interface for processing item data and assigning symbols to
items. This tool can be used to process and extend the WSCAD item database. Very
many filter functions have been integrated in the interface in order to search for a
certain item as quickly as possible.
SQL for administrators
The Part Manager operates in conjunction with the Microsoft SQL server. In order to
do so, a linked table must be generated in an ACCESS database and this is then linked
to the SQL server table.
608

ACCESS 97 (Standard) or ACCESS 2000
Extras
Since the database formats vary significantly according to the version status of ACCESS,
you will need to decide which format you wish to use for the project. This can be set
under the menu option Parameters / General configuration / Miscellaneous tab
where, via the option Database access compatible with ACCESS 2000, you can
select the general format for the databases which WSCAD creates and uses.
Caution
If you process an ACCESS 97 formatted database externally with
ACCESS Version 2000, the database may be converted into this
format and may no longer be readable.
609

WSCAD 51
Structure or fields of the database
A data record always has a clear structure which is defined in the item database. The
Part Manager interface now shows you several data records simultaneously. In order
for this to remain uncluttered, only the selected database fields are shown.
However, a database record may contain any number of other fields (which are
important to you) but although the database fields used by WSCAD 5 are
predetermined, these can be adjusted by means of a dialog.
The following is the table view of the WSCAD50_en.mdb without catalogues.
The fields which are currently being used can be seen in the draft view of the WSCAD 5
database.
610

Extras
611

WSCAD 51
Catalogues in the database
One extension of the database structure is the introduction of a catalogue manager
which, as well as the necessary database in the WSCAD 5 format, also allows files to be
saved which enable calculation or order evaluations to be carried out on the items used
on the circuit diagram or installation diagram. The additional data are saved in
separate tables of the WSCAD 5 database.
Datanorm
The values are imported in the form of the Datanorm standard (Version 4.0 and 5.0).
This is a form of data exchange between wholesaler / manufacturer and
calculation software in the respective factory. By selective evaluation of the catalogue
data, it is possible to create files or lists for further processing in other (management)
software packages. Using these files, it is very easy to prepare quotations or order
lists.
The following is the table view of WSCAD50_en.mdb with catalogues
(Salespartner1).
The fields which are currently used can be seen in the draft view of the catalogue
table.
612

Extras
613

WSCAD 51
Activating catalogue forwarding
Catalogue forwarding (during item assignment) is activated in the Part Manager by
setting the preferred catalogue in the Current catalogue field. Only when a catalogue
has been selected here will the item search be automatically forwarded to the
catalogue if no valid linked entry is present. If ‘none’ is entered in the Current
catalogue field, catalogue forwarding is shut down.
614

Part Manager – interface of the dialog
Extras
The Part Manager is accessed via the menu option Extras/ Part Manager. The Part
Manager interface has been adapted to conform to the style of Windows Explorer.
Part data and symbols can be seen at a glance.
Reference and selection
The identification letters and selection texts which are assigned to the symbol are
immediately visible. The data records shown in each case are minimised by selecting the
tabs. The Filter area provides numerous different ways to reduce the displayed Parts to
the necessary dimensions. Both the way the Filter operates and the data fields which are
displayed can be adjusted individually. The filter entries are saved in WSWIN50AT.INI
in the CFG directory and can be changed directly in the dialog.
Columns
The columns of the Part database which are shown on the screen can be hidden or
revealed by using the right mouse button. The sequence of columns shown are
controlled by clicking on the column headings. The latest column heading to be
clicked on moves to the first position and the search function is executed in the first
column.
615

WSCAD 51
Part Manager – Symbol view
The Symbol Explorer described above appears on the left part of the Part Manager.
This was docked at the manager dialog with its functionality. Tabs (Library,
Designation, Search and Favourites) are provided to enable or change the sorting or
search functions within the libraries. Double clicking on the Symbol view provides a
large view of the symbols in a separate window.
616

Part Manager tabs
Extras
On the right edge, there are 5 tabs which limit the number of data records shown at any
one time. These limitations are determined by various criteria.
Show all tab
The All tab shows Parts where the designation and selection agree with entries in the
fields of the Part database when you have clicked on a symbol (Designation: Q //
Selection: pow).
If you have not marked a symbol, all database entries will be displayed since there
is no filtering.
617

WSCAD 51
All [Exec Combo]l tab
The General tab shows all of the Parts which are not combination elements
(combinations of several individual Parts). In this case also, the dependency applies to
the selected symbol and the set filter.
Combi only tab
The Combination tab shows all of the Parts which are combination elements. In this
case also, the dependency applies to the symbol which has been selected and the filter
which has been set.
618

Linked tab
Extras
The Connection tab shows all of the Parts which have a Linked (= link between and
Part and symbol). In this case also, the dependency applies to the selected symbol and
the set filter.
619

WSCAD 51
Linked to sel. symbol tab
The Linked to sel. symbol tab shows all of the Parts which have a connection to the
symbol which is currently selected. In this case, the dependency only applies to the set
filter. Several Parts can be linked to one symbol.
620

Catalogue
The Catalogue shows all of the Parts which are assigned to a catalogue.
Extras
621

WSCAD 51
622

Part during symbol selection
Extras
The Part option connects the right and left part of the Item Database Manager. Once
this option is activated, the other side is immediately activated by each selection in each
case whether it is in the right or left window. When a symbol is selected, on the right in
the database field, only those database entries are shown (with the Part option set)
which also have the same designation as that of the symbol. The additional control
elements make it possible to page within the filter using the arrow keys and refresh the
view by means of the updating symbol.
623

WSCAD 51
Specifying the selection for a data record
Selection codes are used to assign symbols to items from the database quickly. The
selection codes are saved on your computer as a Word document within the installation
path
e.g. C:\ WSCAD50 \Libraries \Addition \Description overviews \Module
selections \WSCAD_Module_selection.doc
Even with small project-specific databases, it is very helpful to control and accelerate
the database access using selection criteria. The Professional Version of WSCAD 5
operates with a 3-stage selection procedure:
624
• The first stage is oriented to the reference name of the symbol, which is
compared with the Designation field.
• The second stage is based on a comparison of the selection database field with
the symbol parameter Selection. This symbol parameter (created in the symbol
editor) is used as a delimiter within the reference group. This is how a
distinction is made between a power and contactor relay (pow or aux) or how
switches are distinguished from each other by the number of contacts (1 pole
and 2 pole etc).
• The third stage is executed via the filter features which are available in the Item
Manager dialog.
First stage
During Stage 1, the reference name of a loaded symbol (identification letter) is tested to
see if it is similar to the first letter of the variable in the Designation field. If these are
coil type symbols, then the contact designation must still start with the identification
letter (e.g. K) (e.g. K22H) so that this database entry is transferred during the selection.
With all other types of symbols, no other characters are allowed to follow the
identification letter.
Second stage
During Stage 2, a text comparison is made between the selection and the symbol
parameter Selection. This comparison is evaluated as positive when both values are the
same and also when one of the two values is not available. It is also permitted for the
symbol selection to be shorter than the selection but not the other way round.
Third stage
During Stage 3, a text comparison is carried out for the symbols of the respective
reference family(ies) once again. Some examples of selection texts with we use are as
follows:
Selection Designation Identification
3pol S Cam switch
3pol-m Q Motor circuit breaker
3pol-t F Disconnector
3pol-lvhbc F l.v.h.b.c. disconnector
pow Q Power circuit breaker
4pol Q 4-pole power circuit breaker
3pol-m Q Main switch
3pol-l Q Load switch
pow K Motor contactors
pow-heat K 4-pole heating system contactors
stc K Contactor relay
3pol K Starter combination

Extras
1pol-mcb F Miniature circuit breakers
1pol-f F Fuses
pow F Bimetallic relay
1ph T Single-phase transformers
3ph T Multi-phase transformers
2pol-elcb F 2-pole earth-leakage circuit breaker
4pol-elcb F 3-pole earth-leakage circuit breaker
3pol-elcb/ocr F earth-leakage circuit breaker with overcurrent
release
4pol-elcb/ocr F earth-leakage circuit breaker with overcurrent
release
k-clock K Clock relay, flasher relay
k-imp K Impulse relay
k-close K Time relay - close
k-open K Time relay - open
k-multi K Multifunction relay
k-stdr K Star-delta time relay
k-surge K Surge switch
3phas M 3-phase motors
std M Single-phase motors
std G Generators
1pol N Time switches
2pol N Time switches
svp F Surge voltage protector
SSM-&MP E Mounting plates, side panels and base plates for
switch cabinet
SSM-&SC E Switch cabinets
SSM-CC E Cable channels
SSM-MR E DIN rails, mounting rails
SSM-BB E Bus bars
SCM-&BSC E Base for switch cabinets
SCM-&B E End retainer, insulation plates, barriers for
terminals
1pol S 1-pole normally open contact, break contact
2pol S 2-pole normally open contact, break contact
3pol S 3-pole normally open contact, break contact
1pol-2-TR-NO S 1-pole normally open contact, emergency off
1pol-2-TR-NC S 1-pole break contact, emergency off
2pol-2-TR-NO S 2-pole normally open contact, emergency off
3pol-2-TR-NO S 3-pole normally open contact, emergency off
1pol-2-K-S S Normally open contact, key switch 1-pol.
2pol-2-NO-KS S 2-pole normally open contact, key switch
3pol-2-NO-KS S 3-pole normally open contact, key switch
1pol-2-NO-LS S 1-pole normally open contact, limit switch
1pol-2-BC-LS S 1-pole break contact, limit switch
2pol-2-NO S 2-pole normally open contact, break contact, limit
switch
1pol-2-NO-S S 1-pole normally open contact, swivel
2pol-2-NO-S S 2-pole normally open contact, swivel
3pol-2-NO-S S 3-pole normally open contact, swivel
1pol-2-NO-SL S 1-pole normally open contact, swivel, latch
625

WSCAD 51
626
1pol-2-BC-SL S 1-pole break contact, swivel, latch
1pol-2-NO-T S 1-pole normally open contact, tiltable
1pol-2-BC-T S 1-pole break contact, tiltable
1pol-2-NO-P S 1-pole normally open contact, pull
1pol-2-BC-P S 1-pole break contact, pull
1pol-2-NO-LD S 1-pole, normally open contact, latch-down key
2pol-2-NO-LD S 2-pole, normally open contact, latch-down key
3pol-2-NO-LD S 3-pole, normally open contact, latch-down key
1pol-2-BC-LD S 1-pole, break contact, latch-down key
2pol-2-BC-LD S 2-pole, break contact, latch-down key
3pol-2-BC-LD S 3-pole, break contact, latch-down key
std-t X Standard terminals general
std-t2.5 X Standard terminals 2.5 mm²
std-t4 X Standard terminals 4 mm²
std-t6 X Standard terminals 6 mm²
std-t10 X Standard terminals 10 mm²
std-t16 X Standard terminals 16 mm²
std-t35 X Standard terminals 35 mm²
std-t50 X Standard terminals 50 mm²
std-t70 X Standard terminals 70 mm²
std-t95 X Standard terminals 95 mm²
std-t-m X Multi-storey terminals general
std-pspc X Plugs, plug strips, plug connectors

Additional information for the Part Manager
Extras
The lower area shows the extension fields of an Part data record which may have a
large number of characters. This is where the texts are edited. Click on the blue arrow
for the fields to be displayed or not displayed.
When the extension field appears, click on the narrow button on the right or left and
then you can select from a list which fields of the database should be displayed (select by
double clicking).
If you skip through the data records in the Part Manager, then, where available, the
texts of the selected fields will be constantly updated on the screen. These texts can be
up to 256 characters long.
627

WSCAD 51
628

Conversion of dBASE to ACCESS xx
Extras
If you have databases in dBASE format (WSCAD Version 4.0 or earlier), then contact us
at our Support telephone number: +(49) 8131 3627 99.
629

WSCAD 51
Editing
Changing the item entry in the dialog
The menu option Edit / Change Online (quicker by using function key or double
clicking on the field) enables the data record to be changed directly in the Item Database
Manager.
Navigation
You can move the active field in the dialog by using the arrow keys ←→↓. Use the
keyboard to make an entry in the field (double click in exactly the same way). When
editing, use the key to jump to the next field (and + to jump to
the previous field).
Deleting an part entry
The currently selected data record is deleted under the menu option Edit / Delete
(invoked more quickly via the function key F8).
Quick data record editing. Click on the data record with the right mouse button and a
context menu will open with all the functions again as described above.
630

Create / Change / Delete an Part entry
Extras
Under the menu option Edit / New entry or Change (corresponds to the function key
F3 and F4) start a dialog which will enable you to create a new Part or change an
existing one. You have the following options:
• Pre-assign the fields with the values of the marked data record using the Load
button.
• Remove the assigned values with Delete.
• End the dialog with OK and save any entries you have made.
• Abort your changes with Cancel.
The Part numbers must be entered again. The function keys in the Part Manager are reassigned.
New data record Modify data record
DB fields is written in the left column of the dialog concerned. These are the field names
of the database which you are using.
The WSCAD fields are in the middle column of the dialog. On the right, you will see the
entry fields in the column Value which you can fill in with the Part values. The column
Type shows you the selected field type (ACCESS) and the maximum number of
characters the field concerned can accept.
Database fields with special functions
631

WSCAD 51
632
• Comb:
The Comb button enables you to jump directly to the comb library. Click on the
button in the field Comb and then open the preset comb library under
Parameters / General / Directories and the comb can be picked out
selectively via the name and graphics.
• Switch cabinets
The Switch cabinets button enables you to jump directly to the switch cabinet
library. Click on the button in the field Switch cabinet and then open the
preset structure directory under Parameters / General / Directories and pick
out the desired structure graphics via the name.
• Selection
The Selection button enables you to select from all currently available selections.
• Codes
The Code button offers a selection for assignment (with plugs) or the Colour
code (with cables).
Special feature If you require round symbols for the switch cabinet layout, then enter
the width or possibly the depth or length. Simply click on the fields for the entry and then
edit them by using the keyboard. The entries are accepted by pressing Return and the
cursor moves to the next line.
Additional database control elements
In the Change data record mode (F4), you will see a few buttons under the dialog title
line which you can use to navigate through the data records. You can switch to the data
records which were previously displayed in the Part Manager. €The single arrow jumps
one data record forwards or backwards. The double arrow jumps to the beginning or end
of the data records.

Extras
Link with symbol
Extras
You can permanently connect item numbers to symbols. The advantage of this is
that when you select a symbol, the associated item number is displayed automatically.
In order to make the connection, first mark the symbol and then the item concerned.
Execute the menu option Extras / Part/ Link with symbol (shortcut +E). This
starts an assignment dialog which would otherwise show you a previous connection, but
existing connection are overwritten during this process). You can generate the (new)
connection by clicking on OK.
• Any number of items can be connected to one symbol.
• The current connection can be overwritten simultaneously at any time.
• Connected items are marked in the first column.
• The option Transfer designation transfers the symbol designation to the
item database.
633

WSCAD 51
Removing a link
Existing links can be removed under the menu option Extras / Parts / Remove link
(shortcut +T)
Extending function
The menu option Extras/ Parts / Link all with symbol connects the marked symbol to
all item numbers displayed by the filtering feature. The menu option Extras/ Parts /
Remove all links removes these connections (this applies to all filtered data records).
The process takes place after clicking on a message dialog in each case.
634

Combination element
Extras
The combination element is an element which is made up of several individual parts
(base element + additional components).
With the aid of so-called combination elements (e.g. contactor relay + auxiliary switch
block) it is possible to work with symbols for which only one symbol is present on the
circuit diagram but which is made up of several elements in the material list. Examples of
this are a lamp (base element) for which only one holder and cover is required or a
contactor which is furnished with contact tops. Select a data record (base element) for
which you wish to create a combination element.
Under menu item Tools / Create combination element / Any (shortcut +B)
the dialog starts which already has the selected item numbers in the item line. You will
see the existing combination elements for this main element under User names. If
you select an entry, the Delete button becomes active. The Delete button removes the
existing combination element (caution).
The entry Part must be changed since the Part number must be unambiguous. The main
number, however, remains fully intact. Apart from that, the name of the combination
element should be extended in a similar way. Then double click on all items in the Part
Manager which are associated with this component. The dialog can be moved anywhere
and still remain active.
635

WSCAD 51
The number of selected items in each case can be changed using the ‘+’ and ‘-’ keys. The
entries can be removed by selecting the element and pressing the key on your
keyboard.
Click on the OK symbol on the left in the dialog. The Part is generated and when the
Combination tab is activated (right on the Part Manager dialog) all combination
elements appear. Combination elements are marked specifically.
636

Editing the combination element
Extras
Select an existing combination element (taking into consideration the other filter
settings as well) and confirm with +B. All active fields can be edited.
• You can add other Part s as well.
• Delete existing Part s by selecting them and pressing the DEL button.
• Under User names, you will see the existing combination elements which use
the identical base element.
The number of Parts selected can be changed with + and -.
The OK dialog button saves the changes and X aborts them.
637

WSCAD 51
Data import
ACCESS data, CSV data and Datanorm 4.0 files can be read into the selected ACCESS
database. Select the menu option Extras / Import database. The setting under the
Creation of new part possible option is crucial. If the option is set, the item numbers
(source field > DB field) are compared and new part numbers are transferred
complete but previously existing part numbers are only updated. If the option is not
set, then only the existing part numbers are updated.
In the dialog, select the database file (import database) at the top from which you
wish to import the data. With File type, you decide on the data format (ACCESS, CSV
or Datanorm).
638

Extras
Under Table, select the table to be selected in the import database (ACCESS
databases only). Select the fields (Source field) of the import database with the
contents which are to be imported into the WSCAD fields. The automatic field
assignment attempts to assign fields automatically by name derivation.
639

WSCAD 51
Cancel aborts the whole process. Item prefix defines the character in front of the
actual item name. This is for the identification of different wholesaler catalogues
which can be read in with Datanorm 4.0. (e.g. Froe for Fröschl). Now start the process
by clicking on the Import button. Take into account the Creation of new item
possible setting.
640

Data transfer into the WSCAD database
Extras
All the fields of a WSCAD database can be attached to the current database
automatically. In the dialog, select the database file (import database) at the top
from which you wish to import the data. The data format (ACCESS, CSV or Datanorm)
is selected with File type.
Complete transfer
With Complete transfer, no setting of filters, all values (if not already present) are
transferred to the currently selected WSCAD database. The setting under the Creation
of new item possible option is crucial. Once the option is set, the item numbers
(source field > DB field) are compared and new item numbers are transferred
complete but previously existing item numbers are only updated. If the option is not
set, then only the existing item numbers are updated.
Caution
In general, only the settings which are made in the Source field are
transferred to the main database or updated.
The number of database entries which are yet to be edited are displayed on the status
bar on the bottom border of the screen.
Selective transfer
After specifying the filter via the Test filter button for the selective transfer, a
preview appears on the screen.
641

WSCAD 51
This filter is AND-linked, i.e. if you wish to implement further restrictions, you will only
need to do this in the respective filter field. You can also select several entries (
button with the left mouse button held down) or a range ( key with the left
mouse button held down). The dialog is terminated with OK and any entries which have
been selected are then copied.
642

Extras
643

WSCAD 51
Data transfer from outside -> WSCAD
Item files can be transferred to the WSCAD database by selecting the available
Source field (in this case the source Datanorm) and starting the import.
The reading-in process is started with Import. The setting under the Creation of new
item possible option is crucial. Once the option is set, the item numbers (source field
> DB field) are compared and new item numbers are transferred complete but
previously existing item numbers are only updated. If the option is not set, then only
the existing item numbers are updated.
644

Adjusting database fields
Extras
Under the menu option Tools / Set database fields, all current links to the database
which is being used (in this case C:\WSCAD50eng\DB\WSCAD50_en.mdb) are
displayed with the fields which are available in WSCAD.
645

WSCAD 51
Save field association
646

Extras
The settings for the field assignment are saved in a separate table of the database (in
this example under the field assignment Default). The New button is used to generate
new field assignment identifications in order to save the changed assignments. The
Delete button is used to delete these field assignment identifications again.
Selecting a table
Databases in ACCESS format may contain very different tables. A table (in this case
WSCAD50) from the database which you used above can be set and another field
assignment specified for it.
Only show necessary fields
The option, Only show necessary fields hides the fields which WSCAD can manage
from the necessary fields. The blue fields on the left hand side are WSCAD data fields for
which a field must be assigned. If your database does not have a suitable field, then this
will be displayed on the right in red and a WSCAD field name suggested.
Green fields are not necessary but can also be assigned.
647

WSCAD 51
You can specify a field from your current database to accept the values via the arrow
key of the combination field. If you do not select separate fields, then the separate
WSCAD field names will be used. Selections which you have made can be discarded
with the Cancel button. Ignore leaves the state of the table unchanged and necessitates
fields to be re-assigned every time the Item Manager dialog is re-invoked. Standard
attempts to find the best fields from your database according to internal criteria.
Identical fields are transferred automatically.
Example After clicking on the OK and Create buttons, these fields are created in
the following dialog automatically and, on request, filled with a standard value (in this
case £).
648

Additional database fields
Extras
Since the ACCESS database can be extended by new fields, the Item Manager must
be able to display all of the new fields which have been added. The following field types
are supported for the additional database fields:
• Text
• Double
• Long
• Memo
• Currency
This extension can be made using Microsoft ACCESS. While doing
so, note whether the format is ACCESS 2000 or ACCESS 97.
When you have created fields in your ACCESS database, you may use them in the Item
Manager. Open the Item Manager and switch to this interface under menu option Tools
/ Create database fields and deactivate the option Only show necessary fields.
Now look for, for example, the User field 1 (left) and select the additional database
fields via the Combo box (right). Confirm the transfer with OK.
Using the right mouse button, now click on the column header in the Item Manager at
the position where you wish the additional field to be displayed. Then select Paste in the
first context menu and then Additional_field1.
649

WSCAD 51
650

Database fields and their meaning
Extras
Field names
Coding Colour code or number code for plugs or cables (selection field from Cores.txt
Shield
or Plugs.txt)
Cable is shielded (1) or not (0)
Cable cores Number of cores in the cable
Plug contacts Number of plug contacts
Voltage Voltage value (V)
Current Current value (A)
Power Power value (kW)
Currency Currency (€)
Designation
DIN61346
Identification letters according to the new DIN
Field names Description
Number Number of elements per symbol (with main component always set to 1). (The value
indicated here multiplied by the number of symbols per drawing set gives the
total number)
Item While loading a symbol, the item number is transferred to the symbol
parameters. This is the most important data base field. There must not be any
double item numbers anywhere in the database. This is checked every time new
data are entered. The number does not have to agree with the item designation
of the manufacturer.
Symbol name When loading a symbol, the symbol name is transferred to the symbol
parameters.
Manufacturer Name of manufacturer
Comb Symbol name of the associated contact comb for contactor or relay. When you
select the Button [...], a window opens with the names of all of the combs which
are available in the comb library. By clicking on a name, the field is automatically
filled and the field designation extended.
Designation Identification letter of the resource, e.g. F for a fuse. While loading a symbol,
only those elements are displayed where the identification letter agrees with the
reference name of the symbol. This identification is very important for the
Contactor Manager. Read about the structure of the contact designation in the
chapter Contactor Manager.
Supplier Supplier
Memo field The memo field represents a list of all the parts belonging to a combination
element. Enter here the number and item numbers of the individual elements,
separated by at least one space in each case. Make sure that the item numbers
exist in the database.
Reserve1 Reserve
Reserve2 Reserve
Switch
cabinet
The text which is entered here can be written in the material list using the
wildcards ssb and ssm. The name must correspond to the symbol names in the
structure libraries (e.g. AUEBUNG \\Main_switchT0)
Selection This field is used for limiting the data base selection when loading a symbol.
Part number Additional part number, e.g. manufacturer-specific designation
Text1 General text
651

WSCAD 51
Text2 While loading a symbol, the general text is transferred to the symbol
parameters. This text should be used to provide technical information such as
power or current.
Type
designation
652
Any type information, such as item numbers of the manufacturer, if not already
used in the item field.
Further Can contain the item number of an additional element (including mechanical). This
makes it possible to build up a concatenated list for the material list. Caution: We
recommend using so-called combi-elements for additional elements. The
concatenated list is still supported for compatibility reasons but should no longer
be used.
Time Time consumed (whole number, unit interpreted by the user)
Labour costs Additional costs (e.g. for assembly), 2 places after the comma. Caution: This is a
currency field
Price Unit price of the symbol, 2 places after the comma. Caution: This is a currency
field
Width Width of symbol in mm
Height Height of symbol in mm
Length Length of symbol in mm
Weight Weight of symbol
Discount Discount
Cat1..3 Catalogue fields which can accept the respective item numbers from the
catalogue.
Reserve3 Reserve
Example Item entry; left plugs / right
cables

Extras
653

WSCAD 51
654

Checking the database
Extras
Under the menu Part Manager / Extras / Check database, you can check the
database for multiple entries (identical Part numbers) and whether combination
elements correctly consist of several components. This dialog shows all of the errors
found and the information can be exported as a text file (by using the Export button).
By double clicking on an entry, the cursor jumps to the Part Manager.
Important
The Part must be included in the current selection in the Part
Manager.
655

WSCAD 51
Converting a database
The database structure of Version 50 differs from that of the previous version. If you
have selected as the Part database a database of a previous version, such as a
database with a 4.2 structure, then create the additional database fields when
opening; the database content can be restructured to the 50 format. The conversion
prepares an additional designation for a new DIN 61346 at the same time and specifies
the changed designations, providing they are known. Restructuring can be restarted by
using the Part Manager menu option Extras / Convert database.
Note
656
This menu option is not available when a project has been activated
with the new standard.
Caution
A restructured database cannot be used in an older version of
WSCAD.

Catalogue manager
Creating a catalogue
Extras
In order to create a catalogue, the menu option Catalogue / Catalogue Manager
must be started in the activated Item Manager.
A new dialog will then appear showing the available catalogues. The icons which are
necessary for creating or deleting the catalogues appear on the top right.
Select the Create new catalogue icon and an entry will start. When making the entry,
the catalogue name and associated catalogue code (always 4 characters) has to be
entered. The field External source (in this case, none ) is not important.
657

WSCAD 51
Now click on OK and a database table with this name will be created and a Datanorm
import to this table can now be executed.
658

Datanorm import to a catalogue table
Extras
On the Catalogue Manager interface you will see the Import button together with a
button with dots. Use the button with dots to select the site where the imported
Datanorm file is to be saved. Select the relevant file and then select Import.
The reading-in process now starts and a progress bar will appear. The result appears as a
total of the values just entered and the individual data records are displayed at the
bottom. If the import is to an existing catalogue (catalogue maintenance by the
wholesaler) then the data records are updated or even removed. It is therefore
necessary to compare the Datanorm data at regular intervals.
659

WSCAD 51
660

Linking a catalogue to an Part root
Extras
In order to link the catalogue data to those of the Part Manager root data
permanently, open the Part Manager and insert the column of the additional
catalogue field (in this case, Cat2:Wholesaler2). Then click on the data record with the
right mouse button and select Assign Cat.Part in the context menu.
The Catalogue Manager then opens. Select the intended Part from there.
This assignment is saved in the field concerned and will be available for future
evaluations. This is identified by a symbol and a separate tab is used for rapid selection.
Otherwise, look for the Catalogue symbol in order to find this data record more easily.
When this Part is selected from the Part Manager in future, the value will be made
available in Cat2:Wholesaler2 automatically.
661

WSCAD 51
Filters
Part Management filters
Several filters are available in the Part Manager. Delete the last used filter using the
function key F10 (unless it is fixed).
Symbol filters
If you want to search for a certain Part for a symbol, then use the additional filters of
the Part Manager. The Designation display in the section shown below is determined
by a selected symbol, the identification letter of which is shown (in this case, K). The
selection is likewise transferred from the symbol.
Special function for symbol filters
If you double click on the field Designation, then the text shown switches to all
designations, i.e. no filtering takes place in regard to the designation and the filter
settings are switched off. The process is reversed by double clicking again.
Data filters
Search terms for the different database fields (Part and Manufacturer etc) can be
entered in the yellow fields on the right next to the designation Filter. The entry is made
by simply clicking on the field concerned and entering the desired search term.
662

Extras
All search terms are AND linked. Wildcards can be used by using ‘*’. The functionality
is extended by prefixing the search term with an asterisk ‘*’. The search mode now also
finds component names with additional characters in front of the word ‘contactor’. An
asterisk ‘*’ is placed internally after every entry (not visible). In general, a filter setting
can be saved for all designations (defined for all symbols according to DIN) in each
case. Within a field, there is an OR-linked filter. Thus, with the entry *Wago* ||
*Weidm* in the field Manufacturer, there is an OR-linked query result where one of
the two word fragments must be contained in the data record shown in the field
Manufacturer.
Within a field, there is an AND-linked filter. Thus, with the entry *Cont* && *DC* &&
*24* in the field Component name, there is an AND-linked query result where all
three word fragments must be contained in the data record shown in the field
Component name.
663

WSCAD 51
The filter is saved in the WSWIN50AT.ini file which is located in the Windows System
directory and should only be edited with great care.
Setting data filters
The filters can be set independently of the designation by clicking on the header of the
filter entry fields with the right mouse button. In the dialog which now opens, you
can specify the desired filter from the database for all designations for filtering. First
select the designation. The dialog then shows all the previously set filters.
664

Extras
The button New in the dialog supplies all those designations for which no filters have
been set. The Delete button removes the currently set designation from the selection.
Selecting the filter for the set designation:
•
• The WSCAD database fields which are available appear on the Left (WSCAD
fields) in the dialog.
• Specify the names of the headers in the centre (Designation).
• Specify the other properties of the filter entry fields on the right (Filter property)
665

WSCAD 51
The setting with selection lists all the unambiguous entries which have been found from
the database field (e.g. all manufacturers). After clicking on the field Manufacturer in
the Part Manager dialog with the right mouse button, a window appears in which all the
manufacturers of the your database are displayed. By selecting one, it will be transferred
to the relevant filter settings.
Fixing settings
The data filter is always assigned to a certain designation. If a symbol with another
designation is selected, the filter also changes. If no filter is logged for designations,
then previously made filter settings will be deleted. However, the filter can be fixed for
the current designation by clicking on its header with the left mouse button (the filter is
identified with a pin). This fixed entry appears when you select a symbol with an
identical designation (D).
Single filters
An additional search for the Part s is executed for the first column on the right hand side
of the Part Database Manager if, for example, the initial letters of the entry being
looked for are entered in the upper entry line (in this case CPU). This filter always groups
and updates the Part s it has found for the entry at the top.
666

Views
Zoom in
This function allows you to zoom in closer to the drawing and is very useful if a
complex component is to be created. he view orientation will be moved so that the cursor
position is in the center of the screen. The function key magnifies the drawing by
a factor of 2. The position of the cursor, prior to selecting , becomes the center of
the screen.
667

WSCAD 51
Zoom out
Zooming out, allows you to see more of the drawing on the screen. You can draw at
any reduced view scale. The function key reduces the display of the drawing by a
factor of 2. The point on the drawing, determined by the position of the cursor, prior to
selecting , becomes the center of the screen.
668

Zoom Extents
Views
The 'Zoom Extents' command will display the complete drawing sheet in the
drawing windows, regardless of the window size.
Function key also activates the 'Zoom Extents' command.
669

WSCAD 51
Zoom Window
The 'Zoom Window' command allows you to define the area of the drawing to be
displayed on the screen. After selecting the command, you are prompted to 'Define the
window'. This is done by entering two diagonal points that define a rectangle that
encompasses the area to be displayed.
670

1/1 Middle
Views
The '1/1 Middle' command is used to show the drawing in 1:1 scale and positions
the cursor in the middle of the drawing window.
Function key also activates the '1/1 Middle' command.
671

WSCAD 51
Zoom last
This command switches back to the previous scale and display orientation, used
prior to the last change.
672

Display dimensions
Views
Under menu option View / Show dimensions, you can hide and reveal the
dimensions.
673

WSCAD 51
674

Show invisible texts
Views
This menu option is a derivation of a dialog invocation See all which was previously and
still is located under Parameters / Options. Using this option makes all texts on the
diagram visible.
This makes it possible to switch between the two modes quickly.
675

WSCAD 51
676

Identify symbols with number locks
Views
With this menu option, all the symbols (reference names) which are locked for the
auto-numbering are marked visually on the circuit diagram.
677

WSCAD 51
Identify symbols with material locks
With this menu option, all the symbols (reference names) which are locked for the
material list are marked visually on the circuit diagram.
678

Mouse wheel zoom
Views
On the basis of the current cursor position the representation is constantly increased
and/or reduced depending upon direction of rotation, which picture shifted after
possibility in such a way that the cursor position becomes the picture center. The
function is activated and/or deactivated through to press on the mouse wheel.
hint
An identical effect as over mouse wheel tricks you obtain with +
and - keys
679

WSCAD 51
Cable visible or invisible
With this menu option all cables aren't displayed in the schematic. This is corresponding
to the Common Settings / Cables / Do not display conductors .
See also
Cables
680

Text Box visible or invisible
Views
This menu option is corresponding to the option invisible at the Text Box dialogue
started by the menu option Draw / Text Box. This makes it possible to switch between
the two Mode.
See also
Text Box
681

Settings
General
Software running under Windows normally uses *-INI files (or the registry) to hold the
settings . These INI-files are simple text files, which you can read with any standard text
editor (but please do not alter them). Inside an INI-file you can find sections (e.g.
[Colours]) and the associated settings (e.g. Color0=12345678). WSCAD 5 does not use
the registry, so that even users with more limited systems knowledge can check and
modify the configuration, if necessary.
Hint
Project related settings are stored in a file in the actual project directory.
When you open the project the settings are automatically
read..
A feature is the separation between project dependent and general configuration
settings, stored in two separate files. So for instance you can keep your screen colour
settings unchanged, while project dependent data such as the database in current use is
automatically configured correctly. During installation in the windows directory a WSCAD
subdirectory is created, to which the general configuration file WS_WIN50AT.INI and
the project dependent file WS_PRJ50AT.INI are copied. Every time you create a new
project and you want to work with project dependent configuration the file
WS_PRJ50AT.INI is copied into your project directory for later use.
All the configuration dialogs use the standard Windows style, which is based on an
‘index card’ format. This offers quick access and easy control. You can only change the
settings which are relevant to the current situation. For example, there is no point in
changing the settings for the Contactor manager when working with a Basic version.
Hint
When you work with WSCAD 5 an additional file (WSCAD50.INI) is
created in the windows directory. In this file the MFC software
(from Microsoft) stores information about the position and state of
the toolbars.
683

WSCAD 51
Color and Font settings
Color settings
WSCAD 5 has separate settings for screen and printer/plotter colours. In both
cases WSCAD 5 handles 16 colors, which you can modify using the standard windows
color dialog. On the left side you can see the colors WSCAD 5 is currently using (Custom
colors). If you click on the button 'Define custom colors' the dialog is extended:
Select the colour you want to change and modify it. Then click on the button 'Add to
custom Colours' to store the changed WSCAD colour.
Hint
684
There is a difference between solid colors (used for drawing lines)
and the color used for area filling. This depends on the color
resolution of your system. Have a look at the field 'Color/Solid',
there you can see the difference.

Screen colors
You can modify your screen colors for the drawings with the following dialog:
Settings
On the right side you see the 16 colors WSCAD 5 supports for the screen. By clicking on
the button 'Change' you get the standard windows color dialog and you can change the
color definitions. To change a color setting first select the color you want to use. The
selected color is marked with a small rectangle in the middle of the color field. Then click
on the button for the element you want the change. Every change is immediately displayed
in the current drawing window. The setting for 'Drawing color' only shows the
current state. It's easier to modify this directly from the information bar.
685

WSCAD 51
Printer colors
The separation of screen colors and printer colors allows you to set both output areas
optimally:
On the right side you see the 16 colors WSCAD 5 supports for printers/plotters. By
clicking on the button 'Change' you get the standard windows color dialog and you can
change the color definitions. For every element for which you can set a printer color you
have a button in the relevant color area, showing the current setting. Modifications are
made in the same way as for the screen colors .
686

Fonts
WSCAD 5 supports TrueType fonts for screen and printer/plotter output.
Settings
It depends on your system as to which fonts are available. Normally you can find Arial
and Courier New on all systems.
WSCAD 5 supports the following text types:
• Simple text, as used for all Symbol parameters like function text or part number
• Text in three different styles (Standard, Propo, Special)
The following dialog shows you the settings available for screen and printer:
The style is very important if you need special character sets for eastern countries. You
can select a font from the list available on your system. You can also select script and
style for every font, but these attributes are only effective is the compatibility is set to
Mode 3! For 'Simple text' only monospaced fonts are listed. For the type 'text' you can
select any TrueType font available on your system.
Hint
You can also use special fonts like 'Wingdings' or even foreign
language fonts, if your system is set up for these.
An optimised font manager is used when the option 'Mode 3: Optimal text scaling' is
selected.
687

WSCAD 51
This should be the standard mode. All other modes are only useful if you have to display
older projects in the conventional style.
Hint
688
There is no longer any differentiation between fonts for screen and
plotter. The only output devices supported are those allowing True
Type fonts.

Options
Options
Hint
The 'Options' dialog controls some important and useful settings.
the dialog can be opened by a right mouse click at the plan if a
special option in the Miscellaneous index card is set.
Settings
689

WSCAD 51
690

Snap settings
Settings
Is used to change the spacing of the grid points. Click on the '' sign to the right of the
field, and you get a list of all available values.
With the 'Activate snap' toggle ticked (check marked), the cursor will jump from grid
point to grid point and changing the 'Grid settings' will change the effective jump that the
cursor makes. You can also use to toggle the snap state.
Tip
The Library components were made using a 2.5mm - grid. If you
work with a 4mm grid and the automatic size fitting is turned off,
some component pins will not fit the grid (3x 2.5mm = 7.5mm).
691

WSCAD 51
Ortho mode
If the Ortho mode is activated, you can only draw vertical and horizontal lines. An 'O',
displayed on the left of the information bar, indicates that Ortho mode is turned on.
Hint
692
You can also turn the Ortho mode On/Off with function key

Grid setting
Settings
Grid setting is used to change the spacing of the grid points. Click on the '' sign to the
right of the field, and you get a list of all available values. The values depend on the
current snap settings. When the 'Activate Grid' toggle is ticked (check marked), a grid
is displayed in the drawing window. You can also toggle the grid state with .
693

WSCAD 51
Auto-connection
Activating Auto-connection turns on the Automatic Connection mode. An 'A', displayed
on the left of the information bar, indicates that 'Automatic Connection' mode is turned
on.
Hint
694
You can also turn the 'Auto-connection mode On/Off with function
key
When a component is placed with 'Auto-connection active, it will be automatically
connected to the component above or below it (or to the right or left depending on the
mode selected). In addition, if a node is drawn, a connection line will also be drawn to a
component directly above or below it. Existing connection lines will be opened
automatically. Automatic connection and opening of connection lines also works with the
UNDO, REDO, Repeat and Copy commands. Opened lines will also be closed again if
Delete, UNDO or REDO is used.

Cursor
Within this section you can select from four different cursor shapes:
• Small cross
• Arrow
• Cross hair (large cross).
• Standard Windows cursor
TIP
When placing components, it is often easier to use the crosshair
type format to line up connection points
Settings
Selecting either 'inch' or 'mm' causes the readout to display in the corresponding units.
When adding dimensions to a drawing, the dimension text will also be written according
to the units selected.
TIP
You can toggle between readouts in 'inches' or 'mm' by pressing
function key
695

WSCAD 51
Cursor scale
Cursor scale is used to enter a scale factor for the drawing. This is more applicable to
physical layout type drawings, where equipment, etc., is often drawn to scale. Typical
schematic drawings are drawn at a scale factor of 1. Readouts and dimensioning are
generated according to the scale. Select the field with a left mouse button click and
enter a scale factor between 1 and 1000 (e.g. enter 50 for a scale of 1:50).
Hint
696
The scale changes only the display co-ordinates and the
dimensioning, but does not affect the drawing output size.

Page scale
Settings
The value entered here determines the standard scale for the current switch cabinet
layout page. This scale is also applied to all of the pages which are subsequently
prepared on the basis of this page
697

WSCAD 51
File type
The different file types are very important for many functions.
When preparing the lists, such as the material list, the file type is automatically
corrected. When a new file is generated with the command File / New, the default
setting is the same as that for the current drawing. However, if this file is a form or a
drawing frame, the type will have to be set manually.
Freehand graphics
This file type is, for example, a standard WSCAD drawing but is completely ignored
when the lists and evaluations are being prepared
Others
This file type can be permanently deposited with all file types and representations in the
preview. For example, by setting *.txt for file filters, all text files in the project folder
will be shown and made visible in the preview window when they are selected.
698

Drawing frames
Settings
Matters are made significantly simpler when loading a drawing frame because the
values of the drawing frame for cross references, path classifications and borders
can be transferred automatically, thus making manual checking and reworking
unnecessary. You would do well to adjust your existing drawing frames so that you can
take advantage of this new functionality.
When converting old circuit diagrams into the new file format, all of
the lists are recognised as such and precise specification (terminals
and cables) is not possible.
The following settings under Parameters / General / File are necessary for the
automatic transfer of drawing frame values.
• Transfer drawing settings: ON
• Values when inserting a drawing frame: ON
699

WSCAD 51
Invisible text
With this toggle you can turn on/off the display of all text that has been designated as
invisible (i.e. invisible texts have '!' as the first character).
700

Margins
Settings
The margin settings are primarily important in connection with:
• Foreign languages, so that margin texts can be excluded from any translation.
• Replacement of the drawing frame, so that all elements of the drawing frame can
be removed.
701

WSCAD 51
Auxiliary lines
Auxiliary lines are very helpful to position symbols exactly. Auxiliary lines are
displayed in the specified distance (mm), beginning from the bottom of the drawing area.
The separator for the values is the '#' character, the decimal separator is the '.'
character. You can enter up to 10 values to get up to 10 lines.
702

Exact conversion
Settings
This toggle is used to determine the conversion factor for the cursor coordinates. If this
option is set, the conversion factor is 1" = 2.54 cm, otherwise 1" = 2.50 cm.
Internally calculations are always done in (inches).
703

WSCAD 51
Format
The 'Format' section is used to select the sheet size for the drawing. Selecting the list
box displays a list of available sizes from which the required size can be selected. The
choices available are European DIN A0 to DIN A4 and North American A to E size.
The fields 'X:' and 'Y:' show the size in mm or inches, depending on the selected cursor
unit. You can set the size of the drawing to any desired value by selecting 'Special' and
then entering the sizes in the 'X:' / 'Y:' fields. The maximum sheet size, using the
'Special' command, is 3000mm x 3000mm. You can also select Landscape or
Portrait format. Selecting one de-selects the other.
TIP
704
When a drawing is plotted and it appears to be too small, the most
likely problem is that a larger sheet format was chosen and then a
smaller format drawing frame was placed on the sheet, e.g. a
DINA3 format and a DINA4 frame. A solution to this problem is to
move the complete drawing to the upper left corner and to select
the correct format. The upper left corner is fixed and only the lower
right corner changes.

Desktop interface
Arranging the (desktop) interface
Settings
The WSCAD 5 interface can be freely adapted to your personal presentations. Here, an
important factor is the function bars. You can decide on the composition and appearance
of the function bars (this also applies to the library bars).
705

WSCAD 51
Toolbars general
The arrangement or adjustment of the desktop is one of the most important criteria
for the fast and efficient use of a program. In Windows the arrangement of the elements
available to the user and the degree of variability are especially important. Toolbars play
a major part here, and there are various types of toolbar. Toolbars have common
features, but offer various functions.
The toolbars can take two different forms:
706
• an independent window which can be placed anywhere on the desktop and which
has its own window text (“floating” toolbar).
• a linked toolbar, which can be ‘docked' to any side of the main window; it does
not have any window text (“docked” toolbar).
You can switch between the two forms using the following
Windows-standard methods:
• Double click the edge of the toolbar with the left mouse button to change the form
of the toolbar.
• Click on the edge of the toolbar, and then drag with the left mouse button held
down, to move and place the toolbar as you wish. If you move the bar right to
any side of the main window, it becomes “docked” again.
Toolbars can be positioned parallel (next to each other) or in rows (one behind the other)
at the edge of an application window.
As soon as the cursor moves onto a button, a short help text appears explaining the
button’s function. The individual buttons are always arranged in rows in the toolbar. If
you move the mouse onto a button, a “Tool tip” is displayed, describing the function of
the button. If you press the button and hold it down, you will see additional information
in the status bar. In order to avoid overcrowding the desktop, every toolbar can be made
invisible. Move the mouse onto the area of the toolbar (but not onto a button) and click
with the right mouse button to obtain a menu covering both the visible and the invisible
toolbars.
WSCAD has three different types of toolbars:
1. Command toolbars
2. Library toolbars
3. Information bar
WSCAD 5 can handle up to 200 toolbars and a maximum of 2000 buttons in the library
toolbars. The number of command and library toolbars together is limited to 200. They

Settings
can be held in the background (invisible) or can be switched off. The maximum number
of buttons per bar is set in the configuration and can be modified. On all the library toolbars
together, there can be a maximum of 2000 buttons. There is only one information
bar.
707

WSCAD 51
Managing function bars
Function bars can be quickly and conveniently managed with the aid of the Working
interface dialog. The dialog is invoked via the menu option Parameters / Desktop /
Function bars.
708

Settings
709

WSCAD 51
Choose between the library bars and command bars in the upper area. The available
function bars for the category concerned then appear in the list underneath. Active
function bars are marked with an ‘*’ and invisible ones are marked with a ‘.’ If you
select one of the bars, you will see the size of a button on the immediate right and
underneath, the functions assigned to each button. The Library column, however, only
appear in the case of library bars.
The command or library bar options
Note
710
• Independent The symbol bar is always displayed whatever the standard
setting you are working with in the current project.
• DIN 61346 The symbol bar is only displayed when the DIN61346 standard
field has been set in the Project Manager for the active project.
• Neither of the two The symbol bar is only displayed when you are working
without the new DIN in the active project.
• Structure identifies libraries which can accept symbols for the switch cabinet
layout.
• Off The function bar is not displayed and is removed from the memory. There
is no longer any link to the program but the bar continues to be defined and can
be activated again.
• On If the function bar was already loaded but was not visible, it is activated
at the previous position. Otherwise, the function bar is loaded and displayed at
the top left edge as a window.
• Hidden The function bar is merely made invisible and not removed from the
memory.

You can change the size of each column (e.g. Name or File) in the
list field by dragging the heading field with the mouse.
Settings
The function bars can be switched between the states On and Hidden very quickly by
clicking on the open area at the top next to a command bar, for example. A list of all
the function bars loaded is displayed and the state is switched simply by clicking with
the left mouse button. A new function bar is created by clicking on the button NEW and a
new dialog starts which can be used to adjust the name of the function bar concerned,
the number of buttons and the size of the library bars. You can give the function
bar any name you like and specify the number of buttons on the bar. The size of the
command bars is fixed. With library bars, you can either choose the standard size or
specify the size of the buttons. The DELETE button permanently deletes a function bar
after a prompt.
711

WSCAD 51
Command bars
The command bars are generated under the menu option Parameters / Desktop. In
the associated dialog, select the tab Function bars and there set the option Command.
Next, click on the button New and enter the name of the command bar in the field
Designation. The Number-of-buttons slider bar gives the number of the buttons
which are initially available.
After clicking on the OK button, the command bar is accepted and deposited with empty
commands.
712

Settings
713

WSCAD 51
Configuring a command toolbar
In order to configure the buttons in a toolbar according to your preferences, you can
activate the Object characteristics menu by positioning the cursor on the button and
clicking the right mouse button.
Inserting a button
You can insert an additional button or a separator at the insertion point (the point in
front of the cursor position). If this point is already a separator, a further separator
cannot be inserted. If a new button is inserted, it is initially empty, i.e. no function has
been assigned to it. If the maximum number of buttons has been reached, an error
message appears and the function is not carried out.
Appending a button
A new button can also be attached to the end of a toolbar. As with an inserted button, it
is initially unoccupied and you must first of all assign a function to it before you can work
with it.
Moving a button
The button on which the cursor is positioned can be moved to another position on the
same Toolbar. You start the procedure by selecting the menu item ‘Move’ in the Object
characteristics menu. Now move the cursor to the position where you want to insert the
button and activate the Object characteristics menu again using the right mouse button.
Delete
When this item is selected, the button or separator on which the cursor is located, will be
deleted from the toolbar without any further security prompts.
Record (=assign function)
You can see which function is assigned to a button, by looking at the first line of the
Object properties menu. In order to modify or reassign a function, select the menu
714

Settings
item ‘Record’. This item always requires the user to take the appropriate action, which is
then recorded. A tick within the menu will show whether this mode is still active.
If you activate the recording, the program waits for you to select the desired menu item.
If the command is assignable the button display momentarily changes. When the menu
closes, the recording automatically terminates.
Options
This item brings you directly to the appropriate section of the configuration, assuming
that the command in question is configurable. If not, the menu item is shown as inactive
(grey).
715

WSCAD 51
Library bars
A library bar can manage buttons for symbols from very different libraries. Assign
symbols to the bar in the symbol editor.
The buttons of a library bar provide the “direct loading” of a symbol from a library as
a functionality where symbols from different libraries can be assigned to each bar. The
composition is according to choice and is put together in the symbol editor. The
graphics appearance of the buttons is determined by a “photo” of the symbol.
716
A total of 2000 buttons can be managed for all library bars
together.

Library bars and IEC 61346
Settings
A standard arrangement can be made for the library bars with the options from the
Standard group. If the Standard option is set to IEC 61346 for library bars, they
will only be active when the Standard project mode is also IEC 61346. Library
bars must be populated with symbols from the corresponding libraries so that the
standard arrangement works. In the case of projects for which the project mode
standard is not set to IEC 61346, the library bars which are set to Standard IEC
61346 are hidden and those for which this option is not set are revealed. The standard
assignment is independent, for the Destination wiring library bar, for example. This
status has the effect of the library bar being independent of the standard project mode
of the currently active project, and is therefore visible.
717

WSCAD 51
Generating library bars
The library bars are generated under the menu option Parameters / Desktop. In the
associated dialog, select the tab Function bars and there set the option Library. Next,
click on the button New and enter the name of the library bar in the field
Designation. The Number-of-buttons slider bar gives the number of buttons which
are initially available. In the Size panel, the standard can be activated or, if the
standard is deactivated, a special size can be entered. The Size is entered as length x
width in the two boxes next to the Standard option. Whole numbers between 5 and 99
can be used.
After clicking on the OK button, the library bar is accepted and deposited with empty
commands.
718

Settings
719

WSCAD 51
Configuring a library toolbar
Library toolbar configuration differs from that of a command toolbar only in the
assignment process:
The component which is to be assigned must first be loaded into the Symbol editor.
Use the zoom function to enlarge the drawing so that you can easily identify the section
to be allocated to the button. With the right mouse button, activate the Object
characteristics of the desired button and choose the command Record.
The program waits for you to open up a window with the mouse. This section is then
sized to suit the button and displayed within it. The component name and the name of
the active library are also transferred. When you activate the button , the component is
immediately loaded onto the cursor. The background color of the Symbol editor is
also displayed.
Tip
720
You can check the allocation of each button within a toolbar from
the component list in the Desktop dialog.

Library bar cabinet
Settings
The library bar type allows immediate selection of symbols in the switch cabinet
layout diagram from special layout libraries. Layout components are, for example,
a front view of its mechanical structure. This view is drawn to scale in the symbol editor
and is saved in special cabinet libraries.
Important
The components on this bar can now be pasted directly on the
switch cabinet diagrams. During this process, they are adjusted to
scale. They are only used on the switch cabinet diagram since they
are only used for viewing and have no logical function.
721

WSCAD 51
Creating a new cabinet library bar
The cabinet bars are generated under the menu option Parameters / Desktop. In the
associated dialog, select the tab Function bars and there set the option cabinet . Next,
click on the button New and enter the name of the library bar in the field
Designation. The Number-of-buttons slider bar gives the number of buttons which
are initially available.
Now label the new library bar as the type Cabinet.
722

Drawing the symbols on buttons
Settings
The buttons of cabinet library bars are drawn on in the symbol editor by loading the
symbol concerned in the editor and activating the cabinet library bar. Click on the
Library button which you want to accept the symbol with the right mouse button and
select Draw in the context menu. The window function of the cursor can be used to
draw the outline. The symbol is now copied graphically onto the library bar.
723

WSCAD 51
System performance
Under Microsoft Windows, the processing time for many different tasks is largely
shared (Multitasking or Multithreading). Numerous processes are already running in
the background (e.g. updating of function bars) without the user himself initiating the
process. Within WSCAD 5, this effect can be used for displaying the working interfaces
and the relationship between these and the drawing processes.
However, it is important to make sure that the settings are not too high otherwise some
of the states which are displayed will not change quickly enough and will cause confusion
instead. If in doubt, a comparison can be made between the current setting and “the
setting against the left stop”.
Drawing priority
The relationship between the general display and the drawing processes is
designated a drawing priority. At high priority, the process of refreshment of general
displays during the drawing or functions such as moving or dragging is rarely invoked
and the drawing processes are therefore accelerated.
Display delay
The display delay is defined as the time which elapses before the general displays on
the working interface are refreshed. This includes, for example, the presentation of
alternating types of function bar display or alternating types of button display. If the time
is increased, more of the computer processing time is available for the drawing
processes.
724

Note
WSCAD has no influence on the processing time demanded by other
applications. If there is a time deficit, the best solution is to shut
down as many other programs running at the time as possible. Note
that this is often not synonymous with the iconisation.
Copying to clipboard
Settings
This option must be set in order to copy selected components or objects to the clipboard
using the +C key command and then pasting them to other Windows applications.
725

WSCAD 51
Design
This is a new feature in regard to the graphics appearance of the WSCAD 5 screen. You
can include the features of Windows XP / 2000 by the way you configure an individual
design.
The Design tab provides all the tools which are required for this purpose.
726
• The Windows standard interface option offers the not-so-courageous WSCAD
user a work interface in the conventional style.
• The checkboxes Menu, Function bars and Buttons activate the graphics
settings for the selected colours.
• The Preview immediately displays a dialog button with the settings updated.
Here you will see, for example, the type of colour blending, horizontal and 3D.
The settings must be made separately for WSCAD 5 circuit diagram editing,
installation diagram editing and module building and are only updated after the
program has been restarted.

Settings
727

Common Settings
Tabs
Directories
The 'Directories' group is used to set the default directory paths for the different files
used by WSCAD 5. With the different setting possibilities flexible network operation is
possible, because every user has an own configuration file (s). When you enter path
names, (e.g. for the contact-comb library, database, DB selection or DB Field renaming)
a complete name with path and file extension must be entered. It is much easier first to
select the field you want to change, and then to click on the 'Search' button. You get the
standard Windows File Open dialog for selecting the file or path.
Hint
If there is no setting for the Project database, project management
is automatically disabled.
729

WSCAD 51
File
Within this tab are all the settings, which control the loading, and storing of drawings.
Auto-load of last drawing when starting program anew
If this option is selected, WSCAD 5 will automatically load the last active drawing when
the program is started again. Otherwise WSCAD 5 will open with an empty screen.
Accept default settings of loaded drawing
When a drawing is saved the following settings are stored along with the drawing: Page
size, display status, grid size, path assignment for cross-reference, position of
the reflector contacts. If you activate this option, the above values, stored with the
drawing, are used when the drawing is loaded.
Hint
730
If you wish to change the parameters of the drawing (e.g. path
width), use the 'File save' command to write the changes to disk.
Otherwise, the old values will always be selected.
Accept Settings when loading a drawing frame

Common Settings
If you are inserting a drawing frame into a schematic and this option is activated, then
values form the path and distances will be take over.
Exact Format adaption
Setting this options ensures that the drawing sheets exactly fit the current format size
(A4, A3…).
Accept Settings when loading a drawing frame
If you are inserting a drawing frame into a schematic and this option is activated, then
values form the path and distances will be take over.
Disable request 'Safety copies'
Select this option if you do not want to work with safety copies.
Store display status+zoom with every page
If this option is selected, display viewing information (e.g. zoom value and pan position)
will be stored. The next time the drawing is opened, it will be displayed at exactly the
same position.
Remember that only modified drawings are automatically saved.
Store drawing if only display position modified
If this option is selected, the display status will be stored, even if the drawing itself has
not been modified.
This is useful when paging through a drawing set (if the display status was also stored).
The disadvantage is that the automatic function will always create the universal
connection file (*.CXK).
Time interval for automatic saves
WSCAD 5 has the ability to regularly save onto disk the file you are currently working
on. Set the value to 0 to disable the automatic save.
Automatic Safety Copies
If you are saving single schematics WSCAD creates a subfolder BAK in the project folder.
In this folder, the files will be saved with their original name.
Deleting files to the recycle bin
This option prevents files from being deleted immediately without the possibility of
recovery. If you tick on this option, the deleted files are stored in the Windows recycle
bin and must be deleted again from there for them to be removed completely.
731

WSCAD 51
Printer
This group contains options for schematic and label printers.
Line width
Here you can control the width of different types of lines. (0.1 to 1.0 mm)
Always enable color printout
This option overrules the settings of the printer driver. At the print dialog you select
whether the printout is colored or not
Here you can also change the current printers
These buttons starts the same function like menu item 'File-Change printer'.
732

Cross reference
Common Settings
This tab covers all the settings for size, content, orientation and layout of crossreferences
displayed on the drawing.
Leading character
This character will become the first character of every cross-reference text. The default
value is '/', but you also can enter a string.
Separation between page # and path
Here enter the sign, which is displayed in cross-reference texts between the page
number and the path.
Disable contact cross-reference
With this option, you can prevent the generation of cross-reference text at contacts and
(Mega module only) at side elements.
Also, forward on the last page
If a line has an open end on the right side and this line is not continued on the following
pages, normally the cross-reference points at the line end itself. If you set this option,
you can force the cross-reference text to point to a preceding page.
733

WSCAD 51
Disable Unit/field designation
If this option is NOT selected the UFD is included in the cross-reference text (at the
beginning).
Disable at single line end
If a line has only one open end in the complete project, you can disable creation of the
cross-reference text.
Disable at the last line end
Select this option if the cross-reference text at the last open end on the right should not
be generated.
Space upper contact -> page edge
This option defines the location of the first reflector contact, and this is the reference
point for the automatic positioning of the contact combs in the Professional module.
Space between reflector contacts
This option defines the space between the various contacts of a reflector (the duplicate
contacts displayed next to the coil that are used to display the cross references).
Display in snap grid
If this option is selected, the contacts are placed 1 grid space away from the preceding
contact. If disabled, the size of the contact is calculated and the distance away is adapted
to this size. The previous setting 'Space between reflector contacts' then has no effect.
Cross reference text at reflector / comb
With this option, you can determine whether the cross-reference text at contact comb
and contact reflector is generated at the left or right side.
Hint
734
The pin direction at the contact comb must be ‘left’ for the lefthand
pins and ‘right’ for the right-hand pins. A wrong pin direction
causes a missing cross-reference text!
Group path
With these settings, you can modify the path parameters. All entries can be made in mm
or inches.
Hint
Be careful when setting the path unit to ‘Grid’. The cross references
will change if the grid setting is altered.
The Distance from frame represents the space between your drawing frame and the
format area. You can also set the start values (Blank = disable).
Hint
Remember that the path setting you can see in your drawing is only
optical, which means there is no fixed relationship between what
you see and the path settings used by the cross reference
generator. You must therefore make sure the path setting matches
the frame. You can easily check this by moving the cursor from left
to right and noting the path information in the information bar.

Common Settings
735

WSCAD 51
Miscellaneous
This group contains options, which do not fall clearly into any other category.
Drawing memory
This amount of drawing memory is allocated for every drawing
window you create. The value is not as important for the actual drawing
size (a typical drawing needs about 10-20kB), as it is for the speed of the
automatic functions (Good value 4096kB).
Note
736
This settings also determines the maximum size of a symbol
library!
Full horizontal functionality
For European drawings, the layout is typically in a vertical orientation
and hence this option is NOT set as a default. In North America, the
layout of schematics is typically in a horizontal orientation and hence the
horizontal mode is required.
This option affects many functions:

Common Settings
• The automatic connection feature when inserting a symbol
• The automatic break in connection lines when inserting a symbol
• The identification of terminals/cable conductors belonging together.
For these components, the reference name can be taken from
another component of the same type.
• Automatic positioning of the contact combs
• Display of the auxiliary line for the reflector contacts
• Creating of reflector contacts
• Creating and positioning of line related cross-reference texts.
Simple sorting algorithm
Typically, this option is not set; which means that the letters are
outputted in sequence relative to the numbers. When the option is set,
the numbers are outputted in sequence relative to the letters.
Example: For numbers in a terminal chart
NOT SET: 1A, 2A, 3A, 1B, 2B, 3B, 1C, 2C, and 3C...
SET: 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B, 2C, 3A, 3B, 3C,.....
This is also important for the sequence in which the contactors and
contacts are displayed in the dialogs of the 'Contactor Manager'.
Calculate ref. name position when auto-numbering
With components that are placed in a vertical orientation (typically
European), the reference name is located on the left side of the
component. If the reference name has been moved, during automatic
numbering, the reference name will be re-positioned to the existing
location. To prevent this from happening this option should be deselected.
Error beep
Deselecting this option disables the warning beep when an error occurs.
The error message is still displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Update variable date automatically
Select this option if you want the 'date' variable to be automatically
updated each time a drawing is opened and modified.
Cursor Auto-Position to Standard Button
The cursor jumps always to the default button on each call up dialog.
ACCESS 2000 compatibility
If you select this option, all internal databases external Access lists (like
Material list) will be saved in the new format except the large Accessdatabase
(wscad42.mdb) that includes all parts.
The Access-database must be converted with the program ACCESS 2000.
Be carefully with this option cause ACCESS 2000 format is not readable in
ACCESS97.
Display
Within this group, you can set the style of date presentation and the
printout of nodes. The limits on the display of names and pin
numbers/names affect what happens when you zoom. Depending upon
the resolution and screen size, it may become impossible to read the text
737

WSCAD 51
for the component names, reference names, line names, pin numbers and
simple text. Entering a value here controls whether the text is displayed
or not. For example, if the display factor is set to 0.5, text will be displayed
up to the point where it is being displayed at 50% of its size, and
0.1 up to 10%. With a factor of 0.5, if the view were zoomed to 1/2
(50%) the text would be displayed, but if the factor was .6, it would not,
because the viewing scale exceeded the entered display factor.
Show dialog 'Option' with right mouse button
If you right click within a drawing window, but not on an element, the
'Option' dialog appears if this option is set.
738

Contactors + PLC modules
Common Settings
Within this group are all the settings for contactor and PLC processing. If you are working
with a Basic module most of the settings are disabled (greyed).
Activate contactor manager
The automatic 'Contactor Manager' can be switched on. (Contactor Manager is only
available in the Professional module).
If it is switched off, and contacts or coils are added or deleted, the contactor project
file will cease to reflect these changes, and has to be generated anew.
Semi-automatic
If this option is activated you will be able to use the conductor browser this also prevents
an automatic database call up during placing conductors.
Display occupied contacts
If a contact is selected for placement, all coils that have been placed will appear in a
dialog. Selecting a coil assigns the contact to it.
Deselecting this option means that only the free contacts is displayed at the appropriate
coil (displayed as capital letters 'OOCO'). Otherwise, all contacts assigned to this coil are
displayed: The unoccupied contacts are displayed using capital letters and the occupied
ones with small letters (only Professional module).
739

WSCAD 51
Accept function text of the coil for the contact
If this option is selected, when a contact is placed and associated to an existing coil
whose function text has already been entered, the function text of the coil will
automatically appear ready for the text to be placed.
Preset vertical position of function text
If you enter 'Function text' when placing a coil, this text can automatically be displayed
for each associated contact. The position of the text is pre-defined. If contacts are placed
vertically (typically European style), the 'y' position is set by the location of the contact
and the 'x' position is taken from the contact itself. If contacts are placed horizontally
(typically North American style) the 'x' 'y' positions are reversed (Professional module
only).
Determine pin numbers anew when changing a contactor
When a contactor is replaced (using the 'Contactor' command on the 'Modify' menu, or
by selecting 'Change' on the 'Contactor management' menu found under 'Automatic
functions'), you can accept the existing pin numbers or regenerate the pin numbers as
per the new contactor.
Show auxiliary line for reflector contacts
Activating this option will display an aux. line at same level as that defined for the
location of the reflector contact in configuration. This line acts as a guide only and is not
printed or plotted.
Automatically change Ref. Name coil/contact using copy/repeat
If this option is selected, the coil/contact reference names are changed automatically if
'Repeat', 'Copy', 'Insert File/Block' and 'Copy File' are used, so that identical
reference names will not appear in the drawing set. The reference names are changed in
such a way that the page number and a number that does not already appear on the
page will be added. Some component reference names (e.g. coils and associated
contacts) are modified in the same manner if using 'Copy' and 'Insert' is used, so that
the assignment of coil to contact is not destroyed. During the automatic numbering run,
the reference names will be converted to the correct numbering scheme.
TIP
740
If 'Repeat' and 'Copy (immediately)' are used, no assignment will
be detected, because single elements are copied.
Activate PLC manager
The automatic PLC-manager can be switched on. (PLC-manager is only available in the
Professional module). If it is switched off, the PLC project file and PLC modules are
added or deleted, the PLC project file will cease to reflect these changes, and has to be
generated anew.
Import symbol text instead of comment from the PLC list
This setting determines if the symbol or comment is used when importing a PLC list, or
creating a PLC list with WSCAD for Windows. The system is able automatically to read
and assign Comment and Symbol Text from a S5 formatted list (only Professional
module).
Note
This setting only takes effect if you are working without the PLC
manager. The components for the PLC manager have text allocators
for symbol and comment!

Export using DOS character set
This allows exporting a PLC list in a text file with DOS code.
Import using DOS character set
This allows importing a PLC list in a WSCAD project.
Common Settings
741

WSCAD 51
Connect + Load
Within this group, are all the settings, which have an effect on procedures such as
placing a component, drawing or entering text.
Adapt component size automatically
Standard library components are all created using a 2.5mm grid so that the pins fall on
grid points. If you work with another grid, the component pins will not fit. Enabling this
toggle will cause the component size to be adapted from a 2.5mm grid to suit the
selected grid size.
IMPORTANT
742
Please use this setting with care. If you draw using a 2.5mm grid,
there will be no problems. However, if you draw in a 1, 2 or 4mm
grid and use 2.5mm library components, you must make sure that
any components that you create, are created using a 2.5mm grid,
otherwise the size adaptation will not work.
Take values from database

Common Settings
If this is activated, you can select Symbol parameters, e.g. part numbers, component
names and Text2 from the database. Only components corresponding to the designated
item will be displayed in the dialog, if it was stored in the database (only Mega module).
Graphic component selection
If this is activated, every time you use the command 'Schematics - Select
component', WSCAD 5 displays the drawing corresponding to the current library, and
you can simply pick the symbol you need by positioning the cursor over it and clicking
the left mouse button.
Assignment Component Parameter Text to Database
Here you can create a connection between Component Text (Text3…Text16) and a
specified Database field. When placing components the values from database will be
assigned to the particular Component Text. (If option 'Take values from database' is
activated)
Disable request to enter 'line name'
This prevents the call up of the 'Input line name:' dialog to enter the line name and
additional information.
Enter line name in general input field
If this option is selected you must use the general input field at the information bar to
enter line names.
Pre-set last text when input
If this option is selected, any text entered last will be displayed in the input field of the
information bar (e.g. reference name, component name, variables,...). This is very useful
when using similar text inputs.
Place entered text immediately
When placing components and entering the associated text for the component,
deselecting this option means you can position the text in any desired location after it
has been inputted. Selecting this option means that the text will automatically be placed
at the location determined for that text when the component was created.
Auto-connection possible when a node is drawn
If this is activated, a connection line will automatically be drawn from the point where a
node is placed to a connection pin on a component, if the node and pin are directly above
or below each other (or directly left or right depending upon the setting for horizontal or
vertical functionality). The automatic connection line is disabled if the general automatic
connection (Function key ) is disabled.
743

WSCAD 51
Compatibility
The tab Compatibility is designed specifically for adherents of the earlier method of
working.
Graphical Symbol selection
This activates the menu item Schematics - Graphical Symbol selection – Select
component or ‘Library’ (here you activate the individual libraries). Corresponds to the
working style of previous versions.
Utilities for Electronics
Switches on the various pin types and pin forms and activates the menu item Automatic
funct. – Export/Import - Net list.
Activate Destination Wiring
Switches on the Destination wiring functionality and switches off the drawing element
Nodes.
744

Cables
Common Settings
The options under this tab can be used for specifying settings for cables. In the Basic
version, most of these settings are irrelevant and are therefore inactive. This is where
the basic settings for defining the cable shield are located.
Place cable cores automatically at the intersection point.
When drawing a cable line, WSCAD can automatically place cable-core type symbols
at the crossover point with the connection lines. During this process, the cable
designation and cable type which have been entered are converted into reference
names or symbol names.
Line when cable core on cable line
When cable cores are placed automatically, the cable is identified with these symbols
and the cable line element is unnecessary. However, if you wish to see a cable line on
the circuit diagram, with this option, you can specify that a cable line (free graphics) be
added with the colour setting for cables. But this cable line only has visual significance
and is hidden (see next option).
Do not show cables
This option is used to prevent the cable line from appearing on the screen or on the
printout.
745

WSCAD 51
Activate Online Cable Manager
This is where the Cable Manager is switched on or off. Logging takes place in the
background simultaneously when new cables are laid or existing cables are changed.
Overwrite all
When this option is ticked, all of the cable-core type symbols are numbered. Otherwise,
only those cable cores are changed which start with a number. This is only active when
the Cable Manager is switched off.
Continuous counting
When this option is ticked, the cable cores for which the number has already been
specified (important – the first character must not be a number) are counted during
numbering.
From top to bottom
As with the terminals, numbering can be from top to bottom or from left to right. Note
that the option must be set for a diagonal line from top right to bottom left if the left
core is to start with 1.
Number reference names automatically
Normally, the reference names for the cables are issued manually. When this option
has been ticked, after prompting, the reference names of the cable are logged at the
same time by the automatic numbering.
Transfer terminal numbers
This option allows the numbers for the connected terminals to be transferred as core
numbers. With a cable between 2 terminals (or 2 standard symbols) the number is
transferred from the internal side.
Shielding
746
• Select the type of line which is to be drawn for the shield under Line type.
• The Radius determines how the shield connections are presented as a drawing.
• The Designation, in this case, the shield, is transferred to the function text for
the shield symbol.
• The ‘Sh’ under Connection is the pin name of the shield connection.
Load symbols automatically
Library used: this is where the library which is to be used is selected. Cable symbol:
this is where the symbol from the library being used is selected for the cable
presentation. The symbol must be of the symbol type, Cable core.

Terminals
Common Settings
The options under this tab can be used for specifying settings for terminals. In the
Basic version, most of these settings are unnecessary and are therefore inactive.
Output pin name to printer
When output to the printer, the pin name (=designation internal side) is output at the
same time.
Attach pin names to pin numbers. With multi-storey terminals, it is often useful to
label the pin names (= designation internal side of terminals) with, for example, a and b
etc. rather than using points. These pin names can then be attached to the terminal
diagram for the pin numbers (= terminal connection).
Note
Only the first character of the pin name is transferred.
Terminal processing compatible with Version 4.3
Only tick this option when an editing mode is wanted, as is conventionally described
under Terminal diagram.
Terminal numbering continuous or page / path
747

WSCAD 51
When numbering, the terminals are referenced with serial numbers or numbers
relating to page/path depending on the setting.
Terminal numbering bottom or top
With this, you can decide whether the terminal numbers are positioned at the top or
bottom connection (pin) of the terminal (i.e., either the top or the bottom pin number
is placed).
Note
If the connection has not been selected, the pin number is deleted anyway. This is
important if you, for example, mark (PE) manually and then number automatically.
Direction of the terminal numbers
In the auto setting, the pin direction of the terminal (as they were issued when
preparing the symbols) determines the orientation of the terminal numbers. If you
select Horizontal or Vertical, the specified pin direction is permanently changed. This
cannot be reversed again by using automatic numbering.
Overwrite all
When this option is ticked, all of the terminal connections are numbered. Otherwise,
only those terminal connections are changed which start with a number.
Continuous counting
Ticking this option means that the terminals for which the terminal numbers have already
been specified (important: first character must not be a number) are counted during the
numbering.
active
not active
Number connections from top to bottom
The terminal numbers are issued on the circuit diagram in relation to the position. If
this option is not ticked, the terminal numbers are incremented line by line from left to
right.
not active
748

active
Note
If the output is not sorted, the output sequence of the terminal
diagram corresponds to the direction set here.
Number manually when loading
Common Settings
If you tick this option, you will be able to enter the terminal numbers directly while
loading. Pay attention to the display on the information bar which provides you with the
appropriate information.
Number reference names automatically
If this option is ticked, the reference names of the terminals are also processed during
automatic numbering. Before this, however, a prompt appears. The reference names
of terminal strips are usually issued manually.
Attach pin names to pin numbers
If you tick this option, the terminal numbers are supplemented with the pin names
when the terminal diagram is output. Ideal for multi-storey terminals which have
an identical terminal number.
Automatic empty lines and Automatic numbers in empty lines
If you tick the option Automatic empty lines, the empty lines are added during the
terminal diagram output. With the option Automatic numbers in empty line, the
pin numbers are added to the empty lines as the terminal diagram is output.
Automatically empty
lines
Automatically insert
number into empty lines
749

WSCAD 51
750

Plug/Socket
Common Settings
The Online Plug Manager is activated via Parameters / General / Plug/Socket
Manager.
For the menu option Connect+load / Plug or socket or plug+socket, the following
settings are necessary. If you load the plug or socket via the function symbol then, of
course, the alternative plug symbols can also be used. The library which is to be used is
selected under Library used. The socket symbol is the symbol from this library which
is used for displaying the socket. The symbol must be of the symbol type, Socket. The
same applies to the plug symbol.
751

WSCAD 51
Database
Database access compatible to ACCESS 2000
If the option Database compatible to ACCESS 2000 is selected, then all of the
databases generated are saved re-formatted (both internal databases and databases
which can be output as files such as material lists).
If you use an older WSCAD database in ACCESS 97 format, then the format of this will
not be changed. Conversion to ACCESS 2000 must be carried out manually with the
database program ACCESS 2000.
Important
752
When you convert the database access to ACCESS 2000, you must
bear in mind that all databases produced in this way (material and
PLC etc) from the previous version V 4.2, and of course V 4.4
installations which have not set this option, can no longer be read.
This can lead to problems when starting the program.

Labels
Labels
WSCAD 5 provides the ability to create labels for three different sections:
• Equipment
• Cable
• Terminals
Common Settings
Some parts of the settings are identical for each section. The size and position of the
labels can be in mm or inches depending upon the units selected:
A Label width
B Vertical spacing (distance between rows)
C Horizontal spacing (distance between columns)
D Left margin
E Top margin
F Number of columns
G Number of rows
Please remember that the Windows printer drivers have margin settings. We recommend
that you print a test page and then correct the values. Within the group 'Font' you can
change character size, font type and thickness. Remember that most available fonts only
include 2 or 3 thicknesses (THIN, NORMAL, BOLD).
753

WSCAD 51
Equipment labels
In addition to the common label settings you can control the creation of equipment
labels. The text can be positioned left aligned or centered. You can determine if Unit
and/or field designation should also be included. If so, you can output the text in
Multiline style, e.g. different lines will be created for Unit designation, field designation
and reference name. The required line distance is calculated from the font size used.
Hint
754
For left aligned text there is a margin of 5% of the label width.
Within the section Component types you can determine which types of components
should have labels.
Selection
With ‘Selection’ it is easy to make further restrictions. By the use of the wildcards '?',
'*' and '#', you can create the appropriate specification. Multiple specifications must be
separated with a ';'. If the toggle 'Inclusive mode' is selected, only those components
are processed which match the selection.
Example
Selection what happens
-K* All symbols who starts with an K in the reference name. A UFD has
no effect

Hint
Common Settings
-#K* All symbols who have numerals (0...9) before the reference name
-#K2? All symbols with a reference name like:
z.B. 1K21, 10K25, 71K23
-K1?.* All symbols who starts with an K1 in the reference name behind them
must be any character and a . (dot) further characters can but not
must be.
=Anl*-K* All symbols with Unit designation like Anl and the reference name
like K starts . The Field designation will not considered.
=Anl*+Ort?-K* All symbols with Unit designation like Anl and the reference name
like K starts . Additional the Field designation must have 4
characters.
+Ort? All symbols where the Field designation have 4 characters.
Components which are not listed in the material list, will also not
be processed during label creation.
Use ANSI Code
If you want to use a label printer, you have to create a print file. For this here you can
determine which character set is used ANSI or DOS.
2 copies
Here you can determine a label print out twice. (For Equipment and Cable labels).
Templates
Here you be able to save different templates for different label styles. Make first your
settings and then type the template name in the list box. Now press the right button
(picture has changed) to save the template. If you want to delete a template, select the
template in the list box and then press the left button. (Picture has changed)
755

WSCAD 51
Cable labels
756
In addition to the label sizes, you can control which labels are created.
The text can be positioned left aligned or centered. You can determine if Unit, and/or
field designation should also be processed. If so, you can output the text in Multiline
style, e.g. different lines will be created for Unit designation, field designation and
reference name. The required line distance is calculated from the font size used.
Hint
For left aligned text there is a margin of 5% of the label width.
WSCAD 5 offers 4 different types of cable labels:
Cables Cable name only
Cable - Dest. Cable name + Reference name of destination
(typically an external component)
Cable - Source Cable name + Reference name of source
(typically a terminal)
Source - Cable - Dest. Reference name of source + Cable name +
Reference name of destination
Tip

Even when you select 'Multiline style' and the Unit or field
designation is included, the Unit/Field information is not printed on
a separate line.
Common Settings
If you want to specify further restriction criteria you can do it with the 'Selection' field.
All the entered specifications refer to a reference name, depending on the type of cable
label you have selected:
Cable label type Reference name
Cable Cable
Cable - Dest. Destination
Cable - Source Source
Source - Cable - Dest. Destination
By use of the wildcards '?', '*' and '#' you can create the appropriate specification.
Multiple specifications must be separated with a ';'. If the toggle 'Inclusive mode' is
selected, only those components are processed which match the selection.
757

WSCAD 51
Terminal labels
For the terminal marking, information can be printed out on labels via the
terminals which are present in the circuit. In order to do this, you must provide certain
information (such as the width, height and distance etc.) via the labels being used. You
can also decide whether only numbers should be printed out, whether the output should
be rotated or whether the pin numbers (identification of the internal side of the
terminal) should be output at the same time.
Selection
The extensive selection capabilities have been extended further by the introduction of
the wildcard #. This character stands for any number of numbers and makes it easier to
select certain symbols which, for example, are designated with a prefixed page number.
Another selection criterion can be to restrict to certain reference names (setting
inclusive is active) or to exclude certain reference names (setting inclusive is not
active).
Example #K2? => 1K21, 10K21, 72K25 ........
ANSI-Code
With the option Output in ANSI code, you can specify whether DOS or ANSI
(=Windows) character sets should be used when outputting to a file for marking
systems. If incorrectly set, the special characters such as ä or Ü will appear incorrectly.
758

Rotate terminal no.
The terminal number is rotated by 90 o anticlockwise when output.
Output numbers only
No terminal numbers with letters are printed out.
+Pin name
The pin name is output together with the terminal numbers.
Common Settings
759

WSCAD 51
Output lists
General
In this folder, all of the configurations are combined which have an influence on the
difference output lists. Settings which, depending on the configuration level, have no
effect are deactivated and greyed out. However, the appearance of the graphics form will
not be discussed here.
760

Summary specification with variables
Common Settings
In this group, all of the settings are collected which relate to the creation of the content
information in the previous style with variables.
In the Professional version, the setting Graphics form determines whether the content
information is created using a graphics form. In this case, the text spaces and their
positions determine the information to be output.
Note
This setting represents a preset for the dialog of the automatic
function Content information.
If the option Align column height is set, the number of lines to be filled in is calculated
so that approximately the same number of lines is written in each column. Otherwise, the
first column is filled first before the next column(s).
The information in the ASCII list panel determines the appearance of the content
information and how it is generated in the Automatic version or the Professional version
without a graphics form. In each case, you can specify the column position and, for some
settings, the heading text. If a column value is set to 0, output of the information
concerned is suppressed.
Note
761

WSCAD 51
762
Unlike the graphics form, only one variable can be transferred to
the ASCII list at a time.

Reference list
Common Settings
A reference list is a special connection list which only contains the connections of a
symbol or symbols with the same identification letters.
In the Column panel, you can specify the column position for the individual pieces of
information. The Path setting determines whether the path should also be output at the
same time. The settings in this group determine the appearance of the path and at what
distance from the reference name the path should be output. Likewise, either the header
data (i.e. headings) or empty lines can be output instead. This is important if you wish to
output the reference list together with an ASCII form.
763

WSCAD 51
Connection list
The connection list shows all of the electrical connections for the entire project. This
can either be output directly to the printer, an ASCII list or to a text file. In order to meet
the maximum number of requirements, you can generate different types of lists. This
group includes all of the settings which relate to the creation of the connection list.
In the group Columns, the column positions can be specified for the individual pieces of
information as can the text which is to be transferred from the line name dialog.
Likewise, either the header data (i.e. headings) or empty lines can be output instead.
A simple output will only output the first connection name.
764

Tablet
Requirements
Common Settings
As mentioned at the beginning, a correctly installed tablet is a requirement for correct
use of the program. The tablet pen moves the cursor like the mouse.
Hint
WSCAD 5 can give no support whatsoever regarding the installation
of the tablet or its driver. This applies particularly to the tablet's
WINTAB driver. Consult the manufacturer or your dealer.
The procedure for working with a tablet is as follows:
• Create or select your template.
• Scale the tablet.
• Load or display your template.
765

WSCAD 51
Activate
You can activate the drawing tablet with the menu command 'Settings - Digitiser -
On'. A button with a tick will appear in front.
'On' without a tick means that in this setting, the stylus or puck attached to the tablet
functions only as a mouse. If you click on 'On', the functions of your tablet template will
become active.
Hint
766
If the command is shown as inactive (greyed out), this means the
tablet was switched off at startup and the WINTAB drivers are not
loaded.

Create or select template
Common Settings
The first step towards working with a drawing tablet is the creation of a template.
Templates are constructed as a table with as many columns and rows as desired. The
position of the individual fields in these templates is determined by coordinates. In these
fields you can specify WSCAD commands, and in any order, components from any
available library and also complete drawing macros. The dialog 'Digitizer template'
appears, preset with the most recent settings. In the Fields section you can enter the
number of rows (Y-direction) and columns (X-direction) which determine by multiplication
the maximum number of fields which can be used. The Size shows the X and Y
extensions of an individual field. This value is constantly updated and is displayed in
'mm'.
The Format section determines the page size on which the tablet template will be
output. You can choose from any current paper size, and the dimensions (x and y) of the
current size are displayed. Margins can also be defined (in 'mm'). Under Name you see
the drive and directory where the templates are stored. If you want to create a new
template, then first complete the settings described above, give the template a new
name e.g. 'Tablet.901'. and click on the button New. This loads a new template as a
WSCAD drawing with the name Tablet.901. All the columns and rows are created and
the individual fields can then be completed graphically with each symbol or command.
With the button '…' you can change the preset directory or drive where the file
Tablet.901 is stored.
Hint
As long as you do not enter any other template into the Name field,
this template is active for your drawing tablet. This also applies to
the menu item Load/display template.
Please note that the file extension *.901 should not overflow the
900 range of numbers, as this ensures the unambiguous
assignment of WSCAD tablet templates.
Load/display template
In order to load a tablet template or to display its contents you use the menu command
'Settings - Digitiser – show assignments' or the corresponding Command Button.
In the display at the top left you see the currently selected field with the co-ordinates
Column/row. If you click on a particular field of the tablet then the current settings of
this field are displayed under Type and Description. To change a field first select it by
clicking on it and then select the desired Type.
Hint
For the assignment you can choose from any WSCAD command, any
library component and any drawing macro.
Depending on the chosen Type, you will now see under Commands all the commands,
components or macros which are available for selection. The plus sign in front of a
command shows that for this group there is a further level of commands for you to
choose from. A minus sign shows that you have reached the lowest level. Click on the
minus sign and you can move back up to the next level of commands. Once you have
found the desired command or component you can assign this value to the previously
selected field of your template, by using the button Assign to Field. Thus you can assign
components or commands field by field as you wish.
767

WSCAD 51
Hint
768
These settings are stored with the template in their own *.ini file.

Scale tablet
Common Settings
These define the limits of the usable tablet template area and of the drawing area itself.
To start the scaling procedure click on the Start button. Follow the instructions in the text
fields and the relevant coordinates will automatically be transferred into the adjacent
boxes. If you are working without a defined drawing area, finish the scaling procedure
after you have determined the tablet area, simply by clicking on 'OK'.
Tip
You must scale your digitizer, if your template (paper on the
digitizer) has been moved.
769

Windows
General
WSCAD 5 allows you to work in multiple windows. This makes it easy to copy sections of
an existing project into your current project
Hint
Each window is linked to one page It is not possible to show one
page (or a part of it) in two different windows simultaneously.
771

WSCAD 51
Tile horizontally
772
Use this command to arrange the windows as non-overlapping horizontal tiles.

Tile vertically
Use this command to arrange the windows as non-overlapping vertical tiles.
Windows
773

WSCAD 51
Window list
At the end of the window menu you can see the list of the currently open windows. The
active window is marked with a '' in front. If you select a window from this list, the
window will be activated and shown in the foreground.
774

Cascade
Windows
Use this command to arrange the windows overlapped. The currently active window
is shown in the foreground.
775

WSCAD 51
The full screen
With this menu option, all of the elements of the working interface up to the symbol,
command and information bars are hidden to produce a larger “work station”. This
option is switched on and off using the function key.
776

Help
Online Hilfe
Online help overview
The Online help is started directly by using the menu option Help / Overview or
. The Online help is installed on your system as standard and is therefore
available at any time. If your PC has internet access and you have activated the
connection (menu command Help / WebHelp), then the help data are loaded directly
from the internet.
If you now wish to access specific information on a topic, press the F1 key and the
relevant data will be loaded directly from the internet. You will find the information on
the topic which you have just selected.
Note
The files for the online help on our homepage are constantly
updated. These files are supplemented with tips and pieces of
advice which can be downloaded from the internet to be displayed
on your system at any time.
777

WSCAD 51
778

Help in Search mode
Use this command also to start the Help, but this time in Search mode:
Help
Sometimes, the index file which is necessary for this is not created so a dialog appears
beforehand in which you can start creating the index file. This usually only happens when
starting the Help in Search mode for the first time.
Index
It is usually better to look in the last pages of the reference manual in the index where
you will find an alphabetical list of headwords and keywords. The page numbers refer to
the relevant places in the book.
Online
Alternatively, when the mouse cursor is on a menu option or inside a dialog, you can
press the F1 key to invoke the Online Help for this particular topic.
779

WSCAD 51
Services
Software maintenance via the internet and
version status checking
Also check for the current version status by looking at the setting for the time interval.
Parties to the maintenance contract have access to the latest software updates at any
time. You can enter a time interval within which WSCAD 5 is to remind you to check for
the availability of newer versions (releases).
Conditions
The WSCAD 5 working computer must have internet access (with network systems, at
least one computer must have this capability). The user must have the appropriate user
rights (e.g. administrator rights) to execute the downloads and the customer must have
a valid maintenance contract.
780

Time interval
Help
Once the time interval has elapsed, a dialog which enables you to carry out the check
and download starts automatically.
In the top right of the dialog, click on the graphics button Fetch update from internet
to start the checking procedure for checking whether the version you are currently using
is the latest version. If you are already using the latest version, this will be confirmed by
a message and the download process will not be continued. In the bottom part of the
dialog, start the program with the graphics button WSCAD 5.
Setting the time interval
The time interval can always be set for a few days at a time. Here, the setting 0 days has
the effect of repeatedly invoking the dialog. The setting none suppresses this invocation
completely. If the dialog is left via the program start, then the dialog does not appear
again until after the number of days set for the interval has elapsed.
781

WSCAD 51
Online checking and download
Once the online checking and download have started, a dialog appears which shows the
current information on the available software package. The directory into which the
download file is copied is permanently created internally.
The dialog is closed by clicking on the button Finish and then WSCAD 5 can be started
in the normal way. The button Start download starts the process and a progress bar
appears on the screen. The process can be aborted at any time by clicking on the button
Cancel download. The option Automatically disconnect connection when finished
closes the online connection after the software has been successfully downloaded and
disconnects any remote data transfer connection via the modem or modem card.
782

Activating the new version
Help
The setup starts immediately after the download is complete. If the installation is
aborted, the WSCAD 5 recognises that there is an incomplete version on your system
the next time the program is started and starts the setup process again automatically.
783

WSCAD 51
Online update directly from the program
The download can be started from the main program at any time by activating the
information dialog via the menu option Help / Via WSCAD 5 and clicking on the Online
update button there. The reminder interval can be set up here as well. If the interval
has been shut down completely in the loader at any time, here it is also possible to
specify a time interval again. A direct link can be set up to the WSCAD homepage and
your local e-mail system can also be started here.
784

DLL information
Help
Activate the information dialog via Help / Via WSCAD 5. The button DLL’s displays all
of the DLL (Dynamic Link Library) files which are used by your system in another dialog.
These files are very important for the software on your system to operate smoothly. The
version of each DLL which is registered here is crucial.
Report
The Report button prints out all of the important system information on the printer
which is connected to your system.
Use this form when you want to contact our hotline by fax.
785

WSCAD 51
Error log
Use the option Help / Error log or start a list directly to give you an overview of all the
messages which have been generated for the current project with the date and time.
This will enable you to understand your work procedures better. The list is arranged in
chronological order. The button Delete until removes all entries prior to the selected
entry. The button Delete from removes all entries after the selected entry. Cancel
aborts the deletions and closes the dialog. OK accepts the changes and likewise, closes
the dialog.
786

Function keys
Help
With this menu option you start an overview of all keyboard instructions, which are
available in WSCAD 5 .
See also
Function keys
787

Terminals
General
The handling of terminals is a topic which, like the Contactor manager, gives rise to a
lot of questions. The following section therefore explains the general functions of
terminals and the internal details of the automatic functions.
Standard terminals each have one internal and one external connection
and one jumper pin.
The word Terminal includes all components designated as ‘Terminal’. A normal
terminal must have at least 2 connection points. One of these pins is designated as
‘internal’ by having the pin name attached to this contact. As a rule this pin is marked
by a full stop, but it could be any letter (or ‘+’ or ‘-’). Our standard terminals each
have 3 pins: one each on the internal and the external sides and also a so-called
jumper pin, which can only be used for forming jumpers within a terminal bar.
The reference name of a terminal can be omitted if it can be allocated
from another terminal by the automatic process.
As the components concerned have special characteristics, you will normally find them in
the library ‘ELEKCROS’. In order that the automatic process can combine the individual
terminal connections into a terminal bar, the reference name must be given for each
individual terminal connection. An exception to this are terminal connections where the
reference can be transferred from another terminal. In this instance the automatic
process looks for terminals which are drawn on the left at precisely the same height.
Then the reference name must be present only on the left most terminal (or on the top).
789

WSCAD 51
Terminal chart algorithm
The following section explains how the automatic function creates the
terminal chart. The automatic function finds the terminal pin position in
the general connection file '*.CXK'. The destination reference is created
as follows:
790
• All component pins found on the same 'X' co-ordinate as the
terminal pin are treated with highest priority.
• If no connection was found on the same 'X' co-ordinate, the closest
component pin to the left of the terminal pin will be selected, even if
it is placed on a different drawing sheet.
• If no connection was found to the left of the terminal pin, the closest
component pin to the right will be selected, even if it is on a
different drawing sheet.
The example on the following page shows a strange terminal chart, which
the algorithm has created from a certain component arrangement. It is
not incorrect, but is not practical.
• -X2 pin 2 only locates the component K1/13 on the right side.
• -X2 pin 3 sees X2 pin 2, marked for jumper connection, and on its
left side component K1/13.
• The external -X2 pin 5 in connected to K1 pin 13 on its left side
and to K2 pin 13 on its right side. According to the algorithm, the
terminal chart lists K1/13 again.
• K1/13 is listed three times, K2/13 is not mentioned at all.
A practical solution, created with the Professional module, for the same
arrangement is shown on page following the above example, but this time
using terminals with 'jumper' pins.
Hint
The section on ‘Jumpers’ shows how, for the same drawing, the use
of ‘jumper’ pins can create a more correct and more practical
terminal chart in graphical form.

Terminals
791

WSCAD 51
Terminal destination
The designation of a terminal connection as internal or external, is called the terminal
destination assignment. This simply means that for connections assigned to the internal
side, there must be a pin name. For the libraries supplied with WSCAD, the pin name
is marked with a dot ‘.’, but this can be any letter you wish (e.g. ‘a’, ‘b’, or even ‘+’, ‘-’
). The dot is visible on the screen, but for plotting it must first be enabled in the
Configuration.
With the command Modify - Terminal destination the destination assignment can also
be easily reversed after a terminal connection has been loaded. The figure shows two
display options for the terminal destination:
792

Terminal numbering
Terminal numbering comprises 2 levels:
• the reference name of the whole terminal strip
• the individual terminal connections.
Terminals
Since reference names are usually entered manually, you must explicitly allow the
numbering of reference names, by enabling it in the Configuration. You can also set the
option of numbering the terminal connections manually as soon as a terminal contact is
loaded. This is useful in the case of terminal contacts named with letters (e.g. PE) .
The numbering itself is carried out automatically. The type of numbering
is set in the Configuration:
• continuous or with page/path
• position pin numbers on top or bottom. The unselected pin number
(top or bottom) will be deleted!
• orientation (vertical/horizontal, auto)
• count to include previously created terminal connections
• superscribe all previously created terminal connections
793

WSCAD 51
Hint
794
he setting ‘Auto’ for the orientation of the pin numbers means that
the orientation given in the Symbol editor will be retained. Any
other setting (vertical or horizontal) alters the pin orientation of
the terminal contacts (and the text orientation as well)
permanently!

Vertical terminals
Terminals
The use of vertical orientation for terminal connections is relatively rare. The main
functions are not affected by this, but two small points should be observed:
• The configuration for pin numbers changes from Top or Bottom to Left or
Right.
• The reference name must be given for all terminal connections if you are not
working in horizontal mode. This can be made invisible by adding a preceding ‘!’
to avoid many overlapping references..
795

WSCAD 51
Terminals with several connections (e.g. multistorey
terminals)
Create a terminal with, for example, 4 connections (2 internal and 2 external). Simply
imagine a square with 2 pins on its top surface and 2 pins on its bottom surface.
However, when creating the symbol, make sure that the first two pins which you create
are on top of one another (in other words, first the pin on the bottom left and then the
pin on the top left and so on). When numbering, the automatic uses the two
connection points drawn first only. Set the assignment destination by giving the pin
names at the top the values A or B or even a or b (remembering that each pin with an
assigned pin number is internal). You now have a symbol which has 2 internal and 2
external connections. During numbering, the automatic counts the connections as one.
Under Parameter lists, specify that the pin names of the terminal connections on
the terminal diagram are attached to the pin numbers. They will then be given the
terminal connection designations 1A and 1B etc.
In the example you will see that. Terminal X4 has been created as a separate multistorey
terminal, as described above. The identical result is obtained when using
terminal symbols (Xterminal) and assigning to multi-storey terminals in the
terminal browser later on (significantly easier and more flexible).
796

Jumpers
Terminals
The automatic identification of jumpers is a relatively difficult task especially when there
is a mixture of jumper connections and connections to other equipment. WSCAD 5
therefore uses ‘jumper’ type pins. Thus a standard terminal has 2 connections for the
component and 1 connection for the jumper connection..
797

WSCAD 51
Jumpers display (standard)
Jumpers are displayed without dividing them up into web and wire Jumpers. The
following example shoes the drawing from the terminal algorithm section where the
Jumper pin type is used for the connection at the same time. The drawing can of course
be arranged better by, for example, moving the Jumper pins outwards – see the
example for the multi-storey terminals. The type of display which we have chosen
should show the Jumper pin more clearly and be as similar to the first drawing as
possible. The terminal diagram now shows clear, practical assignments.
Note
798
Jumper pins are not recognised if you use the terminal diagram in
ASCII format since another bridge algorithm is used for this
purpose.

Terminals
799

WSCAD 51
Plug-in jumpers
Jumpers pins are used for fixed web bridges between the individual terminals of the
terminal strips.
As you can see from the picture above, the Jumpers pin is drawn exactly in the centre
of each terminal, the pin shape is a point and pin type is a bridge. Because of the
shape of the pin, the connection point does not appear on the printout. The
connection line between Jumpers pin 1 and Jumpers pin 4 can be drawn as a
continuous connection line and coordinate points are not necessary for connection to
Jumpers pins. The web bridges can run over different pages of the diagram. You can
also use the destination wiring elements for this purpose providing, in this case, that
the line name and the connection name of the connection line which runs from one
Jumpers pin to another is known.
Note
800
If a terminal has a Jumpers pin, then this terminal must have at
least 3 pins. The Jumpers pin can be positioned anywhere and can
also be the top most pin.
Jumpers pins may only be connected to each other and not to a
symbol connection.
Jumpers pins only being allowed to be connected to one another means that the
information for the automatic function is unambiguous. This rule however, is not always
as easy to implement in practice as in the previous example without impairment to the
visual appearance.

Terminals
801

WSCAD 51
Wire jumper
The wire jumpers connects the individual terminals to the external connections via
connection lines. In so doing, the web jumpers can run over different pages of the
diagram. You can also use the destination wiring elements for this purpose,
providing, in this case, that the line name and the connection name of the
connection line which runs from one jumper pin to another is known. The wire
jumpers can only be displayed and managed within a terminal strip, i.e. from
Terminal X1 Connection 1 to Terminal X1 Connection 2 etc. or here, for example
PE.
802

Contactor Management
Fundamentals of contactor management
By using Contactor Management, it is very easy to add contactors and relays to the
circuit diagram and then arrange and manage them.
All the symbols for coils and contacts are subject to Contactor Management. All
information about these symbols is managed in the so-called contactor database. This
file has the name Schütz.Mdb and is located in the project directory.
Contact Management supports 2 modes which can be set in the configuration or under
the menu Automatic / Contactor Manager / Semi-Automatic (on / off).
Hint
• Fully Automatic Contactor Management (all actions are monitored by
Contactor Management to see whether the values from the database agree
with the values from the contactor database)
• Semi-Automatic (contacts and coils are added to the contactor database
arranged according to reference name in order to carry out a comparison with
the database later on)
Editing procedures which affect contactor coils and contacts are carried out
using the Contactor Manager
The contact comb carries all the collected contactor-specific information about available
contacts and contact numbers. This is normally assigned to a real component via the
field comb in the database. This contact comb is analysed automatically as the coil or
the contact is loaded and the recognised values are transferred to the contactor
database at the same time. It does not matter whether you load the coil or a
contactor contact first in the circuit diagram.
When loading a coil or contact of a new contactor without using semi-automatic, a
selection must always be made in the database even if this is a contact. I.e. in this
case, although the contact comb is analysed, it is not transferred to the circuit diagram.
This is then defined as a so-called virtual contactor because, although it is available for
contact assignment, the contactor coil has not yet been added to the circuit diagram.
When the coil is added later on, it need only be assigned to the virtual contactor. A
virtual contactor can be recognised by virtual of the fact that it is labelled graphically
in the symbol manager.
Component with part number assignment from the database with the
contact comb
803

WSCAD 51
=>
804

Contactor Management
805

WSCAD 51
The following commands have no effect on coil or contact symbols when Contactor
Management is activated:
806
• Repeat
• UNDO / REDO
• Change symbol type

Rebuilding the contactor database
Contactor Management
The contents of the contactor database is re-built with the coils/contacts which
are available in the project. A contact or coil which has not been entered can be assigned
on-line. Faulty entries in the contactor database are recognised and displayed in the
contactor manager where they can be corrected.
Mind the dialogue which appears every time, even you've select the New project file
command.
Choose Yes, if just want to update the conductor database or choose No if you want a
re-assignment of the contact numbers (belonging to the comb which is assigned to the
coil ).
The contactor database is adjusted automatically with the following functions:
• Copying, deleting and moving a file
• Inserting a drawing macro
• Inserting a block
• Copying and multiple copying
• Deleting and multiple deleting
807

WSCAD 51
Cross reference coil-contact
The cross reference of a contact to a coil is written on-line beneath the reference
name of the contact (if not barred in the configuration). The cross reference is
written on the contact just loaded at the corresponding position of the contact comb
on-line, even if the comb is located on another page. The cross references to the
contact and contact comb are produced on-line.
See also
Contactors + PLC modules
808

Creating symbols
Creating coil and contact symbols
Contactor Management
In the following, the most important points are numbered step-by-step when creating
new contactors.
1 Contactor coil
It is only rarely necessary to create a new contactor coil. A new symbol must also be
created as described in the chapter Symbol editor. The appearance of the coil is
unimportant for contactor management but the symbol type COIL is absolutely
necessary. The optional selection must also not be forgotten.
Example:
Power contactor with the connections A1 and A2, the reference name –Q5, the
selection !pow and the symbol type coil
2 Contact
If a new contact is required, a new symbol must also be created of the symbol type
CONTACT. In this case, familiarise yourself with the presentation of the symbols of the
library CONTACTCOMBS.BIB also supplied. It is important that the contact type and
the expanded type declaration are specified. The pin names must therefore be
assigned to all pins of the contact, as described under Characteristics of a contactor
contact.
809

WSCAD 51
3 Creating the contact comb
The contact comb is a central element of Contactor Management. Follow the rules
precisely which are described in the section Creating contact comb for contactor.
Transfer an existing comb to the symbol editor and consider it in the light of the points
listed below.
See also
Expanding contactor contact
4 Database adjustment
After having created all the conditions, the database which you have used (which
represents the link between the coil and contact comb) still has to be adjusted. Create a
new item database entry by filling out the following fields:
810
• Set the signal designation in Component Name. This overwrites the preassigned
general symbol name in the library (e.g. C COIL becomes POWER
CONTACTOR). This value is transferred to Symbol Parameters.
• Enter the Part number in Part number. This number must only occur once
throughout the entire database. Here, you do not have to enter the
manufacturer's item number. If you would like to have this listed in the
material list, write the actual item number or order number e.g. in the field
Part Number and use the corresponding wild card. This value is transferred to
Symbol Parameter.
• Enter the reference name (= such as K) of the coil in Designation but not the
contact designation (this is set automatically when selecting the contact comb).
• Click on the button in the field Comb. All contact combs for the comb
library which has been set are now shown in one window. Select the relevant one

Contactor Management
and the name will be automatically transferred to the database field. The field
Designation will also be expanded by the contact designation (= the first three
characters of the comb name).
Display Database
The display of the Change Data Record dialog of this starts when the button F4 is
pressed in the current data record.
With these 4 fields, the minimum conditions have been created for working with
Contactor Management correctly. The other fields of the database entry can also be
filled but this does not effect Contactor Management. The contents of the field Text2
are always transferred to Text2 of the symbol parameters but made invisible if this
entry has not been pre-assigned in the symbol.
811

WSCAD 51
Contact and Contact comb
Contact comb in general
The contact comb can be created manually in the symbol editor. However, if it is
desired to expand the contact combs subsequently which are already present on the
circuit diagram, then Contactor Manager must be used to do so.
Start the symbol editor and load an existing contact.
812

Contactor Management
Once the contact has been loaded, it is possible to edit it graphically (menu symbol)
and edit the connections (menu Pins) also.
All contact combs must be saved in the library (CONTACTCOMBS.BIB) which is set
under Settings/Common settings/ Directories. This setting applies to all projects
regardless of which standard has been set in the Project Manager.
If you have created your own contact combs and / or comb directories, then it is
advisable to copy all the comb symbols into the new CONTACTCOMBS.BIB of WSCAD
Version 5.1 by using the function Copy /remove Symbol(s) of the symbol editor.
813

WSCAD 51
Characteristics of a contactor contact
Each contact carries the information (invisibly) about the contact type and the type of
connection in the pin name. A certain number of connection pins must also be
available depending on the contact type. The contacts within a contact comb are
subject to the same conditions although a serial number is still available. The pin name
consists of a contact designation followed by an additional type declaration. This
prevents connection numbers being confused and contact types from being assigned
incorrectly. The characters for the additional type declaration can be chosen at will but
must agree exactly in the symbol of the contact comb and in the symbol of the
corresponding contact.
Example Double-throw contactor (W)
814
Contact part Contact Contact comb
Normally-open
contactor part
!Ws !0Ws
Normally-closed
contactor part
!Wo !0Wo
Common connection !Wc !0Wc
Hint
The contact comb and the contact must be provided with the
extended type declaration.
The WSCAD DOS version had an alternative algorithm here (without
an expanded type declaration) which is no longer valid.
The following is a list of different contact types and the identification of the pin
name:
Contact type Fixed part Moving part
Normally-open
contactors
general
Normally-open
contactors
Normally-open
contactors slow
release
!Sa !Sb
!Sc !Sd
!Se !Sf

Advanced
normally-open
contactor
Power normallyopen
contactor
(4 th contact)
Normally-open
contactor, slow
acting and
release
Normally-open
contactor 3-pole
Normally-closed
contactors
general
Normally-closed
contactors slow
acting
Normally-closed
contactor, slow
release
Retarded
normally-closed
contactor
Changeover
contactors
general
Changeover
contactors slow
acting
Changeover
contactor, slow
release
Hint
!Sg !Sh
!Sk !Sl
!Sm !Sn
!Ha, !Hc, !He !Hb, !Hd, !Hf
!Oa !Ob
!Oc !Od
!Oe !Of
!Oi !Oj
Normally-closed- Common part
normally-open
contactor part
!Wo !Ws !Wc
!Wv !Ww !Wu
!Wy !Wz !Wx
Contactor Management
If you require a power contactor with 4 power contacts, first load
the 3-pole normally-open contactor, then the normally-open
contactor _ power _ main contact4, for example, from the library
DIN_Q_power-switchgear with the identifiers !Sk and !Sl. The
standard normally-open contactors have the identifiers !Sa and !Sb
and are assigned as an auxiliary contact.
815

WSCAD 51
Creating a contact comb for contactor
The contact comb is a central element of Contactor Management. It contains all of
the information about the available contacts such as the contact type, pin numbers
and number of contacts. For this reason, a few rules must be followed during creation.
The contact comb must be created using the symbol editor or with the expansion
dialog of the Contactor Manager. In order to do so, the library
CONTACTCOMBS.BIB (created in the 2.5 mm grid) must be set and must remain in the
configuration. Then an existing comb should be loaded, changes only carried out on the
existing comb and then saved with a new designation.
See also
General information on the symbol editor
Symbol name (designation of comb)
816
• The symbol name starts with a three/four-place designation (e.g. 31P) for the
contact arrangement and the contactor type.
• The fourth/fifth character must either be a – (hyphen) for fixed pin numbers or
a / (forward slash) for flexible pin numbers
• Any text can then be entered which corresponds to the contact arrangement in
a meaningful way.
When loading the contact comb automatically, the first four characters are compared
with the contact designation of the contactor (see Loading Coil). The symbol name
need not be prefixed with the ! character because it is not transferred to the circuit
diagram.
Designation Structure
Character value Meaning
1. Character Number of normally-open contactors or changeover contactors
(when contactor only consists of changeover contactors)
2. Character Number of normally-closed contactors or lower case letter w
when contactor only consists of changeover contactors.
3. Character (omitted if only Number of changeover contactors

changeover contactors or no
changeover contactors)
4. Character
5. Character
H for auxiliary contactor
R for relay
Contactor Management
L for power contactor when a 3-pole contactor is available
S for automatic circuit breaker when the letter is not K and no
3-pole contactor is available.
The comb is positioned at the side
- Hyphen always, if the pin numbers are defined (as defined
during creation).
/ forward slash always, if pin numbers are subject to the
automatic pin-number assignment of the Contactor Manager.
Designation Meaning
11S 1 normally-open contactor, 1 normally-closed (NC) contactor, circuit
breaker
42H 4 Normally-open contactors, 2 normally-closed contactors, circuit
breaker
10P Power contactor with one 3-pole normally-open contactor, 1
normally-closed contactor as circuit breaker
12P Power contactor with one 3-pole normally-open contactor, 1
auxiliary normally-open contactor, 2 auxiliary circuit breakers
102H 1 normally-open contactor, 0 normally-closed contactor, 2
changeover contactor, auxiliary contactor
2wH 2 changeover contactors, auxiliary contactor
E.g.,42H-SOOSSS designation42H contactor with one normally-open contactor, two
normally-closed contactors and then three normally-open contactors. The 42H-
characters are compulsory, instead of SOOSSS, any text can be used.
817

WSCAD 51
Fully automatic
General information on fully automatic Contactor
Management
When working with the Contactor Management activated all of the time, all relevant
changes are logged immediately and the contactor database updated accordingly.
Coils can then only be assigned to matching contacts (in the database) because the
contactor item from the item database has been defined beforehand. Every change is
carried out monitored via the item database.
Contactor determination = item selection in the case of coils (or contact) from
the item database
Power contacts
With reference name –Q (or formerly –K), a 3-pole contact must be assigned in the
comb identification, otherwise the contactor cannot be specified automatically. For
this reason, only items with the designation Q... (or formerly –K) can be suggested
for the assignment.
Pre-selection of item data
When positioning a coil (fully automatic), all contactors are displayed in the item
database and must be assigned manually. If a valid item number is already available
in a contactor, then Contactor Management will orientate itself to this during the preselection.
Otherwise, a designation is formed from the sum of contacts used internally
and is used, possibly with a power specification, during the database search.
Check when having the contactor database rebuilt
If a contact has been introduced without Contactor Management ( = its reference
name is not to be assigned to a coil) then a message appears when the contactor
database is rebuilt.
Existing contact combs are in any case deleted and replaced but their position retained.
With a new comb, the standard position is beneath the coil (when the identification
letter is K or Q) and the height corresponds to the distance for mirror contacts
specified in the configuration from the bottom edge of the page or to the right of the
coil (e.g. circuit breaker, identification letter Q). The connection numbers are
818

Contactor Management
specified all over again or the pin numbers remain, as far as possible, unchanged
depending on the configuration.
Example from the contactor database
The contactor –Q5 is saved in the first entry in the contactor database with its position
defined as well as the item data values. The following lines contain the analysis results
for the contact comb (connection numbers and contact types).
-Q5 Pos: 790 500 0 2 22L-HSOOS !DIL00AM/22(240V50HZ) !Power contactor ...
-Q5 43/44 Sa/Sb ...
-Q5 31/32 Oa/Ob ...
-Q5 21/22 Oa/Ob ...
-Q5 1/2/3/4/5/6 Ha/Hb/Hc/Hd/He/Hf ...
819

WSCAD 51
Loading contactor coil
Loading contactor coil (first)
When loading a coil symbol (-Q, -K or motor contactor –F), you will obtain
Contactor list which shows all the contactors available on the circuit diagram when the
fully automatic Contactor Management is activated after the contactor coil has
been positioned.
A new reference name must now be specified via the button New. Normally, a
reference which does not exist will be suggested which you must then overwrite.
After clicking on OK, Database starts automatically with the pre-selection –Q or –K
depending on the reference name. Now pick out the affected item (contactor) in
Item Management. The pre-selection can be shut down using the option Pre-
Selection Off and all the items will then appear in your database.
820

Contactor Management
After assignment (double click) the data are transferred to Contactor Selection and
therefore to the contactor database. Also enter the function text immediately.
821

WSCAD 51
Extract from WSCAD-svw.mdb
After clicking on the OK button, the symbol parameters are invoked for editing again.
If no changes are necessary or if changes have already been made, then cancel the
process with the ESC key and position the contact comb which has been transferred
from the item database. The entry in the field Comb in Item Management represents
the symbol name of the associated contact comb. With this, a search is carried out for
the corresponding symbol in the current comb library (e.g. CONTACTCOMBS.BIB,
depending on the configuration) and it is displayed. It can then be placed on the circuit.
822

See also
Changing the reference name
Changing the item number
Changing the symbol name
Changing addition text2
Changing the function text
Naming a contact comb
Contactor Management
The contact comb is automatically given the same reference name as the coil (the
association is therefore specified unambiguously) but it is marked invisible.
Cross reference
The cross reference of a contact to a coil is written on line underneath the reference
name (if not barred in the configuration). The cross reference is written on the
contact just loaded at the corresponding position of the contact comb on line, even if
the comb is located on another page.
Re-building contactor project database
If the contactor project database is rebuilt now, then a log file may appear showing
all the incomplete contactors. This can also be selectively printed out. You are then
automatically guided to the Contactor Manager which shows all the contactors for the
project. The contact comb is recreated at the same time.
823

WSCAD 51
824

Using virtual contactor coils
Contactor Management
When loading a coil symbol (-Q, -K or motor contactor –F), with Contactor
Management activated, you will obtain Contactor Selection, which shows all the
contactors available on the circuit diagram, after the contactor coil has been positioned.
All the virtual contactors (here -Q7) are displayed at the same time. These are marked
specifically. Select the Ref.-name .
After clicking on the OK button, the symbol parameters are invoked for editing again.
If no changes are necessary or changes have already been made, then cancel the
process with the ESC key and position the contact comb which has been transferred
from the item database. The entry in the field Comb in Item Management represents the
symbol name of the associated contact comb. With this, a search is carried out for the
corresponding symbol in the current comb library (e.g. CONTACTCOMBS.BIB , depending
on the configuration) and it is displayed. You can then placed it on the circuit.
825

WSCAD 51
Naming a contact comb
The contact comb is automatically given the same reference name as the coil (the
association is therefore specified unambiguously) but it is marked invisible.
Cross reference
The cross reference of the contact to the coil is written on line underneath the
reference name (if not locked in the settings). The cross reference is written on the
contact just loaded at the corresponding position of the contact comb on line, even if
the comb is located on another page.
Rebuilding contactor project database
If the contactor database is rebuilt now, a log file will appear showing all the
incomplete contactors. This can also be selectively printed out. You are then
automatically guided to the Contactor Manager which shows all the contactors for the
project.
The contact comb is recreated at the same time.
826

Contactor Management
827

WSCAD 51
Reference name
The reference name is normally pre-assigned (first the page number and followed by a
sequentially number) so that it only occurs once throughout the entire set of drawings.
This reference name is changed into the desired format later by using the
autonumbering feature (see also “Automatic numbering”).
Alternatively, select the option Preset ref. name with page/path under the Settings
tab Contactor and PLC modules.
The reference name can be changed directly by clicking on the menu Symbol
Parameters – the contacts and the contactor database are corrected automatically
(with Contactor Management switched on).
828

Changing part numbers
Contactor Management
The part numbers can be re-assigned by clicking directly on the symbol parameters.
The part number is transferred from the database to the symbol parameters.
829

WSCAD 51
If a number already exists, this is overwritten but the position and visibility remain
unaltered. If not, the part number is marked invisibly and positioned beneath the
reference name.
830

Contactor Management
The contacts, the contact comb and the contactor database are automatically
corrected (with the Contactor Management switched on).
831

WSCAD 51
Symbol name
The symbol name is transferred from the database and overwrites the symbol name
issued to the library. You can also click on the parameter directly and change it via the
entry line. The contactor database is adjusted automatically (with Contactor
Management switched on).
832

Changing addition text2
Contactor Management
The text from TEXT2 of the database is transferred, if available, to Addition text2
(e.g. power specification) of the symbol parameters. If you assign another part
number, a new Text2 is accepted if available. You can also click on the parameter
directly and change it via the entry line. The position and visibility are transferred from
an existing text2 or else the text is marked invisible and positioned beneath the
reference name.
833

WSCAD 51
Changing the function text
Click on the symbol with the right mouse button and change the function text directly in
the symbol parameters (by clicking on it and changing it via the entry line).
This function text appears in the Contactor list dialog (even though it is not visible on
the circuit diagram (when prefixed with the exclamation mark !)) and makes the
assignment very much easier.
834

Naming a contact comb
Contactor Management
The contact comb is automatically given the same reference name as the coil (the
association is therefore specified unambiguously) but it is marked invisible.
Special case of protective contacts already loaded
When loading a coil of a contactor from which you have already issued contacts (a socalled
virtual contactor) you are not allowed to make a selection in the database
dialog. Abort the assignment with the button Cancel in the database dialog or the
key.
835

WSCAD 51
Loading contact
Loading contact with existing coil
When loading a contact symbol (-Q, -K or motor contactor –F), you will obtain
Contactor list, which shows all the contactors available on the circuit diagram, when the
fully automatic Contactor Management is activated after the contactor contact
has been positioned.
You must now select a reference name. All the contacts which are assigned to this coil
(via the item database) appear on the right hand side. Select the desired contact type
with the matching number.
After clicking on OK (only becomes active when the correct contact type has been
selected) the reference name of the coil is transferred to the contact. A function text
which has been entered is transferred to the contact symbol. The option (Transfer the
function text of the coil for the contact) on the tab Contactor and PLC has the
836

Contactor Management
effect of transferring the function text (which you entered when loading a coil) to the
contact if Contactor Management is activated.
Cross reference
The cross reference from the contact to the coil is written on line beneath the
reference name of the contact (if not barred in the configuration). The cross
reference is written on line on the contact just loaded at the corresponding position of
the contact comb, even if the comb is located on another page. The cross references
to the contact and contact comb are generated on line.
Re-building the contactor project database
If the contactor project database is rebuilt now, a log file will appear showing all the
incomplete contactors. This can also be selectively printed out. You are then
automatically guided to the Contactor Manager which shows all the contactors for the
project.
The contact comb is recreated at the same time.
837

WSCAD 51
Contact without a coil (creating a virtual
contactor coil)
When loading a contact symbol (-Q, -K or motor contactor –F), you will obtain
Contactor Selection which shows all the contactors available on the circuit diagram
when the fully automatic Contactor Management is activated after the contactor
contact has been positioned.
A new reference name must now be specified via the button New. Normally, a
reference which does not exist will be suggested which you must then overwrite.
After clicking on OK, Database starts automatically with the pre-selection –Q or –K
depending on the reference name. Now pick out the affected item (contactor) in
Database . The pre-selection can be shut down using the option pre-selection off
and all the items will then appear in your database (including those which have not
been assigned to a comb).
838

Now pick out the affected item (contactor) in Item Management.
Contactor Management
839

WSCAD 51
840

Contactor Management
After assignment (double click), the data are transferred to Contactor Selection and
therefore to the contactor database. Select the contact on the right which you want to
use. You can also enter the function text there. Then confirm with OK. The contactor
database is corrected.
841

WSCAD 51
After clicking on the OK button, the symbol parameters are invoked for editing again.
The option (Transfer the function text of the coil for the contact) on the tab
Contactor and PLC has the effect of transferring a function text (which you have
entered) to the contact when Contactor Management is activated.
If no changes are necessary or have already been made, then cancel the process with
the ESC key.
842

Cross reference
Contactor Management
The cross reference of a contact to a coil is written on line underneath the reference
name of the contact (if not barred in the configuration).
Building new contactor project database
If the contactor project database is rebuilt now, then a log file will appear showing all
the incomplete contactors. This can also be selectively printed. You are then
automatically guided to the Contactor Manager which shows all the contactors for the
project (the virtual contactors are identified graphically, in this case, Q5).
No contact comb is created.
843

WSCAD 51
Expanding a contactor contact
Expanding a contactor contact
When positioning a contact, if you discover that the selected contactor in Contactor
Selection no longer has a sufficient number of free contacts available with the correct
contact type, then you can switch to the expand dialog during the selection process.
There, it is possible to change the existing comb (contact mirror) which has been
assigned to the contactor via the allocation from Item Management. The pin numbers
can also be changed here.
Hint
844
This of course only make sense if the contactor type (depending on
the item) permits this expansion. The user must know or look up
this information himself. "Throwing together" any design series
inevitably leads to material lists which are incorrect.
You may, for example, want to use a normally-open contact although the contactor
type used (basic contactor) does not have normally-open contacts or no longer has
any free. Select a normally-open contact from the Symbol Explorer and position it
anywhere you like. Contactor Selection is loaded. You may want to assign the
reference name there. However, this is not possible because the basic contactor does
not have normally-open contacts.
Select in the Expand dialog via the button Expand.

Contactor Management
Here, you can see all the information about the current state of the contact comb.
Now you can decide which mode you would like to use to expand the existing basic
contactor.
• Changing the basic contactor or contact block
• Contact block from the item database
• Contact block as comb only
845

WSCAD 51
Changing the basic contactor or contact block
If it is desired to change the basic contactor or the contact block by means of a
certain item number so that, for example, it has more contacts available, then select
the basic contactor or the contact block and click on the button Modify.
After clicking on OK, Database starts automatically with the pre-selection –Q or –K
depending on the reference name and the minimum number of contacts (in this case
Q00). Now pick out the affected item (contactor) in Database. The pre-selection can
be shut down using the option pre-selection off and all the parts will then appear in
your database (including those which have not been assigned to a comb).
846

Contactor Management
847

WSCAD 51
This is transferred with the other comb.
848

Contactor Management
Pin numbers can be changed when the designation of the contact block allows it.
Contactor Selection is corrected with OK and then the normally-open contact from
the example mentioned at the beginning can be assigned using OK. The function text is
assigned (or not) at the same time depending on the configuration settings.
849

WSCAD 51
850

Contactor Management
Adding the contact block from the database again
If it is desired to add an auxiliary switch block of a certain part again, then select the
button Parts database without previous selection. Mind the tooltip .
The database opens where you can search for and accept the auxiliary switch block
with OK. The pre-selection shows all contactors of the manufacturer without
designation and with comb entries. The pre-selection can be shut down using the
option Pre-selection off and all the items will then appear in your database (including
those which have not been assigned to a comb).
851

WSCAD 51
852

Contactor Management
The display is extended with the new auxiliary switch block. These can be deleted
again with the button Delete but only when the contact block has been marked
beforehand. Pin numbers can be changed when the designation of the contact block
allows it.
853

WSCAD 51
Contactor Selection is corrected with OK and then the normally-open contact can be
assigned.
854

Assembling a contact block yourself
Contactor Management
You must only assemble a contact block yourself if no comb exists in the comb library
which complies with the requirements.
When you have assembled a contact block, then assignment to an item from the
database must take place. Here, an existing part or a new part can be used. The
designation of the contact block is assigned to the part in the field Comb (or
overwritten).
Method1
If it is desired to expand the basic contactor with an auxiliary switch block (item
unknown) then select the button New Contact Block.
An empty contact block is generated which can be expanded with individual contacts
from the right-hand side. There, it is possible to see individual contacts (normallyopen
contacts, normally-closed contacts and changeover contactors) depending
on the selection.
855

WSCAD 51
Notice the option Horizontal which allows a targeted pre-selection of the contacts
shown. For example, only horizontal contact comb elements will be seen. If the
option is not set, then only the vertical contact comb elements will appear. The
character _ (transverse) or |(vertical for combs at the side) are used to show this
clearly again.
Select the contacts you require. This is added to the new contact block simply by a
double click on the contact symbol. The pin numbers are issued automatically with the
option Auto.
Caution
856
Now issue a new designation for the comb. The pin numbers can be
changed when the designation of the contact block allows it. An
item number must be assigned to the contact block.
Method2

Contactor Management
If you already know the contact block, select the matching one from the available
contact blocks (fixed or variable) in the right panel of the dialog (see the preview
for this).
The contact block is copied to the left panel of the dialog with all the specifications
(fixed or variable pin numbers). An Part number must now be assigned to the contact
block. The pre-selection can be shut down using the option pre-selection off and all
the parts will then appear in your database (including those which have not been
assigned to a comb).
857

WSCAD 51
Caution
858
The pin numbers can be changed when the designation of the
contact block allows it.

Contactor Management
Saving a contact block to the comb library as a new comb with
designation
Mark the text New Contact Block and click on the button with the diskette symbol
next to the button New Contact Block, then the contact block which has just been
created can be transferred (saved) to the comb library.
859

WSCAD 51
A pre-assignment is available. Issue a meaningful name (designation) for the new
comb. Then confirm the save and the overwrite if that is the case.
860

Contactor Management
If the new contact comb is marked with a grey circle, no item number has been
assigned yet.
Assigning a contact block to an item from the database
Mark the contact block which has been created and click on the button with the
diskette symbol next to the button Item Database.
861

WSCAD 51
Then the contact block which has just been created can be transferred (saved) to the
item database and assigned to one (or more) items. The contact block designation is
entered in the field Comb.
862

Contactor Management
863

WSCAD 51
Changing the pin numbers in the Expand dialog
Whether pin numbers can be changed or not depends on the designation (/ or -) of
the contact block.
864
• While the contact is marked in the left panel of the dialog, it can increase or
decrease the pin numbers in steps of 10 via the up / down arrow keys.
• If the selected designation (the name of the contact block) shows a forward
slash (/), then the automatic (auto pin numbering) attempts to determine
one of the available pin numbers from the comb which already exists.

Contactor Management
• A hyphen in the designation of the contact block is always used when the pin
numbers have been defined by the manufacturer. Here, it is not possible to
change them afterwards.
865

WSCAD 51
Semi automatic
General information on semi-automatic contactor
management
With semi-automatic Contactor Management, you can assign any contacts to any
coils without specifying the contactor item from the item database beforehand. By
using fully automatic Contactor Management, the contactor can then be determined
by assigning the item number, the contactor assignment and possibly the power
specification. The associated contact combs are likewise automatically loaded and
positioned.
The contactor coil (–Q5) is saved in the entry in the contactor database with its
position defined.
-Q5 660 500 0 2 0 0
The contactor coil–Q5 is defined in the entry with its position as well as the
connection numbers and contact types and saved in the contactor database.
-Q5 13/14 Sa/Sb 6 660 440 0 2 1 0
866

Loading contactor coil (semi-automatic)
Re-loading contactor coil (semi-automatic)
Contactor Management
When loading a coil symbol (-Q, -K or motor contactor –F), with semi-automatic
Contactor Management activated, you will obtain Contactor Selection (which shows
all the contactors available on the circuit diagram) after the contactor coil has been
positioned.
A new reference name must now be specified via the button New. Normally, a
reference which does not exist will be suggested which you must then overwrite.
After clicking on the OK button, the symbol parameters are invoked for editing.
867

WSCAD 51
Leave the parameters with ESC; the symbol is then positioned without contact comb.
If the contactor project database is now rebuilt, then a log file will appear showing all
the incomplete contactors. This can also be selectively printed.
Print from the selection or delete up to the selection
If incomplete contactors have been found, you are then automatically guided to the
Contactor Manager which shows all the contactors for the project.
868

Contactor Management
869

WSCAD 51
Using virtual contactor coil (semi-automatic)
If you load a coil symbol (-Q, -K or motor contactor –F), with semi-automatic
Contactor Management activated, you will obtain Contactor Selection (which shows
all the contactors available on the circuit diagram) after the contactor coil has been
positioned. All the virtual contactors are also shown at the same time. These are
shown in the graphics in different ways.
You must now click on a virtual contactor (reference name) and then the OK button
becomes active. You will also see all the contacts assigned so far, listed in the right
panel.
After clicking on the OK button, the symbol parameters are invoked for editing again.
870

Contactor Management
871

WSCAD 51
Loading contact (semi-automatic)
Loading contact with existing coil (semiautomatic)
When loading a contact symbol (-Q, -K or motor contactor –F), with semiautomatic
Contactor Management activated, you will obtain Contactor Selection
(which shows all the contactors available on the circuit diagram) after the contactor
contact has been positioned.
You must now select a reference name. No contacts appear on the right hand side
because this coil is still not assigned to a part number (semi-automatic). After clicking
on OK, the reference name of the coil is transferred to the contact. A function text
which has been entered is transferred only to the contact symbol.
The option Transfer the function text of the coil for the contact on the tab
Contactor and PLC has the effect of transferring the function text, which you entered
when loading a coil, to the contact when the Contactor Management is activated.
Cross reference
The cross reference of the contact to the coil is written on line beneath the
reference name of the contact (if not barred in the configuration). A contact comb
has not been formed here yet.
Contactor project database
If the contactor project database is rebuilt now, then a log file will appear showing all
the incomplete contactors. This can also be selectively printed.
872

Print from the selection or delete up to the selection
Contactor Management
If incomplete contactors have been found, you are then automatically guided to the
Contactor Manager which shows all the contactors for the project (now with
contacts).
873

WSCAD 51
Loading a contact without a coil (creating a
virtual contactor coil)
When loading a contact symbol (-Q, -K or motor contactor –F), with fully
automatic Contactor Management activated, you will obtain Contactor Selection
(which shows all the contactors available on the circuit diagram) after the contactor
contact has been positioned.
A new reference name must now be specified via the button New.
After clicking on the OK button, the symbol parameters are invoked for editing again.
874

Contactor Management
If no changes are necessary or changes have already been made, then cancel the
process with the ESC key.
Cross reference
No cross reference from contact to coil is possible because no coil has been positioned
yet.
Contactor project database
If the contactor project database is rebuilt now, then a log file will appear showing all the
incomplete contactors. This can also be selectively printed.
Print from the selection or delete up to the selection.
If incomplete contactors have been found, you are then automatically guided to the
Contactor Manager which shows all the contactors for the project (now with contacts).
875

WSCAD 51
876

Contactor Manager
Contactor Manager in general
Contactor Management
The Contactor Manager makes it possible to show a compact presentation of
contactor coils and their contacts within a project in a simple way. It is invoked via
Automatic / Contactor Management / Contactor Manager.
The Contactor Manager is characterised by the following features:
• Clear organisation of existing contactor coils
• Automatic contact mirror generation
• Graphics monitoring of the current project status (contactor related)
• Direct contactor database regeneration.
• Project-related selection of contactors from one database
• Automatic monitoring of contacts per contactor and automatic issuing of
connection numbers
• Very simple subsequent alteration of contactors which are already drawn
• On-line issuing of cross reference to contact and comb, even if both are on
different drawing pages
In Contactor Manager, the contactor coils are presented in a general overview.
There, different contactor contacts can be managed individually or in groups. The
contactor coils and their contacts are managed via an Access Database which can be
generated on line from the diagram pages.
The Contactor Manager can be invoked directly via the symbol parameters.
877

WSCAD 51
Activating Contactor Manager
In order to use the automatic functions of the Contactor Manager, Contactor
Management must first be activated in the configuration (Professional Version
only). Therefore, check the configuration Parameters / General / Contactor and PLC
/ Activate Contactor Management.
Contactor Manager is invoked via Automatic / Contactor / Contactor Manager and
displays the contents of the contactor database. This database (WSCAD-SVW.mdb) is
located within the relevant project directory.
878

Contactor Manager interface
Contactor Management
Editing in the Contactor Manager is similar to editing in the Project Manager. All
information is taken directly from the contactor database.
Left panel of the Manager
The existing reference names (of the contactor coils) appear in the Contactor
Manager on the left. Each entry corresponds to a coil (or even a virtual coil).
The contacts can be seen inside the coil, where the red marking indicates that the
contact is being used.
879

WSCAD 51
Here, the graphics presentation shows the status of the coil.
Symbol Description Explanation
880
Green box Coil has item number with defined number of
contacts and is already positioned on the page
Green box with red
cross
Grey box with few
points
Coil is available on the page. Item number and
contact are not yet determined or not positioned
Contact is already positioned on the page but coils
are not yet available on the page (virtual contactor)
Grey box Reference name of the coil is being managed but
neither contact nor coil are positioned on a page on
the circuit diagram
Grey box with points
filled
Virtual contactor: Coil not yet available on the page
but the comb is fully assigned
Green box filled red Various fields during the coil-to-contact-to-contactcomb
assignment
Green box with points
filled
Green contacts Contact free
Red contacts Contact assigned
Coils fully assigned. Addition of boxes due to
expansion of the contact comb
Box red with contacts Comb not available, item missing
Right panel of the Manager
Located on the right in the Contactor Manager is a table which is used for the display
and entry. The display depends on the element selected on the left side. There are two
possible views: the coil (click on reference name) or the contact. You will then see the
information and the preview of the file where the selected element occurs.
When you click on a coil
Again, there are two views: List or Standard. Either of these can be selected via the
menu View / List or the command-bar button.
Standard view
Standard view shows all of the information about the component name, function
text, assignment, item, group, page ….. as well as a plan preview of where the
element is located.

Field
designation
Function
Contactor Management
Component name Contents cannot be edited either from the symbol name or from the
database
Function text This is where the function text for the coils is shown. This can be
changed or entered again. (! makes the text invisible)
Assignments This is where you will see the designation of the contact comb which
cannot be edited
Part number This is where the part number is shown and can be changed by a double
click and invoking the database.
Group This is where the functional groups can be entered to make it easier to
sort the coils in the Contactor Manager.
Sheet Shows the number of the page on which coil is positioned
List mode
List mode shows all the connections to component name, function text, connection,
pin and page.
Field
designation
Function
Component name Contents either from the symbol name or from the item designation
(cannot be edited)
Function text This is where the function text for the coil is shown. This can be
changed or entered again. (! makes the text invisible)
Connection This is where you will now see the pin numbers for individual connections
(can be edited)
Pin This is where the internal abbreviations of the connection pins are
shown. These determine the contact type (cannot be edited)
Page Shows the number of the page on which coil is positioned (cannot be
edited)
881

WSCAD 51
When you click on a contact
Here, there is only one view standard.
Field
designation
882
Function
Component name Contents of symbol name (cannot be edited)
Function text This is where the function text is shown. This can be changed or
entered again, even if a contact has not been used yet. (! makes the text
invisible)
Part number
Pin This is where you will now see the pin numbers of individual connection
(can be edited)
Type This is where the internal abbreviations of the connection pins are
shown. These determine the contact type (cannot be edited)

Contactor Management
Page Shows the number of the page on which coil is positioned (cannot be
edited)
Tabs in the Contactor Manager
The display in the Contactor Manager can be structured using the tabs.
All
The tab All shows all the reference names listed in alphabetical order.
Unit
The tab Unit shows a structure according to designation in a CPP project
Field
883

WSCAD 51
The tab Field shows a structure according to UFD in a CPP project.
Group
The tab Group supplies a structure according to any function groups which can be
defined for each reference name (contactor coil) in the field Group.
Part number
The tab Part number supplies a structure according to item numbers which can be
created for each reference name (contactor coil) in the field Part number.
884

Contactor Management
885

WSCAD 51
Contactor Manager functions
Delete
You can delete from the circuit diagram via the command Contactor Coils. The
symbols are removed at the same time and you can decide whether the associated
contacts should also be deleted.
Select a reference or several references and invoke the menu item Edit / Delete
(The Del key and the symbol delete amount to the same thing).
First, you must generally confirm with Yes or No.
Then the marked references are listed with the message as to whether the contacts
should also be deleted Yes No Cancel.
With Yes, the affected symbols are removed from the circuit diagram and the
connection lines closed.
Copy / Move
Contacts of identical type can be moved both within a reference and between
different references. To do this, you only need to move the assigned contact to the
new position with the left mouse button held down (drag and drop). This can also be
done via the menu Edit / copy and then Edit / Move.
Example of moving a normally-closed contact
886

New
Contactor Management
With the command Edit New, a new reference can be created directly without a
symbol. The symbol
can also be used.
The reference is then shown as a virtual coil.
Expand
Starts the Expand Dialog. The symbol
can also be used.
Split power contacts as single elements
887

WSCAD 51
Power contacts are usually issued with 3 poles. However, if you require the power
contacts separately, then a non-assigned 3-pole contact is converted into 3
individual power contacts.
Result:
It is not necessary to create a new symbol for the contact comb nor assign a new item
to this reference. When issuing the contact in the circuit diagram, however, the symbol
for the individual power contact must be used.
Swapping over contact numbers
The contact numbers can be rotated simply by selecting the contact concerned and
executing the menu item Exchange Edit Contact Number. The symbol remains intact.
The symbol can also be used.
888

Open file
Contactor Management
This menu item enables a kind of Go-To function. Invoking this menu item after selecting
a reference loads the circuit diagram page. Alternatively, the symbol can also be
used.
Stack of contacts or Function Text
The function texts and the Stack of contacts (designation of the contact comb)
can also be shown. The menu items View /Stack of contacts and View / Function
text are available for this purpose, or use the middle command bar commands Stack
of contacts and Function text .
889

WSCAD 51
Filters
Filters can also be used to restrict the associated references which are displayed and
which have been set in Filter1 and Filter2. Enter the references to be filtered.
Then, only those references will be shown which correspond to Filter1 or Filter2.
Error log
This is a file which records all error messages from the contactor project database
formation. This can be selectively printed out or even selectively cleaned.
Re-building a contactor project database
Rebuilding the contactor database
890

Changing Part numbers
Contactor Management
A new Part number can be assigned for one reference or several identical references. In
order to do so, you must select the references (multiple selection is also possible) and
double click in the field Part numbers on the right hand side of the Manager.
The database selection then opens. Select the new Part number from there.
891

WSCAD 51
This Part number is transferred to all selected references, regardless of whether the
assignment is sufficient or not.
892

Contactor Management Compact Version
Make sure that Contactor Management is activated.
Re-loading contactor coil
Contactor Management
When loading a coil symbol (-Q, -K or motor contactor –F), with fully automatic
Contactor Management activated, you will obtain Contactor Selection, which shows
all the contactors available on the circuit diagram, after the contactor coil has been
positioned.
893

WSCAD 51
A new reference name must now be specified via the button New.
After clicking on OK, the reference is transferred to the Contactor Selection list.
After clicking on the OK button, the symbol parameters are invoked for editing again.
894

If no changes are necessary, cancel the process with the ESC key.
Using virtual contactor coils
Contactor Management
When loading a coil symbol (-Q, -K or motor contactor –F), you will obtain Contactor
Selection, which shows all the contactors available on the circuit diagram, when
Contactor Management is activated after the contactor coil has been positioned. All
the virtual contactors (here –Q5 and –Q7) are displayed at the same time. These are
marked specifically.
You must now click on a virtual contactor (reference name) and then the OK button
becomes active. Also enter the function text immediately.
895

WSCAD 51
After clicking on the OK button, the symbol parameters are invoked for editing again.
If no changes are necessary or if changes have already been made, then cancel the
process with the ESC key.
Loading contact (coil isn't virtual)
When loading a contact symbol (-Q, -K or motor contactor –F), with fully
automatic Contactor Management activated, you will obtain Contactor Selection
(which shows all the contactors available on the circuit diagram) after the contactor
contact has been positioned. You must now select a reference name. On the right
hand side, you may see contacts which are already assigned to this coil. After clicking on
OK, the reference name of the coil is transferred to the contact.
896

Contactor Management
Loading a contact without a coil (creating a virtual contactor
coil)
When loading a contact symbol (-Q, -K or motor contactor –F), with fully automatic
Contactor Management activated, you will obtain Contactor Selection (which shows
all the contactors available on the circuit diagram) after the contactor contact has been
positioned.
A new reference name must now be specified via the button New and confirm it with
OK.
897

WSCAD 51
After clicking on the OK button, the symbol parameters are invoked for editing again.
If no changes are necessary or changes have already been made, then cancel the
process with the ESC key.
Mirror contacts on the side
In the case of coils with the contact mirror on the side (e.g. motor circuit breaker), to
obtain a cross reference which has been created automatically, it is only necessary to
position a contact which has already been used for a circuit on the side next to the coil
again.
In Contactor Selection, then select the relevant coil and the contact for which the
mirror is to be formed.
898

After clicking on OK, you will receive the relevant message.
Select Yes if this applies.
Another message may appear here, depending on the positioning.
Contactor Management
On selecting Yes, no reference name is written and a reference line is automatically
created.
Now have a cross reference made with Automatic function / Auto cross reference /
Contact with reflects, then the cross reference is written to the mirror contact.
899

WSCAD 51
900

PLC Manager
General overview of the PLC manager
The PLC manager offers a simple way of showing PLC modules with their classifications.
Whereas the main module gives a general overview, the individual inputs and outputs
(side modules) can be used either singly or in groups in the circuit diagram.
The PLC manager has the following features:
• Project-related selection of the PLC modules from a database.
• Automatic monitoring of connections and automatic allocation of
connection numbers and descriptions.
• Clear depiction of all existing connections.
• Handling of two information texts per channel (symbol and
comment).
• Depiction of cross-reference, comment text and symbol text on main
and side modules.
• On-line allocation of cross-reference for main module.
• Input and display on circuit diagram of PLC list.
• Output of PLC list for programming
• A main module has the allocator sps-m and the component type is
main element.
• A side module has the allocator sps-s and the component type is
side element.
• In text 2 of the Symbol parameters there is an allocator sps-byte
which may have additional numbers.
• The allocator sps-adr is so present, with additional numbers.
In accordance with the rules for text allocators, the component allocators
have to be given labels for invisibility, assignment and formatting. There
are strict rules for creating a PLC symbol.
901

WSCAD 51
Activating the PLC manager
Before the automatic functions of the PLC manager can be used, it must first be
activated in the configuration (Professional module only). You should therefore check
the configuration 'Settings - Common Settings – (tab) Contactors and PLC modules
-> Activate PLC manager'.
902

PLC Manager interface
PLC Manager
Editing in the PLC Manager is similar to editing in the Project Manager. All information
is taken directly from the PLC database.
Left side
The existing reference names are shown on the left in the PLC Manager. Each entry
corresponds to a main module.
The picture shows the status of the main module.
• Few points in the picture corresponds to a main element
which is not fully assigned.
• Many points in the picture corresponds to a main element
which is fully assigned.
• Grey graphics corresponds to a virtual main element which
is not fully assigned (i.e. the main module has not been placed on the circuit
diagram).
903

WSCAD 51
The connections can be seen within the main module itself. Here, the red marking
means a connection which has been assigned or an auxiliary element which has been
placed.
The function texts and the start addresses can be revealed. The menu options View
/Start addresses and View / Function text are available for this purpose or use the
middle command bar commands Start addresses and Function text
Right side
A table which is used for the display and entry is located on the right in the PLC
Manager. The display is dependent on the element selected on the right side. There are
two possible views. The main module (click on the reference name) or the auxiliary
module (click on the connection). The auxiliary module also shows the preview of the
file, where it exists, in addition to the connection information.
904

PLC Manager
Again, with the main module, there are two views: List or Detail, which can be
switched over via the menu View / List or the command-bar button:
List mode shows all of the connections with comments, symbol texts, addresss, pin
numbers and pages.
Detail mode shows all of the information about the filename, function text, address
assignment, group definition ….. as well as a plan preview of where the element is
located.
905

WSCAD 51
Tabs in the PLC Manager
The display in the PLC Manager can be structured using the tabs.
The tab All shows all the main elements (reference names) listed in alphabetical order.
The System card shows a structure according to system identification.
The Location card shows a structure according to location identification.
The Assembly card shows a structure according to assembly.
906

PLC Manager
907

WSCAD 51
PLC Manager functions
Changes are immediately transferred to the database and the diagram pages.
File functions
In the menu Edit / Open, the respective file of the Preview can be opened.
Entries for addressings
Entries are possible in both preview modes, List and Detail; comments, system
text, address (connection), pin number, assembly and slot can be changed.
If the main modules are loaded, the addressing can be easily changed. If you change
the basis address of the module, but wish to leave the individual groups in the
previously assigned sequence, simply change the number at the end of the text.
908
Examples
You have Module 6ES5 434-4UA12 with 4 groups with 8 digital inputs each. When 10 is
entered, the outputs have the designations E10.0 - E10.7 , E11.0 - E11.7, E12.0 - E12.7
and E13.0 - E13.7 and occupy the corresponding addresses. If, however, you wish to
change the individual groups separately, you can assign an address for each group within
the module.

PLC Manager
If you enter 24,22,20,18, the entries have the designations E24.0 - E24.7, E22.0 - E22.7
etc.
Byte addressing. The Byte (address) can be changed. If, for example, 10 is entered,
then the address of each group will increase automatically via the definition in the main
module.
909

WSCAD 51
Hexadecimal addressing
Byte numbers and bit numbers may also be hexadecimal, in which case, there must be at
least one space before the byte number.
Special case addressing
Changing the 1 st address of a group in Detail mode. In this case, the bit
(connection) can be changed but this will also change all other bits in the group at the
same time.
Deleting PLC main or auxiliary elements
The individual main or auxiliary elements can be easily deleted by selection and
choosing the menu option Edit / Delete or using the Del key (several can be deleted at
a time by using the Ctrl and Shift keys).
910

PLC Manager
If you choose Yes and you're deleting a main element you must to decide whether the
side elements to be along-deleted be supposed.
When you confirm the prompt with Yes, the elements will be deleted from the drawing
and the status released again.
911

WSCAD 51
RE-addressing PLC inputs and outputs
Directly on the circuit diagram
If you activate the symbol parameters, re-addressing is carried out by positioning the
cursor on the auxiliary module, pressing the right mouse button and selecting the
Additional text2. The PLC selection then appears with an overview of all of the PLC
modules present on the circuit diagram. The selected reference name is preselected.
Also pay attention to the option Show all which hides fully assigned PLC main
elements or those which do not have the correct connection type. Then select the new
connection. In this case, for example A0.3, the comment text is then assigned online.
Directly in the PLC Manager
Connections (auxiliary element) of identical type can be moved both within a main
element and between different main elements. To do this, you only need to move the
assigned connection (auxiliary element) to the new position with the left mouse
button held down (drag and drop). Alternatively, this can be done via the menu Edit /
copy and then Edit / Move. Example, move Input 5.6 to 5.11.
912

Import Export PLC lists
PLC Manager
In the PLC Manager, PLC lists can be read in or out selectively or together by selecting
the main module or modules (selection using the Ctrl or Shift key). Then click on the
menu Tools / Export and you will be able to specify the output name and output file
type in a file dialog.
Reading in a PLC list
Use this command to start reading in a PLC list from a text file which must be in SEQ or
Excel 5.0 format. The PLC texts are normally read in the current project or part project.
If the PLC list is to be read over several part projects, a configuration entry must be
made in the WS_Win44.ini file – see General information on configuration.
Separator Operand Separator Symbol text Separator Comment Line break
E4.1 SK23 Safety circuit
E4.2 SK23 Motor brake
The Symbol text and Comment text columns of the list are transferred and
displayed in the PLC symbol when the operand of the PLC list matches a pin name in
terms of the byte number and bit number of a PLC module.
In the “Contactor and PLC” configuration on Page 320, for old symbols with only one
wildcard, it is possible to specify whether the symbol text or the comment text is
transferred. The byte number of the PLC module must have already been specified
manually. The symbol text and comment text replace the corresponding wild cards in the
PLC module. These wildcards (as with the form creation) are permanently specified words
with an attached number corresponding to the bit number. The wildcard must be of the
permanent type (| as the first character) and the right hand limiter (>) determines the
maximum length. Each line of the PLC list contains the channel designation (e.g. A5.7),
symbol text and comment, separated by a tab or at least 2 spaces in each case (not in
the case of hexadecimal channel numbers).
If the comment is longer than the wildcard allows, the text continues on the next line.
However, only spaces, plus +, minus - and forward slash / are recognised as
separators but the words themselves are not separated. The line break is placed after the
separator. Therefore, avoid long words or cut them when generating the list, e.g.
operating hours meter: operat- ing_hour meter takes up three lines. The maximum
913

WSCAD 51
number of characters is limited to 48. The wildcards for Symbol / Comment are
subject to the same conditions as those for creating the form, with the following
exceptions:
914
• They must be a component of the symbol, i.e. entered when a PLC module is
created.
• They must be permanent wildcards otherwise the text will not be presented on
several lines.
• They can be marked invisible (! as the first character) but the text being
replaced is still made visible.
• The specified wildcard word is plc text with attached number corresponding to
the input and output.
Example
|lplc text > with PLC Manager
|lplc text5 > without PLC Manager
The wildcards are marked invisible after the text transfer but are still present in the
symbol. With each additional numbering procedure with a PLC list which may be
different or corrected, previously set annotations are deleted.
Note
When saving the configuration, the name of the PLC list is also
saved and is therefore immediately available when the program is
started the next time.
Output of a PLC list
The output format corresponds to the SEQ format of Siemens or Excel 5.0:
Separator Operand Separator Symbol text Separator Comment Line break
E4.1 SK23 Safety circuit

PLC database
PLC Manager
The PLC Manager uses the PLC project database for the management. This can
be re-built via the icon next to it or the menu invocation Automatic / PLC / Project
database.
In CPP mode, the project name is adopted as the filename and in Standard mode,
the name of the current drawing is used. In each case, the filename extension is
.MDB.
This function can be used at any time to re-build the PLC project database from the
information from the circuit diagram. A project database which already exists is backed
up by using the extension .OLD.
Rebuilding the PLC database
The PLC manager is hidden during this action.
Should be carried out whenever, for example, PLC symbols have been removed from
the circuit diagram or, for example, connection diagram pages with PLC symbols have
been copied to an existing project. But also when you have been working with the PLC
Manager switched off.
When re-building the project database, the information is taken from the PLC
modules present on the circuit diagram. Bear in mind that, for example, the comments
text may be present on the circuit diagram in an abbreviated form if the length of the
text wildcard in the symbol was not sufficient. This sometimes makes it necessary to
extend the texts concerned manually or to read in the previously generated PLC list.
Procedure for rebuilding the PLC database
The main and auxiliary modules of the entire circuit diagram are searched for and
combined using the reference names. If the main module is present, this is analysed
and the auxiliary modules assigned. If the main module for a reference name
(virtual module) is missing and if an item number is available for one of the auxiliary
modules, then the database is searched for this number and then, using the symbol
name from the database, the current library is searched for the matching main module.
915

WSCAD 51
If no assignment according to the two previous points can be found for an auxiliary
module, these can be assigned online or a new PLC module (virtual module) can be
generated by selecting an entry in the main module which is offered.
Note
916
The PLC texts present in the project database can sometimes be
longer than the visible text on the circuit diagram (formatted and
limited by the text wildcards). The automatic determination is only
based on the information (texts) on the circuit diagram so the texts
sometimes still have to be re-edited somewhat.

PLC Manager prerequisites
PLC Manager
When loading the symbol of a PLC main element, it is analysed and the
inputs/outputs which are available determined from this analysis. All information is
then pooled in a PLC project database. The connection numbers and connection
identifications are automatically transferred from this when inserting the
inputs/outputs (auxiliary elements).
Important
Only those auxiliary modules can be assigned where the letters of
the pin name (which have already been assigned in the symbol)
match those in the main module.
Example
The table shows an example of a designation of inputs/outputs on the symbol main
element and the possible designations of the individual inputs/outputs of the symbol
auxiliary element.
Main module Auxiliary module Application
E0.0 E Digital input
E0.0 EW Digital input
A0.0 A Digital output
A0.0 AW Digital output
EW0.0 E Analogue input
EW0.0 EW Analogue input
AW0.0 A Analogue output
AW0.0 AW Analogue output
917

WSCAD 51
Procedure when working with a PLC
There are two possible procedures.
1. First place the main element
Load a PLC main module at the position on the circuit diagram where you wish to have
your PLC overview. If you place it by clicking once with the left mouse button, the
database selection will appear.
In the database selection, pick out the corresponding PLC main module according to
the item number.
In the symbol parameters for the main module, extend the Text2 by the address
number. By doing this, you provisionally specify the addressing (e.g.!sps-byte10.0).
then assign the auxiliary element
Load a PLC auxiliary element symbol (input or output) at the position on the circuit
diagram where you require it. Position it by double clicking with the mouse or by pressing
the space bar (or abort the database selection with ). The list of all of the modules
being used by the PLC Manager will appear. Select a module and then you can
immediately assign the free channel of the module.
2. First place a virtual auxiliary element
Load a PLC auxiliary element symbol (input or output) at the position on the circuit
diagram where you need it. If you place it by clicking once with the left mouse button,
the database selection will appear.
If this channel is the first channel of a PLC module, pick out the corresponding PLC main
module in the database selection. In so doing, you will specify the symbol of the PLC
main module which is loaded virtually, analysed and managed from then on by the PLC
Manager.
In the Symbol parameters for the auxiliary element, extend the Text2 by the
address number. By doing this, you specify the addressing provisionally.
Assign the current channel to an Input/Output from the list of the main element.
Switch to Plc text in the Symbol parameters (click on the auxiliary element with the
right mouse button) and the cursor will position itself automatically on the first available
PLC connection pin.
When you confirm the connection, you will be prompted (depending on the wildcard
present in the symbol) to enter the comment text and/or a symbol text.
then assign a virtual main element to a symbol
Load a symbol of the PLC main module and position it by double clicking with the
mouse. A list of all of the main modules managed by the PLC Manager (including the
virtual ones) will then appear. Assign the main module to the corresponding list entry
(modules which have already been assigned are identified by !* at the end). All of the
cross references are created and the PLC texts displayed automatically. Work in this
way until the main symbol has been loaded for all of the PLC modules being managed.
Important
918
A symbol of the same name must be present in the library for each
entry of a PLC main module in your item database.
Rule of thumb
The PLC Manager creates a new module every time you make a
selection in the database dialog. This does not depend on whether
you just load a main or auxiliary module. Skipping (double click or
space bar) or cancelling the database selection always leads to an
assignment.

Inserting PLC elements with the PLC selection
Auxiliary elements
PLC Manager
If you want to introduce PLC auxiliary elements into an existing project then, after the
PLC auxiliary element has been placed (the PLC input or output bit which is
displayed separately), the PLC main elements which are already listed in the project
are listed in a PLC selection. All of the main elements appear in the dialog on the left
(sorted according to list, system, location and assembly) and all of the inputs and
outputs of the main element selected at any one time appear on the right.
• An entry field for a search criterion appears at the top left. A search is carried
out in the reference name of the main elements which are displayed (entry
e.g. =H3).
• An entry field for a comment text in which you can immediately enter the
comment text for the relevant input or output appears at the top right.
Also pay attention to the option Show all which hides fully assigned PLC main
elements or those which do not have the correct connection type. Here, select the
main element and then the relevant connection. Also enter the comment text
immediately. In order to recognise which PLC main elements are already fully
assigned, they are written in red and marked in the PLC selection. They are also
marked in red when there is no longer any valid connection free.
Note
If you use multi-digit pin numbers in the main element, e.g. EAZ,
then, it is precisely this pin name which must also be used in the
auxiliary elements otherwise the PLC Manager cannot establish a
match and no free channels will appear in the PLC selection dialog.
The remedy in this case is a somewhat unusual entry in the
WS_WIN50.INI file. There enter the following:
[Config Contactor/PLC]
PLC_check precisely=0
Main elements
919

WSCAD 51
If you wish to introduce PLC main elements into an existing project which are already
present on the circuit diagram, although virtually (e.g. a previously placed auxiliary
element) then, after placing the PLC main element, the PLC main elements already
listed in the project will be listed in an overview. Select the virtual module (pale grey
symbol).
920

Deleting the PLC main element and auxiliary
elements
Main element
PLC Manager
Deleting the PLC main elements in the PLC Manager can also have the effect of
deleting the PLC auxiliary elements simultaneously. This can be prevented by a prompt.
If the dialog is confirmed with No, the PLC auxiliary elements will remain in the
project (a virtual PLC module will appear). If the PLC database is now recreated,
individual bits of the deleted virtual PLC module will appear on the screen one after the
other. Bestätigen Sie die Zuweisung mit OK, so können Sie eine erneute Zuweisung in
der Projektübersicht vornehmen.
921

WSCAD 51
Entering a comment text and/or symbol text
directly in the symbol
Two texts can be entered for each PLC channel (auxiliary element) providing the
corresponding wildcard is present in the symbol. Once a PLC symbol has been selected,
the PLC text line is added to the Symbol parameter menu. As soon as you click on this
field, the cursor automatically jumps to the PLC connection of the symbol (or to the
first connection, if there are several connections in the symbol). Accept this or position
the cursor on another channel if there is one available. You will be prompted to enter a
comment text and/or the symbol text, depending on which wildcard (plc text or plc
sym) is present in the symbol. The position and formatting are transferred to the symbol
from the wildcard.
922

Assigning a PLC text online
PLC Manager
It makes no difference whether the text is entered at the main element or auxiliary
element, the other page is supplemented online in each case. Select the PLC PIN of the
main element by clicking with the right mouse button and the parameters are activated
automatically.
Now click on the PLC text with the left mouse button. The text entry field becomes active
and you can now enter and place the PLC text. After confirming with , the new
text is placed at the position of the old text and the PLC text of the next PIN is
automatically activated for editing. Cancel with .
Caution
With the PLC Manager activated, the PLC text is immediately placed
at the auxiliary element.
923

WSCAD 51
PLC cross reference navigator
Cross references, which enable you to switch to the relevant main element or
auxiliary element by clicking on the cross reference with the right mouse button, are
written to the symbol. This works on all main elements and auxiliary elements
whether the PLC Manager is switched on or not. Also applies to the Basic version
onwards. The navigator opens the corresponding page but cannot position on the
relevant element.
Example
Click on Cross reference 4.2 (with the right mouse button).
Result
The circuit diagram page with the auxiliary element is immediately loaded and the cursor
is placed on the auxiliary element.
While doing so, you must make sure that you click precisely on the cross reference text,
otherwise, you may find you have selected more than one (even the symbol) and will still
have to select correctly.
Important
924
The cross reference wildcard which was placed when the PLC
module was created should not lie outside the symbol. However, if
the wildcard does lie outside the symbol, then the text of the
wildcard must start as near [

PLC assemblies without PLC Manager
PLC Manager
A symbol is recognised as a PLC assembly when the plc byte wildcard is found for the
byte number. The byte number is attached to the wildcard plc byte (Text2 of the
parameter block) by the user. This is easiest when loading the symbol or via Change /
Symbol parameters.
Note
• The byte number can be multi-digit, decimal or hexadecimal. After it is entered
or while the bytes are being numbered (Automatic numbering), the byte
number is distributed to the connections unaltered when reading in the PLC list.
• The pin name of a connection contains the designation for inputs or outputs,
the byte number and the bit number, e.g. E2.5 or X AF.
The designation X may consist of several characters such as E or A
or CH.
• The bit number can only be a single digit number, decimal 0 to 7 or hexadecimal
0 to F. The total length of the pin name is limited to 10.
In order for the Automatic to distinguish these pins from the standard connections
such as the power supply which may also have pin names, the following rules must be
obeyed:
Rule 1
Any separator for separating between the byte number and bit number. In this case,
the byte number must only consist of numbers, the text in front of the byte number must
not have any numbers and the bit number must always be the last number. The bit
number can be hexadecimal but the byte number cannot. Example: E2.5 or E 2.5 or
E 2.A
Rule 2
Byte numbers and bit numbers may also be hexadecimal. In which case, there must
be at least one space before the byte number.
Example X AF or X 1CA.
An (invisible) wildcard is assigned to each input or output. When a PLC list is read in or
when a comment text is entered, the text is automatically placed at the position of these
wildcards. The plc text wildcards must still be supplemented by the bit number of the
input or output which has been assigned, from 0 to 7 or 0 to F.
Example |msps-text2 > |msps-textA >
Caution
A text cannot be assigned if there is no wildcard. The wildcards
should be General text and not Free text. General text is used for
the comment text and symbol text in any case. The length of this is
limited to 48 characters.
925

WSCAD 51
Creating a PLC symbol
General rules
The process of creating a PLC symbol involves specified steps which must be carried
out. A good basis for starting is to load an existing PLC symbol in the symbol editor
and become familiar with the explanations of this example.
The sequence in which the pins of the PLC channels are placed is a very important
aspect of this process. Pay very close attention to this later on.
Furthermore, there is only one wildcard for each cross reference and PLC text for all
channels. The position of the other texts is determined by the distance of the wildcard
from the first PLC pin. For example, if the wildcard for the cross reference is on the
right of the first pin, then the cross reference for the second pin is positioned at the
same distance as that of the wildcard from the first pin. This means that it is not
possible to place the cross reference to the left of the pin for one part of the connection
and the cross reference to the right of the pin for another part of the connection within
a PLC symbol. One wildcard is available for the position of the cross reference and the
PLC texts in each case. The relative position to the PLC pin drawn is transferred to all of
the other channels. All wildcards are a component of the symbol and must be entered as
general text.
The symbol which displays all connections of a PLC assembly (main element) in a clear
way is designated as the main module. A single input / output or a group of inputs /
outputs can represent an auxiliary module (auxiliary element). A PLC symbol (main
module or auxiliary module) contains a certain number of channels which are
combined in groups. Each channel can in turn have an unlimited number of connections
(pins).
926

Creating a PLC symbol
First, the new symbol is created with the symbol editor as follows:
PLC Manager
• Create the body of the symbol with commands consisting of characters and
free text. Set the symbol type to Main element (for a PLC main module) or
Auxiliary element (PLC auxiliary module).
• Set the pins for all general connections, e.g. supplies, earths or references.
The pin type should be PASSIVE and never BRIDGE.
• Set the pins for the PLC connections. Important: The pin type must be
BRIDGE, but the orientation and shape etc. are determined by the conditions.
Start with the first pin of the first channel of the first group. Then set all other pins of
the channel, then the pins of the other channels in the group and finally the other
groups. If you are not sure of the sequence, delete the PLC pins and start again. Bear in
mind that the pin numbers in this sequence are transferred to the auxiliary
module. This applies especially to channels with several pins per channel. Mistakes at
this stage can lead to incorrect connection numbers on the auxiliary module.
Issue a pin number for all pins.
Note
You can find the first pin of a symbol by selecting command Pin
type in the symbol editor under the Pins menu. The cursor is then
automatically positioned at the first pin.
Issue a pin name for the first pin of a channel in each case. This must have at least 1
letter (example EW4 , E0.0), and it will be changed later according to the specifications
from the symbol parameters sps-byte or the wildcard sps-adr.
Important
Later, you can only assign those auxiliary modules for which all of
the characters of the pin name of the PLC channel are identical. (An
InI switch which waives this precise assignment is available for
older symbols. In this case, only the first character has to match.
WSPRJ50AT.INI [Config Contactor/PLC] PLC_PRECISE_CHECK=0)
Place the wildcard !#lws-q> at the position where you wish to have the cross reference
for the first channel of the first group (Important: first pin drawn). When forming the
cross references later, the distance is determined between the position of the wildcard
and the first pin drawn which represents the cross reference of the other PLC channels at
the same relative distance.
• Set the wildcard !#lsps-text > for the PLC comment and/or the wildcard !#lspssym>
for the symbol text. Adjust the length of the wildcard to the available room.
For the positioning, the same applies as for the cross reference wildcards.
• Set the wildcard !#lsps-s > for an auxiliary module or !#lsps-m > for a main
module – the position is not critical.
• Set the wildcard !#lsps-adr, extended by a 3-digit number block. This type of
number block must be present for each group within the PLC module.
• The first number indicates how many channels are available for each group.
• The second number indicates how many pins a channel or a group has.
• The last number indicates whether the addressing is to be increased by channel or
by group and the value as well.
927

WSCAD 51
928
• The separator for the individual characters or groups is the comma.
Example !#lsps-adr8,1,1
implies that your symbol has 1 group, that there are 8 channels in the group, each
channel has 1 pin and the address should be increased by 1 byte per group. This
corresponds, for example, to a digital output card with 8 connections, such as the
Siemens 6ES5 441-8MA11.
Example !#lsps-adr8,2,1,8,2,1
implies that there are 2 groups, each group has 8 channels, each channel has 2 pins and
the address is increased by 1 byte for each group. This corresponds, for example, to a
digital output card with 16 x 2-pole channels, such as the Siemens 6ES5 454-4UA13.
Example !#lsps-adr8,2,-2
implies that there is one group with 8 channels, each channel has 2 pins and the address
is increased by 2 bytes for each channel. This corresponds, for example, to an analogue
input card with 8 x 2-pole channels where the address is increased by 2 bytes per
channel, which corresponds to a card such as the Siemens 6ES5 460-4UA13.
Set the Text2 of the symbol parameters to !sps-byte. For certain modules, it makes
sense to enter the complete address now (e.g. !lsps-byte0) if this is adjusted to be so as
standard. In which case, make sure that the pin names of the PLC channels are
already assigned correctly (i.e. in accordance with the addressing).
Set the symbol parameters Selection so that when selecting a database, the
delimitation is as accurate as possible. This is desirable with PLC assemblies, since each
symbol has only one equivalent at most in the database. Make the symbol name invisible
(by prefixing with a ! character).
Tip
Study the symbols in our libraries. A relatively complex example is
Assembly S95-U from Library S5-100

Creating the database entry
PLC Manager
There must also be a database entry for each PLC main element. It is important for
the symbol name in the field COMPONENT NAME of the database which you are using
to match the symbol name of the symbol in the library (except for the ! which makes the
identification invisible).
Example Database entry for a PLC main element
The reason for this is that the PLC Manager has to analyse this symbol. Load a PLC
auxiliary module and generate a virtual PLC module by the database selection (i.e.
the main module does not yet exist on the circuit diagram), so the PLC Manager still
has to load the main module temporarily. It therefore takes the symbol name (Field:
Component name) of the database entry which you have selected and searches for this
symbol in the current library.
Note
929

WSCAD 51
930
With PLC auxiliary modules, the general connection generator
adopts the PLC comment text as the function text (instead of the
function text of the symbol parameters) providing one has been
entered. The PLC comment text is therefore available in different
output lists which have a wildcard for the function text (e.g.
terminal diagram): However, this is limited to auxiliary modules
which only have one channel since only 1 function text is managed
per symbol.
Form layout
General
A graphic form is a normal WSCAD drawing file, which contains special texts, the text
allocators. By using the 'Draw' commands you can create a graphic form which contains
text allocators and drawing sheet variables. It is these text allocators that are substituted
with data automatically generated from the schematic.
A text is recognised as a text allocator if the first character is a certain sign. This is
followed by the formatting sign and the text itself. The end of the string is the
delimiter sign, which determines the max. length of the filled allocator.
The minimum length of a text allocator is 4 characters: (Allocator designation ,
alignment format, min. 1 character allocator text and right range limit).
Sometimes allocators will not fit in a column (e.g. terminal pin, conductor number). In
this case the allocators can be positioned so that they overlap, without adversely
affecting the outcome. The only resultant problem is in reading and controlling the positioning
of the allocators, which is more difficult due to them overlapping. When
positioning the allocator be careful with the alignment formats selected (left, right and
middle). In the Compact module you can use a graphic form for the terminal chart,
material list and summary, in the Mega module for cable list, cable chart and wiring
chart, too.

Why Form / Drawing frame
Index
Forms and lists are used for outputting information and data from your circuit diagrams.
By using wildcards and variables, you can organise the data on your forms and lists on
an individual basis. The data which are used to fill out the wildcards are transferred from
the material database, project database, customer database and of course the
circuit diagram which you are using.
In order to produce a structure in your form collection, the forms can be sorted
according to the various frames or page sizes etc. Create subfolders in the form folder in
order to organise them according to page size or frame type etc.
Example Where the forms are installed immediately after WSCAD 5 is installed.
Installation
path
Default template
directory
Form directory with
identical frames
In the directory of
available forms
C:\WSCAD50\ Templates\ Frames 1-8 A4\ Change_list.0001
Content_info.0001
First_page.0001
Cable_list.0001
Terminal_diag.0001
Material_list.0001
. . .
931

WSCAD 51
New Form (or change an existing)
To create a new form, you must select the menu item File-New (or if you want to use an
existing form as a template File-Open). Now choose your target folder and enter a name
for the new form.
Ein sehr schneller Weg zu einem neuen Formular ist die Modifikation eines bereits
bestehenden Formulars. Wählen Sie den Menüpunkt Datei / Laden und suchen im
Dateidialog den betreffenden Pfad, in dem sich die Vorlagen befinden. Die
Dateivorschau hilft das Formular leichter zu erkennen, außerdem ist die Größe
veränderbar . Alle Formulare in dem Verzeichnis Rahmen 1-8 A4 haben den
identischen Rahmen mit einer Pfadeinteilung von 1 bis 8 und das Blattformat DIN
A4. Wählen Sie als Vorlage ein bereits vorhandenes Formular des zu erstellenden Typs
und betätigen Sie die Schaltfläche Öffnen, so wird dieses Formular geöffnet. Ändern Sie
das Formular graphisch nach Ihren Wünschen ab. Speichern Sie dann das geladene
932

Index
Formular mit dem Menübefehl Datei / Sichern als unter einem eindeutigen Dateinamen
ab.
933

WSCAD 51
Form type
First you have to decide which file type, size and so on this sheet should have. With
menu item 'Settings-Options' the Options dialog will appear.
Important
934
The form type decide which kind of text allocators are available
Example
File type: Material list; Format: DIN A4; Snap setting: 4 mm

Inserting a frame
Index
Use the menu item File-Insert drawing macro to insert a frame into the empty sheet.
Select the folder which contains the frames and choose one (preview).
935

WSCAD 51
Draw lines
Now you be able to design your form by drawing lines and rectangles. You can use all
commands from the 'Draw' menu.
Save the new form, or your changes from an existing form by using menu item 'Filesave'
or 'File-save as'.
936

Form dialog
Managing text allocators using the form dialog
Index
Use the form dialog in order to manage the numerous text allocators easily. This form
dialog monitors each form which is loaded in respect of the text allocators which have
already been set and the text allocators which are still available for the current file type
(material list, terminal diagram, cable list and content specification etc.). You can
also adjust the general format of the text allocator concerned in the form dialog.
937

WSCAD 51
Starting the form dialog
The form dialog is started via the menu command Change / Text allocators.
However, this menu option is only activated when the page which has been loaded
corresponds to one of the following file types: terminal diagram, material list, cable
list, cable diagram, content specification, drawing frame, first page, change
status, plug diagram or connection list. The file type can be adjusted for each form
under the menu option Parameters / Options.
Caution
938
The dialog for which the size can be changed starts after activating
the command Change / Text allocators. If Text allocators have
already been set on the page which has been loaded, these will
appear in the area of the existing Text allocators.

Organising the Text allocators
Index
The large number and variety of uses of the Text allocators which are available means
that they have to be organised. For this purpose, a list has been introduced into the form
dialog area Data source which you can use to adjust the generic terms.
Choose a generic term (e.g. Specific Text allocators) and you will now see the
wildcard concerned in the list field below it.
Caution
The specific Text allocators which are available in the list field will
appear, depending on the file type (of the current page). This is
important since not all of the Text allocators are permitted in all of
the form types.
In the Text allocators window, you can influence the Text allocators being used in
respect of their position. Thus, the setting Text allocators on the form shows all of the
Text allocators which have already been placed on the form except those which are
located in the drawing frame. Text allocator in the frame gives exactly the opposite
result. All Text allocators shows the sum of the two above. The Text allocators which
have already been used on the current form and those from the respective data source
which still have to be used for this file type are marked is colour in the data source
window. The Text allocators which are currently available are shown in the area
Available Text allocators. Old Text allocators from your previous forms remain the
same and are shown in the Available Text allocators area with a description.
Example Start with the form type Material list, which already has Text
allocators on it.
939

WSCAD 51
940

Formatting and inserting the Text allocators
For all text allocators:
Every allocator can be formatted at the right side of the dialog in various ways.
Length
• Maximum number of characters: Text = 100 Simple text = 49 characters
Text style
• Standard font; Propo font; Special font; Text
Size
• of the characters
Rotation of the allocator:
• 0°; 90°; 180°; 270°
Alignment of the text:
• left; centered; right
Example
Snapshot from Cable list
Index
941

WSCAD 51
text allocators based on additional database fields:
This allocators are only in the form type 'material list' available
Formatting
In the Length column, the number of characters can be specified, i.e. how many
characters of the value which is to be displayed are output on the form. The maximum
number of characters is determined by the text type.
Simple Text = 49 and Text = 100 characters
Example ##...> Text allocators six characters long when the length = 6
Text type
With Text type, it is possible to adjust the font and the text type. It is advisable to use
Simple Text for Text allocators if a maximum length of 49 characters is sufficient.
Although there are more degrees of freedom with Text, this should not be used,
particularly for number variables, since a proportional font (such as Arial) is often used
for Text and series of numbers may not line up exactly. Selection is made by double
clicking on the field.
Size
942

Index
The Size column determines the font size of the Text allocator and the value shown.
Select by double clicking on the field.
Rotation
In the column Rotation, you can enter the angle in degrees at which the Text allocator
must be rotated when placed. Select by double clicking on the field.
Alignment
The alignment defines the position of the displayed value shown within the character
length of the Text allocator. (left justified, right justified or centred). Select by double
clicking on the field.
Other functions
The form dialog is closed by clicking on the Place button. The new Text allocators are
laid at the cursor one after another and can be placed on the form. The Delete button
deletes all of the Text allocators from the current form which are marked in the right
hand window of the form dialog. The form dialog remains active even when you click on
the form which is displayed in order, for example, to place the selected Text allocator.
943

WSCAD 51
Text allocators which specify the number of lines
on each form page (obligatory)
Each form must have the Text allocator Max. lines from the data source Gen. text
allocators. This Text allocator quantifies the number of possible lines with which the
form can be filled before the page has to be changed.
In the form dialog, the column length normally calculates the number of available
characters for the Text allocator concerned. Exception: with Max. lines text allocators,
this value is synonymous with the maximum number of lines.
If the Text allocator Max. lines is shown in the form dialog with a length of 31, the Text
allocator will be found on the form as #lws_rows31>, which means that the maximum
line length on the form is specified as 31.
944

Sum value of the Text allocator
Index
The Style column specifies whether the Text allocator is a single value, a sum or a
product. Defined as a Value, the Text allocator expresses the value for the item saved
in the database. The Text allocator forms the product of all of the values of this Text
allocator multiplied by the number as the Total value. The Text allocator forms the sum
of all of the values in a column (in the fields above) defined as the Final sum.
945

WSCAD 51
Text allocators based on additional database
fields
Unit
The material list allocator will be followed by _A or _kW or £
Style
Single means a single value
Sum means the product of the value and the number of parts
Total sum means the sum of all values in one column.
Format
Is a template in which style the value will be displayed e.g. ##.###,##
but not for currency!!!
Example
Snapshot from database editor
Add field3 = price of one unit
Snapshots from material list Add field3 = sum = quantity multiply by price of
one unit
946

Formatting the unit (only additional database
fields)
Index
In the Unit column, you can enter labels which are attached to the actual value. Bear in
mind that these abbreviations reduce the value which can be shown in the Length
column. The relevant field can be edited by double clicking on it with the mouse. (e.g.
enter kW, A or €).
Unit Effect
kW Wildcard = (length – 2 characters) i.e. 2 characters for the label kW directly following the
value
_kW Wildcard = (length - 3 characters) i.e. 3 characters for the label kW with 1 space in front
_A Wildcard = (length – 2 characters) i.e. 1 space ( _ ) as a space character and A as the label
947

WSCAD 51
Formatting the number format
In the Format column, database Text allocators can also be configured for the number
format according to Excel. The format ##,###.## means: 2 places after the
decimal point, thousands marked off with a comma, a maximum of 5 places before the
decimal point.
Note
948
The unit (kW) can also be entered in the fields for powers by
entering it in the Unit field. (0.500 kW)

Multi-line texts with Text allocators
Index
Here, the first page serves as an example since a multi-line output is only useful for
texts which occur on their own. With lists or diagrams on the other hand, during the
generation process (e.g. terminal diagram), the Text allocator replacements are
listed in tabular form on the form under the respective Text allocator. Otherwise they
would be overwritten. Load the form that you wish to use from the Template folder and
start the form dialog with the menu option Change / Text allocator. Then select, for
example, the Text allocator Customer from the generic term Project manager. Gen.
Transfer the Text allocator by double clicking with the mouse.
Caution
Pay attention to the colour of the Text allocator which indicates
whether the Text allocator has already been used in the present
form or not.
When formatting, you should generally consider how long your texts can be for this
Text allocator. If you set the Text type to Simple text, you will have 48 characters
maximum available (including the line break). If this is not enough, then the Text
type should be set to Standard font with a maximum of 100 characters. You can
also specify other formats such as the font size, rotation and orientation. Now click on
the Place button and the format dialog will close and you can place the Text allocator
on the form.
Um dies jetzt auszuwerten, speichern Sie das Formular ab und wechseln dann in die
Projektverwaltung. Dort wechseln Sie in das Feld Kunde und geben dort den
gewünschten Text ein. Wollen Sie einen Zeilenumbruch einfügen, so geben Sie das
Zeichen \n ein. In order to evaluate this, save the form and then switch to the Project
Manager. There, switch to the field Customer and enter the desired text. If you wish to
enter a line break, enter the character \n.
949

WSCAD 51
Moveable Text allocators
Moveable Text allocators (start character: #) are always used when information on
each page is presented line-by-line (e.g. terminal number, number and item
number). Make sure that all of the moveable Text allocators are on one line. They
must also all have the same orientation (horizontal / vertical) since the lines are always
oriented according to the corresponding text orientation of the Text allocator
concerned. The line spacing for automatically filled forms is equal to the grid size of the
form. The optimum grid size is 4 mm.
Moveable Text allocators are identified with a # and several Text allocators of this type
may be present on each form.
Note
950
Text which is formatted on several lines is always shown on a
single line in the case of moveable Text allocators and the linebreak
character \n is removed.

Fixed Text allocators
Index
Fixed Text allocators (start character: |) are used for words which only appear once
on each page, such as the page data, filename and Text allocator for a variable or
additional text (e.g. text1) which has to be entered manually.
Note
With fixed Text allocators, text which is formatted on several lines
must also be shown on several lines but the calculation only
regards the text as single line text during formatting. The Text
allocator length must correspond to the length of the whole text
and formatting should on the left.
951

WSCAD 51
Manual additional texts
When generating lists, up to 6 texts can be entered also depending on the choice of
graphic form when the corresponding Text allocators are present on the form (text1 to
text6 are located in the form dialog in the area Data source gen. Text allocators).
These texts are not taken from the drawing automatically but you will be asked to enter
the texts while each generation process is filling a form (e.g. after starting the terminal
diagram). The texts can only be entered for the Text allocators which have been issued.
Without Text allocators, you will not be asked to enter text.
952

Multi-page forms with Text allocators
Index
In general, each form has a unique name. If there are forms with the same name but
with a serial name extension (e.g. 0000 and 0001 etc.) they are loaded in order per
page created. The form with the last serial extension is loaded repeatedly
correspondingly often. For example, an address field can therefore be designated on the
first form but not on the second form.
Example Creating the cable list with the forms cable-list_high.00^01 and Cablelist_high.0002
Page 1 of the cable list is created with the form *.0001 and Page 2 etc. with the form
*.0002.
953

WSCAD 51
Text allocator
What Text allocators are available?
The Text allocator is a composite of formatting characters and text which is used at the
specified positions to acquire information of common interest from each circuit diagram
page.
954
• The Text allocator starts with the characters ##
• The Text allocators are shown on two lines.
• The text used to replace it is positioned in place of the top Text allocator line.
The first line of the Text allocator can be made visible on the form in order to position it
for example, under Parameters / Options / See all. Once the option Change /
Foreign language / Manage and Translate / Main language and 1 st foreign
language has been activated for texts as well as the above option See all, the two lines
of the Text allocators will appear.
The Text allocators Date and Editor, for example, are replaced as follows.
The following general Text allocators can be used on any form
These Text allocators can be used for any type of form whether it is a material list,
terminal diagram or content specification. Here, you will also find the important Text
allocator Max. lines which controls the number of possible lines on each page of the
form.
With the switch AutoFileText allocator=0 in the WS_PRJ50.INI file under category
[Misc], the Text allocator filename of the drawing (!#lfilel> on the drawing) can be
used to output or display the complete filename.

Index
955

WSCAD 51
Text allocators which can be placed for each
terminal form
The following Text allocators can be used for each terminal diagram form page.
View in the form Dialog View in the form
956

Index
The Text allocator with a running number can be placed multiple in a terminal chart.
You can see it also in the Form Dialog.
957

WSCAD 51
Text allocator of the material-list form which can
be placed
The following Text allocator can only be used for the form for the material list:
Text allocator of the material-list form which can be placed
several times
The following is a Text allocator with attached number (e.g. b1; b2) for the position of
independent references for material lists. Important for the generation option
Add.+References.
958
Text
allocator
Function
r1 Reference

name
Index
The positions can therefore be specified separately while with Text allocator ref, the
references are written directly behind one another.
959

WSCAD 51
Universal database Text allocators for the
material list
Once you have set the material list as File type, in the Professional version you can
access your material database using the universal Text allocators on additional
fields as well as the permanently defined specific Text allocators. The advantage is
that you can integrate significantly more technical information in the material list which
is necessary, particularly in the areas such as ventilation and air-conditioning
systems.
These database Text allocators are produced dynamically from the Microsoft Access
Database (*.mdb) set under Parameters /General / Directory tab / Field:
Database.
Caution
960
The Text allocators are formed from the field names of the
respective database set. This means that the Text allocator
designation displayed and the number of the database Text
allocators which are available are determined by the structure of
your database.
Example Database excerpt with field names revealed. In this database, the fields
Addition1 and Addition2 have been attached to the existing fields (with MS ACCESS).
Caution
These fields have to be created with a certain field type. Summing
is only possible with fields with number types or currency. Field
values of another type can only be displayed as a value. The field
must be specified by using the ACCESS database program. And
should only be done by experienced ACCESS users.
With material list file type, the additional database fields appear in the form
dialog. The additional Text allocators (with the additional designation Db: ) appear in
the list field on the left.

Text allocators for revision history
Index
4 revision history can be documented in the standard frame using Text allocators (15
revision history altogether), NAME#0 always being the name of the first completed
state of a project. NAME#1 - NAME#3, on the other hand always represent the last 3
revision history (also applies to COMMENT, DATE and EDITOR).
• 4 revision history (#0-#3) should be transferred to the drawing frame.
• Name#0 = name of the change state.
• Comment#0 = content of the field ‘Comment on change state’.
• Editor#0 = content of the field ‘Editor of change state’.
• Date#0 = content of the field ‘Date of change state’.
These Text allocators provide the INFO texts for all different types of diagram and
should be transferred to the drawing frame. e.g. Prj.Txt. Comment_state = the
content of the field ‘Comment’ of the folder ‘Change state’.
961

WSCAD 51
The following Text allocators should be transferred to the change list:
962
• CH state… gives information on the change state concerned once for each
list. e.g. CH state description = comment on the change state.
• Change… gives information on the changed circuit diagram in question
(appears for every changed circuit diagram on a change list. E.g. Change
on = date of change.
These Text allocators supply the field information from the project information. E.g.
Prj gen. designation = content of the field Designation in the Project Manager.

Text allocators for cable lists
Index
Cable list is used to generate a list of all the cables in the set of drawings. When the
cable designation for the external destination is missing but the cable type is present,
the reference name of the external destination with the prefix W is used as the cable
designation.) Cables are only transferred to the cable list when the cable type and
the cable designation are both present or the cable designation can be assigned by
the external destination.
Note
Every symbol which is not a terminal but is connected to a terminal
is recognised as a destination. Or if this component is explicitly
designated as external.
963

WSCAD 51
Special case of several cables per form page
Text allocators exist for the cable diagram which enable several cables to be
accommodated on one page of the cable diagram:
Text allocator Function
nameUFM Cable designation (multiple)
nameM Cable designation without CPP multiple)
Of course, the form must be adjusted for this new function.
Important
964
These Text allocators may only be used as an alternative to the
previous Text allocators cdes or cdeswithout. If one of the new
Text allocators is present on a form then the previous Text
allocators are ignored.

Text allocators for cable diagram
Index
The following Text allocators can also be used for the general Text allocators on the cable
diagram:
Dialog view
(long text)
Form view Description
Cable name name Reference name of the cable (=Cable name)
Comp. name of cable component Component name of the cable (=cable type)
Function text external
side
fctext Function text of the external component
Function text internal
side
fctint Function text of the internal component
Function text of the
cable
fcttl Function text of the cable
Part number PtNr Part number of the cable
Path path Page number + path
Pin name external side pne1 Pin name of the external component
Pin name internal side pni1 Pin name of the internal component
Pin number external side pe1 Pin number of the external component
Pin number internal side pi1 Pin number of the internal component
Ref.-Name cable nameUFM Reference (Cable) -name, with unit and field
multiline
designation, but it is allowed to place it more than
once per form
Ref.-Name cable without cnam Reference (Cable) -name, without unit and field
UFD
designation
Ref.-Name cable without nameM Reference (Cable) -name, without unit and field
UFD multiline
designation, but it is allowed to place it more than
once per form
Ref.-Name external side ext1 Reference name of the external component
Ref.-Name internal side int1 Reference name of the internal component
Seq. number ln Continuous number, starting with '1' at each cable
Text1 cable addtxt1 Text1 of Symbol parameters
Text2 cable addtxt2 Text2 of Symbol parameters
Wire cnr Pin number of cable conductor (conductor number)
Note
Every symbol which is not a terminal but is connected to a terminal
is recognised as external. Otherwise, the external page must be
explicitly designated with !ext.
965

WSCAD 51
Text allocators for content specification
Here, what is important is that the automatic generation of content specification makes
a distinction between Project Manager Text allocators and conventional Text allocators
consisting of Variables 0-9. The forms (from Version 4.2) only contain new style Text
allocators and are prepared for content specification from the Project Manager.
966

Text allocators for content specification from
variables
Index
The old style Text allocators are located under Data source in the Special Text
allocators area of the form dialog. However, these should only be used in order to
evaluate old projects selectively or when you deliberately want to use variables.
967

WSCAD 51
The content specification on a form can be spread over several columns (up to 4).
Page numbers (possibly including the system identification in the case of KTP projects) as
well as the variables 0 to 9 can be assigned beforehand to each column as variable
wildcards (# as the first character). All variables can therefore be assigned to each
column also.
In the configuration, they determine whether all columns are filled approximately
uniformly or whether the next column is not entered until the previous column is already
full. With the wildcards vara to vard, the number of the variables must still be attached,
e.g. vara4.
Text
allocators
968
Function and designation on the form
dialog
vara.. Variable 0…9, 1 st column
varb.. Variable 0…9, 2 nd column
varc.. Variable 0…9, 3 rd column
vard.. Variable 0…9, 4 th column
pgno Page number (possibly including system) 1 st column
pgb Page number (possibly including system) 2 nd column
pgc Page number (possibly including system) 3 rd column
pgd Page number (possibly including system) 3rd
column
slida System and location identification, 1 st column
slidb System and location identification, 2 nd column
slidc System and location identification, 3 rd column
slidd System and location identification, 4 th column

Text allocators for summary specification from
the Project Manager
Index
The new style Text allocators are located under ‘Data source’ in the Project Manager-
>summary specification area of the form dialog.
These Text allocators are linked to the fields of the new Project Manager, File summary,
Filename, Creation date, KTP description and CPP comment.
Text
allocator
Ref. in the form
dialog
Function
sum_ufd Prj. CPP Output from the respective CPP page
sum_cppdescrPrj: Description Output of the File summary field for each page of the
diagram (Diagram page is only accepted in the summary
specification once the File summary field has been filled
with text)
sum_sh Prj: page number Output of the respective diagram page number (e.g. 001 only
useful for projects for which all of the pages have the same
name and only differ by the file number)
sum_file Prj: File Output of the respective filename (useful either for
summary file or summary page but not for both)
sum_dat Prj: Date Output of the respective diagram page date (depending on
the last save)
sum_descr Prj: Ltp description Output of the Description field of the individual part
projects (e.g. =H1)
sum_cppcomm Prj: CPP comment Output of the Comment field of the individual part projects
(e.g. =H1)
Caution
The last two Text allocators only work when the option Tools /
Overall evaluation / Output to each part project is activated.
969

WSCAD 51
The following text allocators can be used for
connector chart
You will find the allocators if you have:
970
• Selected the form type Connector chart
• Dialog for text allocators is opened
• Data source is selected as Specific text allocators
Dialog view
(long text)
Form view Description
Ref.-name with UFD
multiline
BezM Multiline reference name with UFD
Ref.-name without
UFD multiline
bezohneM Multiline reference name without UFD
Socket: Part number buart Part number of socket
Socket: Symbol name bubauteil Component name of socket
Socket: Ref.-name
bubez Reference name of equipment attached to
connected symbol
socket
Socket: function
text
bufkt Function text of socket
Socket: Cable
function text
buftxtkabel Function text of cable attached to socket
Socket: function
buftext Function text of equipment attached to
text connected
symbol
socket
Socket: Cable
conductor
buader Cable conductor
Socket: Cable name
with UFD
bukabmit Cable name of attached cable with UFD
Socket: Cable name
without UFD
bukabohne Cable name of attached cable without UFD
Socket: Line name to buleitg Line name of connection line to the attached
connected symbol
equipment
Socket: Path bupfad Path name of socket
Socket: Pin name
connected symbol
bunam Pin name of attached equipment
Socket: Pin number bun Pin number of socket
Socket: Pin number
connected symbol
bunum Pin number of attached equipment
Socket: Add. Text 1 butxt1 Additional text 1 of socket
Socket: Add. Text 2 butxt2 Additional text 2 of socket
Plug: Part number start Part number of plug
Plug: Part number
cable
stkabart Part number of cable attached to the plug
Plug: Symbol name stbauteil Component name of plug
Plug: Reference name
connected symbol
stbez Reference name of plug
Plug: Function text stfkt Function text of plug
Plug: Cable function stftxtkabel Function text of cable attached to plug

Index
text
Plug: Function text
connected symbol
stftext Function text of equipment attached to plug
Plug: Pin number stader Pin assignment
Plug: Cable name with
UFD
stkabmit Cable name of attached cable with UFD
Plug: Cable name
without IFD
stkabohne Cable name of attached cable without UFD
Plug: Line name
stleitg Line name of connection line attached to
connected symbol
plug
Plug: Path stpfad Path of plug
Plug: Pin name
connected symbol
stnam Pin name of equipment attached via plug
Plug: Pin number stn Pin number of plug
Plug: Pin number
connected symbol
stnum Pin number of equipment attached via plug
Plug: Add. Text 1 sttxt1 Additional text 1 of plug
Plug: Add. Text 2 sttxt2 Additional text 2 of plug
971

WSCAD 51
Text allocator for connection list
When creating a connection list, the dialog for the Text allocators appears via the menu
option Change / Text allocators. When the File type is set to Connection list, the
Text allocators of the connection list will appear by selecting the data source Specific
Text allocators.
972
Dialog view
(long text)
Form view Description
Ref.-name with UFD
multiline
BezM Multiline reference name with UFD
Ref.-name without
UFD multiline
bezohneM Multiline reference name without UFD
Socket: Part number buart Part number of socket
Socket: Symbol name bubauteil Component name of socket
Socket: Ref.-name
bubez Reference name of equipment attached to
connected symbol
socket
Socket: function
text
bufkt Function text of socket
Socket: Cable
function text
buftxtkabel Function text of cable attached to socket
Socket: function
buftext Function text of equipment attached to
text connected
symbol
socket
Socket: Cable
conductor
buader Cable conductor
Socket: Cable name
with UFD
bukabmit Cable name of attached cable with UFD
Socket: Cable name
without UFD
bukabohne Cable name of attached cable without UFD
Socket: Line name to buleitg Line name of connection line to the attached
connected symbol
equipment
Socket: Path bupfad Path name of socket
Socket: Pin name
connected symbol
bunam Pin name of attached equipment
Socket: Pin number bun Pin number of socket
Socket: Pin number
connected symbol
bunum Pin number of attached equipment
Socket: Add. Text 1 butxt1 Additional text 1 of socket
Socket: Add. Text 2 butxt2 Additional text 2 of socket
Plug: Part number start Part number of plug
Plug: Part number
cable
stkabart Part number of cable attached to the plug
Plug: Symbol name stbauteil Component name of plug
Plug: Reference name
connected symbol
stbez Reference name of plug
Plug: Function text stfkt Function text of plug
Plug: Cable function
text
stftxtkabel Function text of cable attached to plug
Plug: Function text stftext Function text of equipment attached to plug

Index
connected symbol
Plug: Pin number stader Pin assignment
Plug: Cable name with
UFD
stkabmit Cable name of attached cable with UFD
Plug: Cable name
without IFD
stkabohne Cable name of attached cable without UFD
Plug: Line name
stleitg Line name of connection line attached to
connected symbol
plug
Plug: Path stpfad Path of plug
Plug: Pin name
connected symbol
stnam Pin name of equipment attached via plug
Plug: Pin number stn Pin number of plug
Plug: Pin number
connected symbol
stnum Pin number of equipment attached via plug
Plug: Add. Text 1 sttxt1 Additional text 1 of plug
Plug: Add. Text 2 sttxt2 Additional text 2 of plug
973

WSCAD 51
Text allocators for reference list
When creating a reference list, the dialog for the Text allocators appears via the menu
option Change / Text allocators. When the File type is set to reference list, the Text
allocators of the reference list will appear by selecting the data source Specific Text
allocators. The meaning of each Text allocator can be very easily deduced from their
designation.
974

Index
975

WSCAD 51
Text allocators for Project manager texts
If you wish to use description texts for comments, descriptions and file content then,
in the dialog for the Text allocators, use the data source Specific Text allocators on
Project user texts. The file content is, for example, also transferred back to the
Project Manager when you change Text allocator content on the page concerned.
These Text allocators are assigned to the individual files, folders and part projects
visible in the Project Manager.
976

Text allocator for drawing macro
Index
Due to the Circuit Manager of the Building module (not yet as english version),
Text allocators are necessary in the macro concerned for the automatic transfer of
information from the circuit database (SK.mdb and Einsp.mdb). These Text
allocators are filled in when the circuit diagram is automatically generated for the
respective circuit from information in the Circuit Manager dialog.
In order to use the Text allocators in the drawing macro, the macro must be loaded as
a WSCAD 5 drawing, and there the type drawing macro must have been setup. When
you open the Text allocator dialog, the specific Text allocators appear and are
placed and formatted in the macro.
977